C•CURE Hardware Configuration Guide

2.90 8200-1950-08
A0
July 2020
C•CURE and Software House are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls.

The trademarks, logos, and service marks displayed on this document are registered in the United States [or other
countries]. Any misuse of the trademarks is strictly prohibited and Johnson Controls will aggressively enforce its
intellectual property rights to the fullest extent of the law, including pursuit of criminal prosecution wherever necessary. All
trademarks not owned by Johnson Controls are the property of their respective owners, and are used with permission or
allowed under applicable laws.

Product offerings and specifications are subject to change without notice. Actual products may vary from photos. Not all
products include all features. Availability varies by region; contact your regional sales manager. This manual is proprietary
information of Johnson Controls. Unauthorized reproduction of any portion of this manual is prohibited. The material in this
manual is for information purposes only. It is subject to change without notice. Johnson Controls assumes no
responsibility for incorrect information this manual may contain.

© 2020 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. JOHNSON CONTROLS, TYCO and Software House are trademarks of
Johnson Controls.
 Table of Contents

Preface 17
Finding More Information 18
Conventions 19
Software House Customer Support Center 20

Chapter 1 - Configuring IPv6 on C•CURE 9000 Servers, Clients, and iSTAR Controllers 23

IPv6 Configuration 24
Requirements and Restrictions 24
C•CURE 9000 Server System and Client System IPv6 Configuration 24
Multi-homed Standalone Servers 25
iSTAR Controller Configuration 25
IP-ACM Configuration 25

Chapter 2 - The Hardware Pane 27

Using the Hardware Pane 28
Partitions 29
Hardware Tree 30
Hardware Tree Objects 30
Hardware Tree Tasks 31
Creating a New Object in the Hardware Tree 31
Deleting an Object in the Hardware Tree 32
Viewing a List of Hardware Tree Objects 32
Add or Remove Reader Card Formats 33
Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree 35
Groups Tab for Hardware Devices 36
Editing a Hardware Device Group 36
Adding a Hardware Device to a Group 36
Hardware Groups Tab Definitions 36
Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View 37
Refreshing the Hardware Tree 37
Hardware Folders 38
C•CURE Controllers and Dependent Objects 38
Creating a New Hardware Folder 39
Creating and Using a New Hardware Folder Template 39
Renaming a Hardware Folder 40
Templates 41
Creating a Template 41

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 3

 Editing a Template 42
Creating an Object from a Template 43
Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers 44
Deleting a Template 45
Viewing a List of Templates 45
Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers 47
Privileges 48
Important Copy and Paste Process Information 48
Copy & Paste Tasks 48
Renaming Clusters and Controllers 57
Trigger Target Events 60

Chapter 3 - Maintenance Mode 63

Maintenance Mode Dialog Box 64
Maintenance Mode Overview 65
Maintenance Mode Objects Supported 66
Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks 67
Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off 67
Configuring the Application Layout for Maintenance Mode Filtering 67
Turning Maintenance Mode On and Off 68
iSTAR Cluster 68
iSTAR Controller or apC Controller 69
Taking an iSTAR or apC Controller Out of Maintenance Mode. 69
Viewing Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View 69
Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View 69

Chapter 4 - Configuring Dialup 71

iSTAR Dialup 72
Dialup Limitations 72
iSTAR Dialup Configuration Sequence 73
Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port 74
iSTAR Comm Port State Images Tab 76
Configuring the Host Modem 77
Creating a Cluster for Dialup 80

Chapter 5 - Configuring C•CURE iSTAR Clusters 83

Cluster Communications Overview 84
Cluster Configuration and Distributed Management 84
Networked iSTAR Controllers (Clusters) 85
Establishing Connections Via the Primary Communications Path 87
Setting Up the Primary Communications Path 88
Downloading Cardholder and Configuration Information 88
Maintaining Communications 88
Establishing a Secondary Communications Path 89
Distributed Cluster Management 90
Unassigned Folder 90

4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 Configuring iSTAR Clusters 91
Creating an iSTAR Cluster 92
Creating and Using an iSTAR Cluster Template 93
iSTAR Cluster Editor 95
iSTAR Cluster Editor Tabs 95
Accessing the iSTAR Cluster Editor 95
iSTAR Cluster General Tab 97
iSTAR Cluster General Tab Tasks 97
Adding a Controller to a Cluster 97
Removing a Controller from a Cluster 97
iSTAR Cluster General Tab Definitions 98
iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab 99
Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails 102
iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab 103
iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous Tab 104
iSTAR Cluster Area Tab 105
Cluster Antipassback Communications Failure Mode 105
Global Antipassback for the Cluster 105
Area Tab Field Definitions 106
iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab 108
Communication Failure 109
iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab 110
iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab 116
iSTAR Cluster Status Tab 117
iSTAR Cluster State Images Tab 118

Chapter 6 - Configuring C•CURE iSTAR Controllers 119

Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers 120
Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers 121
iSTAR Pro Configuration Summary 121
iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Configuration Summary 122
iSTAR Ultra Configuration Summary 123
iSTAR Ultra Video Configuration Summary 125
iSTAR Ultra LT Configuration Summary 126
iSTAR Controller Tasks 127
Creating an iSTAR Controller 127
Setting the iSTAR Controller Diagnostic Password 128
Creating a Controller Template 130
Deleting an iSTAR Controller 131
Editing an iSTAR Controller 132
Enabling or Disabling SNMP on the Controller 132
Viewing a List of iSTAR Controllers 133
Viewing a List of GCM Board Serial Numbers 133
Viewing Controller SD Cards with Encryption 134

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 5

 Using the iSTAR Controller Context Menu 134
Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller 137
Updating iSTAR Firmware (Ethernet Connections) 137
Updating iSTAR Firmware (Dial-up Connections) 139
Updating Firmware Using ICU 141
Changing the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller 142
Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT) 144
iSTAR Controller Editor 145
iSTAR Classic Controller Editor 145
iSTAR Pro Controller Editor 146
iSTAR eX Controller Editor 146
iSTAR Edge Controller Editor 147
iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor 148
iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Editor 148
iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Editor 149
iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs 150
Basic Tabs 150
iSTAR Specific Tabs 150
iSTAR Controller General Tab 150
iSTAR Ultra LT Controller General Tab 156

iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab 161

Conditional Access 161
Fast Personnel Download 161

iSTAR Ultra Controller High Assurance Tab 162

iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab 162
iSTAR Controller Status Tab 162
iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab 163
iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab 164
iSTAR Controller State Images Tab 164
iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab 165
iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) 167
iSTAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab 170
iSTAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab 174
iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs 176
iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab 178
iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab 180
iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs 182
iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab 186
iSTAR Ultra Controller Boards Tab 187
iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Boards Tab 188
iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab 189
iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs 189
iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Inputs Tab 191
iSTAR Ultra LT Controller COM Port Tab 192
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab 195
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 197
Accessing the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 198

6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab 198
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab 199
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab 200
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab 201
iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor 202
iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Editor 202
iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab 202
iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab 203
iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor 204
iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Tabs 204
iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab 204
iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EXT Tab 205
iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab 207
iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor 208
iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board Editor 208
iSTAR ACM Board General Tab 208
iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab 209
iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab 211
iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab 212
iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab 213
iSTAR Input Board Editor 215
Accessing the iSTAR Input Board Editor 216
Configuring iSTAR Input Boards 217
iSTAR Input Board General Tab 218
iSTAR Output Board Editor 220
Accessing the iSTAR Output Board Editor 220
Configuring iSTAR Output Boards 222
iSTAR Output Board General Tab 222
iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers 225
Assa Abloy Aperio Hubs and Wireless Readers 225
Allegion Schlage PIMs and Wireless Readers 225
iSTAR Ultra Schlage Wireless Types of Connections 226
Wireless - PIM400 and PIM400-TD2 227
Summary Tables 227
Readers per Controller/Panel 230
iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) 232
iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor General Tab 232
iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab 234
iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab Definitions 234
iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Readers Tab 234
iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board Hub Editor Readers Tab Definitions 235
iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor 236
iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab 236
iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab Definitions 237
iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab 238
iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab Definitions 238
iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab 239
iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab Definitions 239

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 7

 iSTAR Input Editor 240
Accessing the iSTAR Input Editor 241
Configuring an iSTAR Input 243
iSTAR Input General Tab 244
iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab 245
iSTAR Input Triggers Tab 246
iSTAR Input Status Tab 246
iSTAR Input State Images Tab 246
iSTAR Output Editor 248
Accessing the iSTAR Output Editor 249
Configuring an iSTAR Output 251
iSTAR Output General Tab 252
iSTAR Output Status Tab 253
iSTAR Output State Images Tab 253
iSTAR Reader Editor 255
Accessing the iSTAR Reader Editor 256
Configuring iSTAR Readers 257
iSTAR Reader General Tab 257
iSTAR Reader I/O Tab 259
iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab 260
iSTAR Reader Triggers Tab 262
iSTAR Reader Status Tab 263
iSTAR Reader Options Tab 264
After-Hours 265
High Assurance Tab 267
iSTAR Reader State Images Tab 268
iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor 270
iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab 271
iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor 274
iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab 276
iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab 277
Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices 278
Defining a Trigger for an iSTAR Device 278
Removing a Trigger 279
iSTAR Triggers Tab Definitions 280
State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices 281
iSTAR State Images Tabs Definitions 281
Customizing State Images for an iSTAR Device 281
Restore a Default State Image 282
Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT) 283

Chapter 7 - Configuring the IP-ACM 285

IP-ACM Overview 286
Limitations 286
286
IP-ACM Configuration Sequence 286
IP-ACM Offline Mode Configuration Information 288

8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 Stored Credentials 288
Door Configuration 289
IP-ACM v1 to IP-ACM v2 Board Conversion 291
Requirements and Limitations 291
Configuring the IP-ACM 294
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 297
Accessing the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 298
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab 298
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab 299
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab 300
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab 301
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Triggers Tab 304
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab 304
Viewing the IP-ACM Board Serial Numbers 304

Chapter 8 - Configuring Advanced Processing Controllers (apC) 307

apC Panel Overview 308
Features of apC Panels 308
Inputs and Alarm Device States 311
Outputs and Readers 311
Optional Boards 311
apC Time Zones 312
Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller 314
apC Time Zone Reports 315
apC Firmware Update 318
apC Controller Configuration Summary 320
apC Comm Port Editor 322
apC Comm Port Triggers Tab 327
apC Comm Port Status Tab 328
apC Comm Port State Images Tab 328
apC Controller Editor 330
apC Controller General Tab 331
apC Controller Communications Tab 333
apC Controller Inputs Tab 333
apC Controller Outputs Tab 334
apC Controller Readers Tab 334
apC Controller Add-On Board Tab 334
apC Controller Status Tab 335
apC Controller Triggers Tab 335
apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab 335
Configuring Holiday Groups for an apC Panel 336
apC Controller User Defined Fields Tab 338
apC Controller State Images Tab 338
apC Input Editor 340
apC Input General Tab 340
apC Input Board Triggers Tab 341
apC Input Board - Status Tab 342
apC Inputs State Images Tab 342

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 9

 apC Output Editor 343
apC Output General Tab 343
apC Output Status Tab 344
apC Output State Images Tab 344
apC Reader Editor 346
apC Reader General Tab 346
apC Reader Input/Output Tab 347
apC Reader Keypad Tab 348
apC Reader Triggers Tab 348
apC Reader Status Tab 348
apC Reader State Images Tab 348
apC Add-on Board Editor 350
apC Add-On Board General Tab 350
apC Add-On Board Input Boards Tab 351
apC Add-On Board Output Boards Tab 351
apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab 355
apC Input Board Editor (I32 and I8) 357
apC I32 Input Board General Tab 357
apC I32 Input Board 1-16 Inputs Tab 358
apC I32 Input Board 17-32 Inputs Tab 359
apC I8 Input Board General Tab 359
apC Star Coupler Board Editor 360
Star Coupler Readers Tab 361
Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs Tab 361
Star Coupler Outputs Tab 362
Triggers Tab for apC Devices 363
Defining a Trigger for an apC Device 363
apC Triggers Tab Definitions 364
Mini Star Coupler Board Editor 366
Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor 367

Chapter 9 - Floors 369

Floors Overview 370
Configuring Floors 371
Creating a Floor 373
Creating a Floor Template 373
Deleting a Floor 374
Modifying a Floor 374
Viewing a List of Floors 374
Using Set Property to Configure Floors 374
Add Floors to a Group 375

Chapter 10 - Doors 377

Door Overview 378
Door Tasks 379

10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 Creating a Door 379
Creating a Door Template 380
Deleting a Door 381
Modifying a Door 381
Viewing a List of Doors 381
Using Set Property to Configure Doors 382
Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View 383
apC Door Editor 384
Configuring an apC Door 384
apC Door General Tab 385
apC Door Readers Tab 387
apC Door Timing Tab 388
apC Door Triggers Tab 389
apC Door Status Tab 389
apC Door State Images Tab 389
apC Door Special Actions Tab 390
apC Door Definitions 392
apC Door Readers Tab Definitions 392
apC Door Timing Tab Definitions 393
apC Door Triggers Tab Definitions 394
apC Door Trigger Properties 395
apC Door Groups Tab Definitions 396
apC Door Status Tab Definitions 396
apC Door State Images Tab Fields and Icons 396
iSTAR Door Editor 397
iSTAR Door Editor Tabs 397
iSTAR Door General Tab 397
iSTAR Door Timing Tab 400
iSTAR Door Areas & Zones Tab 401
iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab 401
iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab 405
iSTAR Door Triggers Tab 407
iSTAR Door Status Tab 408
iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab 409
iSTAR Door State Images Tab 409
iSTAR Door Special Actions tab 409
iSTAR Door Definitions 411
iSTAR Door Timing Tab Definitions 412
iSTAR Door Areas and ZonesTab Definitions 413
iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab Definitions 413
iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab Definitions 414
iSTAR Door Triggers Tab Definitions 415
iSTAR Triggers Properties 416
iSTAR Triggers Actions 417
iSTAR Door Groups Tab Definitions 418
iSTAR Door Status Tab Definitions: 418
iSTAR Door State Images Tab Definitions: 419
iSTAR Aperio Door Editor 420

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 11

 Chapter 11 - Configuring Advanced Door Monitoring 421
Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring 422
Features 422
Hardware Requirements 424
Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions 425
New Definitions, Acronyms, and Abbreviations 425
Advanced Door Monitoring Components 427
Lock Sensor Devices 427
Lock Release Devices 427
Expanded Door Inputs 428
Advanced Door Alarms 429
Expanded Event Actions 430
Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations 431
Multiple RTE Configurations 431
Multiple DSM Configurations 432
DSM Configuration Guidelines 435
Configuration Overview 437
Configuring an Advanced Door 438
Sample Door 438
Configuring RM4-1 and RM4-2 Reader, Inputs, and Output 438
Configuring Lock Releases on the I/8 441
Configuring the Advanced Door 442
Understanding Timing 445
Kinds of Timing Options 445
Grace Time Options 446
Change Time Options 446
Shunt Time Options 448
Special Timing Considerations 448
Monitoring Door Activity 450
Using Monitoring Station Commands 450
Using Journal Reports 450
Understanding Door Alarms 451
Alarms 451
New Activity / Journal Reports 451
Managing Message Traffic 451
Clearing Alarms 455
Door Triggers 455
Privilege Modifications 456
Reports 457
Advanced Door Monitoring Details 459
Door Monitoring Screen 461
Consecutive Rejects Activate an Event 464

Chapter 12 - Configuring Readers 469

Reader Overview 470

12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 OSDP Reader Configuration 471
Readers Supported 471
Features 472
Restrictions and Limitations 472
HID iCLASS SE Reader Information 473
Allegion aptiQ Reader Information 473
Wiring Options Using OSDP 474
Wiring Details for OSDP Readers 474
Configuring OSDP in C•CURE 475
Configuring the Readers 476
Changing the OSDP Reader Baud Rate 476
OSDP Conversion for Wiegand and RM readers 477
OSDP Troubleshooting 479
Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration 480
Hardware and Firmware Requirements 480
Reader Configuration Requirements Checklist 480
Importing the Enrollment Service XML file 482
Configuring the FICAM Plugin User-Defined Field 482
CHUID Templates for use with Card Formats 483
Enrolling Users 486
Reader Configuration 486
TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader Configuration 490
RM Mode Configuration 490
Smart Mode Configuration 490
Updating TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Firmware 492
Reader Editor 494
Accessing the Reader Editor 494
Reader Tab Definitions 495
apC Readers 495
iSTAR Readers 495
iSTAR Reader Editor 496
Accessing the iSTAR Reader Editor 497
Configuring iSTAR Readers 498
iSTAR Reader General Tab 498
iSTAR Reader I/O Tab 500
iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab 501
iSTAR Reader Triggers Tab 503
iSTAR Reader Status Tab 504
iSTAR Reader Options Tab 505
After-Hours 506
iSTAR Reader Touchscreen Tab 508
High Assurance Tab 509
iSTAR Reader State Images Tab 510
iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor 512
iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab 513
iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor 516
iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab 518

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 13

 apC Reader Editor 520
apC Reader General Tab 520
apC Reader Input/Output Tab 521
apC Reader Keypad Tab 522
apC Reader Triggers Tab 522
apC Reader Status Tab 522
apC Reader State Images Tab 522

Chapter 13 - Configuring Reader LCD Messages, LED Colors, LED Patterns, and Beep
Patterns 525
LCD Message Set 526
Accessing the Reader LCD Message Set Editor 526
Changing the Language for the Default LCD Messages 531
Reader LCD Message Set Editor 532
Reader LCD Message Set Tasks 532
Configuring a Reader LCD Message Set 534
LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns 538
Limitations 538
LED Color Configuration 539
LED Pattern Configuration 539
Beep Pattern Configuration 540

Chapter 14 - Two Factor Authentication 543

Two Factor Authentication Overview 544
Prerequisites 544
Two Factor Authentication in an Enterprise Environment 544
Supporting Hardware 545
Enabling Two Factor Authentication for C•CURE through DUO APIs 545
Configuring iSTAR Readers and Doors for Two Factor Authentication 547
Configuring Fallback to One Factor Authentication 548
Configuring fallback when the C-CURE host and two factor authentication provider fail to communicate 548
Two Factor Authentication Behaviors 550

Chapter 15 - Configuring Elevators 551

Elevator Configuration Overview 552
Elevator Tasks 553
Creating an Elevator 553
Creating an Elevator Template 553
Deleting an Elevator 554
Modifying an Elevator 554
Viewing a List of Elevators 554
Using Set Property for Elevators 555
Adding Elevators to a Group 555
iSTAR Elevators 557
Configuring a Floor for an iSTAR Elevator 557
iSTAR Elevator General Tab 558

14 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab 562
iSTAR Elevator Status Tab 563
iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab 564
iSTAR Elevator State Images Tab 565
iSTAR Elevator Definitions 566
apC Elevators 571
Configuring a Floor for an apC Elevator 571
apC Elevator General Tab 572
apC Elevator Buttons Tab 574
apC Elevator Status Tab 576
apC Elevator Triggers Tab 577
apC Elevator State Images Tab 577
apC Elevator Definitions 578

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide 15

16 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide
 Preface

This C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide is designed for new and experienced security system users. The
manual describes the various hardware objects in the C•CURE 9000 application program and presents procedures for
configuring and using them.

The manual assumes that you have already installed C•CURE 9000 and have familiarized yourself with the basic
C•CURE 9000 information provided in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide.

In this preface

Finding More Information 18

Conventions 19
Software House Customer Support Center 20

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Preface 17

Finding More Information

Finding More Information

You can access C•CURE 9000 manuals and online Help for more information about C•CURE 9000.

Manuals
C•CURE 9000 software manuals are available in Adobe PDF format on the C•CURE 9000 installation media. You can
access the manuals if you copy the appropriate PDF files from the C•CURE 9000 installation media Manuals\CCURE
folder.

The available C•CURE 9000 and Software House manuals are listed in the C•CURE 9000 Installation and Upgrade Guide.

These manuals are also available from the Software House Member Center website
(http://www.swhouse.com/TechnicalLibrary/TechLibSW.aspx).

Online Help
You can access C•CURE 9000 Help by pressing F1 or clicking Help from the menu bar in the Administration/Monitoring
Station applications.

18 Preface C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Conventions

Conventions
This manual uses the following text formats and symbols.

Convention Meaning

Bold This font indicates screen elements, and also indicates when you should take a direct action in a procedure.
Bold font describes one of the following items:
• A command or character to type, or
• A button or option on the screen to press, or
• A key on the keyboard to press
• A screen element or name

blue color text Indicates a hyperlink to a URL, or a cross-reference to a figure, table, or section in this guide.

Regular italic font Indicates a new term.

<text> Indicates a variable.

The following items are used to indicate important information.

Indicates a note. Notes call attention to any item of information that may be of special importance.
NOTE

Indicates an alternate method of performing a task.

TIP

Indicates a caution. A caution contains information essential to avoid damage to the system. A caution
can pertain to hardware or software.

Indicates a warning. A warning contains information that advises users that failure to avoid a specific
action could result in physical harm to the user or to the hardware.

Indicates a danger. A danger contains information that users must know to avoid death or serious injury.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Preface 19

Software House Customer Support Center

Software House Customer Support Center

Technical Support Portal

The Technical Support Portal provides knowledge-based articles, technical documents, and tips to install and use
Software House products.

Qualified Integrators can register to access the Technical Support Portal at http://www.swhouse.com. Click Support and
select Support Portal to access the Support Portal log in page.

The email address you use to register for access to the portal must be the same one you used for the certification course.

If the request is approved, log in credentials are emailed twenty-four to forty-eight hours after received.

Telephone Technical Support

During the period of the Agreement, the following guidelines apply:
■ Software House accepts service calls only from employees of the Systems Integrator of Record for the installation
associated with the support inquiry.

Before Calling
Ensure that you:
■ Are the Dealer of record for this account.
■ Are certified by Software House for this product.
■ Have a valid license and current Software Support Agreement (SSA) for the system.
■ Have your system serial number available.
■ Have your certification number available.

Hours Normal Support Hours Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m., EST. Except holidays.

Emergency Support Hours 24 hours/day, seven days a week, 365 days/year.

Requires Enhanced SSA “7 x 24” Standby Telephone Support
(emergency) provided to Certified Technicians.
For all other customers, billable on time and materials basis.
Minimum charges apply – See MSRP.

Phone For telephone support contact numbers for all regions, see http://www.swhouse.com/support/contact_technical_support.aspx.

EMEA
Hours: 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CET
■ Toll Free: +800 CALLTYCO or +800-2255 8926
■ Direct: +31 475 352 722

Local Direct Dial Numbers:

20 Preface C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Software House Customer Support Center

■ UK: +44 330 777 1300

■ Israel: +972-772 201 350
■ Spain: 900 99 31 61
■ Denmark: +45-4494 9001
■ France: 0800 90 79 72
■ Germany: 0800 1806 757
■ Italy: +39-0230 510 112
■ Belgium: 0800 76 452
■ Ireland: 1800943570
■ Nordic: 04494 9001
■ Greece: 00800-312 294 53
■ South Africa: +27-211 003 882
■ Russia: 81080020521031
■ Turkey: 00800-31923007
■ UAE: 800-03107123
■ Bahrain: 800-04127

Asia Pacific
Hours: 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. CST
■ Toll Free: +800 CALLTYCO or (+800-2255 8926)
■ Direct: +86 21 61916510
■ China only Hotline: 4006711528
■ India only Hotline: 1-800-1082-008
■ Australia: 02-9684-3980

Latin America
■ Colombia: + 57 1 344-1422 +57 2 8912476 +57 4 2040519
■ Costa Rica: + 506 4000-1655
■ República Dominicana: +1 8292353047
■ El Salvador: + 503 21368703
■ Guatemala: + 502 22681206
■ Panamá: + 507 836-6265
■ Mexico: + 52 5585261801
■ Perú: + 511 6429707
■ Venezuela: + 58 212-720-2340
■ Buenos Aires: + 54 11 5199 3104

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Preface 21

Software House Customer Support Center

■ Santiago de Chile: + 56 2 3210 9662

■ Sao Paulo: + 55 11 3181 7377

22 Preface C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 1

Chapter 1 - Configuring IPv6 on C•CURE 9000 Servers, Clients, and

iSTAR Controllers

This chapter describes the requirements and configuration for IPv6 on C•CURE 9000 servers, C•CURE 9000 clients,
iSTAR controllers, and IP-ACMs.

In this chapter

IPv6 Configuration 24

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 23

IPv6 Configuration

IPv6 Configuration

Requirements and Restrictions

■ Supported on iSTAR Ultra, iSTAR Ultra SE (Ultra Mode) and iSTAR Ultra LT, either using a static IPv6 or DHCPv6
when in IPv6 mode.
■ If there are iSTAR controllers with firmware versions lower than v6.6.0, and they support IPv6, you should
set the specified Host IPv6 address on your system (SAS or Standalone).
Perform the following procedure in the C•CURE 9000 Administration Station:
a. Enter the Host IPv6 address for the iSTAR controllers in the Options & Tools >System Variables >iSTAR
Driver> Specified Host IPv6 Address field.
b. Restart the driver.
Alternately, you can lock the Host IPv6 address for each controller in the ICU. In the Controller dialog box,
click the Host tab, enter the IPv6 address and click .
■ IPv6 requires iSTAR firmware version 6.5.2 or higher.
■ IPv6 is supported on C•CURE 9000 standalone servers and supported in an Enterprise environment.
■ The C•CURE 9000 server, standalone or Enterprise, must be configured with dual IP address modes (IPv4 and IPv6)
if there is a mixture of panels using IPv4 and IPv6.
■ All panels in a cluster must have the same Address Family - either IPv4 or IPv6.
■ The IP-ACM supports either static IPv6 or Stateless Auto Configuration in IPv6 mode.
■ Communication does not work if the Address Family is set to IPv6 and the iSTAR controller firmware is below version
6.5.2.
■ The iSTAR Configuration Utility (ICU) must be version 6.5.2 or later.
■ The Address Family must match in C•CURE 9000 and in the ICU to establish communication (refer to the ICU help or
the iSTAR Configuration Utility User Guide for IPv6 configuration information.).
■ If there are panels in the cluster that contain firmware lower than version 6.5.2, all panels in that cluster must be set to
IPv4.
■ The iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE, and the Ultra LT factory default is set to IPv4. If you reset the iSTAR back to its factory
defaults, after the controller reset is complete, use the ICU to set the controller IP address family to IPv6 and then
change the C•CURE settings accordingly.
■ To use IPv6 to communicate with an iSTAR Cluster, the C•CURE 9000 server system must be configured to use
IPv6. See C•CURE 9000 Server System and Client System IPv6 Configuration on Page 24.

C•CURE 9000 Server System and Client System IPv6 Configuration

To configure the system running the C•CURE Server or client to use IPv6:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Select Network and Sharing Center.
3. Select Local Area Connection.

24 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

IPv6 Configuration

4. Select Properties to open Local Area Connection Properties.

5. Scroll to Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6):
• If Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) is not selected (clear), select it and click Properties.
• If Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) is selected (checked), click Properties.
6. Configure a Static IPv6 address or obtain an IPv6 address automatically.
7. Configure a static DNS server Address or obtain the DNS server address automatically.
8. Click OK, Close, and Close to complete the configuration.

C•CURE 9000 server only:

NOTE
The SQL Server and SQL Server Native Client fully support both Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) and
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6). When Windows is configured with IPv6 SQL Server, components
automatically recognize the existence of IPv6. No special SQL Server configuration is necessary.

Multi-homed Standalone Servers

When using a multi-homed 9000 standalone server with multiple network adapters on multiple networks, specify an IP
address for IP communication to ensure consistent communication with the iSTAR fast personnel download.

Set the IP address as the host address for the iSTAR controllers in the Options & Tools > System Variables > iSTAR
Driver>Specified Host IPV6 Address field. Then restart the driver.

iSTAR Controller Configuration
The IP Address Family selection for the iSTAR controller, in C•CURE 9000, is located in the iSTAR Controller Editor
General tab.

This setting must match the IP Address Family selected in the ICU. The ICU must be used to switch the controller's
Address Family.

ICU
The IP Address Family is selected on the Controller editor Ethernet Adapter tab in the ICU. The ICU must be used to
switch the controller's Address Family.

IP-ACM Configuration
The IP-ACM Configuration/Status web page is used to configure the Address Family.

To configure the IP-ACM to use IPv6:

l From a browser:

a. Enter the IP-ACM IP address.

b. Enter the password in the login screen and click Login.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 1 25

IPv6 Configuration

The default password is "iSTAR".

NOTE

c. Select IPv6 for the IP-Type.

d. Select the Alloc Type, Stateless Auto Config orStatic.
If you select Static, enter the IP-ACM Addr and the IP-ACM Prefix Length.
e. Enter the iSTAR Controller IPv6 address in the iSTAR IP Addr field.
f. Click Save.
g. Click Reboot.
■ From the ICU:
a. Click the IP ACM button to display the IP-ACM's on the network.
b. Locate the IP-ACM in the list.
c. Right-click on the IP-ACM and select Configure IP-ACM.
d. Enter the password in the log in screen and click Login.

The default password is "iSTAR".

NOTE

e. Select IPv6 for the IP-Type.

f. Select the Alloc Type, Stateless Auto Config orStatic.
If you select Static, enter the IP-ACM Addr and the IP-ACM Prefix Length.
g. Enter the iSTAR Controller IPv6 address in the iSTAR IP Addr field.
h. Click Save.
i. Click Reboot.

26 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 2

Chapter 2 - The Hardware Pane

This chapter explains how to use the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane to configure and manage the hardware components
that are connected to the C•CURE 9000 server.

In this chapter

Using the Hardware Pane 28

Hardware Tree 30
Groups Tab for Hardware Devices 36
Hardware Folders 38
Templates 41
Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers 47

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 27

Using the Hardware Pane

Using the Hardware Pane

The Hardware pane displays a tree structure that shows how you have configured the hardware on the C•CURE 9000
system. For example, the hardware tree shows you which readers, inputs, and outputs are configured for each controller.

You can use the Hardware Tree to navigate to hardware components you want to view or edit, or to create new hardware
components, such as a reader you want to add to a controller.

The Hardware Tree displays, by default, folders for Digital Certificates, Floors, Reader LCD Message Sets, and a
Hardware Folder called Company Name.

The folder called Company Name is the default container for apC Comm Ports and the Controllers, Readers, Doors,
Elevators, Inputs, and Outputs.

This folder is re-namable so that you can customize the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Tree to your site's needs.

You can create additional Hardware Folders as needed.

You can click on the to the left of a folder or object to expand the tree.

When you select a folder or object in the tree, you can right-click to display a context menu that shows the objects you can
create under the selected folder or object.

Example:
If you right-click on the Company Name folder, the context menu shows that you can create a wide variety of
Hardware Tree objects in this folder.
Figure 1:  Hardware Tree Context Menu

The following topics provide more information about using the Hardware pane.
■ Partitions on Page 29
■ Hardware Tree on Page 30
■ Hardware Tree Objects on Page 30
■ Hardware Tree Tasks on Page 31

28 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Using the Hardware Pane

Partitions
If you partition the C•CURE 9000, a new Hardware folder is created for each Partition you create, and given the same
name as the Partition.

You can also create additional Hardware folders to contain hardware devices if you need to separately group hardware to
reflect, for example, a multi-tenant building, a campus, or a multi-site company.

You can use Partitioning and Privileges to control Operator access to each tenant's hardware folder(s) if you don't want
one tenant to be able to view another tenant's security access hardware and personnel.

The New Object Partition setting in the Administration Workstation determines the Partition in which an Operator can
create objects, in addition to Hardware Tree objects such as Floors that reside at the root of the Hardware Tree. You can
use the Privilege Editor to grant or deny an Operator access to a Partition, which affects whether they can view or create
objects in that Partition.

For example, you could create a privilege that has no access to the Partition (and Hardware folder) called Company A, but
with full access to Company B, and assign it to Operators from Company B, so that they can view their configuration but
not the configuration for Company A. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information about the
Privilege Editor.

You can also drag and drop objects to move them in the Hardware Tree. For example, you can move C•CURE Mobile
objects from one Hardware folder to another. See Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 35 for more
information.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 29

Hardware Tree

Hardware Tree
The Hardware pane displays a tree structure that shows how you have configured the hardware on the C•CURE 9000
system. For example, the hardware tree shows you which readers, inputs, and outputs are configured for each controller. 

You can use the Hardware Tree to navigate to hardware components you want to view or edit, or to create new hardware
components, such as a reader you want to add to a controller.

The Hardware Tree displays, by default, folders for Floors, Digital Certificates, and a Hardware Folder called Company
Name.

The folder called Company Name is the container for your Comm Ports, Controllers, Readers, Doors, Elevators, Inputs,
and Outputs. 

This folder is re-namable so that you can customize the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Tree to your site's needs.

You can click on the to the left of a folder or object to expand the tree.

When you select a folder or object in the tree, you can right-click to display a context menu that shows the objects you can
create under the selected folder or object. For example, if you right-click on the Company Name folder, the context menu
shows that you can create a wide variety of Hardware Tree objects in this folder.

If you Partition your C•CURE 9000, a new Hardware folder is created for each Partition you create. This hardware folder is
given the same name as the Partition.

You can also create additional Hardware folders to contain hardware devices if you need to separately group hardware to
reflect, for example, a multi-tenant building, a campus, or a multi-site company.

You can use Partitioning and Privileges to control Operator access to each tenant's hardware folder(s) if you don't want
one tenant to be able to view another tenant's security access hardware and personnel.

For example, you could create a privilege that has no access to the Partition (and Hardware folder) called Company A, but
with full access to Company B, so that Operators from Company B can view their configuration but not the configuration
for Company A.

You can also drag and drop objects to move them in the Hardware Tree. For example, you can move C•CURE Mobile
objects from one Hardware folder to another. See Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 35 for more
information.
■ Hardware Tree Objects on Page 30
■ Hardware Tree Tasks on Page 31

Hardware Tree Objects

Table 1 on Page 30 shows the types of objects (and objects that reside under them as child objects) in the Hardware Tree.
Table 1:  Hardware Tree Objects

Object Description

Hardware Folder See Hardware Folders on Page 38.

30 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Hardware Tree

Hardware Tree Objects (continued)

Object Description

Digital Certificate These objects reside in the Hardware Tree but they are created using Encryption Options from the Options & Tools
pane. See the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information.

Floor See Floors Overview on Page 370.

Reader LCD See LCD Message Set on Page 526

Message Set

apC Comm Port See apC Comm Port Editor on Page 322.

CCURE Mobile These objects reside in the Hardware Tree but they are documented in the C•CURE Mobile Handheld Reader User
device Guide.
NOTE: C•CURE Mobile cannot be used in UL applications.

iSTAR Cluster See Configuring iSTAR Clusters on Page 91.

apC Controller See apC Panel Overview on Page 308.

Hardware Tree Tasks

■ Creating a New Object in the Hardware Tree on Page 31
■ Deleting an Object in the Hardware Tree on Page 32
■ Viewing a List of Hardware Tree Objects on Page 32
■ Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 35
■ Refreshing the Hardware Tree on Page 37
■ Creating a New Hardware Folder on Page 39
■ Creating and Using a New Hardware Folder Template on Page 39
■ Creating a New Hardware Folder on Page 39
■ Renaming a Hardware Folder on Page 40

Creating a New Object in the Hardware Tree

Most objects in the Hardware Tree support a right-click Context Menu that shows you the actions you can perform on that
object.

The right-click Context Menu for an object has selections for objects that you can create under that object.

For example, if you want to create an iSTAR Cluster in a Hardware Folder, right-click on the Hardware Folder and select
iSTAR Cluster from the menu.

To Create a New Object in the Hardware Tree

1. Select the Folder or Object that will contain the object you want to create.
2. Right-click on the object and you should see in the Context menu a list of the objects that you can create.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 31

Hardware Tree

3. Select the object you wish to create and select New from the menu.
4. The Editor for the object opens and you can configure the object.

Deleting an Object in the Hardware Tree

You can delete objects from the Hardware Tree if they are no longer needed. If you delete an object that has a child object
(such as a Door or Reader) below it, those objects are also deleted.

To Delete an Object in the Hardware Tree

1. Select the Folder or Object that you wish to delete.
2. Right-click on the object and select Delete.
3. A confirmation dialog box appears to confirm that you want to delete the object. Click Yes to delete the object, or No to
cancel the deletion.
4. A dialog box appears to confirm the deletion. You can click:
• OK to close the dialog box.
• Print to print the deletion message.
• Email to send the deletion message to the email address you have configured in the Customer Support section of
the C•CURE 9000 System Variables.

Viewing a List of Hardware Tree Objects

You can view a list of any type of Hardware Tree object.

To View a List of Hardware Tree Objects

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Use the drop-down list in the Hardware pane to select the object type that you want to list.

3. Click and a Dynamic View listing the object type appears in the content area.
4. You can filter, sort, group, and add columns to the list. See the C•CURE 9000 Data Views User Guide chapter on
Dynamic Views for more information.

The Dynamic View for an object type includes a column that displays the Time Zone in which the object resides. This can
be useful in determining when an Event or Trigger is activated for an object in a different Time Zone than the C•CURE
90000 Server.

If you right-click a row in the Dynamic View, a context menu is displayed. This menu contains a number of standard
selections, as well as selections that are specific for different object types. See Using the Object List Context Menu in
the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for more information about the object context menu.

The context menu for iSTAR, apC, ASSA ABLOY, Connected Program readers allows you to select one or more readers
and Add or Remove Cards formats. See Add or Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

32 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Hardware Tree

Add or Remove Reader Card Formats

The context menu for iSTAR, apC, ASSA ABLOY, and Connected Program readers allows you to select one or more
readers and add or remove Cards formats. For iSTAR, the APERIO, Schlage Wireless, Direct Connect Wiegand, and RM
readers offer this selection.

The context menu actions are equivalent to opening each of the selected readers and adding/removing the card format
from each reader.

The limits for card formats allowed for apC (8 per reader) and iSTAR (10 per reader) are enforced when using these menu
actions.

If the selected Card Formats cannot be added or removed from the selected readers, the confirmation dialog box for the
Add/Remove displays "Already has card format" or or "Nothing to remove...". Errors that occur are shown in the
confirmation dialog box as well.

To Add or Remove Card Formats from a Reader via a Dynamic View

1. From the Hardware pane, use the drop-down menu to select the type of Reader you want to display in a dynamic View,
and click .

Example:
If you select iSTAR Reader, the Dynamic View displays multiple types of iSTAR Reader. If you select
iSTAR Aperio Reader, only that type of reader is displayed.
2. Select one or more readers from the list (you can use multiple selection keystrokes such as CTRL+Left-click and
SHIFT+Left-click to select more than one reader).
3. Right-click the selected readers to display the context menu.

4. Select Add Card Format or Remove Card Format from the menu.

5. The Card Format Name Selection dialog box appears. Select ( ) each Card Format that you want to add or remove
from the readers, then click OK.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 33

Hardware Tree

6. If you added readers, a confirmation dialog box appears, showing the formats added:

7. If you removed readers, a confirmation dialog box appears, show the formats removed:

8. Click OK to complete the Add/Remove.

34 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Hardware Tree

Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree

You can drag and drop objects to move them in the Hardware Tree, within certain restrictions.
■ You cannot move Root level objects such as Folders and Floors.
■ You cannot move objects in Hardware Folders to the Root level.
■ You cannot move objects that are Folders, such as a folder named C•CURE Mobile (but you can move their contents
to another C•CURE Mobile folder).
■ You cannot move child objects of one Controller to another Controller.

Some objects cannot be moved to another partition via drag and drop. For example, you cannot move an
NOTE iSTAR Controller to a different Partition via drag and drop, nor can you move a non-partitionable object.
Also, you cannot move an iSTAR Cluster to a different Partition if the Cluster is Enabled.

To determine if you can drag and drop an object, click on the object and then drag to the right with the mouse. If the
cursor appears, you can drag and drop the object. If you try to drop the object in an invalid location, the object instead
remains in its original location. For example, if you tried to drop an apC Comm Port in an iSTAR Cluster, the object is not
be moved, and an error message “Invalid Hardware Folder” appears.

To Drag and Drop an Object in the Hardware Tree

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Click on an object to select it (the object will be highlighted when selected).

3. Drag to the right with the mouse. The drag and drop cursor appears. (If it does not appear, you cannot drag and drop
the object.)
4. Drag the object to the location you want and release the mouse button. If you have chosen a valid location for the
object, it then appears in the new location.
Example
If you drag an apC Controller to a different Hardware Folder, the apC and all its child objects are moved to that
Hardware Folder.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 35

Groups Tab for Hardware Devices

Groups Tab for Hardware Devices

The Groups tab for a Hardware device lists all of the Groups to which the Hardware device currently being edited belongs.
The Groups in the list are lists of Hardware devices of the same type (such as Inputs, Readers, and so on).

Figure 2 on Page 36 shows the Groups tab for an iSTAR Input, which is typical for a Hardware device.
Figure 2:  Typical iSTAR Group Tab

Hardware Groups Tab Definitions on Page 36 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an iSTAR Device Group
tab.

Editing a Hardware Device Group

You can edit any of the Groups in the list on the Groups tab by double-clicking on the Group’s name in the list of Groups.

Adding a Hardware Device to a Group

To add a Hardware device to a Group, you need to either:
■ Edit the Group by opening the Configuration pane and using the Group Editor.
or
■ Display a list of devices of that type and use the context menu Add to Group selection. You cannot add the Hardware
device to a Group from the Groups tab (the device is already a member of every Group that is listed here).
See Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View on Page 383 for more information.

Hardware Groups Tab Definitions

Table 2 on Page 37 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the Groups tab for a Hardware pane device.

36 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Groups Tab for Hardware Devices

Table 2:  Groups Tab Definitions

Field/Button Icon Description

Card View Displays the list of Groups in Card View.

Print Prints the list of Groups. 

Group Click to enable Grouping of the list. You can drag a column heading to the area labeled Drag columns to
group by here to group the list by that heading.

Filter Click to display the filter bar. See the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about filtering
a Dynamic View list.

Row Selector Click to select a row in the table.

Count This field displays the number of Groups in the list.

Name This column lists the names of the Groups of which this device is a member.

Description This column lists the descriptions of the Groups of which this device is a member.

Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View

When you select a Hardware device from a Dynamic View and then right-click for the context menu, Add to group
appears as a menu selection. This function enables you to add the object(s) to a Group. For more information about the
Group function see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36.

To Add a Hardware Device To a Group

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select a Hardware device from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all objects of that type.
4. Right-click on the object that you want to add to a Group and select Add To Group. A list of Groups is displayed.
5. Select the Group from the list, and the object is added to that group.
6. Click OK to confirm your choice.

Refreshing the Hardware Tree

To make sure that all the folders and objects in the Hardware Tree are accurately displayed on the screen, you can Refresh
the Hardware Tree.

To Refresh the Hardware Tree

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click on Hardware and select Refresh Tree from the context menu. The Hardware Tree is updated.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 37

Hardware Folders

Hardware Folders
You can create additional Hardware Folders if you need to organize the Controllers and access hardware into separate
folders.

When you create a new Partition, a new Hardware Folder is automatically created to contain objects that reside in that
Partition.

A Hardware Folder pane displays a tree structure that shows how you have configured the hardware on the C•CURE 9000
system. For example, the hardware tree shows you which readers, inputs, and outputs are configured for each controller.

You can use the Hardware Tree to navigate to hardware components you want to view or edit, or to create new hardware
components, such as a reader you want to add to a controller.

The following topics provide more information about Hardware folders.

■ C•CURE Controllers and Dependent Objects on Page 38
■ Creating a New Hardware Folder on Page 39
■ Creating and Using a New Hardware Folder Template on Page 39
■ Renaming a Hardware Folder on Page 40

C•CURE Controllers and Dependent Objects

Dependent (child) objects that are managed under iSTAR and apC controllers include inputs, outputs, readers, boards,
elevators, floors and doors. Controllers are parent objects to these and are created first. The parent objects are created
within the company name folder in the hardware tree and must be created before the child objects in their respective
classes, such as apC and iSTAR.

For iSTAR controllers, a cluster object encompasses a system of one or more iSTAR controllers, determining
communications between individual controllers. To configure an iSTAR controller in the
C•CURE 9000 system, you must first create a cluster. Each cluster is configured as either Non-encrypted (iSTAR
Classic/Pro and Ultra) or Encrypted (iSTAR eX/Edge and Ultra) controllers. The cluster must have a controller that is the
primary communication path to the host and may have an optional secondary communication path. The secondary
communication path can be set to the same controller as the primary path.

In the instance of apC controllers, a communications port must be set up before these controllers and their dependent
objects can be configured.

Elevators are similar to doors, but have many exit points which are determined by the floor objects. Floors are created
independently but are added into the system through the selection of elevator buttons. Elevators also require readers,
inputs, and outputs. The inputs are used to determine at which floor the cardholder exited and the outputs are used to
control the elevator buttons.

Elevators (configured on iSTAR or apC controllers) have not been evaluated by UL.
NOTE

Doors which are configured as part of an apC or iSTAR controller have properties that are unique to each controller,
whereas a Door object is a base class that recognizes only those properties which are common to all controllers.
Accordingly, door objects are created last because each door object requires the controller-specific dependent objects to
exist for the door. Doors typically require readers, inputs and outputs. The inputs are used for door state monitors and exit
devices. The outputs are used for locks and automatic door openers.

38 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Hardware Folders

Example:
C•CURE 9000 dependent object hierarchy examples:

n iSTAR Cluster>iSTAR Controller>Readers, Inputs, Outputs>

iSTAR Doors
n apC Comm Port>apC Controller>Readers, Inputs, Outputs>apC Doors

Creating a New Hardware Folder

Perform the following steps to create a new Hardware Folder.

To Create a New Hardware Folder

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click on Hardware in the tree and select Hardware Folder>New from the context menu. The Hardware Folder
dialog box opens.
3. Type the name for the new folder into the Name field.
4. Optionally type a description for the new folder into the Description field.
5. Click Save and Close to save the new folder.
6. Right-click on Hardware and select Refresh Tree from the context menu. The Hardware Tree is updated to display
the new folder.

Creating and Using a New Hardware Folder Template

You can create a Hardware Folder Template that you can use as a basis for creating additional Hardware Folders.

In a template, you can fill in field values that will have the same values for all Hardware Folders, and then use the template
when you are creating new Hardware Folders.

To Create a New Hardware Folder Template

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click on Hardware in the tree and select Hardware Folder>New Template from the context menu. The
Hardware Folder dialog box opens.
3. Type the name for the new folder into the Name field.
4. Optionally type a description for the new folder into the Description field.
5. Click Save and Close to save the new folder template.

To Use a Hardware Folder Template to Create New Hardware Folders

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click on Hardware in the tree and select Hardware Folder from the context menu. The next level menu appears
listing the Hardware Folder Templates you have previously created under the ---- Templates category.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 39

Hardware Folders

3. Click on the name of the Hardware Folder Template you wish to use as the basis for the new Hardware Folder.
4. Type the name for the new folder into the Name field.
5. Optionally type a description for the new folder into the Description field.
6. Click Save and Close to save the new folder.
7. Right-click on Hardware and select Refresh Tree from the context menu. The Hardware Tree is updated to display
the new folder.

Renaming a Hardware Folder

You can rename a Hardware Folder to customize it to your site's needs. Typically, you will want to rename the default
folder, Company Name, with a more suitable name.

To Rename a Hardware Folder

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click on the folder that you want to rename, and select Edit from the context menu. The Hardware Folder Editor
dialog box opens.
3. Type the new name for the folder into the Name field.
4. Optionally type a description for the folder into the Description field.
5. Click Save and Close to save the renamed folder.

40 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Templates

Templates
The C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane supports the concept of Templates for almost all objects in the Hardware Tree. A
Template is a re-usable object you can create and configure with settings that you would like to use when creating other
objects. For example, if all of the iSTAR Readers are the same reader type, using the same card format, you could create a
Reader Template that contained those settings, and apply that Template to any iSTAR Reader object that you create, to
make Reader configuration faster and more consistent. The Template objects you create do not appear in the Hardware
Tree, but they are available to be applied when you create an object of the same type as the Template.

The following topics provide more information about using the Hardware Templates.
■ Creating a Template on Page 41
■ Editing a Template on Page 42
■ Creating an Object from a Template on Page 43
■ Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44
■ Viewing a List of Templates on Page 45
■ Deleting a Template on Page 45

Creating a Template
To create a new Template for an object, it is necessary to create an instance of the parent object for the object so that the
object type for the Template appears in the Hardware Tree. For example, to create a Template for the iSTAR eX Controller
object type, you need to create an iSTAR Cluster that can contain iSTAR eX Controllers first, then create the iSTAR eX
Controller Template.

To Create a Template
1. In the Navigation pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the object type for which you want to create a new Template.

Example:
If you want to create a Template for an iSTAR eX Controller, navigate to a folder that contains an iSTAR Cluster
for iSTAR eX Controllers.
3. Select the parent object type (in this case, iSTAR Cluster) and right-click to display the context menu.
4. Select the object type for the Template from the context menu, then select New Template. See the example in Figure
3 on Page 42.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 41

Templates

Figure 3:  Creating a New Controller Template

5. The editor for the object opens the new Template.

6. Configure any settings you want to include in the Template.
7. To save the new Template, click Save and Close.

The new template appears under ---- Templates in that object type’s context menu drop-down list in the Hardware tree. For
example, in Figure 3 on Page 42, an iSTAR Controller Template named controller template appears in the context menu.

Editing a Template
If you have created a Template and need to make changes to it, you need to locate the Template to edit it. Because you
cannot view Templates in the Hardware Tree, and most default Dynamic Views do not list Templates, you may need to
create a new Dynamic View that shows the Templates you have created.

This section will use Inputs as an example, and show you how to create a Dynamic View that lists the Input Templates
along with the Controller Inputs.

Note that you can create a Dynamic View that shows only apC Inputs or iSTAR Inputs by choosing that object type, or you
can create a View that lists all Input (or Door or Reader) objects, then filter that view to show only the Inputs (or Doors or
Readers) of a particular type.

To View Templates in a Dynamic View

1. Navigate to Data Views and choose Dynamic View from the Data Views drop-down list.
2. Click New. The Dynamic View editor opens.
3. Type a name for your Dynamic View in the Name field. Include ‘with Templates’ in the name of the Dynamic View so
that you can find the view again easily.

42 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Templates

Example:
Inputs Dynamic View (with Templates)
4. Type a description of the view in the Description field.
5. Click in the View Type field. A dialog box appears listing the object types you can choose for your Dynamic View.
6. Click on ‘Click here to filter data’ and type the first letter of the name of the object type for which you wish to create a
Dynamic View. The list of object types is filtered to show only the types that begin with that letter.
Example:
To create a list of Inputs, type ‘i’ then click on Input.
7. Click Add to add a column to the Dynamic View.
8. Click in Column Property, then click Name to add the Name Property to display in the column.
9. Click Add to add a column to the Dynamic View.
10. Click in Column Property, then click Template to add the Template Property to display in the column.
11. You can click Add again to add more columns as needed.
12. Click Save and Close to save the Dynamic View.

13. In the Data Views pane, click to display a list of your Dynamic Views.
14. Double-click on the Dynamic View you just created. When it appears, it will list all of the objects of the object type you
specified, and the Template column identifies which objects are Templates.
15. Find the Template you wish to edit, and double-click it to open the editor to edit the Template.
16. When you have completed making changes to the Template, click Save and Close to save your changes.

Creating an Object from a Template

You can create objects such as Controllers, Doors, and Elevators from Templates.

To Create an Object from a Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the parent object in which you want to create the new object from a
Template.
3. Select the parent object and right-click to display the context menu.
4. Select the object type and click the Template you want to use from the context menu.
Example:
In Figure 3 on Page 42, you could select controller template to create an iSTAR Controller from a Template.
5. The Editor for the object opens so that you can edit the new object. The settings from your Template are already
configured.
6. Configure any additional settings.
7. To save the new object, click Save and Close.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 43

Templates

Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers

You can use Templates as the basis for objects that you create while configuring Controllers in C•CURE 9000. For
example, if you are configuring an iSTAR Controller that has an I/8 board, you can create an Input template and use that
template as the basis for one or more iSTAR Inputs on that I/8 board.

Typically, you create these objects from a tab within the Controller editor. The tab where you create such an object
contains a table that includes a Template column for you to identify a Template to use as a basis for the objects you create.

Example:
The apC Controller editor has tabs for Inputs, Outputs, and Readers. On each of these tabs, there is a Template
column that lets you select a Template to use for creating new objects.
Figure 4 on Page 44 shows an example of an apC Outputs tab with an apC Template selected in the Template
column.
Figure 4:  apC Outputs Template

By default, when you select a Template for one object in the list, the same Template is added as the basis for each object.
You can use more than one Template by configuring the objects for which you want to use one Template, then choosing
one or more different Templates for the remaining objects.

To Use Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, or Readers

1. From the Hardware pane, open the Controller Editor for the Controller you want to configure.
2. Click the tab in the Controller Editor for the objects you want to configure.
Example:

44 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Templates

In the apC Editor, click the Outputs tab to configure Outputs on this apC.
3. To specify a Template for an object you want to configure, click in the Template column of an object that is not yet
configured (Configured column value is ).
4. Click to select a Template. A dialog box opens listing the available Templates. See Figure 4 on Page 44 for an
example.
5. Click on a Template in the list to select it. That Template is added to every object in the table that is not already
configured.

6. Select the Configured column for each object you want to configure with the selected Template.
7. If you want to select a different Template for any of the remaining objects in the table that you have not yet configured
(Configured column value is ):
a. Click in the Template column of that object, then click to select a Template. A dialog box opens listing the
available Templates.
b. Click on a Template in the list to select it. That Template is added to every object in the table that is not already
configured.
c. Select the Configured column for each object you want to configure with the selected Template.
8. Repeat Step 7 for any additional objects for which you want to choose a different Template.
9. To edit any of the objects, click in the Edit column for that object. The editor for that object opens. The fields that
were configured in the Template are already configured in the object you are editing.
10. When you have completed configuring an object from the Template, click Save and Close in the object editor to save
the object.
11. Click Save and Close in the Controller editor to save the your changes to the Controller.

Deleting a Template
You can delete a template that you have created by using the right-click context menu in a Dynamic View.

To Delete a Template

1. In the Navigation pane, select the type of object you want to delete from the drop-down list. (For example, in the
Hardware pane, choose apC Comm Port from the drop-down list.)
2. Click the Search pane.
3. Select the Template check box
4. Click to display a list of the objects that includes the Templates you have defined.
5. Select the Template(s) from the list that you wish to delete.
6. Right-click on a selected Template to bring up the context menu for the object.
7. Select Delete from the menu to delete the Template.

Viewing a List of Templates

You can include Templates in a list of objects of a type.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 45

Templates

Typically the Dynamic View for an object type does not include Template objects. You can use the Template check box to
cause the Dynamic View to list all the Templates you have created.

To View a List of Templates

1. In the Navigation pane, select the type of object you wish to view from the drop-down list. (For example, in the
Hardware pane, choose apC Comm Port from the drop-down list.)
2. Click the Search pane.
3. Select the Template check box
4. Click to display a list of the objects that includes the Templates you have defined.

46 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

The C•CURE 9000 supports the ability to duplicate an existing configured iSTAR Cluster with all of its included Security
Objects - Controllers, Boards, Inputs, Outputs, Readers, Doors, Elevators, Triggers (plus associated Events).
■ The Copy & Paste context menu selection can be used to make a duplicate of a Cluster and its Child Objects on the
same partition on the same system.
■ The Copy To context menu selection can be used to make a duplicate of a Cluster and its Child Objects on a different
partition on the same system, using Paste From.
■ With a flash drive or other portable memory device or shared drive, the Copy To and Paste From context menu
selections can be used to duplicate the Cluster and Children on another system.
■ The Rename context menu selection is used to give these duplicated Objects new names.
■ If you are extensively using the Copy & Paste and Rename features, it is good practice to establish a naming
convention for the site and then rename based on that convention.

Example:
Create the new Clusters and Controllers with -Bldg appended to all of the objects. While Copying and Pasting you can
use Search and Replace to change -BLDG-Copy-datetime to -BLDG-A. See Using Search and Replace on Page
50.

The Export and Import of Clusters does not include all the doors, elevators and events (configured via
NOTE triggers). Copy & Paste includes all of those objects.

When an iSTAR Cluster is selected and Copy & Paste is used, the following objects that belong to that cluster are copied
and pasted:
■ All configured Controllers plus the following components of each Controller:
• Boards (all the boards including GCM, ACMs, Aperio Hubs or Schlage PIMs, etc.)
• Inputs (including I/8s, I/8-CSIs)
• Outputs (including R/8s)
• Readers (all types)
• Doors
• Elevators
• Triggers, including their associated Events and actions

When an iSTAR Controller is selected and Copy & Paste is used, the following objects that belong to that Controller are
copied and pasted:
■ Boards (all the boards including GCM, ACMs, Aperio Hubs or Schlage PIMs, etc.)
■ Inputs (including I/8s, I/8-CSIs)
■ Outputs (including R/8s)
■ Readers (all types)
■ Doors
■ Elevators
■ Triggers, including their associated Events and actions

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 47

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Privileges
To use the Copy & Paste, Copy To, Copy From and Rename features, you must be an Administrator or an operator that
has a Privilege with those Permissions granted for iSTAR Controller and iSTAR Cluster.

The iSTAR Controller and iSTAR Cluster Privilege Permission features are located in the Privileges dialog box
Defaults tab. Click on the Hardware>Controllers>iSTAR. Locate the iSTAR Controller and iSTAR Cluster for the
Permissions for the Privilege.

See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide 'Privileges' chapter for more information.

Important Copy and Paste Process Information

■ All the child objects that are copied and pasted follow the same naming convention (i.e., Copy [date-time] will be
appended to their original names.)
■ If copying and pasting on the same system, the objects are pasted in the same partition as the source objects. If you
are pasting on another system, the pasted objects will have the same partition as the object or folder on which user
right-clicked and selected Paste From.
■ All the export files are .xml files.
■ During import, the secondary objects must exist on the destination system. If not, then the import of object that refers
to secondary object will be aborted. For example, Event A is configured to activate Event B. Here Event B is the
secondary object and it must already exist otherwise the import will be aborted.
■ Copy & Paste copies all triggers assigned to the object, including the events and event actions, but not all of the
event action targets, such as a sound object.
■ When copying a panel which has panel events associated with it, the panel events are copied but not assigned to the
panel. The panel must be assigned manually after the copy is complete and host events must be reconfigured.

Copy & Paste Tasks

When you copy a Controller, or a Controller in a Cluster, the MAC address is also copied. The
copied Controller MAC address must be changed to a unique MAC address before the unit can
be enabled.

You can perform the following tasks using Copy & Paste:
■ Copying and Pasting on the Same System on Page 48
■ Copying to a Mapped Drive or Another System Using a Flash Drive on Page 51
■ Copying and Pasting from Partition to Partition on Page 55

The same procedures can be used to copy and paste individual Controller configurations.
NOTE

Copying and Pasting on the Same System

The following procedure is used to create a copy of the following:

48 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

■ A Cluster, plus all the objects within that Cluster with the same names as the existing ones with -Copy [date-time]
appended to their names.
■ A Controller with -Copy [date-time] appended to its name, plus all the objects within that Controller.

Example:
For a Cluster named Cluster5, the new cluster's name will be Cluster5-Copy [date-time], and if the Cluster has a
Controller named Controller7, the new name will be Controller7-Copy [date-time].

For a Controller named Controller6, the new name will be Controller6-Copy [date-time].

To Create a Copy of an Existing Cluster or Controller on the Same System

1. Right-click on an existing Cluster, or Controller, in the Hardware tree and select Copy & Paste from the context
menu. Figure 5 on Page 49 shows selecting to copy and paste a Cluster.
Figure 5:  Copy & Paste Context Menu Selection

The Search and Replace dialog box, as shown in Figure 6 on Page 50, appears.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 49

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 6:  Search and Replace Dialog Box

Using Search and Replace

Prior to the paste operation, the system provides the ability to replace a particular string in the names of objects being
copied in the objects being pasted. Normally, the pasted objects will have the string -Copy [date-time] appended to
the names. The Search and Replace dialog box allows you to replace the name.
— Any string can be entered in the Search for field, and the string that it will replace in the Replace with field.
— Objects in conflict will have -Copy [date-time] appended to their names
— Partial matches are considered. For example, if Door is entered in the search field and Dr in the replace field
with an object named FrontDoorReader then it is renamed as FrontDrReader. Selecting the Cancel button
will abort the Paste operation.
— If both the Search for and Replace with fields are left blank, the object names are appended with -Copy
[date-time].
— Both Search for and Replace with fields must have a string entered or both fields must be blank. Leaving one
field blank is not allowed by the C•CURE 9000 software.

If the Copy & Paste operation is stopped before it completes, the entire operation is
NOTE canceled.

2. Click OK. If you selected to search and replace, the system searches for the string and performs the replace while
copying the Cluster or Controller.
The Copying Status Window, shown in Figure 7 on Page 50, appears. The time required depends on the complexity
of the Cluster or Controller. The time is 10 to 60 seconds for most Clusters.
Figure 7:  Copying Status Window

50 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

3. Click OK when the object is displayed as copied, as shown in Copying Status Window on Page 50.
Figure 8:  Copying Status Window - Complete

When the copy is complete, shown side-by-side in Figure 9 on Page 51, all Readers, Inputs, Outputs, Doors, etc. have
-Copy [date-time] appended to their names.
Figure 9:  Hardware Tree - Copy Complete

Copying to a Mapped Drive or Another System Using a Flash Drive

To Copy a Cluster or a Controller to a Mapped Drive or Another System

1. Right-click on the Cluster and select Copy to.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 51

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 10:  Copy To Menu Selection

The Export Window, shown in Figure 11 on Page 53, opens.

2. Select the Flash Drive (or the mapped drive), and edit the File name if desired.

52 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 11:  Copy to Flash Drive

3. Click Save.
The Copy To Status Window, shown in Figure 12 on Page 53, appears.
Figure 12:  Copy To Status Window

4. Click OK when the object is displayed as copied.

5. Insert the Flash drive into the system where you want to copy the objects. Or, browse to the mapped drive on the
system.
In this example, a simulated hardware folder is representing the other system.
6. Right-click on the target folder in the new system's Hardware tree and select iSTAR Cluster>Paste From.
7. Select the Flash Drive (or the mapped drive), the .xml file, and click Open as shown in Figure 13 on Page 54Figure 13
on Page 54

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 53

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 13:  Paste From Window

The Search and Replace dialog box appears. For information about Search and Replace, see Using Search and
Replace on Page 50
8. Click OK in the Search and Replace dialog box. If you selected to search and replace, the system searches for the
string and performs the replace while copying the objects.
The Pasting Status Window, shown in Figure 14 on Page 54, appears.
Figure 14:  Pasting Status Window

9. Click OK in the Pasting Status Window when the object is displayed as pasted.
The copied Cluster appears under the simulated folder in the Hardware tree on the system.

54 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Copying and Pasting from Partition to Partition

To Copy and Paste for a Partition to a Partition

1. Right-click on the Cluster or Controller and select Copy To.
The Export Window appears.
2. Select a folder on the system to save the .xml file, and click Save, as shown in Figure 15 on Page 55.
Figure 15:  Export Window

3. Select the other partition where you want to copy the object.
4. Right-click on the Hardware folder in the partition and select iSTAR Cluster>Paste from, as shown in Figure 16 on
Page 56Figure 16 on Page 56

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 55

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 16:  Partition Selection

The Paste From Window appears.

5. Browse to the .xml file you saved on the system.
6. Select the .xml file and click Open.
The Search and Replace dialog box appears. For information about Search and Replace, see Using Search and
Replace on Page 50
7. Click OK in the Search and Replace dialog box. If you selected to search and replace, the system searches for the
string and performs the replace while copying the objects.
The Pasting Status Window appears.
8. Click OK in the Pasting Status Window when the object is displayed as pasted.
The copied object appears in the Partition.

56 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Renaming Clusters and Controllers

If you did not use the Search and Replace option in the Copy & Paste procedure, you can use the Rename selection on
the Context menu.

The following procedure renames -Copy [date-time] that was appended to the end of a Cluster and its objects during
Copy & Paste to -Bldg-C.

To Rename Clusters and Controllers

1. Right-click on the object and select Rename, as shown in Figure 17 on Page 57.
Figure 17:  Rename Cluster

The Renaming dialog box appears.

2. Click Search and Replace to open the Search and Replace dialog box, as shown in Figure 18 on Page 58.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 57

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 18:  Cluster Renaming

3. Enter the new name in the Replace with field (in this example it's -Bldg-C).
4. Optional selections
• Click on the Match case check box to match the case entered.
• Click in the Ignore Trigger Targets check box to ignore Trigger target events.

Use caution if renaming original Events. The Events may be linked to other objects. Use the
Show Association feature to determine if they are. See the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started
Guide for information about using Show Association.

5. Click OK.
An informational dialog box appears displaying all the objects that were modified with the new name.

58 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 19:  Rename Results

6. Click OK.
7. Verify that the rename changes are complete. Click on the tabs in Renaming dialog box.

Because Ignore Trigger Targets was selected in the Search and Replace dialog box, the
NOTE original Trigger Target Events were not renamed, but another copy of the Events exist with the
-Copy [date-time] appended to the end.

Rename Results
The next series of graphics illustrate the effect of the Rename operation.
Figure 20:  Controller Tab and Input Tab

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 59

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 21:  Outputs Tab and Readers Tab

Figure 22:  Doors Tab and Elevators Tab

Figure 23:  Triggers Tab

Trigger Target Events

Notice that the original Trigger Target Events were not renamed, but another copy of the Events exists with the [-Copy-
date-time] stamp. The date-time stamped ones can be further renamed and used as desired.

Use caution if renaming original Events. The Events may be linked to other objects. Use the
Show Association feature to determine if they are. See the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started
Guide for information about using Show Association.

60 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

Figure 24:  Trigger Targets

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 2 61

Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers

62 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 3

Chapter 3 - Maintenance Mode

This chapter describes how to configure and use Maintenance Mode.

In this chapter:

Maintenance Mode Dialog Box 64

Maintenance Mode Overview 65
Maintenance Mode Objects Supported 66
Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks 67

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 63

Maintenance Mode Dialog Box

Maintenance Mode Dialog Box

The Maintenance Mode dialog box, shown in Figure 25 on Page 64, opens when Maintenance Mode is selected or
deselected.

See the following for more information:

■ Maintenance Mode Overview on Page 65
■ Maintenance Mode Objects Supported on Page 66
■ Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks on Page 67
Figure 25:  Maintenance Mode Dialog Box (Cluster)

64 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Maintenance Mode Overview

Maintenance Mode Overview

Maintenance Mode is used to limit information about an object displayed on the Monitoring Station. Maintenance Mode
only affects what is reported at the Monitoring Station.

Some examples for using Maintenance Mode:

■ To Not display information about:
• Parts of the system being installed by an integrator
• Hardware being serviced, requiring maintenance, or being tested.
■ To only monitor information about hardware being serviced, requiring maintenance, or being tested.
■ To view information about all objects, including those tagged Maintenance Mode.

Placing an object into Maintenance Mode does not prevent actions from occurring. For example, if an event assigned to an
intrusion zone in Maintenance Mode activates an output that turns on the building-wide evacuation alarm, the activation of
the output will still occur.

Arming and disarming of inputs and events do not affect what is reported when the object is activated. In other words,
arming of an event by an event assigned to a Maintenance Mode intrusion zone will be reported as activity.

Maintenance Mode is only reported in Journal messages when an object is tagged Maintenance Mode. When the object is
taken out of Maintenance Mode it is not reported in a Journal message.

Operator Privilege and Application Layout Filtering assignments determine whether or not an object in Maintenance Mode
is viewable as being in Maintenance Mode on the Monitoring Station. Only Monitoring Station operators with the correct
privilege and Application Layout Filtering can view objects in Maintenance Mode.

See the following for more information:

■ Maintenance Mode Objects Supported on Page 66
■ Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks on Page 67

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 65

Maintenance Mode Objects Supported

Maintenance Mode Objects Supported

The following objects are supported in Maintenance Mode:
■ apC Comm Ports ■ Events ■ iSTAR PIM-485 Readers
■ apC Controllers ■ Floors ■ iSTAR Schlage Readers
■ apC Add-On Boards ■ Intrusion Zones ■ iSTAR Schlage Doors
■ apC I32 Input Boards ■ Keypad Commands ■ iSTAR Device Ports
■ apC I8 Input Boards ■ iSTAR Clusters ■ iSTAR ACM Boards
■ apC R48 Output Boards ■ iSTAR Controllers ■ iSTAR GCM Boards
■ apC R8 Output Boards ■ iSTAR Doors ■ iSTAR Input Boards
■ apC Inputs ■ iSTAR Inputs ■ iSTAR Output Boards
■ apC Readers ■ iSTAR Readers ■ iSTAR Ultra ACMs
■ apC Doors ■ iSTAR Aperio Hub ■ Outputs
■ Areas ■ iSTAR Aperio Readers ■ Star Coupler Ministar
■ C•CURE Mobile ■ iSTAR Aperio Doors ■ Star Coupler Star
■ Elevators ■ iSTAR Comm Ports ■ Star Coupler WPSC

66 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks

Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks

Operator privileges and application layout assignments must be configured to use, view, or filter objects in maintenance
mode.

The following tasks are described:

■ Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 67
■ Configuring the Application Layout for Maintenance Mode Filtering on Page 67
■ Turning Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 68
■ Viewing Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View on Page 69
■ Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View on Page 69

Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off

Only operators who have the Turn Maintenance Mode On and/or Turn Maintenance Mode Off privilege assigned to
them can put an object into Maintenance Mode and take an object out of Maintenance Mode.

The following procedure describes how to configure the privilege to include Maintenance Mode.

To Configure the Privilege

1. Click the Configuration pane.
2. Select Privilege from the Configuration drop-down menu to open the Privileges dialog box.
3. Click the Defaults tab.
4. Under Classes, click an object to view the permissions for that object.
5. Scroll down to locate Turn Maintenance Mode On and Turn Maintenance Mode Off.
6. Click in the Grant column next to Turn Maintenance Mode On and/or Turn Maintenance Mode Off to enable the
permission(s) for this Privilege configuration.
7. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for complete Privilege configuration information.
8. Click Save and Close when done with the configuration.

Configuring the Application Layout for Maintenance Mode Filtering

Application layouts can be configured to allow operators to filter objects in Maintenance Mode in the Monitoring Station and
the Administration application Dynamic Views.

The following procedure describes how to configure the application layout to allow Maintenance Mode filtering. The
Operator must have the correct privileges to use filtering. See Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and
Off on Page 67.

See the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about configuring the application layout.

To Configure Maintenance Mode Filtering in the Application Layout

1. Click the Data Views pane.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 67

Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks

2. Select Application Layout from the Data Views drop-down menu.

3. Edit or add an Application Layout.
4. Click the Filtering tab.
5. See the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide "Application Layout chapter" for information about the Filtering tab fields.
6. Click Save and Close when done with the configuration.

Turning Maintenance Mode On and Off

To use Maintenance Mode, operators must have the correct privilege permissions assigned to them. See
NOTE Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 67

There are several ways to turn Maintenance Mode on and off:

■ Right-click on an object in the object tree and select Turn Maintenance Mode On or Turn Maintenance Mode Off.
■ Right-click on an object in the Dynamic View and select Turn Maintenance Mode On or Turn Maintenance Mode
Off.
■ Click in the Maintenance Mode column check box in the Dynamic View.
■ Open the object editor and select the Maintenance Mode check box. Deselect the check box to turn it off.

iSTAR Cluster

To Put a Cluster Into Maintenance Mode

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. Locate the Cluster in the Hardware tree, or in the Dynamic View.
3. Right-click on the Cluster name and select Turn Maintenance Mode On to open the Maintenance Mode dialog box.
4. The Maintenance Mode dialog box opens with the Cluster and all of its components/objects selected.
5. Click Save and Close.

To Take a Cluster Out of Maintenance Mode

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. In the Hardware tree, or in the Dynamic View, right-click on the Cluster and select Turn Maintenance Mode Off to
open the Maintenance Mode dialog box.
3. Click Deselect All.
4. Click Save and Close.

To Add an iSTAR to a Cluster in Maintenance Mode

1. Right-click on the Cluster name and select Turn Maintenance Mode Off to open the Maintenance Mode dialog box.
2. Select the check box next to the iSTAR name.

68 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks

3. Click Save and Close.

iSTAR Controller or apC Controller

To Put iSTAR or apC Components/Objects into Maintenance Mode

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. Locate the controller in the Hardware tree or in the Dynamic View.
3. Right-click on the iSTAR or apC, controller and select Turn Maintenance Mode On to open the Maintenance Mode
dialog box.
4. Click the iSTAR or apC, controller name, or click Select All to select all components and objects belonging to the
controller. Or, click on the separate components and/objects that you want to put into Maintenance Mode.
5. Click Save and Close.

Taking an iSTAR or apC Controller Out of Maintenance Mode.

To Take an iSTAR or apC Components/Objects Out of Maintenance Mode

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. In the Hardware tree, click on the Cluster where the iSTAR, or apC, controller belongs.
3. Right-click on the controller and select Turn Maintenance Mode Off to open the Maintenance Mode dialog box.
4. Deselect the controller, components and/or objects.
5. Click Save and Close.

Putting Objects (Doors, Readers, Events, Elevators, etc.) into Maintenance Mode

To Put Objects into Maintenance Mode

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. Locate the object, right-click on it and select Turn Maintenance Mode On.
To turn off Maintenance Mode, right-click on the object and select Turn Maintenance Mode Off.

Viewing Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View

The Dynamic View can be customized to display objects that are in Maintenance Mode. See the C•CURE 9000 Data
Views User Guide for information about adding the Maintenance Mode column to the Dynamic View.

Filtering Partitions and Maintenance Mode Objects in the Dynamic View

Application Layout Filtering configuration allows Operators to filter a Dynamic View to show only selected partitions and/or
to view objects that are in Maintenance Mode in the Administration application and in the Monitoring Station. Only
Operators with the correct privilege and Application Layout assigned to them are allowed to use filtering.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 3 69

Maintenance Mode Configuration Tasks

See Configuring Privileges to Turn Maintenance Mode On and Off on Page 67 and Configuring the Application Layout for
Maintenance Mode Filtering on Page 67

70 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 4

Chapter 4 - Configuring Dialup

This chapter explains how to configure dial up for use with the iSTAR Pro and the iSTAR Ultra SE (Pro Mode only).

In this chapter

iSTAR Dialup 72
iSTAR Dialup Configuration Sequence 73
Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port 74
Configuring the Host Modem 77
Creating a Cluster for Dialup 80

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 71

iSTAR Dialup

iSTAR Dialup
Dialup enables you to connect the C•CURE 9000 to the iSTAR Pro and iSTAR Ultra SE (in Pro Mode with a USB-based
modem card) controllers at remote locations using modems and standard telephone lines.

The C•CURE host and iSTAR phone line/modem connection is based primarily on Windows standard telephony
communications and Routing and Remote Access Service (RRAS).
■ The lowest level of the communications, which deals with modem states, is handled by the Microsoft Windows
Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI). TAPI supports the use of any type of standard modem on the
host.
■ The higher level of the communications, which deals with the transmission of C•CURE relevant data, is handled by
Microsoft RRAS. RRAS treats dial-up connections as if they were network connections. Consequently, the C•CURE
host views the connection established between the iSTAR and itself via a phone line and modem as any other network
connection.
■ Serial port-based dialup modems and USB port based modems are supported.

Dialup Limitations
■ Dialup is only supported on Windows Server 2008 R2, 2012, and 2012 R2.
■ Dialup is not supported in configurations using redundancy.
■ Dialup can be used only as the primary connection method or the secondary communication method, not as both.

Example:
— Dialup is used as the primary communication method and there is no secondary communication method.
— TCP/IP is used as the primary communication method and Dialup is used as the secondary communication
method.
■ A cluster used for dialup can only contain one iSTAR controller.
■ Fast Personnel download is not supported.
■ Dialup is not supported on a separate RRAS server.

72 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Dialup Configuration Sequence

iSTAR Dialup Configuration Sequence

The configuration information in this section only applies to the C•CURE 9000, and assumes that you
NOTE completed the operating system setup as described in the Operating System Setup for Dialup Guide.
This guide is located in the C•CURE 9000 Installation DVD English\Manuals folder.

The dialup configuration sequence is described in Table 3 on Page 73.

Table 3:  iSTAR Dialup Configuration Sequence

Step Task See...

1 Configure the Comm ports to which the host modems are attached in C•CURE 9000 Configuring the iSTAR Comm
using the iSTAR Comm Port Editor. Port on Page 74

2 Configure the host modems in C•CURE 9000 using the Host Modem editor. Configuring the Host Modem
on Page 77

3 Create an iSTAR Cluster. Click the Dialup tab to configure dialup settings. Creating a Cluster for Dialup
on Page 80

4 Configure the iSTAR controller. iSTAR Pro Controller Editor

on Page 146

5 1. Open the iSTAR Cluster you created in Step 3. Configuring iSTAR

2. Click the Communications tab. Clusters on Page 91

3. Add the controller you configured in Step 4.

4. Configure the communication with the host.

6 Configure/Grant Privileges for the iSTAR Controller dialup permissions using the C•CURE 9000 Software
Privilege editor. Configuration Guide

7 Configure Events to download to the controller and select the dial up conditions using the C•CURE 9000 Software
Event editor. Configuration Guide
Select the Dialup settings from the Event Editor General tab.

8 Configure the System Variables Dialup settings (dial-up user name, password, domain, C•CURE 9000 System
grace seconds, cycle seconds) to use RRAS. Maintenance Guide

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 73

Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port

Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port

Use the iSTAR Comm Port dialog box, shown in Figure 26 on Page 74, to communicate with a serial port connection.

See Table 4 on Page 74 for descriptions of the fields on the Comm Port editor General Tab.

■ The iSTAR Comm Port only supports a serial port.

NOTE
■ Triggers are not supported.

Figure 26:  iSTAR Comm Port Editor Dialog Box

Table 4:  iSTAR Comm Port Field Definitions

Field Description

Name The Name field will reflect the Comm Port you select.

Description Enter a textual comment about the controller, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only.

74 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port

iSTAR Comm Port Field Definitions (continued)

Field Description

Enabled This setting determines whether or not the iSTAR Comm Port is able to provide communication between the iSTAR Controller
and the C•CURE 9000 Server. Select Enabled to set the Comm Port online. To take the Comm Port offline, clear the Enabled
selection.
If the iSTAR Comm Port is currently in use by iSTAR controllers, you must disable all the controllers before you attempt to take the
Comm Port offline. If any iSTAR controllers are enabled when you attempt to take the iSTAR Comm Port offline, an error
message is displayed - "Port cannot be disabled with enabled controllers. Please disable controllers first. When the controllers are
re-enabled they will do a full personnel download."
The message explains that when you re-enable the iSTAR Comm Port and then re-enable the iSTAR controllers, each controller
will perform a full personnel download.
NOTE: Fast Personnel Download is not supported.

Maintenance Click to put the iSTAR Comm Port into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition.

Communications Type

Serial Port Selected by default.

Port Settings

Port Timeout The Port Timeout Delay Time is the extra interval that the host waits for a response from the iSTAR panel after sending a
Delay Time message to the panel. If the host does not receive a response in the specified time, the host re-transmits the message or declares
(1/10 sec) a communications failure. This field allows you to set the timeout delay for all panels that use a specific port.
Software House recommends that you set this period to 20 (2 seconds). However, if you require additional delay time because
iSTAR controllers run on a Digiboard, Equinox board, or over a network, you may need to increase this value. Keep this value as
small as possible, or system performance may be affected. If your panel goes into communications failure often, try setting this
value between 30 (3 seconds) and 50 (5 seconds).
Range: 0 through 99.
Default: 0.

Comm Port Select the Communications Serial Port from the drop-down list. The Name field will reflect the port number that you select. The
range is COM1 to COM256.

To Configure the iSTAR Comm Port

1. Open the C•CURE 9000 Administration Hardware Pane, select the Hardware Folder in which you want the iSTAR
Comm Port to reside.
2. Right-click the folder to display the context menu, click iSTAR Comm Port and, then click New. The iSTAR Comm
Port editor appears.
You may also choose New Template. For further information about creating Templates, see Creating a Template on
Page 41.
3. Enter a unique Host Communications Port name in the Name field (required).
4. Enter a textual description of the Comm Port (optional) in the Description field.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 75

Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port

5. You can set a Port Timeout Delay Time in tenths of a second units by entering it in the field or by using the up/down
arrows.
6. Select the Comm Port from the drop-down list.
7. Select the Enabled check box to put the Comm Port online after you have completed the configuration procedure.
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Go to Configuring the Host Modem on Page 77.

iSTAR Comm Port State Images Tab

The State images tab, shown in Figure 27 on Page 76, provides a means to change the default images used to indicate
communication port states. These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object
that they represent.
Figure 27:  iSTAR Comm Port State Images Tab

To Change a State Image

1. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you
have placed replacement images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it and click Open to add it to the image listing.
3. If you are done editing the iSTAR Comm Port, click Save and Close to save the Comm Port’s configuration.
Alternatively, if you want to save the Comm Port and create a new one, click Save and New. The Comm Port Editor
remains open to allow you to create a new Comm Port.

To Restore to the Default Image

■ Right-click on the new image and select Restore Default.

76 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring the Host Modem

Configuring the Host Modem

The Host Modem dialog box, shown in Figure 28 on Page 77, lets you specify the communication port, the dialing direction,
and the phone numbers the iSTAR Pro/SE Pro Mode can use.

Hyphens, parentheses, and spaces are not allowed in phone numbers.

NOTE

The Host Modem dialog box definitions are described in Table 5 on Page 77.
Figure 28:  Host Modem Dialog Box

Table 5:   Host Modem Dialog Box Definitions

Field Description

Name Enter a unique name for the host modem configuration.

Description A textual comment for information only.

Enabled Select Enabled to set the host modem online. To take the host modem offline, clear the
Enabled selection.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 77

Configuring the Host Modem

Table 5:   Host Modem Dialog Box Definitions (continued)

Field Description

Maintenance Mode Click to put the iSTAR Comm Port into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance
Mode for more information.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Controller resides.

Communication Port
Click to open the Name Selection dialog to select the iSTAR Comm Port.
NOTE: The iSTAR communication ports must already be configured. See Configuring
the iSTAR Comm Port on Page 74

Direction Dial out only

Select this option to specify that this modem is used only for dialing out to
panels/controllers
Dial in only
Select this option to specify that this modem is used only for dialing into the host.
Dial in and Dial out
Select this option to specify that this modem is used for both incoming and outgoing
calls.

Phone numbers that Displays the list of phone numbers that reach this host modem. Use the buttons to the
reach this modem right of the list to modify the numbers in the list.
• The phone number can be up to 35 characters long.
• Hyphens, parentheses, and spaces are not allowed in phone numbers.
• If Dial out only is selected in the Direction box, this box and the Add Dial In, and
Remove buttons are unavailable.

To Configure Modems for the Host

1. Ensure that the iSTAR communication ports are configured. See Configuring the iSTAR Comm Port on Page 74.
2. Open the C•CURE 9000 Administration Hardware Pane, select the Hardware Folder in which you want the iSTAR
modem configuration to reside.
3. Right-click the folder to display the context menu, click Host Modem, and then click New.
The Host Modem dialog box, shown in Figure 28 on Page 77, appears.
4. Enter a unique Host Modem name in the Name field (required).
5. Enter a textual description (optional) of the Host Modem configuration in the Description field.

6. Click in the Port field to open the Name selection dialog box and click the iSTAR Comm Port you want to use.
7. Select the dial Direction: Dial out only, Dial in only, or Dial in and Dial out.
8. In the Phone numbers that reach this modem box:
a. Click Add Dial In to add a new row.
b. Click in the new row and enter a phone number.
c. Repeat step a and step b for each phone number you want to add.

78 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring the Host Modem

9. Click Enabled to put the Host Modem online.

10. Optional. Click on the State Images tab to change the default images used to indicate communication port states on
the Monitoring Station.
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Go to Creating a Cluster for Dialup on Page 80.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 79

Creating a Cluster for Dialup

Creating a Cluster for Dialup

This section describes how to create a cluster to use dial-up on the iSTAR Pro or Ultra SE Pro Mode controller.

The Dialup Configuration tab in the iSTAR Cluster Editor dialog box, shown in Figure 29 on Page 80, lets you select pre-
configured host modems and specify other dial-up configurations.

This tab is only available for unencrypted clusters and for use with the iSTAR Pro or iSTAR Ultra SE in Pro Mode.

■ You can only have one controller in a cluster that uses dialup.
NOTE
■ To enable a cluster, a dial-in and a dial-out phone number must be configured.
■ Alternate master is not supported.

Figure 29:  iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab

There are three tabs under Configuration:

• Dial In lets you select host modems that the controller can call when dialing the host.
• Dial Out lets you select host modems that the controller can use to dial out.
• Periodic lets you specify a controller to periodically upload activity to the host, receive download configuration
changes, and cardholder information from the host at that time.

80 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Creating a Cluster for Dialup

Table 6:  iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab Definitions

Field Description

Dial In Tab

Host Modem/Host Click to Add to open the Name Selection dialog box host to select the host modems and host phone numbers that the
Phone Number host can use to contact this controller.
• The host calls the modems in the order that they are listed.
• A modem/phone combination can be listed more than once, but you cannot enter more than 8 modem/phone
combinations.

Number of times to try Specify the number of times the controller dials each telephone number in the list when the controller cannot contact
connections the host.
Example:
If 2 is entered in this field, the controller dials each telephone number in the list two times. If the requisite connection
attempts with all the phone numbers in the list fail, the controller is considered to be in Comm fail.The system will
use the Retry interval during communication failure value to set the timing of communication attempts.
Default: 2
Range: 0-99

Dial Out Tab

Host Modems/ Remote Click Add to add host modems and remote phone numbers that the host can use to dial out.
Phone Number • The host calls the modems in the order that they are listed.
• A modem/phone combination can be listed more than once, but you cannot enter more than 8 modem/phone
combinations.

Automatically initiate Specify the time to automatically download configuration changes to the dial-up controller. Then, click on the check box
connection when to enable the download time.
configuration changes Example:
after hh:mm
Cardholder additions and deletions.
NOTE:
- Leaving this unselected means that configuration changes will not be downloaded until the next normal
connection with the controller.
- Selected with a time of 00.00 indicates immediate download.
- Changes to the controller, such as change to an object’s name or description, do not cause a download to the
controller.
Range: 0 to 23 hours 59 minutes.

Periodic Tab
NOTE: To make changes to the Periodic tab you must clear the Enabled, click Save and Close and then reopen the Cluster editor.

Redial interval during Specify the interval of time the host waits to redial the controller when there is a communication failure. Enter the time in
communications failure hh:mm format.
• Default: 30 minutes.
• Range: 0 minutes to 24 hours 59 minutes.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 4 81

Creating a Cluster for Dialup

Table 6:  iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab Definitions (continued)

Field Description

Schedule
Click to open the Name Selection dialog box to select a non-recurring schedule for periodic dialing, and
downloading configuration changes and cardholder information.
NOTE: If the predefined 'Always' schedule is selected, the controller will only use the time interval specified by Dial
interval outside of schedule.The Dial interval during schedule setting will be ignored.

Dial interval during Specify the frequency that the host dials the controller when the time specification is in effect.
schedule • Enter the time in hh:mm format.
• Range: 0 to 24:00 hours.

Dial interval outside Specify the frequency that the host dials the controller when the time specification is not in effect.
schedule • Enter the time in hh:mm format.
• Range: 0 to 24:00 hours.

To Configure a Cluster for Dialup

1. Click on the Dialup Configuration tab in the iSTAR Cluster Editor dialog box.
2. See Table 6 on Page 81 for Dial In, Dial Out, and Periodic tab configuration information.
3. Click Save and Close when done.
4. Go to iSTAR Pro Controller Editor on Page 146 to configure the controller.

82 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 5

Chapter 5 - Configuring C•CURE iSTAR Clusters

This chapter explains how to configure iSTAR Clusters in the C•CURE 9000 system.

In this chapter

Cluster Communications Overview 84

Configuring iSTAR Clusters 91
Creating an iSTAR Cluster 92
Creating and Using an iSTAR Cluster Template 93
iSTAR Cluster Editor 95
iSTAR Cluster General Tab 97
iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab 99
iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab 103
iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous Tab 104
iSTAR Cluster Area Tab 105
iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab 108
iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab 110
iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab 116
iSTAR Cluster Status Tab 117
iSTAR Cluster State Images Tab 118

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 83

Cluster Communications Overview

Cluster Communications Overview

iSTAR controllers are organized for network communications into user-defined, logical groups called Clusters. Clusters
contain one or more iSTAR controllers. A C•CURE 9000 server (host) can be connected to multiple iSTAR clusters. An
iSTAR Controller must belong to a Cluster.

A Cluster can have a maximum of sixteen controllers.

NOTE

■ Cluster Configuration and Distributed Management on Page 84

■ Networked iSTAR Controllers (Clusters) on Page 85
■ Establishing Connections Via the Primary Communications Path on Page 87
■ Setting Up the Primary Communications Path on Page 88
■ Downloading Cardholder and Configuration Information on Page 88
■ Maintaining Communications on Page 88
■ Establishing a Secondary Communications Path on Page 89
■ Distributed Cluster Management on Page 90
■ Unassigned Folder on Page 90

Cluster Configuration and Distributed Management

One or more controllers can be configured for communications purposes into user-defined groups called Clusters.
Clusters have a primary communication path to the host that use Masters to control communications among cluster
members and the host over the network. Clusters also support a backup communications path, the secondary
communications path. The cluster can use the secondary path to communicate with the host when a communications
failure occurs on the primary path. Secondary paths can only exist on the Master.

The Alternate Master capability cannot be configured in newly-created iSTAR clusters in version 2.20 or
NOTE later.
iSTAR Clusters that already have an Alternate Master, when upgraded to version 2.20 or later, retain the
Alternate Master, but if the cluster is edited and the Alternate Master is removed, this change will
permanently remove the ability to configure an Alternate Master for this cluster.
See the iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab on Page 99 for more information.

Secondary communications paths have not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

Communications among iSTAR controllers provide distributed functionality at the controller level that is not typically
available on security management systems.

A cluster can only contain controllers that support compatible methods of encryption (or do not use encryption).
■ You can create a Non-Encrypted Cluster containing iSTAR Classic, iSTAR Pro, or iSTAR Ultra Controllers.
■ You can create an Encrypted Cluster containing iSTAR eX, iSTAR Edge, or iSTAR Ultra Controllers.

84 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Cluster Communications Overview

Previously, clusters were categorized by Controller Type rather than Encryption Setting. The
NOTE composition of clusters and the models of controllers they contain has not changed. When C•CURE 9000
is upgraded, cluster types are changed to reflect Encryption Settings, but existing controllers remain in
the same clusters.

This change has the following additional effects:

l Existing Reports: ControllerType field is ignored.
l Existing Queries: If ControllerType is included, the query cannot run until the Query is edited and
ControllerType is removed.
l Dynamic Views: ControllerType is replaced by EncryptionSetting.
l Existing Imports: ControllerType is marked as an Import Only property and used to set the Encryption
Setting value.

Master controllers use the primary or secondary communications path to communicate with the C•CURE System host.
Establishing and maintaining a connection with the host involves the following administrative actions through the use of
iSTAR Clusters:
■ Establishing connections via the primary communications path. You set up a primary communications path for a
cluster when configuring controllers and clusters.
■ Downloading cardholder and configuration information from the host to the controller.
■ Maintaining communications via the primary communications path. If a communications failure occurs on the primary
communications path, controllers can re-establish communications via a secondary communications path.

Networked iSTAR Controllers (Clusters)

Controllers are organized for network communications into user-defined or logical groups called Clusters. This section
describes the key elements of clusters.

Master and Cluster Members

Each cluster has one controller that serves as the Master with all other controllers in the cluster acting as Cluster
Members. The master manages all communications between the cluster and a host computer. Cluster members can
communicate with each other via the master, over an Ethernet network. Cluster members cannot communicate with each
other directly. Figure 30 on Page 86 (left) shows how Cluster Member A communicates with the host via the master. The
figure (right) shows how Cluster Member A communicates with Cluster Member B via the master.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 85

Cluster Communications Overview

Figure 30:  Cluster Members

The Primary Communications Path

The Primary Communications Path is the first communications path that master controllers use to establish
communications with the host. Controllers communicate with the host directly. The Connection type is TCP/IP over
Ethernet.

The Master is the one controller in a cluster that is responsible for passing messages between the host and cluster
members. Cluster members do not communicate with the host directly; they communicate with the host through the
master. Connections are established in the following bottom-to-top order:
■ The Master is responsible for establishing a connection with the host. The host does not establish a connection with
the master.
■ Cluster Members are responsible for establishing connections with the master. The master never tries to establish a
connection with a cluster member, as shown in Figure 31 on Page 87.

86 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Cluster Communications Overview

Figure 31:  Cluster Communication Path

The Connection type is how the master connects to the host: TCP/IP over Ethernet. Cluster members are connected to
the master via Ethernet only. Figure 32 on Page 87 shows the Primary Communications Path for Cluster Member A. The
master/host connection type is TCP/IP over Ethernet.
Figure 32:  Primary Communications Path

Establishing Connections Via the Primary Communications Path

The primary communications path is comprised of the following connections:
■ The master connects directly to the host using a network connection.
■ Cluster members connect to the master using a network connection. After connections are established, the master
manages cluster communications by passing messages between cluster members and the host.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 87

Cluster Communications Overview

Connections are established in a bottom-to-top order. Thus, clusters members are responsible for establishing
connections with the master, and the master is responsible for establishing a connection with the host.

Setting Up the Primary Communications Path

Before controllers can establish any connections, you must configure the cluster’s primary communications path by
performing the following tasks:
■ Use the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application to first configure the cluster and then the iSTAR Controllers. See
Configuring iSTAR Clusters on Page 91 and Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 121 for
information.
■ Use the iSTAR Configuration Utility (ICU) to manually configure the master. After you configure the master, it reboots
and then establishes a connection with the C•CURE 9000 Server. The server downloads cardholder and configuration
information to the master.
After downloading information from the host, the master auto-configures its cluster members. Cluster members then
reboot and establish connections with the master.

Downloading Cardholder and Configuration Information

The following information is downloaded to the master and its cluster members from the host:
■ Cardholder data for personnel with clearances on the controller.
■ Configuration information for inputs, outputs, and readers on the controller.
■ Events that are controlled by the controller.
■ Cluster information that the controller uses to communicate with other cluster members.

The C•CURE 9000 Server downloads cardholder and configuration information to the controller under the
NOTE following conditions:
■ Initial configuration
■ Each time the controller is powered on
■ Each time the cluster is taken offline/online

Changes to personnel, clearances, inputs, outputs, readers, and events are immediately downloaded.

Maintaining Communications
Although a communications link may be open between two devices, long periods of time can exist when devices do not
communicate because of low system activity. In the absence of this type of communications, devices send “keep-alive”
messages, called Connection Verification messages, to verify that connections are alive.

Example:
The master and host send these messages to each other to confirm that the connection between them is open. If the
host does not receive a connection verification message from the master in a specified amount of time, the host
closes the communications link with the master and waits for a connection attempt from the cluster. When the master
does not receive a connection verification message from the host in the specified amount of time, it also declares a

88 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Cluster Communications Overview

communications failure for the primary communications path and then notifies its cluster members of the
communications failure. At this time, cluster communications revert to the secondary communications path.

Use the Communications and Cluster tabs in the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application, iSTAR Cluster dialog box,
to configure connection verification messages for the master, host and cluster members. See Configuring iSTAR Clusters
on Page 91 for more information.

Establishing a Secondary Communications Path

If a communications failure occurs on the primary communications path, communications can be re-established via the
cluster’s secondary communications path. The secondary communications path must be a second connection between
the master and the host. The network connection must be one that is not already being used as the primary path.

While communicating via the secondary path, the cluster attempts to re-establish communications with the host on the
primary communications path. When a connection is re-established on the primary path, communications revert to the
primary path and the communications link on the secondary path is closed.

Use the Communications tab in the Cluster dialog box in the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application to configure the
secondary communications path (see iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab on Page 99).

The Secondary Communications Path

A Secondary Communications Path is the host communications path that is used by a controller if a communications
failure occurs on the primary communications path. The secondary path is activated by the iSTAR Controller’s dual
network capability.

Figure 33 on Page 89 shows an example of a secondary communications path on the host using an Ethernet connection
and a secondary communications path on another network card, using an Ethernet connection.
Figure 33:  Primary and Secondary Communications Path to Host

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 89

Cluster Communications Overview

Distributed Cluster Management

Cluster communications allow iSTAR controllers to share information and control actions throughout a cluster without host
intervention. Distributed Cluster Management is the distribution of system functionality from the host to cluster
members.

Distributed cluster management lets a controller perform many actions locally and share information with other cluster
members even when the controller is not communicating with the host, during a communications failure for example.

Cluster members communicate with each other through the master. Although a communications failure
NOTE with the host may not affect cluster communications, a communications failure with the master can cause
communications problems in the cluster.

Unassigned Folder
The Unassigned folder is a repository for iSTAR controllers that have been configured for an iSTAR cluster, in an existing
partition, but which have been removed from the iSTAR cluster, or the cluster has been deleted. Such controllers will be
listed under the Unassigned folder until they are reassigned to another iSTAR cluster or deleted.

90 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring iSTAR Clusters

Configuring iSTAR Clusters

Before you can create and configure iSTAR Controllers, you must create an iSTAR Cluster. The Cluster dialog box lets
you configure clusters by performing the following tasks:
■ Add controllers to the cluster.
■ Configure a primary communications path for the cluster.
■ Configure a secondary communications path for the cluster.
■ Configure communications between cluster members and the master.
■ Configure the number of unacknowledged messages for controllers.
■ Set Triggers for the cluster.
■ Evaluate cluster status.
■ Change state images that appear on the Monitoring Station.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 91

Creating an iSTAR Cluster

Creating an iSTAR Cluster

You can create an iSTAR Cluster in a Hardware Folder in the Hardware tree. You can either select a folder, then pick
iSTAR Cluster from the Hardware tree drop-down list, or right-click on the folder and select iSTAR Cluster from the context
menu.

To Create an iSTAR Cluster

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Expand the Hardware tree and select the folder where you want to create the iSTAR Cluster.
3. Right-click on the folder and select iSTAR Cluster>New to create a cluster for one or more iSTAR controllers. The
iSTAR Cluster Editor dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 36 on Page 96.
See iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 95 for instructions on configuring the Cluster.
4. Enter a Name (required) and Description (optional).
5. Select an Encryption Setting:
■ Encrypted for a Cluster that will contain iSTAR eX, iSTAR Edge, or iSTAR Ultra controllers that will use an
iSTAR encryption method.
■ Non-Encrypted for a Cluster that will contain iSTAR Pro, iSTAR Classic, or iSTAR Ultra controllers that will not
use an iSTAR encryption method.

This field becomes Read-only once you add iSTAR controllers to the Cluster and save it, because
NOTE changing this setting while there are controllers in the cluster would cause problems.
If you need to change this setting, you must remove all controllers from the Cluster, change the
Encryption Settings on the Cluster Encryption tab (see iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab on Page 108),
then add controllers of the appropriate type.

6. Click Save and Close to save the Cluster. The new iSTAR Cluster icon displays in the tree, one level below the folder
that you selected.

92 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Creating and Using an iSTAR Cluster Template

Creating and Using an iSTAR Cluster Template

You can create an iSTAR Cluster Template that you can use as the basis for creating new iSTAR Clusters with specific
settings that you choose when creating the Template.

Example
If you want all of your iSTAR Clusters to use 60 seconds instead of the default 10 seconds for the Connection to Host
Interval, you can create an iSTAR Cluster Template with Connection to Host Interval set to 60 seconds, and every
iSTAR Cluster you create from this Template will inherit that setting.

To Create an iSTAR Cluster Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Expand the Hardware tree and a hardware folder.
3. Right-click on the folder and select iSTAR Cluster>New Template from the context menu (see Figure 34 on Page
93).
Figure 34:  New Cluster Template from Hardware Folder Context Menu

Alternatively, select iSTAR Cluster in the Hardware pane drop-down list, click the down-arrow next to the New
button, then select iSTAR Cluster>New Template from the menu.
The iSTAR Cluster Editor opens a new Template that you can configure and save.
4. Enter a unique name for the Template in the Name field (required) and type a textual description for the Template in the
Description field (optional).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 93

Creating and Using an iSTAR Cluster Template

5. Select the Encryption Setting for the Cluster Template. Only controllers of the types supported by this setting can
subsequently be added to Clusters created from this Template. (This field becomes read-only after you save the
Cluster Template).
6. Navigate to the Communications, Cluster, Miscellaneous, Encryption, Triggers, and State Images tabs and configure
any settings that you would like to be included in your Template. See iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 95 for more
information about the iSTAR Cluster Editor tabs.
7. Click Save and Close. The Cluster Template is saved with your settings. You can now use the Template as the basis
of new iSTAR Clusters you subsequently create.

A Cluster Template is not saved inside of a Hardware folder, and it is not visible in the Hardware tree. To
NOTE
edit a Cluster Template, select iSTAR Cluster from the Hardware drop-down list and click to display
a Dynamic View listing all iSTAR Clusters, including Cluster Templates. Double-click on a Cluster
Template in the Dynamic View to edit it.

To Create an iSTAR Cluster from a Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Expand the Hardware tree and a hardware folder.
3. Right-click on the folder and select iSTAR Cluster>New from the context menu (see Figure 35 on Page 94).
Figure 35:  New iSTAR Cluster from a Template

The iSTAR Cluster Editor and you can edit the new Cluster.
4. Enter a unique name for the Cluster in the Name field (required) and type a textual description for the Cluster in the
Description field (optional).
5. Select the Encryption Setting for the Cluster Template. Only controllers of the types supported by this setting can
subsequently be added to Clusters created from this Template. (This field becomes read-only after you save the
Cluster Template).
6. Navigate to the Communications, Cluster, Miscellaneous, Encryption, Triggers, and State Images tabs and configure
any settings that you would like to be included in your Cluster. See iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 95 for more
information about the iSTAR Cluster Editor tabs.
7. Click Save and Close. The iSTAR Cluster is saved with your settings.

94 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Editor

iSTAR Cluster Editor

The iSTAR Cluster Editor is used to configure iSTAR Clusters for your C•CURE 9000 system. All iSTAR Controllers must
be contained in an iSTAR Cluster in order to communicate with a C•CURE 9000 Server. You need to create at least one
iSTAR Cluster before you can create any iSTAR Controllers.

iSTAR Cluster Editor Tabs

The iSTAR Cluster Editor includes the following tabs:
■ iSTAR Cluster General Tab on Page 97
■ iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab on Page 99
■ iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab on Page 103
■ iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous Tab on Page 104
■ iSTAR Cluster Area Tab on Page 105
■ iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab on Page 108
■ iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab on Page 110
■ iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab on Page 116
■ iSTAR Cluster Status Tab on Page 117
■ iSTAR Cluster State Images Tab on Page 118

Accessing the iSTAR Cluster Editor

Perform the following steps to access the iSTAR Cluster Editor.

To Access the iSTAR Cluster Editor

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane (see on
Page 91).
2. Expand the Hardware tree and select the Cluster that you want to configure.
3. Right- click and select iSTAR Cluster>Edit to open the selected Cluster in the iSTAR Cluster Editor (see Figure 36
on Page 96).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 95

iSTAR Cluster Editor

Figure 36:  iSTAR Cluster Editor

96 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster General Tab

iSTAR Cluster General Tab

The iSTAR Cluster General Tab provides an interface to manage controllers that you have configured for a cluster. From
the General tab, you can add or remove iSTAR Controllers from a Cluster. An example of an iSTAR Cluster General tab is
shown in Figure 36 on Page 96.

See iSTAR Cluster General Tab Definitions on Page 98 for definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Cluster

iSTAR Cluster General Tab Tasks

You can perform the following tasks from the iSTAR Cluster General Tab.
■ Adding a Controller to a Cluster on Page 97.
■ Removing a Controller from a Cluster on Page 97.

Adding a Controller to a Cluster

To Add a Controller to a Cluster

1. Open the iSTAR Cluster editor for the Cluster to which you wish to add a Controller. See To Access the iSTAR
Cluster Editor on Page 95.
2. Click Add.
The iSTAR Controller selection dialog box opens. This dialog box lists all iSTAR Controllers that can be added to this
Cluster. Only iSTAR Controllers with the same Encryption Setting as the Cluster (Encrypted or Non-encrypted) that
are currently Unassigned (not currently attached to an iSTAR Cluster) appear in this dialog box.
3. Select one or more iSTAR Controllers from the dialog box. You can use multiple selection keystrokes such as
CTRL+Left-click and SHIFT+Left-click to select more than one Controller.
4. Click OK to add the selected iSTAR Controllers to the list of Controllers in the iSTAR Cluster.
5. Click Save and Close to save your changes.

Removing a Controller from a Cluster

You can remove iSTAR Controllers from an iSTAR Cluster using the iSTAR Cluster General tab. Once you remove a
Controller from an iSTAR cluster, the Controller is moved to the Unassigned folder and can subsequently be added to a
different iSTAR Cluster with the same Encryption Setting.

To Remove a Controller from a Cluster

1. Open the iSTAR Cluster Editor for the Cluster to which you wish to add a Controller. See To Access the iSTAR
Cluster Editor on Page 95.
2. From the Controller(s) list on the General tab, select one or more iSTAR Controllers you wish to remove from the
Cluster. You can use multiple selection keystrokes such as CTRL+Left-click and SHIFT+Left-click to select more
than one Controller.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 97

iSTAR Cluster General Tab

If the Cluster is Enabled, you cannot remove a Controller that is selected on the Communications tab as either the
controller having primary communications with the host (C•CURE 9000 Server) or the controller having secondary
communications with the host. The Remove button becomes unavailable if you select such a controller.
3. Click Remove. The Controllers you selected are deleted from the Controller(s) list of this Cluster.
4. Click Save and Close to save your changes. The Controllers you removed from this Cluster now appear in the
Unassigned folder in the Hardware tree, and can be re-assigned to another Cluster with the same Encryption Setting.

iSTAR Cluster General Tab Definitions

The iSTAR Cluster General tab includes the fields and buttons described in Table 7 on Page 98.
Table 7:  iSTAR Cluster General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Name Enter a name (up to 100 characters long) of the iSTAR Cluster that you are configuring.

Description Type a description of the iSTAR Cluster that you are configuring.

Enabled Enabled is grayed out until:

1. The controller's are configured. See Chapter 6, Configuring C•CURE iSTAR Controllers
2. A Controller having primary communications with host is selected on the iSTAR Cluster
Communications tab.
3. Click Enabled to put the cluster online.

Maintenance Click to put the Cluster or iSTARs and/or their components into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance
Mode Mode for more information.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this iSTAR Cluster resides.
Select the Encryption Setting for the Cluster Template. Only controllers of the types supported by this setting can
subsequently be added to Clusters created from this Template. (This field becomes read-only after you save the
Cluster Template). you want to change the Partition of a Cluster, see Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree
on Page 35.

Encryption A read-only field displaying the Encryption Setting for the Cluster.
Setting

Controllers

Add To add an iSTAR Controller to your Cluster, click Add to display the iSTAR Controller selection dialog box. Select
one or more controllers and click OK to add it to the iSTAR Cluster.

Remove To remove an iSTAR Controller from your Cluster, select the iSTAR Controller you want to remove in the list, then
click Remove.

Name column Displays the name of the controller.

Description Displays the description text for the controller.

column

98 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab

iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab

The Communications tab in the iSTAR Cluster dialog box lets you configure communications from the Controllers in a
cluster to the C•CURE 9000 Server (Host). Primary and Secondary communications can be configured for an iSTAR
controller that has two Onboard Ethernet Adapters. When one adapter is chosen as primary, the other can become the
secondary.

If you are using iSTAR Pro dialup, the cluster must be configured for dialup communication.

For a cluster that existed prior to version 2.20, you can have one controller configured for the Primary
NOTE communications path as a Master controller, and a second, different, controller configured for the
Secondary communications path as an Alternate Master.
However, if you remove the Alternate Master from the cluster, you will no longer be able to configure an
Alternate Master for the cluster. A message box appears when you change Controller having secondary
communications with host to None, informing you that the change will remove the Alternate Master.

For a new cluster created in version 2.20 or later, you cannot configure an Alternate Master. If you
configure both a Primary and Secondary communications path, you must use the same controller, which
must have two onboard Ethernet Adapters.

Dialup can be used only as the primary connection method or the secondary communication method, not
NOTE as both.

Example:
■ Dialup is used as the primary communication method and there is no secondary communication
method.
■ TCP/IP is used as the primary communication method and Dialup is used as the secondary
communication method.

Communications tab definitions are listed in Table 8 on Page 101.

Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails on Page 102 explains how to configure the cluster's controllers to
attempt to connect to the cluster, and resolve communications failures.

Secondary communications paths have not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Communications Tab

1. From the iSTAR Controller dialog box, click the Communications tab. The Communications tab opens, shown in
Figure 37 on Page 100.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 99

iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab

Figure 37:  iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab

2. Controllers having primary/secondary communication with host allows you to select the controller in the cluster
that has primary or secondary communications with the host (C•CURE 9000 server). Choose a controller using the
drop-down selection.
3. Method of communication between host and controller allows a selection of the communication type designated
for the iSTAR controller that communicates with the host. Choose the connection type of Onboard Ethernet or
Dialup (iSTAR Pro or iSTAR Ultra Pro Mode only) using the drop-down selection.
4. In the Connection to Host Interval entry field, specify the number of seconds that a controller waits between
attempts to connect to the host.
UL requires a maximum of 200 seconds supervision on the Communications link between the protected premise
equipment and the central station.
5. In the Number of failed attempts before connection fails field, specify the number of attempts that a controller
makes to first connect to the host before the controller is declared to be in communications failure. See Number of
Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails on Page 102 for more information.
6. In the Reconnect Interval after connection failure field, specify the number of seconds that controllers wait
between attempts to re-connect to the host. This field sets the rate at which controllers attempt to reconnect or
connect to the host after a communications failure occurs between the host and the controller. The default interval is
40 seconds. The maximum value is 9999 seconds and the minimum is 1 second.
7. In the Connection Inactivity Interval field, specify the number of seconds that a controller waits between attempts to
connect to the host. The default interval is 80 seconds. The possible values are between 15 and 80 seconds.

100 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab

8. Navigate to the iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab on Page 103 or click Save and Close to save the cluster and begin
configuring iSTAR Controllers.
Table 8:  iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab Definitions

Field Description

Controllers This field allows you to select the controller that has primary or secondary communications with the host. Choose a controller
having primary using the drop-down selection.
or secondary
communication
with host

Method of This field allows you to select the communication type designated for the iSTAR controllers, PCMCIA Ethernet, Onboard
communication Ethernet or Dialup (iSTAR Pro/iSTAR Ultra SE Pro Mode only).
between host
and controller

Connection to Specify the number of seconds that a controller waits between attempts to connect to the host. Use the Number of failed
Host Interval attempts before connection fails field in the Communications tab to specify the number of connection attempts a
[seconds] controller makes before a communications failure is declared for the controller. The maximum value is 9999 seconds and the
minimum is 1 second. The default value is 20 seconds.

Number of failed Specify the number of attempts that a controller makes to first connect to the host before the controller is declared to be in
attempts before communications failure. See Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails on Page 102. The default value is 4
connection fails attempts.

Reconnect Specify the number of seconds that controllers wait between attempts to re-connect to the host. This field sets the rate at
Interval after which controllers attempt to reconnect or connect to the host after a communications failure occurs between the host and the
connection controller. The default interval is 40 seconds. The maximum value is 9999 seconds and the minimum is 1 second.
failure [seconds]

Connection Specify the number of seconds that a controller waits between attempts to connect to the host. The default interval is 80
Inactivity Interval seconds. The possible values are between 15 and 80 seconds.
[seconds]

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 101

iSTAR Cluster Communications Tab

Number of Failed Attempts Before Connection Fails

The Number of failed attempts before connection fails field in the Communications tab specifies the number of
connection attempts a controller makes before a communications failure is declared for the controller. The default is 4
attempts. The maximum is 99 attempts and the minimum is 1 attempt.

If a connection is established, the controller and host use connection verification messages to maintain the connection.

If a connection is not made in the specified number of attempts, a communications failure is declared for the controller, and
the following connections are attempted:
■ If the secondary communications path uses an alternate host, the controller attempts to connect to the alternate host,
which passes the controller’s messages to the host. At the same time, the controller tries to re-establish a connection
with the host at the rate specified in the Reconnect Interval after connection failure field.
■ If the secondary communications path does not use an alternate host, the controller attempts to connect to the host
forever, or until a connection is established. The controller attempts to connect to the host at the rate specified in the
Reconnect Interval after connection failure field.
■ The controller broadcasts a request across its subnet for the host’s IP Address. The host responds to the request. If
the host does not respond in a set amount of time and the iSTAR Configuration Utility is configured for auto-response,
the utility responds to the controller. See the iSTAR eX Installation and Configuration Guide for information.

If a communications failure occurs, the following connections are attempted simultaneously:

■ If the secondary communications path uses an alternate host, the controller attempts to connect to the alternate host,
which passes the controller’s messages to the host. At the same time, the controller tries to re-establish a connection
with the host at the rate specified in the Reconnect Interval after connection failure field.
■ If the secondary communications path does not use an alternate host, the controller attempts to re-connect to the host
forever or until a connection is established. The controller attempts to reconnect to the host at the rate specified in the
After connection failure, controller attempts to reconnect every XX seconds field.
■ The controller broadcasts a request across its subnet for the host’s IP Address. The host responds to the request. If
the host does not respond in a set amount of time and the iSTAR Configuration Utility is configured for auto-response,
the utility can respond to the controller. See the iSTAR eX Installation and Configuration Guide for information. If
a connection is established, the controller and host use connection verification messages to maintain the connection.
The default is 4 attempts. The maximum is 99 attempts and the minimum is 1 attempt.

102 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab

iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab

The Cluster tab regulates the connection and reconnection intervals between the primary iSTAR Controller and those
controllers which are cluster members.

The Cluster tab has not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Cluster Tab

1. From the iSTAR Controller dialog box, click the Cluster tab. The Cluster tab opens, shown in Figure 38 on Page 103.
2. Specify the number of seconds that the primary controller attempts to connect with the host server in the Controllers
attempt to connect to cluster master interval entry field. The range is from 1 to 9999 seconds; the default value is
20 seconds.
Figure 38:  iSTAR Cluster Cluster Tab

3. Enter the number of instances after which the primary controller transmits a connection failure in the Number of failed
attempts for controllers to declare a connection failure entry field. The range is from 1 to 99; the default value is 4.
4. Specify the number of seconds after which the primary controller attempts to reconnect after a connection failure in the
Reconnection Interval after connection failure entry field. The range is from 1 to 9999 seconds; the default value is
40 seconds.
5. Enter the number of seconds after which the primary controller transmits a connection failure if there is no message
while it is connected, in the Connection Inactivity Interval entry field. The range is from 15 to 80 seconds; the default
value is 80 seconds
6. Navigate to the Miscellaneous tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 103

iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous Tab

iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous Tab

The iSTAR Cluster Miscellaneous tab allows you to set the maximum number of unacknowledged messages that are
allowed for each iSTAR Controller

To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Miscellaneous Tab

1. From the iSTAR Controller dialog box, click the Miscellaneous tab. The Miscellaneous tab opens, shown in Figure
39 on Page 104.
Figure 39:  iSTAR Cluster MiscellaneousTab

2. In the Unacknowledged Messages box specify the maximum number of unacknowledged messages that are
allowed for each iSTAR Controller in the Maximum number of unacknowledged messages for each controller
field.
If you have a network with high latency, you may want to set this value to a higher number; if the network has low
latency, the default value (10) should be sufficient.

■ This setting does not result in lost messages.

NOTE
■ For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Send state changes to the monitoring station option
must be selected.
■ The range is from 1 to 99 and the default value is 10. For UL applications, set the range to 99.

3. Navigate to the Antipassback tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers.

104 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Area Tab

iSTAR Cluster Area Tab

The iSTAR Cluster Area tab allows you to configure the following:
■ How Cluster Antipassback works for iSTAR Cluster Areas during a communications failure when the Cluster
members lose communication with the Cluster master.
■ Whether or not the Cluster is configured for both Global Antipassback and Cluster Antipassback or solely for Cluster
Antipassback.

Modifying either of these options can only be done if the Cluster is not Enabled.
NOTE

You configure how Global Antipassback works during a communications failure through a system variable in the iSTAR
Driver section, "iSTAR Global Antipassback Communication Failure Mode". For more information, see the C•CURE 9000
System Maintenance Guide.

Cluster Antipassback Communications Failure Mode

As long as the communication within the Cluster is good, the Cluster members do not store any antipassback information.
During communications failure, the Cluster members (the Controllers) begin to enforce antipassback locally, based on the
Failure Mode you configure for the Area's Cluster on this tab.

For iSTAR Cluster Areas, all Doors and Readers must be within the same iSTAR Cluster. Adjacent Areas can be on any
Cluster and can also be Cross-Cluster Areas.

Using Antipassback restricts access to Cluster Areas as follows:

• Regular antipassback – Personnel cannot exit an Area they are not in, nor re-enter an Area without exiting it first.
• Timed antipassback – Personnel cannot re-enter an Area until a specified amount of time has passed.

The violation triggered when personnel enter a specified Area is called an entry violation. The violation triggered when
personnel exit a specified Area is an exit violation.

To ensure that personnel are always appropriately prevented from entering Lockout Areas, make sure that
NOTE you configure the Communications Failure Mode for the Area’s iSTAR Cluster as No access Mode,
instead of Local Mode.

Global Antipassback for the Cluster

iSTAR Global Antipassback gives a higher level of security, but also means that when a person's card moves from one
Cluster to another, the card must be transferred through the Host. Transfer through the Host is slower than within a Cluster
and also requires the Cluster to Host network connections to be good. Access within the Cluster is faster since it only
relies on the member-to-master network connections.

For more information on Areas and Antipassback, see the C•CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Configuration Guide.

To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Area Tab for Cluster Antipassback Communications Failure Mode
1. From the iSTAR Cluster dialog box, click the Area tab. The Area tab opens, shown in Figure 40 on Page 106.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 105

iSTAR Cluster Area Tab

Figure 40:  iSTAR Cluster Area Tab

2. In the Cluster Antipassback Communication Failure Mode box, click to select either the No access or Local
option.

Make sure that you leave the Cluster enforces iSTAR Global antipassback as well as iSTAR Cluster
NOTE antipassback check box unselected.

To Configure the iSTAR Cluster - Area Tab for both Global Antipassback and Cluster Antipassback
1. From the iSTAR Cluster dialog box, click the Area tab. The Area tab opens, shown in Figure 40 on Page 106.
2. In the Global Antipassback box, click to select the Cluster enforces iSTAR Global antipassback as well as
iSTAR Cluster antipassback option.

Area Tab Field Definitions

Area tab definitions are listed in Table 9 on Page 107.

106 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Area Tab

Table 9:   Area Tab Definitions

Fields Description

Cluster Antipassback Communication Failure Mode

The options in this box are available only if the Cluster enforces iSTAR Global antipassback as well as iSTAR Cluster antipassback
option in the Global Antipassback box is not selected.

No access (Hard) Select this option to configure No access as the Communications Failure mode for this Cluster.
• Access is denied by any member Controller in the Cluster in communications failure.
• Member Controllers still in communications with the Master continue to request normal
antipassback decisions for entry to the Area.
• Master Controllers need no communication to make antipassback decisions and always do so
regardless of host or member communication.
(In this mode, the person is presumed to be in violation, unless proven otherwise.)

Local (Soft) Select this option to configure Local as the Communications Failure mode for this Cluster.
• The Controller uses locally available information to grant or deny access. Even if this information
is insufficient, the Controller admits the person presenting the card.
(In this mode, the person is presumed not-in-violation, unless proven otherwise.)
When Local mode is configured, the person is allowed in unless the Controllers making the decision
determine beyond doubt that he/she is guilty of an antipassback violation.

Global Antipassback

Cluster enforces iSTAR Global Select this check box to indicate that this Cluster shares data with all the other Clusters that use
antipassback as well as iSTAR Cluster iSTAR Global Antipassback. (The default is cleared indicating that the Cluster does not share data
antipassback with any other Clusters.)
NOTE: When this option is selected, the Cluster Antipassback Communication Failure Mode
box options become unavailable.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 107

iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab

iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab

This tab allows you to configure the encryption mode for an Encrypted Cluster. The encryption setting will apply to all
iSTARs and IP-ACMv2s in the cluster.

To use FIPS 140-2 Validate mode, the Encryption Options must be configured in the Options and Tools pane before
you can configure Cluster encryption.

■ This tab is Read-only for a Non-encrypted Cluster, and does not apply. Non-encrypted Clusters do not
NOTE use 256-bit AES (FIPS 197) encryption. The iSTAR eX, iSTAR Edge, and encrypted iSTAR Ultra LT,
iSTAR Ultra, iSTAR Ultra SE (in Ultra Mode) controllers use 256-bit AES (FIPS 197) encryption by
default.
■ Encryption is supported on IP-ACM v2 when connected to a controller with firmware v6.6.5 and higher.
If you are already using custom certificates on the controller, you need to upgrade to firmware v6.6.5
and generate a new certificate.
■ The 256-bit AES (FIPS 197) encryption method satisfies the Proprietary Burglar Alarm application
requirements.
■ Software House recommends that you configure the Tamper Input for a 'dark mode' controller to trigger
an Alarm Event that will be displayed on the Monitoring State if the input changes state.

FIPS 140-2 mode requires a custom certificate key, either host based or controller based. Software House recommends a
controller based certificate key. Once you set the cluster to FIPS 140-2 compliant mode, the iSTAR encrypted controllers
and IP-ACM v2s will be in “dark mode.” They will not be visible on the network.

To Configure FIPS 140-2 Encryption for an iSTAR Encrypted Cluster

1. Click the Options and Tools pane.
2. Click Encryption Options to open the dialog box.
3. Select from the following options:
• Controller-Based Encryption Mode modifies the system-wide Key Management Policy to Custom - Controller
supplied. The controller supplies public and private keys, and the host signs public keys.
• Host-Based Encryption Mode modifies the system-wide Key Management Policy to Custom - Host supplied.
The Host supplies all public and private keys.
4. To use FIPS 140-2 mode, Software House recommends that you use the Controller-Based Encryption Mode.

Software House recommends Controller-based Encryption for two reasons:

NOTE
1. Host-based Encryption requires a private key to be transmitted to the controllers non-encrypted.
Controller-based Encryption does not. The tradeoff is that the controller-based method requires a
signature at the host that recognizes the iSTAR to be valid.
2. The second reason is that it is much easier to recover from a controller-based error situation than to
recover from a host-based area. Host based recovery of encryption keys is more difficult.

3. Click the Hardware pane.

4. Locate the iSTAR Cluster in the Hardware tree and double-click on it.

108 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab

5. In the iSTAR Cluster dialog box, click the Encryption tab. The Encryption options are shown in Figure 41 on Page
109.
Figure 41:  iSTAR Cluster Encryption Tab

6. Select from the available Encryption modes: Non-FIPS 140-2 or FIPS 140-2 Validate mode for iSTAR Ultra,
iSTAR Edge, iSTAR eX, and IP-ACM.
7. Navigate to the Triggers tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers.

FIPS 140-2 compliant mode has not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

Communication Failure
This section applies if you selected FIPS 140-2 Validate mode for iSTAR Ultra, iSTAR Edge, iSTAR eX, and IP-
ACM.

If any of the controllers are disabled or in communication failure after the change in policy, use one of the following
methods to re-establish communication:
■ If the C•CURE 9000 server is the Certificate Authority, use the ICU to initiate the Signature Request process. If the
request fails, clear the controller memory, reboot the controller, and then use ICU to reinitate the Signature Request
process.
■ If a third-party is the Certificate Authority, export the controller certificate to a USB drive, insert the USB drive into the
controller, and then reboot the controller.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 109

iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

C•CURE 9000 uses Triggers, which are configured procedures used for activating security actions. A Trigger
automatically executes a specified Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the
Actions available depend on the property selected. This section illustrates the use of Triggers to monitor a cluster master
power failure.

The Triggers tab is not available for iSTAR Pro or iSTAR Ultra SE Pro Mode dialup configurations.
NOTE

To Configure the iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

1. Navigate to the Triggers tab, shown in Figure 43 on Page 111.
Figure 42:  iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

This tab provides you with ability to define the activation/deactivation, enable/disable, and arm/disarm, etc. of such
objects as: events, inputs, outputs, camera actions, door status changes, etc. Triggers can also be used to launch
events which also can be used to launch imports and exports, email and reports, viewer and message displays,
personnel ID number state changes, controller downloads, sound activation, communication notifications, etc.
2. Click Add in the Triggers tab to create a new trigger.
a. Click within the Property column to display .
When you select this button, the Property browser opens presenting properties available for the controller.
b. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column (see Figure 43 on Page 111).

110 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

Figure 43:  iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab - PropertySelection

c. Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have
selected. Then click on a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column (see
Figure 44 on Page 112).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 111

iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

Figure 44:  iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab - Value

When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that will occur
when the object’s selected Property receives the selected Value.
d. Click within the column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to include as a
parameter for the trigger to add it to the column (see Figure 45 on Page 113).

112 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

Figure 45:  iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab - Action

As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box displays a corresponding entry field, or group of entry
fields, specific to the selected Action, such as an Event or Output (see Figure 46 on Page 113).
In the case of the Primary Communications Status Property, the available Action is to activate an event.
Figure 46:  iSTAR Cluster TriggersTab - Action Event

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 113

iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

e. In the Event field, click to select a Event that you want to associate with the trigger (see Figure 47 on Page
114). Events are created in the Configuration Pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more
information.
Figure 47:  iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab - Event Selection

Once the field (or group of fields) is completed, the Details column will show information about how the Action has
been configured.

114 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab

Figure 48:  iSTAR Cluster Triggers Tab - Finished

To activate or arm iSTAR Cluster events by a trigger condition, the schedule value is restricted to Always.
NOTE

3. To Remove a Trigger, select the row using the button and click Remove.
A completed Trigger that notifies you of communications failure in the cluster is shown in Figure 48 on Page 115.
4. Navigate to the Status tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 115

iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab

iSTAR Cluster Dialup Configuration Tab

The Dialup Configuration tab is used to configure a cluster to use dial-up on the iSTAR Pro or Ultra SE Pro Mode
controller.

See Chapter 4: Configuring Dialup for the dial-up configuration sequence to follow and configuration information.

116 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Cluster Status Tab

iSTAR Cluster Status Tab

The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the iSTAR controllers
associated with the cluster. Such information includes:
■ Cluster Name ■ Comm State
■ Controller Name ■ Conn Path
■ IP Address ■ Boards State
■ IP Address 2 ■ Panel State
■ Type ■ Firmware Version
■ Comm Path ■ Board Type

The Details of the selected controller section displays the same status fields that are displayed on that controller's
Status tab. For more information on the status fields that are displayed for each controller type, see the iSTAR Controller
Status Tab on Page 162.

The Status tab is shown in Figure 49 on Page 117.

Figure 49:  iSTAR Cluster Status Tab

Using the Cluster Status Tab

1. The Cluster Status box displays Communications Status values for the iSTAR Cluster.
2. When you select an iSTAR Controller within the Controllers Status list, its status values are displayed in the Details
of selected controller box.
3. Navigate to the State Images tab or Save and Close to save the cluster and begin configuring iSTAR Controllers.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 5 117

iSTAR Cluster State Images Tab

iSTAR Cluster State Images Tab

The State Images tab, shown in Figure 50 on Page 118, provides a means to change the default images used to indicate
Cluster states that are displayed in the Monitoring Station.
Figure 50:  iSTAR Cluster State Images Tab

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image.
A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click the new image and select Restore Default.
4. Click Save and Close to save changes to the cluster state images.

118 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 6

Chapter 6 - Configuring C•CURE iSTAR Controllers

The C•CURE iSTAR controller is an intelligent controller for networked security systems. C•CURE iSTAR controllers
communicate with the C•CURE 9000 server (acting as a database and journal host) and the system security hardware,
providing direct control of events and system activity. This chapter explains how to configure iSTAR controllers, and the
devices related to them, in the C•CURE 9000 System.

In this chapter

Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers 120

Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers 121
iSTAR Controller Tasks 127
Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT) 144
iSTAR Controller Editor 145
iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs 150

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 119

Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers

Understanding C•CURE iSTAR Controllers

The iSTAR controller is an intelligent, network-ready controller for security systems. The heart of the iSTAR controller is
the General Controller Module (   GCM) - an embedded microprocessor-based controller card. Add-on Access Control
Modules (ACM Boards) provide access control functionality by supporting readers, outputs, and inputs.

To install and configure the controller hardware and its connected devices see the following manuals:
■ iSTAR Pro Installation and Configuration Guide
■ iSTAR eX Installation and Configuration Guide
■ iSTAR Edge Installation and Configuration Guide
■ iSTAR Ultra Installation and Configuration Guide
■ iSTAR Ultra SE Installation and Configuration Guide
■ iSTAR Ultra LT Installation and Configuration Guide

For information on configuring host and panel Events for an iSTAR controller, see the Events chapter in the C•CURE 9000
Software Configuration Guide.

The following sections provide the information you need to configure the iSTAR Controllers.
■ iSTAR Controller Tasks on Page 127
■ Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 121
■ iSTAR Controller Editor on Page 145

120 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers

Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers

Configuring the iSTAR controllers involves setting up the hardware and configuring the software components. See the
iSTAR Hardware Installation Guides for instructions about setting up controllers and related hardware.

■ Before configuring a controller, make sure you know the MAC address of the controller NIC you are
NOTE using. The MAC address is built into the GCM and cannot be changed. You can find a controller’s
MAC address(es) on a label attached to the GCM.
■ If you configuring the iSTAR Ultra Video controller, the MAC address is the MAC Address of the
iSTAR Ultra Video device.

To Configure an iSTAR Controller

1. Create an iSTAR Controller (see Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 127) or edit an existing iSTAR Controller (see
Editing an iSTAR Controller on Page 132. The iSTAR Controller General tab appears, as shown in Figure 57 on Page
151.
2. On the iSTAR Controller General tab, configure the basic communications settings for the Controller, such as the
MAC address, the primary and optional secondary network connections, and the Controller Time Zone.
3. Click on each of the tabs for attached devices, such as the Boards tab for iSTAR Classic/Pro Controllers, or the
Readers tab for iSTAR eX Controllers, and configure the devices and their settings.
• For iSTAR Classic/Pro Controllers, refer to the iSTAR Pro Configuration Summary on Page 121.
• For iSTAR eX/Edge Controllers, refer to the iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Configuration Summary on Page 122.
• For iSTAR Ultra, refer to the iSTAR Ultra Configuration Summary on Page 123.
• For iSTAR Ultra Video, refer to the iSTAR Ultra Video Configuration Summary on Page 125.
• For iSTAR Ultra LT, refer to the iSTAR Ultra LT Configuration Summary on Page 126.
4. Click on the iSTAR Triggers tab to configure actions that can activate Events, lock or unlock Doors, sound audible
alarms, or a wide range of other security functions.
5. Click on the iSTAR State Images tab to customize the images that are displayed on the Monitoring Station to
represent the Controllers.
6. Click Save and Close to save your settings.

When using a multi-homed 9000 standalone server with multiple network adapters on multiple networks,
NOTE use a selected IP address for IP communication to ensure consistent communication with the iSTAR fast
personnel download. Set the IP address as the host address for the iSTAR controllers and in the Options
& Tools > System Variables > iSTAR Driver> Specified Host IPV4 Address and/or Specified Host
IPV6 Address field. Then restart the driver.

iSTAR Pro Configuration Summary

Table 10 on Page 122 provides a summary of the tasks involved in configuring an iSTAR Pro Controller.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 121

Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers

Table 10:  iSTAR Pro Configuration Summary

Step Task Reference

1. Create and save an iSTAR Pro Cluster for the Controller. Creating an iSTAR Cluster on
Page 92

2. Create an iSTAR Pro Controller under the iSTAR Cluster in the Hardware Tree. Creating an iSTAR Controller on
Page 127

3. Use the iSTAR Controller General tab to configure the basic communications iSTAR Controller General Tab on
settings for the Controller and to assign Reader LCD Message Sets. Page 150

4. Use the Boards tab to create and configure Inputs, Outputs, and ACM boards for iSTAR Controller Boards Tab
the Controller. (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 167

5. Use the Advanced tab to

5. If you have Schlage Wireless PIMs and Readers, use the Schlage Wireless PIMs iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab
tab to configure these devices. on Page 165

6. From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Door objects for the Controller. iSTAR Door Editor on Page 397

7. From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Elevator objects for the Controller. iSTAR Elevators on Page 557

8. Use the iSTAR Triggers tab to create new triggers for the Controller. iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on
Page 162

9. Use the iSTAR State Images tab to customize the state images that are displayed iSTAR Controller State Images
on the Monitoring Station for the iSTAR Controller. Tab on Page 164

iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Configuration Summary

Table 11 on Page 122 provides a summary of the tasks involved in configuring an iSTAR eX or iSTAR Edge Controller.

Table 11:  iSTAR eX/Edge Configuration Summary

Step Task Reference

1. Create and save an iSTAR eX/Edge Cluster for the Controller. Creating an iSTAR Cluster on
Page 92

2. Create an iSTAR eX/Edge Controller under the iSTAR Cluster in the Hardware Tree. Creating an iSTAR Controller on
Page 127

3. Use the iSTAR Controller General tab to configure the basic communications settings for the iSTAR Controller General Tab on
Controller and to assign Reader LCD Message Sets. Page 150

4. Use the iSTAR Controller Inputs tab to create the Inputs on the Controller. iSTAR eX and Edge Controller
Inputs Tab on Page 170

122 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers

Table 11:  iSTAR eX/Edge Configuration Summary (continued)

Step Task Reference

5. Use the iSTAR Controller Outputs tab to create the Outputs on the Controller. iSTAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs
Tab on Page 174

6. Use the iSTAR Controller Wiegand tab to create the direct connect Wiegand Readers on the iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab
Controller. on Page 180

7. Use the iSTAR Controller tabs to create the Input Boards, Output Boards, and Readers on the iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on
Controller. Page 182
iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3
Tabs on Page 176

8. If you have Schlage Wireless PIMs and Readers, open the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor to iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor on
configure these devices. Page 236

9. From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Door objects for the Controller. iSTAR Door Editor on Page 397

From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Elevator objects for the Controller. iSTAR Elevators on Page 557
10.

Use the iSTAR Triggers tab to create new triggers for the Controller. iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on
11. Page 162

Use the iSTAR State Images tab to change the images that display on the Monitoring Station for iSTAR Controller State Images
12. the iSTAR Controller. Tab on Page 164

iSTAR Ultra Configuration Summary

Table 12 on Page 123 provides a summary of the tasks involved in configuring a iSTAR Ultra Controller.
Table 12:  iSTAR Ultra Configuration Summary

Step Task Reference

1 Create and save an iSTAR Ultra Cluster for the Controller. Creating an iSTAR Cluster on
Page 92

2 Create an iSTAR Ultra Controller under the iSTAR Cluster in the Hardware Tree. Creating an iSTAR Controller on
Page 127

3 Use the iSTAR Controller General tab to configure the basic communications settings for the iSTAR Controller General Tab on
Controller and to assign Reader LCD Message Sets. Page 150

4 Use the Boards tab to create and configure Inputs, Outputs, and ACM boards for the Controller. iSTAR Ultra Controller Boards
Tab on Page 187

5 Open the iSTAR IP-ACMs tab to create Inputs, Outputs, and Readers for the Controller. iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs
Tab on Page 189

6 Click the Com1 and Com2 tab to configure Aperio Hubs and Schlage PIMs iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs
on Page 189

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 123

Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers

Table 12:  iSTAR Ultra Configuration Summary (continued)

Step Task Reference

7 From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Door objects for your Controller. iSTAR Door Editor on Page 397

8 From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Elevator objects for your Controller. iSTAR Elevators on Page 557

9 Use the iSTAR Triggers tab to configure the triggers for controller events.. iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on
Page 162

10 Use the iSTAR State Images tab to customize the state images that are displayed on the iSTAR Controller State Images
Monitoring Station for your iSTAR Controller. Tab on Page 164

124 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers

iSTAR Ultra Video Configuration Summary

Table 13 on Page 125 provides a summary of the tasks involved in configuring the iSTAR Ultra Video Controller.
Table 13:  iSTAR Ultra Video Configuration Summary

Step Task Reference

1 Create and save an iSTAR Cluster. Creating an iSTAR Cluster on

Page 92

2 Create an iSTAR Ultra Video Controller under the iSTAR Cluster in the Hardware Tree. Creating an iSTAR Controller on
Right-click on the Cluster and select iSTAR Ultra Video Controller. Page 127

3 Use the iSTAR Controller General tab to configure the basic communications settings for the iSTAR Controller General Tab on
Controller. Page 150

4 Use the iSTAR Controller Boards tab to create and configure Inputs, Outputs, and Readers. iSTAR Ultra Controller Boards
NOTE: Ensure that iSTAR Ultra ACM is selected as the ACM type. Tab on Page 187

1. Create the ACM Boards that you need by clicking Create All ACMs, or by selecting the
Configured check box for only the ACMs you wish to create.
2. Click in the Edit column to configure an ACM. iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM
Board Editor on Page 202

5 Use the iSTAR Controller IP-ACMs tab to configure the IP-ACMs Inputs, Outputs, Readers and Configuring the IP-ACM on Page
Triggers. 294
1. Create the IP-ACM Boards that you need by clicking Create All IP-ACMs, or by selecting the
Configured check box for only the ACMs you wish to create.
2. Click in the Edit column to configure an IP-ACM.

6 Use the iSTAR Controller Triggers tab to configure the triggers for controller events. Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices
on Page 278

7 Use the iSTAR Controller State Images tab to customize the state images that are displayed on the iSTAR Controller State Images
Monitoring Station for your iSTAR Controller. Tab on Page 164

8 From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Door objects for your Controller. iSTAR Door Editor on Page 397

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 125

Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers

iSTAR Ultra LT Configuration Summary

Table 14 on Page 126 provides a summary of the tasks involved in configuring a iSTAR Ultra LT Controller.
Table 14:  iSTAR Ultra LT Configuration Summary

Step Task Reference

1 Create and save an iSTAR Ultra LT Cluster for the Controller. Creating an iSTAR Cluster on
Page 92

2 Create an iSTAR Ultra LT Controller under the iSTAR Cluster in the Hardware Tree. Creating an iSTAR Controller
on Page 127

3 Use the iSTAR Controller General tab to configure the basic communications settings for the iSTAR Ultra LT Controller
Controller and to assign Reader LCD Message Sets. General Tab on Page 156

4 Use the Inputs tab to create and configure Inputs for the Controller. iSTAR Ultra LT Controller
Inputs Tab on Page 191

5 Use the iSTAR IP-ACM tab to open the configure offline mode of IP-ACMs and open the IP- Configuring the IP-ACM on
ACM Board Editor and create Inputs, Outputs, and Readers for the Controller. Page 294

6 Click the COM Port tab to configure Aperio Hubs or Schlage Wireless PIMs. iSTAR Ultra LT Controller
COM Port Tab on Page 192

7 From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Door objects for your Controller. iSTAR Door Editor on Page
397

8 From the Hardware Tree, create iSTAR Elevator objects for your Controller. iSTAR Elevators on Page 557

9 Use the iSTAR Triggers tab to configure the triggers for controller events. iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab
on Page 162

10 Use the iSTAR State Images tab to customize the state images that are displayed on the Monitoring iSTAR Controller State Images
Station for your iSTAR Controller. Tab on Page 164

126 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

iSTAR Controller Tasks

You can perform the following tasks to manage iSTAR Controllers.
■ Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 127
■ Creating a Controller Template on Page 130
■ Deleting an iSTAR Controller on Page 131
■ Editing an iSTAR Controller on Page 132
■ Setting the iSTAR Controller Diagnostic Password on Page 128
■ Viewing a List of iSTAR Controllers on Page 1
■ Viewing a List of GCM Board Serial Numbers on Page 133
■ Using the iSTAR Controller Context Menu on Page 134
■ Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller on Page 1
■ Updating iSTAR Firmware (Ethernet Connections) on Page 137
■ Updating iSTAR Firmware (Dial-up Connections) on Page 139
■ Updating Firmware Using ICU on Page 141
■ Changing the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller on Page 142
■ Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT) on Page 283

Creating an iSTAR Controller
You can create a new iSTAR Controller only within an iSTAR Cluster of the appropriate type.

The iSTAR Ultra S1-1 encryption switch enables FIPS 197 AES 256-bit encryption. The switch setting
NOTE must match the software configuration of the cluster and the controller. See the iSTAR Ultra Installation
and Configuration Guide for more information.

To Create a iSTAR Controller

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the iSTAR Cluster in which you want to create the new Controller.
3. Select the iSTAR Cluster and right-click to display the context menu.
4. Select the controller you wish to create:

For an iSTAR Ultra SE in Pro Mode, select iSTAR Pro Controller.

NOTE

■ For an Encrypted Cluster, you can select:

• iSTAR Edge Controller>New
• iSTAR eX Controller>New
• iSTAR Ultra Controller>New
• iSTAR Ultra Video Controller>New

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 127

iSTAR Controller Tasks

• iSTAR Ultra LT >New
■ For a Non-encrypted Cluster, you can select:
• iSTAR Classic Controller>New
• iSTAR Pro Controller>New
• iSTAR Ultra Controller>New
• iSTAR Ultra Video Controller>New
• iSTAR Ultra LT >New
The iSTAR Controller Editor opens to allow you to configure the Controller. See iSTAR Controller Editor on Page 145

Setting the iSTAR Controller Diagnostic Password

Starting in C•CURE 9000 v2.80, you need to set a Diagnostic password on new controllers and previously configured
controllers once you open the controller's Editor dialog box. The Diagnostic password is used to access the web pages for
controller status and configuration.

You set the password in the iSTAR Controller editor dialog box. You can also use the iSTAR Controller Dynamic View to
set a password on a controller and to set the same password on multiple controllers.

You are not required to set a diagnostic password for the iSTAR Ultra Video controller.
NOTE

See the following:

■ Requirements and Limitations on Page 128
■ Setting the Diagnostic Password on a Controller on Page 129
■ Setting the Diagnostic Password on Multiple Controllers on Page 129
■ Changing the Diagnostic Password on Page 130

Requirements and Limitations

■ You must have administrative privileges.
■ Administrators must have the iSTAR Controller Set Password Grant privilege selected.
■ The password configured for the controller overrides the system-wide Diagnostic Web Page Password system
variable. The Diagnostic Web Page system variable is disabled after C•CURE v2.80 is installed.
■ If you have controllers previously configured using the Diagnostic Web Page Password system variable, those
controllers will continue to use that password until updated.

Granting the Set Diagnostic Password Privilege

To grant the controller set password privilege

1. Click the Configuration pane.
2. Select Privilege from the Configuration drop-down menu.

128 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

3. Click to open a Dynamic view of privileges.

4. Select the privilege assigned to the administer you want to edit.
5. Navigate to Hardware>Controllers>iSTAR>iSTAR Controller.
6. Scroll down to Set Password.
7. Select the Grant check box.
8. Ensure that Enabled is selected.
9. Click Save and Close.

Setting the Diagnostic Password on a Controller

To set the diagnostic password on a controller

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. Select a controller in the Hardware tree, right-click on it and select Edit. The iSTAR Controller editor opens.
Alternately, configure a new controller.
3. On the General tab, under Diagnostic Password, click Set Password. The Set Diagnostic Password for this
Controller dialog box opens.
Password requirements:
• Password length: >= 10
• Contains at least one uppercase letter (A-Z)
• Contains at least one lowercase letter (a-z)
• Contains at least one digit (0-9)
• Contains a special character
• Password Strength must be >= 80
4. Enter the password, confirm the password and click OK.

Setting the Diagnostic Password on Multiple Controllers

You can set multiple controllers to use the same password in the Dynamic View.

To set the diagnostic password on multiple controllers

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware drop-down menu.

3. Click to open a Dynamic View displaying all configured controllers.

4. Press and hold Ctrl and click on the controllers.
5. Right-click on a selected controller and select Set Password. The Set Diagnostic Password for this Controller
dialog box opens.
Password requirements:

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 129

iSTAR Controller Tasks

• Password length: >= 10

• Contains at least one uppercase letter (A-Z)
• Contains at least one lowercase letter (a-z)
• Contains at least one digit (0-9)
• Contains a special character
• Password Strength must be >= 80
6. Enter the password, confirm the password and click OK.

Changing the Diagnostic Password

Changing the diagnostic password on a controller

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. Select a controller in the Hardware tree, right-click on it and select Edit. The iSTAR Controller editor opens.
3. On the General tab, under Diagnostic Password, click Set Controller Password. The Set Diagnostic Password
for this Controller dialog box opens.
4. Follow the password requirements described in Setting the Diagnostic Password on a Controller on Page 129.

Changing the diagnostic password on multiple controllers

1. Click the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware drop-down menu.

3. Click to open a Dynamic View displaying all configured controllers.

4. Press and hold Ctrl and click on the controllers.
5. Right-click on a selected controller and select Set Password. The Set Diagnostic Password for this Controller
dialog box opens.
6. Follow the password requirements described in Setting the Diagnostic Password on Multiple Controllers on Page 129.

Creating a Controller Template

You can create a template for an iSTAR Controller. A Controller Template saves you time because you can save the
configuration settings and re-use the template to create new Controller objects with the those settings pre-defined.

To Create a Controller Template

1. In the Navigation pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the iSTAR Cluster in which you want to create the new Controller
Template.
3. Select the iSTAR Cluster and right-click to display the context menu.
4. Select the iSTAR controller you wish to create a template for:

130 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

■ iSTAR Edge Controller>New Template.

■ iSTAR eX Controller>New Template.
■ iSTAR Classic Controller>New Template.
■ iSTAR Pro Controller>New Template.
■ iSTAR Ultra Controller>New Template.
■ iSTAR Ultra LT >New Template
5. The iSTAR Controller Editor opens a new Template.
6. Configure any settings you want to include in the Template.
7. To save the new iSTAR Controller Template, click Save and Close.

The new Controller template appears under ---- Templates in the iSTAR Controller context menu drop-down list in the
Hardware tree.

To Create an iSTAR Controller from a Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Navigate to the Hardware folder that contains the iSTAR Cluster in which you want to create the new Controller.
3. Select the iSTAR Cluster and right-click to display the context menu.
4. Select iSTAR Controller and click the Template you want to use from the context menu.
5. The iSTAR Controller Editor opens so that you can edit the new Controller. The settings from your Template are
already configured.
6. Configure any additional settings. See Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 121 for more
information.
7. To save the new iSTAR Controller, click Save and Close.

Deleting an iSTAR Controller

You can delete an iSTAR Controller from the Hardware tree, or one or more iSTAR Controllers from a Dynamic View.

To Delete an iSTAR Controller from the Hardware Tree

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Navigate to the iSTAR Cluster that contains the Controller that you want to delete.
3. Right-click on the iSTAR Controller that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu.
4. Click Yes in the “Are you sure you want to delete the selected iSTAR Controller object?” message box. A dialog
box appears showing the progress of the deletion.
5. When the object has been deleted, click one of the following buttons:
• OK to close the dialog box.
• Print to print the deletion message.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 131

iSTAR Controller Tasks

• Email to send the deletion message to the email address you have configured in the Customer Support section of
the C•CURE 9000 System Variables.

To Delete iSTAR Controllers from a Dynamic View

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controller objects.
4. Select one or more iSTAR controllers from the Dynamic View list of iSTAR Controllers.
5. Right-click one of the Controllers in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu.
6. Click Yes in the “Are you sure you want to delete the selected iSTAR Controller object(s)?” message box. A
dialog box appears showing the progress of the deletion(s).
7. When the object(s) have been deleted, click one of the following buttons:
• OK to close the dialog box.
• Print to print the deletion message.
• Email to send the deletion message to the email address you have configured in the Customer Support section of
the C•CURE 9000 System Variables.

Editing an iSTAR Controller

You can edit an iSTAR Controller to change settings or add new Input, Output, or Reader objects to the Controller.

To Edit an Controller or Board

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controller objects.
4. Double-click the Controller in the list that you want to modify and select Edit from the context menu. The iSTAR
Controller editor opens (see iSTAR Controller Editor on Page 145).
5. See Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 121 for information about how to use the iSTAR Controller
Editor to configure your iSTAR Controller.

Enabling or Disabling SNMP on the Controller

Use this setting to enable or disable SNMP on the iSTAR Ultra, iSTAR Ultra SE, or the iSTAR Ultra LT controller.

This setting overrides the SNMP setting in the iSTAR Configuration Utility.

To enable or disable SNMP on the controller:

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list.

132 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controllers.

4. Right-click on the controller and select SNMP Enabled or SNMP Disabled.

To add the SNMP status to the Controller Dynamic View:

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controllers.
4. Right-click on a column name and select SNMP Enabled to add it to the Dynamic View.
5. Locate the controller in the list.
6. Scroll to the SNMP Enabled column. A check mark indicates that the controller is SNMP enabled.

Viewing a List of iSTAR Controllers

You can view a list of iSTAR Controllers in a Dynamic View.

To View a List of iSTAR Controllers

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controller objects
4. You can filter, group, and print the list of iSTAR Controllers in the Dynamic View. See the C•CURE 9000 Data Views
Guide for more information about using the features provided by Dynamic Views.
5. You can select one or more Controllers in the list (using CTRL+Left-click or SHIFT+Left-click for multiple selection)
and right-click to display a context menu (see Viewing a List of iSTAR Controllers on Page 133).

Viewing a List of GCM Board Serial Numbers

You can view a list of iSTAR GCM board manufacturer unique serial numbers in the Dynamic View.

To View the Serial Numbers:

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR GC Board from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all GCM boards. The GCM boards are listed by the names you gave the
controllers.
4. Right-click on a column heading and select Serial Number Status. The serial numbers are listed under the Serial
Number Status column.

Once you select Serial Number Status the serial numbers are visible whenever the iSTAR GCM
NOTE Board Dynamic View is displayed.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 133

iSTAR Controller Tasks

Viewing Controller SD Cards with Encryption

Starting with iSTAR Controller firmware v6.6.B, iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE, and Ultra LT controllers ship with an encrypted SD
card for enhanced security. Firmware v6.6.B also provides the opportunity to upgrade existing SD cards in controllers to
use the new encryption security though the iSTAR Ultra Web Page.

Encrypted SD cards, and firmware upgrades to v6.6.B and higher, are controller specific and cannot be used in any other
controller.

To determine if your controller SD card is encrypted:

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controllers.
4. Right-click on a column name and select SD Card Encryption Status to add it to the Dynamic View.
5. Locate the controller in the list.
6. Scroll to the SD Card Encryption Status column.
• Encrypted indicates the SD is encrypted. The controller either shipped with the encrypted SD card or the SD card
was encrypted during the firmware v6.6.B and higher upgrade.
• Unencrypted indicates the SD card is unencrypted.
• Unknown indicates the SD card is unknown (not an Ultra, Ultra SE, or Ultra LT).

Using the iSTAR Controller Context Menu

To access the controller context menu, right-click on a controller in the Hardware tree or in the Dynamic View.

The selections described in Table 15 on Page 134 are not available for all controllers. Selections available are also based
on the privileges granted.
Table 15:  iSTAR Controller Context Menu

Selection Description

Edit Click this menu selection to edit the selected iSTAR Controller. The iSTAR Controller editor opens. You can rename the
iSTAR Controller, change its description, and any other attributes.

Delete Click this menu selection to delete the selected iSTAR Controller(s). A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to
delete the iSTAR Controller. Click Yes to delete the Input or No to cancel the deletion.
When you delete an iSTAR Controller, all of the child objects you have defined for the Controller are also deleted.

Set Property Click this menu selection to change the value of a property in the selected controller(s).
A dialog box appears asking you to select a property to change. Click to open a selection list and click the property you
wish to change.
See Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller on Page 137.

134 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

Table 15:  iSTAR Controller Context Menu (continued)

Selection Description

Add to Group Click this menu selection to add the iSTAR Controller to a Group. .A dialog box listing the iSTAR Controller Groups in the
system appears. Click on a Group in the list to add the iSTAR Controller(s) to that Group. See Add a Hardware Device to
Group from a Dynamic View on Page 383.

Export Opens an Export dialog box from which you can export one or more records displayed in a Dynamic View to either an XML or
Selection... a CSV file. This allows you to quickly and easily create XML/CSV reports on selected C•CURE 9000 data.
NOTE: Although XML is the initial default file type, once you choose a type in the Save as type field, whether XML or CSV,
that becomes the default the next time this dialog box opens.

CSV-formatted exports cannot be imported. If you require importing functionality, export to XML.
• When you export to an XML file, all available data for the selected object(s), whether displayed in the Dynamic View or not,
as well as all the child objects of the selected record(s), is exported.
• When you export to a CSV file, only data in the columns displaying in the Dynamic View is exported, and in the order
displayed. This allows you to both select and arrange data fields for your report. In addition, exporting to a CSV file allows
you to view the exported data in an Excel spreadsheet and further manipulate it for your use.
NOTE: When you click Export Selection, you are running the export on the client computer. Consequently, the system does
not use the Default Export Directory Path—which is on the server. It opens a directory on the client, reverting to the
last directory used. You can navigate to the default export server directory, if you wish. Or to avoid confusion or use the
same destination folder for both client and server computers, you can use UNC (Universal Naming Convention)
paths.
Example:
\\Computer Name\Program Files\Software House\SWHouse\SWHSystem\Export.

Find in Audit Opens a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the query criteria to search for entries in
Log... the Audit Log that reference the selected iSTAR Controller. The results display in a separate Dynamic View. This selection is
not available if you select multiple Controllers.

Find in Journal... Opens a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the query criteria to search for entries in
the Journal that reference the selected iSTAR Controller. The results display in a separate Dynamic View. This selection is not
available if you select multiple Controllers.

Set GIS Location Used to set the GIS location of the object.

Associate Tag Associates the object with a tag configured in the Tag Manager.

Perform Full Downloads configuration and personnel records appropriate to the controller.
Controller
Download

Update Updates the firmware for an iSTAR controller. See Updating iSTAR Firmware (Ethernet Connections) on Page 137 and
Firmware... Updating iSTAR Firmware (Dial-up Connections) on Page 139.
NOTE: If you are using dial-up to update the firmware, you must manually connect to the iSTAR before Update Firmware is
visible in the context menu.

Diagnostics... • Opens the iSTAR Controller Diagnostics System web page for the iSTAR eX, Edge and Pro Controllers.
• Opens the iSTAR Ultra Web Diagnostics page for the iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE, and Ultra LT Controllers.
• Opens the iSTAR Ultra Video log in page for the iSTAR Ultra Video Controller.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 135

iSTAR Controller Tasks

Table 15:  iSTAR Controller Context Menu (continued)

Selection Description

Turn Opens the Maintenance Mode dialog box to put the iSTAR Controller and/or its components into Maintenance Mode. See
Maintenance Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode On

Turn Opens the Maintenance Mode dialog box to take the iSTAR Controller and/or its components out of Maintenance Mode. See
Maintenance Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode Off

Associations Displays all objects associated with the selected object.

Disable Web Click to disable Web Diagnostics on the controller.

Diagnostics

Disable/Enable Click to enable or disable SNMP on the controller. This setting overrides the SNMP settings in the iSTAR
SNMP Configuration Utility.

Copy and Used to make a duplicate of a Cluster and its Child Objects on the same partition on the same system. See Copying, Pasting,
Paste... and Renaming Clusters and Controllers on Page 47.

Copy To... Used to make a duplicate of a Cluster and its Child Objects on a different partition on the same system, using Paste From.
See Copying, Pasting, and Renaming Clusters and Controllers on Page 47.

If there are multiple monitors attached to your system you can use the monitor icon, located at the end of the Monitor and
Associations context menu selections, to display the activity on a selected monitor.
NOTE: The monitors displayed is based on the monitor configuration settings.

Monitor Click this menu selection to view activity for the selected iSTAR Controller(s), and any Add-on Board, Door, Elevator, Input,
Output, Reader, and Trigger-with-target-Event children, on an Admin Monitor Activity Viewer.
NOTE: Which Add-on Boards display on the Monitor—as well as which of their Input, Output, Reader, and Trigger-with-
target-Event children—Depends on the Controller type and what is turned on.
For more information, see "Monitoring an Object from the Administration Station" in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide.

Connect Dialup This menu selection is only available for an iSTAR using dialup (Pro/Ultra SE Pro Mode).
Panel Click to open the Manual Action dialog box to enter a starting time, ending time, and priority to connect using dialup. It is
recommended that you set the Start and End time to maintain a connection for a minimum of two hours.

Reset Dial-up This menu selection is only available on an iSTAR Master using dialup (Pro/Ultra SE Pro Mode).
Panel Click to reboot the iSTAR controller.

Reset All IP- Resets all IP-ACMs configured on the controller.

ACM Panels

Show Opens a Show Association dialog box that lists all the security objects associated with the object selected.
Associations

iSTAR Door Click to configure a new door or a door template.

Elevator Click to configure a new elevator or an elevator template.

iSTAR Input Click to configure a new input or an input template.

136 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

Table 15:  iSTAR Controller Context Menu (continued)

Selection Description

Output Click to configure a new output or an output template.

iSTAR Reader Click to configure a new reader or a reader template.

Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller

You can use Set Property to quickly set a property for a Controller without opening the iSTAR Controller Editor. Set
Property allows you to select multiple Controllers in a Dynamic View and right-click to set a specific property for all of
them. So, for example, if you wanted to change a setting for 20 Controllers, you could select all of them and do it in one
step.

To Set a Property for an iSTAR Controller

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all iSTAR Controller objects.
4. Select the iSTAR Controllers in the list for which you want to set a property, using multiple selection (CTRL+Left-click
to select more than one Controller, or SHIFT+Left-click to select a range of Controllers) as needed.
5. Right-click a selected iSTAR Controller and select Set Property from the context menu.
6. Click in the Property field to open a selection dialog box and select the property you want to set.
7. Enter the value for the property in the Value field and click OK.

Updating iSTAR Firmware (Ethernet Connections)

You can update the iSTAR firmware on iSTAR panels using Ethernet connections from either the Administration Client or
the Monitoring Station client.

You cannot update the iSTAR Ultra Video controller firmware from C•CURE 9000. See the iSTAR Ultra
NOTE Video Installation and Configuration Guide for upgrade information.

You can initiate a firmware update by right-clicking on the iSTAR controller:

■ In the Hardware Tree
■ In a Dynamic View in the Administration Client
■ In the Status List - Controller in the Monitoring Station

To Update Firmware on an iSTAR Controller

1. Right-click on the controller and select Update Firmware from the context menu as shown in Figure 51 on Page 138.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 137

iSTAR Controller Tasks

Figure 51:  iSTAR Context Menu

Update Firmware will not appear on the context menu if the iSTAR is not Enabled or is off-line.
NOTE

The Firmware Download dialog box, shown in Figure 52 on Page 138, opens.
Figure 52:  Firmware Download Dialog Box

138 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

2. Select iSTAR Controller from the Download Type drop-down menu.

3. Select the firmware version that you want to download from the list in the dialog box.
4. Click Start firmware download. A progress bar shows you when the download is completed.
5. When the download has completed, click Close to close the dialog box.

Updating iSTAR Firmware (Dial-up Connections)

You can update the iSTAR firmware on iSTAR Pro and iSTAR Ultra SE Pro Mode panels using dial-up from either the
Administration Client or the Monitoring Station client.

You can initiate a firmware update by right-clicking on the iSTAR controller:

■ In the Hardware Tree
■ In a Dynamic View in the Administration Client
■ In the Status List - Controller in the Monitoring Station

To Update Firmware on an iSTAR Controller

1. Manually connect to the dial-up iSTAR controller. Right-click on the dial-up iSTAR controller and select Connect
Dialup Panel as shown in Figure 53 on Page 139.
Figure 53:  iSTAR Context Menu - Dialup Connection

The Manual Actions dialog box, shown in Figure 54 on Page 140, opens.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 139

iSTAR Controller Tasks

Figure 54:  Manual Action Dialog Box

2. Ensure that the Start and End Time is set to a minimum of two hours.
3. Click Save and Close.
4. After the connection is established, right-click on the controller and select Update Firmware as shown in Figure 55 on
Page 140.

Update Firmware will not appear on the context menu if the iSTAR is not Enabled or is off-line.
NOTE

Figure 55:  iSTAR Context Menu - Update Firmware

The Firmware Download dialog box, shown in Figure 56 on Page 141, opens.

140 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

Figure 56:  Firmware Download

5. Select iSTAR Controller from the Download Type drop-down menu.

6. Select the firmware version that you want to download from the list in the dialog box.
7. Click Start firmware download. A progress bar shows you when the download is completed.
8. When the download has completed, click Close to close the dialog box.

Updating Firmware Using ICU

You can use the ICU (iSTAR Configuration Utility) to quickly download firmware updates to one or more controllers. Copy
the new firmware file to C:\Program Files (x86) Tyco\CrossFire\ServerComponents\istar\ICU\Firmware (the default
folder location) before starting the download process.

Before starting the firmware download, note the following:

■ If you moved the ICU folder, then you must go back to the ICU Controller dialog box and change the Server Root
Directory to match that path. See the ICU help for information about changing the Server Root Directory.
■ If the default Server HTTP Port (9701) that is used for firmware downloads is in use by another application, you have to
specify another port to use for firmware downloads. See the ICU help for information about changing the Server Root
Directory.

These procedures use default passwords. If you changed the default passwords, then you must use those.
NOTE

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 141

iSTAR Controller Tasks

To Download Firmware to the Controller Using the ICU

You cannot use the ICU to upgrade the iSTAR Ultra Video Controller. See the iSTAR Ultra Video
NOTE Installation and Configuration Guide for upgrade information.

If you are downloading firmware to a controller using dialup, perform the following steps before you
NOTE download the firmware:

1. Right-click on the controller an select Connect to Controller.

2. Monitor the connection in the Monitoring Station. Once complete, proceed to Step 1 below.

1. Click the Options & Tools pane.

2. Click ICU.
3. Enter the ICU password and click OK. The default password is manager. The ICU starts and the main window opens.
4. Select the controller(s) that you want to update. You can select multiple controllers by pressing the Ctrl key while you
are selecting them.
5. After selecting the controller(s), right-click in the ICU window and select Download Firmware from the context menu.
6. You are prompted for a password if the iSTAR controller is an Ultra or Ultra SE.
Enter "iSTAR", the default password and click OK.
7. Click Browse and navigate to C:\Program Files (x86) Tyco\CrossFire\ServerComponents\istar\ICU\Firmware
(the default folder location) .
8. Select the firmware image file and click Open. The selected file is displayed in the Firmware Image File to Download
box.

6. Click Start Download to initiate the download to all controllers in the Download Firmware list.
The firmware is downloaded simultaneously to all controllers in the list. The Progress bar on each line indicates when
the download is complete for each controller.

The controller may reboot more than once during the upgrade process.
NOTE

• To cancel a download, select the controller and right-click to select Cancel Download from the context menu.
• If a Controller returns a Download Failed message, you can select the controller and right-click to select Retry from
the context menu to restart the firmware download.
9. When all of the downloads have completed, click Exit to close the Firmware Download dialog box.

Changing the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller

You can change the value of the iSTAR controller Time Zone field only when the iSTAR Controller is not enabled
(Enabled field is blank ). You must edit the controller, clear the Enabled field, save the controller, then re-open it to
change the Time Zone.

142 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Tasks

If you change the Time Zone of the iSTAR controller, the Time Zone settings of all child objects of that iSTAR controller are
changed as well. A warning message appears if you change the Time Zone and any Events or Triggers have controller-
based actions on this iSTAR controller and the Event is configured to use a different Time Zone than this iSTAR controller.

Host-based actions with Schedules respect the controller Time Zone: a host-based Event that unlocks doors according to
a Schedule uses the controller Time Zone to determine when the Schedule is active for devices on that controller.

However, if a Time Zone is assigned to the host-based Event itself, the Event actions will activate on the Schedule based
on the host Time Zone.

Example:
With a C•CURE 9000 Server in the Eastern US Time Zone (GMT -5:00) and an iSTAR controller in the Central
US Time Zone (GMT -6:00):
■ A host Event that does not include an Event Time Zone unlocks specific Doors by Schedule on an iSTAR
controller according to the controller Time Zone.
■ A host Event that includes an Event Time Zone unlocks specific doors by Schedule on an iSTAR controller
according to the C•CURE 9000 Server Time Zone.

To Change the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller

1. From the Hardware pane, select the iSTAR controller you wish to change. Right-click and select Edit.
2. Clear the Enabled field (change to ).
3. Click Save and Close to save the change.
4. From the Hardware pane, select the iSTAR controller again. Right-click and select Edit.
5. When the iSTAR controller editor opens, the Time Zone field can be changed.
6. Click Save and Close to save the change.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 143

Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT)

Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT)

■ The information this section only applies to the iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE, and Ultra LT.
NOTE
■ If CPNI mode is enabled on the controller, then all database and transactions are stored in RAM. The
database and transactions are not backed up on the SD card.

The iSTAR Ultra SE configuration data (doors, personnel, etc.) is held in volatile RAM during normal operation (IP settings
are stored in the controller’s onboard flash memory). This data is backed up to non-volatile SD Card memory on a periodic
basis during normal operation. Data is automatically backed up after a fast download to the panel, and, upon a soft reset on
the GCM board.

The non-rechargeable lithium coin cell battery maintains the controller’s clock only during a power outage
NOTE for up to 30 days.

To ensure that the database backup is always current, Software House recommends that you create an event to trigger a
database backup when the Low Battery or AC Fail input is activated on the GCM board. An event with the action
“Backup iSTAR Database” can trigger the event from the Low Battery or AC Fail input. If your power supply does not
support the Low Battery or AC fail, then you can trigger the database backup event using a schedule. For example, set a
schedule to run every Monday at 2AM.

When power is restored after an outage, the controller first attempts to connect to its host server. If successful, the host
will download the current time to the controller, and download the current database. However, if the host is not present,
then the controller will use its local backed-up time, and it will use the last saved database from the SD card.

When the host is offline, transaction buffers of card activity and other activity are automatically written to non-volatile
memory, and do not require database backup configuration.

144 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor

iSTAR Controller Editor

The iSTAR Controller editor dialog box allows you to configure an iSTAR Controller and its attached devices.

You use the iSTAR Controller editor to configure the Controller settings and specify the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that
are connected to the Controller.

For information about the iSTAR Controller editor for a specific iSTAR model, see:
■ iSTAR Classic Controller Editor on Page 145
■ iSTAR Pro Controller Editor on Page 146
■ iSTAR eX Controller Editor on Page 146
■ iSTAR Edge Controller Editor on Page 147
■ iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor on Page 148
■ iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Editor on Page 149
■ iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Editor on Page 148

iSTAR Classic Controller Editor

On iSTAR Classic Controllers, you can configure the GCM and any installed ACM Boards. Two ACM Boards can be
installed on an iSTAR Classic Controller.

The iSTAR Classic Controller Editor has the tabs listed in Table 16 on Page 145.
Table 16:  iSTAR Classic Controller Editor Tabs

Tab See...

General iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 150

Boards iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 167

Schlage Wireless PIMs iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab on Page 165

Triggers iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 162

Advanced iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab on Page 161

Groups Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36

Status iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 162

Network Status iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab on Page 163

User Defined Fields iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 164

State Images iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 164

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 145

iSTAR Controller Editor

iSTAR Pro Controller Editor

On iSTAR Pro Controllers, you can configure the GCM and any installed ACM Boards. Two ACM Boards can be installed
on an iSTAR Pro Controller.

The iSTAR Pro Controller Editor has the tabs listed in Table 17 on Page 146.
Table 17:  iSTAR Pro Controller Editor Tabs

Tab See...

General iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 150

Boards iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 167

Schlage Wireless PIMs iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab on Page 165

Triggers iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 162

Advanced iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab on Page 161

Groups Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36

Status iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 162

Network Status iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab on Page 163

User Defined Fields iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 164

State Images iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 164

iSTAR eX Controller Editor

On iSTAR eX Controllers, you can configure the GCM and any boards connected to the Power Management Board (PMB).

The tabs for the iSTAR eX Controller Editor are listed in Table 18 on Page 146.
Table 18:  iSTAR eX Controller Editor Tabs

Tab See...

General iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 150

Inputs iSTAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab on Page 170

Outputs iSTAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab on Page 174

Wiegand iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 180

COM1 iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 182

COM2 iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 182

146 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor

Table 18:  iSTAR eX Controller Editor Tabs (continued)

Tab See...

Advanced iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab on Page 161

Triggers iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 162

Groups Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36

Status iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 162

Network Status iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab on Page 163

User Defined Fields iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 164

State Images iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 164

iSTAR Edge Controller Editor

The tabs for the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor are listed in Table 19 on Page 147.
Table 19:  iSTAR Edge Controller Editor Tabs

Tab See...

General iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 150

Inputs iSTAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab on Page 170

Outputs iSTAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab on Page 174

Wiegand iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 178

COM1 iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 176

COM2 iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 176

COM3 iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 176

Advanced iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab on Page 161

Triggers iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 162

Groups Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36

Status iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 162

Network Status iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab on Page 163

User Defined Fields iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 164

State Images iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 164

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 147

iSTAR Controller Editor

iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor

The tabs for the iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor tabs are listed in Table 20 on Page 148.
Table 20:  iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Tabs

Tab See...

General iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 150

Inputs iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab on Page 186

Boards iSTAR Ultra Controller Boards Tab on Page 187

IP ACM's iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab on Page 189

COM1 iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 189

COM2 iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 189

Advanced iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab on Page 161

Triggers iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 162

Groups Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36

Status iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 162

Network Status iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab on Page 163

User Defined Fields iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 164

State Images iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 164

iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Editor

The tabs for the iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Editor tabs are listed in Table 21 on Page 148.
Table 21:  iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Editor Tabs

Tab See...

General iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 150

Boards iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Boards Tab on Page 188

IP ACM's iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab on Page 189

Advanced iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab on Page 161

Triggers iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 162

148 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor

iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Editor Tabs (continued)

Tab See...

Groups Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36

Status iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 162

User Defined Fields iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 164

State Images iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 164

iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Editor

The tabs for the iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Editor tabs are listed in Table 22 on Page 149.
Table 22:  iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Editor Tabs

Tab See...

General iSTAR Ultra LT Controller General Tab on Page 156

Inputs iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Inputs Tab on Page 191

IP ACMs iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab on Page 189

COM Port iSTAR Ultra LT Controller COM Port Tab on Page 192

Advanced iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab on Page 161

Triggers iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 162

Groups Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36

Status iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 162

Network Status iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab on Page 163

User Defined Fields iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 164

State Images iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 164

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 149

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

The iSTAR Controller editor tabs available depend on the iSTAR Controller type.

The iSTAR Controller editor basic tabs and iSTAR specific tabs are listed below.

Basic Tabs
■ iSTAR Controller General Tab on Page 150
■ iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 167
■ iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab on Page 162
■ iSTAR Controller Status Tab on Page 162
■ iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab on Page 163
■ iSTAR Controller State Images Tab on Page 164
■ iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 164

iSTAR Specific Tabs

■ iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab on Page 165
■ iSTAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab on Page 170
■ iSTAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab on Page 174
■ iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 176
■ iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 178
■ iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 180
■ iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 182
■ iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab on Page 186
■ iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 189
■ iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab on Page 189
■ iSTAR Ultra Controller High Assurance Tab on Page 162
■ iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab on Page 161
■ iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Inputs Tab on Page 191
■ iSTAR Ultra LT Controller COM Port Tab on Page 192
■ iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Boards Tab on Page 188

iSTAR Controller General Tab

The iSTAR Controller General tab provides a means to set the controller’s onboard and PCMCIA Ethernet adapters, MAC
address, Reader LCD Message Sets, Time Zone, and to enable FICAM High Assurance readers. All iSTAR controller's
General tab settings are described in this topic.

150 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Starting in C•CURE 9000 v2.70, iSTAR Ultra family controllers with firmware version 6.6.x must use the
NOTE iSTAR Configuration Utility (ICU) or the iSTAR Ultra Web pages to configure network settings. The IP
address and IP family settings will not be displayed and are not configurable in C•CURE 9000.

■ PCMCIA Ethernet adapters have not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE
■ Not all configuration fields are available for all controllers.

See iSTAR Controller General Tab Definitions on Page 153 for field descriptions.
Figure 57:  iSTAR Controller General Tab (iSTAR Ultra shown)

To Configure the iSTAR Controller General Tab

1. Create or edit an iSTAR Controller. See either:
■ Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 127
■ Editing an iSTAR Controller on Page 132.
2. Enter a unique controller name in the Name field at the top of the iSTAR Controller dialog box.
3. Enter a textual description (optional) in the Description field.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 151

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

4. Enter the last six hexadecimal characters after the vendor portion of the address in the MAC Address entry field for
the controller. The first six characters of a controller’s MAC address are set at 00-50-F9. The last six characters of a
controller’s MAC address must be within the range of hexadecimal values (for example, 0-9 and a-f).
5. To select a particular customized set of LCD messages for the RM Readers, click to display a Reader LCD
Message Set selection list. If you leave this field blank (the default), the Readers use the default messages. See LCD
Message Set on Page 526 for more information. (Edge, eX, Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT, Pro)
6. If you are configuring iSTAR controllers that are located in different time zones, you can use the Time Zone entry
field. Click to display a time zone selection. Greenwich Mean Time is equivalent to Zulu or Universal Time. If you
leave the Time Zone field blank, the iSTAR is considered to be in the C•CURE 9000 server's Time Zone.
You can only change the Time Zone setting for the iSTAR controller when the controller is not Enabled ( ). See
Changing the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller on Page 142.
7. To use the Automatic Door Unlock Control feature, select the check box.
With this feature, the controller turns the strike relay off when the door opens, or if a delay relock is configured, after
the delay relock time expires. Then if a second person swipes while door is open, the controller normally does not re-
activate the relay, under the assumption that if the door is open, the relay activation is not needed.
8. You can type an IP Address in the Onboard Ethernet IP Address field, although it is recommended that you select
Use DCHP to use the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) option to automatically assign an IP address to
the Controller.
9. For an iSTAR eX Controller, you can enter an IP Address for the Onboard Ethernet Adapter #2. Alternatively, you
can select Use DHCP.

The DHCP Server has not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

10. For an iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller:

a. If you have a PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter, select Adapter Installed.
b. You can either enter an IP Address for the PCMCIA adapter or select Use DHCP.
c. If you are using the PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter as the primary connection to the host, select Use as Primary
Communications Adapter.
11. If you are configuring an iSTAR eX or iSTAR Edge Controller, you need to select the supervising resistor configuration
for the GCM Inputs. The default setting is NO/NC Double EOL 1K. See Table 23 on Page 153 for more information.

The supervision method for Inputs on the iSTAR Ultra is configured for each separate Input on the Input
NOTE Editor.

12. Enter the IP address.

13. If any Doors on this controller need to be configured for Conditional Access, see iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab
on Page 161 to select the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel Downloads option in the
Conditional Access box. The Conditional Access tab is available on the iSTAR Doors Editor only if this option is
selected. See iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab on Page 405.

Since selecting this option causes a full Personnel download to the controller (including all credentials
NOTE except for Lost, Stolen Not Active, and Expired), a warning displays about the 250,000-record-download
limit.

152 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

14. To support Innometriks High Assurance readers attached to this controller (Ultra and Ultra SE in Ultra Mode), see
.iSTAR Ultra Controller High Assurance Tab on Page 162.
15. You can optionally click other tabs on the iSTAR Controller Editor to configure other settings prior to saving the
Controller.
16. Click the Enabled check box to put the controller online when you are finished configuring the iSTAR Controller
General tab. You must have entered a valid MAC Address and a setting for the IP Address before enabling the
Controller or you will receive an error message if you try to save the Controller settings with Enabled selected.
17. Click Save and Close to save your settings for the Controller and close the iSTAR Controller Editor.

iSTAR Controller General Tab Definitions

Table 23 on Page 153 includes further information for fields in the Controller Editor General tab. The fields available differ
by controller type, as indicated in this table.
Table 23:  iSTAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields

Field Description

Name Enter a unique name up to 50 characters long for the controller. If you enter the
name of an existing object, the system returns an error message indicating there is
a conflict.

Description Enter a textual comment about the controller, such as its location or purpose. This
text is for information only.

Enabled Click the Enabled check box to put the Controller online. You must specify the
MAC address and IP address for the Controller prior to selecting Enabled or you
will receive an error message when you save the Controller.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the iSTAR Controller and/or its components into Maintenance Mode.
See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Controller resides.
If you are creating a new Controller, the Partition that is currently the New Object
Partition for your Operator account is automatically assigned to each Controller
you create.
If you want to change the Partition of a Controller, you must move the Cluster in
which the Controller resides. See Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on
Page 35.

General

Controller Type This field displays the controller type: iSTAR Classic/Pro, iSTAR Edge, iSTAR
eX, iSTAR Ultra, Ultra LT,or iSTAR Ultra Video.
The Controller Type is determined when you initially create the controller object.
When you save the controller object, this field becomes read-only for all
subsequent editing sessions.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 153

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 23:  iSTAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields (continued)

Field Description

Hardware (MAC) Address The Hardware/Adapter MAC address for the controller. The MAC address is built
Adapter #1 MAC Address into the GCM and cannot be changed. You can find a controller’s MAC address on
a label attached to the GCM or view the address using the iSTAR Configuration
Utility. The first six nibbles (or characters) of a controller’s MAC address are set at
00-50-F9. The last six nibbles (or characters) of a controller’s MAC address must
hexadecimal numbers between 0-9 and A-F.
NOTE: The iSTAR Ultra Video controller does not use the MAC address format
described above. The MAC address displayed is the MAC address of the
iSTAR Ultra Video device.

Reader LCD Message Sets If you want customized LCD messages to display on the RM Readers, specify a
(Classic/Pro, Edge, eX, Reader LCD Message Set. Click to display a Reader LCD Message Set
Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT) selection list. By default, this field is blank indicating that the Readers are use the
default messages. For more information, see LCD Message Set on Page 526.

Time Zone If you are managing controllers in different time zones, specify a time zone for the
controller. Click to display a time zone selection.
The following objects are associated with the controller’s time zone:
• Inputs, outputs, and readers on the controller.
• Doors and door groups with inputs, outputs, or readers on the controller.
• Elevators and elevator groups with inputs, outputs, or readers on the
controller.
NOTE: Only Schedules and clearances that use the same time zone as the
controller are downloaded to the controller. If you change the controller’s
time zone after a Schedule or clearance has been downloaded to the
controller, a matching violation occurs. The time zone is downloaded to the
controller, and the clearance is deleted from the controller. See the
C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information.

Automatic Door Unlock Select this check box to enable the Automatic Door Unlock Control feature for the
Control controller.
If enabled, the controller turns the strike relay off when the door opens, or if a delay
relock is configured, after the delay relock time expires. Then if a second person
swipes while door is open, the controller normally does not re-activate the relay,
under the assumption that if the door is open, the relay activation is not needed.
You can use this feature to cover the case where you require the relay activation.
• If you clear the check box, the behavior of the controller is normal, and an admit
processed while the door is open means the relay is not activated.
• If you select the check box, the relay activates for the configured unlock time
selected in the iSTAR Door editor.
You need to select this check box for every controller you want to use this feature.
You can set this value on the Dynamic View from the Set Property selection. This
selection is audited in the Audit Log.
The default setting is disabled.

154 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 23:  iSTAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields (continued)

Field Description

Onboard Ethernet 1. Enter a static IP address or select DHCP.

IP Address 2. Select the Address Family.
NOTE: The Address Family must match in C•CURE 9000 and in the ICU to
establish communication.

Onboard Ethernet Adapter Enter the unique IP address for Onboard Ethernet as 4 numbers between 0 and
(1/2) 255, separated by periods, such as 100.10.10.1.

Use DHCP Select this check box to obtain an IP Address from a DHCP Server for the iSTAR
Controller’s Onboard Ethernet Adapter.

PCMCIA Ethernet (iSTAR Classic/Pro and Ultra SE in Pro Mode)

Adapter Installed Select this check box to indicate that an PCMCIA Ethernet adapter is installed.

IP Address Enter the unique IP address for the PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter as 4 integers
between 0 and 255, separated by periods, such as 100.10.10.1.

Use DHCP Select this check box to obtain an IP Address from a DHCP Server for the PCMCIA
Ethernet Adapter.

Use as Primary Ethernet Select this check box to indicate that the PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter is to be used as
Adapter the Primary Ethernet Adapter.

Bluetooth Service Tool (not supported, future release)

Bluetooth enabled Select this check box to allow troubleshooting messages to appear on the
Bluetooth device.
NOTE: Software House recommends to disable this feature after use.

Suppress Power / LED Control

Turn off LEDs and LCD You can to configure the LCD backlight and various status LEDs to always be off by
backlight selecting ( ), regardless of tamper state. Selecting this option does not affect the
(Edge, Ultra, Ultra SE (Ultra Power LED or the bright white external power indicator.
Mode), Ultra Video, Ultra
LT)

Onboard reader LED control Specify the method used on this controller to drive the direct connect reader LEDs:
(iSTAR Edge) • 3-wire (Red, Green, Yellow)
• External Bi-Color (2-wire Red, Green)
• 1-wire (A, B, C)

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 155

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 23:  iSTAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields (continued)

Field Description

Supervising resistor All iSTAR eX GCM Inputs and iSTAR Edge inputs must be wired in the same way
configuration and use the same supervision method. All supervised settings assume either one
(iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge) or two end of line (EOL) resistors. You can use the Reverse Sense option if you
need a particular Input to differ from the selected setting (for example, if you
choose a NO setting here, but you need a door switch monitor Input to be NC, you
can set that Input for Reverse Sense in the iSTAR Input Editor (see iSTAR Input
Editor on Page 240 for more information).
• NO = Normally Open
• NC = Normally Closed
• EOL = End of Line
Select one of the resistor values in the drop-down list.
NO/NC Double EOL 1K is the default, and the traditional Software House method

Cluster Info

Communications Path These read-only fields display the Communications Path and the name of the
iSTAR Cluster through which this controller communicates with the C•CURE 9000
Server.

Diagnostic Password

Set Password For security, a password must be set for the controller. Click Set Password to
open the Set Diagnostic Password for this Controller dialog box.
Password requirements:
• Password length: >= 10
• Contains at least one uppercase letter (A-Z)
• Contains at least one lowercase letter (a-z)
• Contains at least one digit (0-9)
• Contains a special character
Enter the password, confirm the password and click OK.
See Setting the iSTAR Controller Diagnostic Password on Page 128

iSTAR Ultra LT Controller General Tab

The iSTAR Ultra LT Controller General tab, shown in Figure 58 on Page 157, provides a means to set the controller’s
onboard Ethernet adapter, MAC address, Reader LCD Message Sets, and Time Zone. The General tab fields are
described in Table 24 on Page 158.

Starting in C•CURE 9000 v2.70, iSTAR Ultra family controllers with firmware version 6.6.x must use the
NOTE iSTAR Configuration Utility (ICU) or the iSTAR Ultra Web pages to configure network settings. The IP
address and IP family settings will not be displayed and are not configurable in C•CURE 9000.

156 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Figure 58:  iSTAR Ultra LT Controller General Tab

To Configure the iSTAR Ultra LT Controller General Tab

1. Enter a unique controller name in the Name field.
2. Enter a textual description (optional) in the Description field.
3. There are two Ultra LT boards, one board supports 8 readers and the other supports 16 readers. If the iSTAR Ultra LT
board supports 16 readers, select the Supports 16 Readers check box, or leave it blank for 8 reader support. The
default reader support is 8.
• The controller must be disabled (Enabled deselected).
• If you switch from 8 reader support to 16 reader support, or vice versa, you need to Save and Close then reopen
the dialog box for the reader support to change.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 157

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

• If you switch from 16 readers to 8 readers, all hardware configured beyond the eight reader version support will be
deleted.
— Everything configured under IP-ACMv1-9 to IP-ACMv1-16 boards will be deleted
— Everything configured under IP-ACMv2-9 to IP-ACMv2-16 boards will be deleted
— Everything configured under Hub9 to Hub16 for Aperio protocol will be deleted
— Everything configured under PIM9 to PIM16 for Schlage protocol will be deleted
4. Enter the last six hexadecimal characters after the vendor portion of the address in the MAC Address entry field for
the controller. The first six characters of a controller’s MAC address are set at 00-50-F9. The last six characters of a
controller’s MAC address must be within the range of hexadecimal values (for example, 0-9 and a-f).
5. To select a particular customized set of LCD messages for the RM Readers, click to display a Reader LCD
Message Set selection list. If you leave this field blank (the default), the Readers use the default messages. See LCD
Message Set on Page 526 for more information.
6. If you are configuring iSTAR controllers that are located in different time zones, you can use the Time Zone entry
field. Click to display a time zone selection. Greenwich Mean Time is equivalent to Zulu or Universal Time. If you
leave the Time Zone field blank, the iSTAR is considered to be in the C•CURE 9000 server's Time Zone.
You can only change the Time Zone setting for the iSTAR controller when the controller is not Enabled ( ). See
Changing the Time Zone of an iSTAR Controller on Page 142.
7. To use a Static IP address, deselect the DHCP check box and enter the IP address.

The DHCP Server has not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

8. Select the radio button for the IP Address family of the controller, either IPv4 or IPv6. See IPv6 Configuration on Page
24 for IPv6 configuration requirements and configuration information.
9. You can optionally click other tabs on the iSTAR Controller Editor to configure other settings prior to saving the
controller.
10. Click the Enabled check box to put the controller online when you are finished configuring the iSTAR Controller
General tab. You must have entered a valid MAC Address and a setting for the IP Address before enabling the
controller or you will receive an error message if you try to save the controller settings with Enabled selected.
11. Click Save and Close to save your settings for the controller and close the iSTAR Controller Editor.

iSTAR Controller General Tab Definitions

on Page 156 includes further information for fields in the Controller Editor General tab. The fields available differ by
controller type, as indicated in this table.
Table 24:  iSTAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields

Field Description

Name Enter a unique name up to 50 characters long for the controller. If you enter the name of an
existing object, the system returns an error message indicating there is a conflict.

158 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 24:  iSTAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields (continued)

Field Description

Description Enter a textual comment about the controller, such as its location or purpose. This text is for
information only.

Enabled Click the Enabled check box to put the Controller online. You must specify the MAC address
and IP address for the Controller prior to selecting Enabled or you will receive an error
message when you save the Controller.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the iSTAR Controller and/or its components into Maintenance Mode. See
Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Controller resides.
If you are creating a new Controller, the Partition that is currently the New Object Partition for
your Operator account is automatically assigned to each Controller you create.
If you want to change the Partition of a Controller, you must move the Cluster in which the
Controller resides. See Using Drag and Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 35.

General

Controller Type This field displays the controller type..

The Controller Type is determined when you initially create the controller object. When you
save the controller object, this field becomes read-only for all subsequent editing sessions.

Supports 16 Readers Deselected, the default, supports the 8 reader Ultra LT board. Select the check box if the
Ultra Lt board supports 16 readers.

MAC Address The Hardware/Adapter MAC address for the controller. The MAC address is built into the
GCM and cannot be changed. You can find a controller’s MAC address on a label attached
to the GCM or view the address using the iSTAR Configuration Utility. The first six nibbles (or
characters) of a controller’s MAC address are set at 00-50-F9. The last six nibbles (or
characters) of a controller’s MAC address must hexadecimal numbers between 0-9 and A-
F..

RM LCD Message Sets If you want customized LCD messages to display on the RM Readers, specify a Reader LCD
Message Set. Click to display a Reader LCD Message Set selection list. By default, this
field is blank indicating that the Readers are use the default messages. For more
information, see LCD Message Set on Page 526.

Time Zone If you are managing controllers in different time zones, specify a time zone for the controller.
Click to display a time zone selection.
The following objects are associated with the controller’s time zone:
• Inputs, outputs, and readers on the controller.
• Doors and door groups with inputs, outputs, or readers on the controller.
• Elevators and elevator groups with inputs, outputs, or readers on the controller.
NOTE: Only Schedules and clearances that use the same time zone as the controller are
downloaded to the controller. If you change the controller’s time zone after a
Schedule or clearance has been downloaded to the controller, a matching violation
occurs. The time zone is downloaded to the controller, and the clearance is deleted
from the controller. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more
information.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 159

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 24:  iSTAR Controller Editor General Tab Fields (continued)

Field Description

Onboard Ethernet Adapter

IP Address Deselect the Use DHCP check box to enter a static IP address or select UseDHCP (the
default).

Address Family Select the radio button for the IP Address family of the controller, either IPv4 or IPv6.
NOTE: See IPv6 Configuration on Page 24 for IPv6 requirements and configuration
information.

Bluetooth Service Tool (not supported, future release)

Bluetooth enabled Select this check box to allow troubleshooting messages to appear on the Bluetooth device.
NOTE: Software House recommends to disable this feature after use.

Suppress Power

Turn off LEDs and LCD You can to configure the LCD back light and various status LEDs to always be off by selecting
backlight ( ), regardless of tamper state. Selecting this option does not affect the Power LED or the
bright white external power indicator.

Cluster Info

Communications Path These read-only fields display the Communications Path and the name of the iSTAR Cluster
through which this controller communicates with the C•CURE 9000 Server.

Diagnostic Password

Set Controller For security, a password must be set for the controller. Click Set Controller Password to
Password open the Set Diagnostic Password for this Controller dialog box.
Enter the password, confirm the password and click OK.
Password Requirements:
• Password length: >= 10
• Contains at least one uppercase letter (A-Z)
• Contains at least one lowercase letter (a-z)
• Contains at least one digit (0-9)
• Contains a special character
Enter the password, confirm the password and click OK.
See Setting the iSTAR Controller Diagnostic Password on Page 128 for more information.

160 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

iSTAR Ultra Controller Advanced Tab

Use this tab to enable conditional access for doors on the controller and to enable fast personnel download.

Conditional Access
If any Doors on this controller need to be configured for Conditional Access, select the Include Personnel Without
Clearance in Personnel Downloads option in the Conditional Access box. The Conditional Access tab is available on
the iSTAR Doors Editor only if this option is selected. For information, see iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab on Page
405.

Selecting this option causes a full Personnel download to the controller. This includes all credentials,
NOTE except for Lost, Stolen Not Active, and Expired. There is a 250,000-record-download limit.

Fast Personnel Download

This number overrides the iSTAR Driver "Threshold to use for fast download " variable.
NOTE

When numerous controllers require fast download, the download starts with controllers configured with High priority.
Table 25:  iSTAR Controller Editor Advanced Tab Fields

Field Description

Conditional Access

Include Personnel If you want to enable conditional access for Doors on this Controller, allow entry to Personnel without Clearances, click to
Without Clearance in select this option. The Conditional Access tab is available on the iSTAR Doors Editor only if this option is selected. For
Personnel Downloads more information, see iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab on Page 405.
NOTE: Since selecting this option causes a full Personnel download to the controller (including all credentials except for
Lost, Stolen Not Active, and Expired), a warning displays about the 250,000-record-download limit.

Personnel Fast Download

Fast download When numerous controllers require fast download, the download starts with controllers configured with High priority.
Priority The download priority can be set to High, Normal, or Low.

Threshold to use fast The number of personnel records in the queue when personnel download starts.
download

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 161

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

iSTAR Ultra Controller High Assurance Tab

Use this tab to enable high assurance on this controller to support High Assurance readers.

iSTAR Controller Triggers Tab

C•CURE 9000 uses Triggers, which are configured procedures used for activating security actions. A Trigger
automatically executes a specified Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the
Actions available depend on the property selected. The Triggers are usually used to activate an Event which can activate
numerous actions.

See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.

iSTAR Controller Status Tab

The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected iSTAR
controller.

on Page 162 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Controller Status tab.
iSTAR Controller Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Dynamic Status

Online Status Indicates whether the controller has been Enabled (see the General tab).

Firmware Version The version of the firmware currently in use by the controller.

Boot Time The last date/time the controller was restarted (GMT or Zulu time)

Free Program Unused program memory in the controller’s microprocessor, in kilobytes.

Memory

Total Program Total storage memory in the controller’s microprocessor, in kilobytes.

Memory

Free Storage Unused storage memory in the controller’s microprocessor, in kilobytes.

Memory

Total Storage Total storage memory in the controller’s microprocessor, in kilobytes.

Memory

Free Physical Unused physical memory in the controller’s microprocessor, in kilobytes.

Memory

Total Physical Total physical memory in the controller’s microprocessor, in kilobytes.

Memory

162 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

iSTAR Controller Status Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Reader Security This field applies only to iSTAR eX controllers. It displays whether or not the eX 8-Reader Security Key is in place. Possible
Key Status status values are:
(eX only) Detected – the key is plugged in and 8 readers are operational on the iSTAR eX.
NotDetected – the key is not plugged in, and only four Readers will be operational.
Unknown – the key status cannot be determined (for example, the status is Unknown if the controller is out of
communication with C•CURE 9000). You can determine the status by observing the LCD on the iSTAR eX.

Encryption Setting A Read-only field that displays the Encryption Setting. Encryption settings are Encrypted (AES), Unknown, or Not
Status Encrypted.
(Edge,
Classic/Pro)

Free RAM Unused program memory available to the microprocessor in megabytes.

(Ultra/ Ultra Video)

Total RAM (Ultra/ Total storage memory available to the microprocessor in megabytes.
Ultra Video)

Free Nand Flash Unused flash memory in megabytes.

Database Memory
(Ultra/ Ultra Video)

Total Nand Flash Total flash memory in megabytes.

Database Memory
(iSTAR Ultra/ Ultra
Video)

PoE Board The field displays whether the Power over Ethernet (PoE) Board is installed. Possible status values are True or False.
Installed
(iSTAR Edge)

Edge Model Status The field displays the iSTAR Edge Model Status, either 2-door or 4-door.

Advanced

SNMP The check box is enabled (checked) if SNMP was enabled in the ICU for the controller.

Web Diagnostics The check box is enabled (checked) if Web Diagnostic was enabled in the ICU for the controller.

eX8 Reader USB The check box is enabled (checked) if the iSTAR eX 8-Reader USB key was enabled in the ICU for the controller.
Key
(iSTAR eX only)

iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab

The Controller Network Status tab displays read-only information. You cannot edit the information.

To change the controller configuration, use the iSTAR Configuration Utility (ICU) or the iSTAR Ultra Web Utility
(iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 163

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 26:  iSTAR Controller Network Status Tab Definitions

Field Description

NetBIOS Name The NetBIOS name of the iSTAR controller.

Host IP Address The IP address or name of the Primary connection to the C•CURE host or to the master controller for the cluster.

NAT IP Address The Network Address Translator (NAT) address for the server used to download firmware to the controller.

IP Mode The IP address family, IPv4 or IPv6.

Host IP Address If the check box is selected, indicates the controller does not accept an IP address from any source.
Locked

Use NAT If the check box is selected, indicates that Network Address Translator (NAT) address for the server is used to download
firmware to the controller.

Ethernet Adapter 1 / Ethernet Adapter 2

IP Address The IP address assigned.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask.

Default The IP address of the default gateway router for the controller.
Gateway

Primary DNS The IP address of the primary domain name server for this Ethernet card.

Secondary DNS The IP address of the secondary domain name server for this Ethernet card.

DNS query The domain name of the DNS server for which you supplied the IP address.
suffix

Lock IP Address If the check box is selected, indicates the controller can accept a translated address downloaded from a Network Address
Translator, C•CURE system, or other remote device.

iSTAR Controller User Defined Fields Tab

The User Defined Fields tab displays user-defined fields in the system for hardware. User-defined fields are configured in
the Configuration pane. If there are no user-defined fields configured, then the tab is empty.

See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information.

iSTAR Controller State Images Tab

The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images that are displayed on the C•CURE 9000 Monitoring
Station to indicate controller states. See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281 for information on using the
State Images tab for your iSTAR Controller.

iSTAR Controller State Images Tab Definitions

Table 27 on Page 165 describes iSTAR Controller State Images.

164 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

The state images shown in the table do not apply to all iSTARS.
NOTE

Table 27:  iSTAR Controller State Images Tab Definitions

Icon Description Icon Description

Unknown Download in Progress

Online Comm Fail

Disabled Database Back Up

Power Failure Fire Alarm

Supervision State

Battery Low FAI Relay Control

Tamper FAI Key Supervision State

Download Error Internal Battery Fault

iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab

This tab allows you to configure up to 16 Schlage Wireless Panel Interface Modules (PIMs) on an iSTAR Classic/Pro.

An iSTAR controller can support up to 16 Schlage Wireless readers. The number of PIM boards needed to support your
readers can vary, depending upon Reader type and the physical location of the reader/lock hardware. You could connect
16 readers to a single PIM if all readers are within the range/distance specifications for wireless readers. If some readers
are farther away, additional PIMs may be needed to place a PIM within wireless range of each reader. You can configure
no more than 16 PIMs and 16 Readers per controller.

The AD300 series readers have an integrated PIM in the reader/lock hardware - these readers require you to configure an
iSTAR PIM board with only that reader attached to the PIM.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 165

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Support for the following Schlage features requires C•CURE 9000 2.10 R2 Patch 1 or later, and iSTAR
NOTE firmware 5.2.1 or later.
■ Wake on Radio
■ Keypad support
■ Manual Lock Override
■ Push Button

PIM and Reader Addresses

Each PIM has an address between 0 (zero) and 15. On an iSTAR, boards are numbered starting at 1, not 0. As a result, a
PIM with address 0 is configured on the iSTAR as PIM #1.

Each Reader has a reader address between 0 (zero) and 15. On an iSTAR, readers are numbered starting at 1, not 0. As a
result, a reader with address 0 is configured on the iSTAR as reader #1.

Example
If you have PIMs with addresses of 4, 8, 12, and 15, you should configure these PIMs on the iSTAR as PIM5, PIM9,
PIM13, and PIM16.
If you have readers with addresses 0 through 5, you should configure these readers on the iSTAR as iSTAR PIM 485
Reader1 through iSTAR PIM 485 Reader6.

Once you have assigned a reader address to one PIM, that reader address will be unavailable on all other PIM boards on
the iSTAR.

Example
You configure Reader address #1 on PIM Board #1. On every other PIM Board you configure on this iSTAR, Reader
address #1 is unavailable (grayed out).

The address ranges for readers connected to PIMs cannot overlap. If you set up your PIM hardware so that a specific PIM
controls reader addresses 0 through 5, you cannot assign a different PIM to control any of the addresses in between.

Example
You have two PIMs. You set one to control Reader addresses 0 through 5 (readers 1 through 6 on the iSTAR). You
other PIM must be setup to control readers outside this range, such as Reader addresses 8 through 11 (Readers 9
through 12 on the iSTAR).
If you add another PIM, that PIM cannot be assigned to control any of the already assigned addresses, even if the
address are not in use at this time by one of the two existing PIMs. The new PIM could only be assigned Reader
addresses 6 and 7 (Readers 7 and 8) and/or Reader addresses 12 through 15 (Readers 13 through 16).

iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab Definitions

The fields and buttons on the iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs tab are described in Table 28 on Page 167.

166 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 28:  iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIM Tab

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create all 16 PIMs. When you click Create All PIMs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you can click
PIMs in the Edit column to open the iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor to configure a PIMs.

Delete All When you click Delete All PIMs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all 16 PIMs, and all 16 PIM boards
PIMs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor to configure a PIM. See iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor on
Page 236.

PIM Index This column displays the number of each PIM Board.

column

Configured Click in this column to create a PIM Board (make it available to be edited) .

column

Name column Displays the name for this PIM Board The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the iSTAR Controller editor.
Close

iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro)

The Boards tab is available for iSTAR Classic and iSTAR Pro Controllers only.

The Boards tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor lets you configure the following inputs, outputs, and ACM boards.
■ Main Board Inputs on the GCM.
• Tamper - this input activates when the controller cabinet is opened.
• Power Failure - this input monitors for AC power failure of the apS or UPS supplying power to the controller. When
this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM has lost its primary power source, and is operating on
batteries.
• External Battery Low (iSTAR Ultra/Classic/Pro) - this input activates when the external emergency battery (from
the apS or UPS) is running low on power.
• Internal Battery Fault (iSTAR Ultra only) - this is a logical input that reports the state of the onboard battery.
• General (iSTAR Ultra only) - this input is a general purpose Supervised Input on the GCM.
■ Main Board Output on the GCM (iSTAR Classic only).
■ ACM 1 and ACM 2 Boards for the Controller (iSTAR Classic/Pro only).
Add-on Access Control Modules (ACM Boards) provide access control functionality by supporting readers, outputs
and inputs.
■ ACM 1 and ACM 2 Boards on SPI port 1 (iSTAR Ultra only) - used to configure Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on an
iSTAR ACM Board attached to SPI port 1 on an iSTAR Ultra Controller.
■ ACM 1 and ACM 2 Boards on SPI port 2 (iSTAR Ultra only) - used to configure Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on an
iSTAR ACM Board attached to SPI port 2 on an iSTAR Ultra Controller.

The iSTAR Controller Boards tab is shown in Figure 59 on Page 168.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 167

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Figure 59:  iSTAR Controller Editor Boards Tab

To Configure the iSTAR Controller Boards Tab

1. From the iSTAR Controller editor, click the Boards tab.
2. Create the Main Board Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box
for only the Inputs you wish to create.
3. To use an existing Input Template to create one or more of the Main Board Inputs, click in the Template Column, then
click . A list of available iSTAR Input Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using
Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more detailed information about using
Templates to create Controller Inputs.
4. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Main Board Inputs. See the definitions of the Main Board Inputs in
Table 29 on Page 169.
5. Create the Main Board Output if needed by clicking Create Output or by selecting the Configured check box for the
Main Board Output.
6. Click in the Edit column to configure the Main Board Output. See the definition of the Main Board Output in Table
29 on Page 169 and see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248 for configuration instructions.

168 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

7. Create the ACM Boards that you need by clicking Create All ACMs or by selecting the Configured check box for
only the ACMs you wish to create.
8. Click in the Edit column to configure an ACM. See iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor on Page 208
for configuration instructions.
9. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Boards tab, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration.

iSTAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions

The iSTAR Controller Boards tab includes the fields and buttons described in Table 29 on Page 169.
Table 29:  iSTAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Main Board Inputs

Create All Inputs Click to create the three Main Board Inputs. When you click Create All Inputs the Configured
column check boxes are selected, and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR
Input Editor to configure an Input.

Delete All Inputs When you click Delete All Inputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for
all three Main Board Inputs, and all three Inputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have
configured are lost).

Tamper The Tamper input activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting
surface.
NOTE: For UL applications, this field must be enabled.
Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to
open the iSTAR Input Editor General tab to configure the Tamper input. From the Input Editor
you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated
with the Tamper Input.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to
creating the Input.

Power Failure The AC power failureinput monitors the AC power failure output of a battery backup unit, such
as the Advanced Power System (apS). When this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM
has lost its primary power source, and is operating on batteries.
NOTE: For UL applications, this field must be enabled.
Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to
open the iSTAR Input Editor General tab to configure the AC Power Fail Input. From the Input
Editor you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are
associated with the AC Power Fail Input.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to
creating the Input.

External Battery Low The External Battery Low input activates when the emergency battery is running low on power.
(iSTAR Classic/Pro) NOTE: For UL applications, this field must be enabled.
NOTE: This field for iSTAR Pro and Classic is on the Boards Tab. For iSTAR eX and Edge, this
field is on the Inputs Tab.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 169

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 29:  iSTAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

External Battery Low Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to
(iSTAR open the iSTAR Input Editor General tab to configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and
eX/Edge/Ultra) State Images that are associated with the Battery Low Input.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to
creating the Input.

Internal Battery Fault A logical input that reports the state of the onboard battery. This Input is configured ( ) by
(iSTAR Ultra) default when the controller is created.

General A physical input that can be used to monitor a condition, particularly useful for Ultra
(iSTAR Ultra) configurations that are GCM only.

Main Board Output (Classic and Ultra only)

Create Click to create the Main Board Output. When you click Create the Configured column check
box is selected, and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to
configure the Output.

Delete When you click Delete, the check box in the Configured column is cleared for the Main Board
(iSTAR Classic/Ultra) Output, and the Output is immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

1 Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to
open the iSTAR Output Editor General tab to configure the Options, Groups, Status and State
Images that are associated with the Main Board Output.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to
creating the Output.

ACMs

Create All ACMs Click to create all the ACM Boards. When you click Create All ACMs the Configured column
(iSTAR Classic/Pro check boxes are selected, and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR ACM
only) Board Editor to configure an ACM Board.

Delete All ACMs When you click Delete All ACMs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for
(iSTAR Classic/Pro both Main Board ACM Boards, and both ACM Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you
only) have configured are lost).

Board1 Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to
open the iSTAR ACM Editor General tab to configure the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that are
associated with the first ACM board.

Board2 Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to
open the iSTAR ACM Editor General tab to configure the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that are
associated with the second ACM board.

iSTAR eX and Edge Controller Inputs Tab

The iSTAR Controller Inputs tab is available only on the iSTAR eX Controller editor and the iSTAR Edge Controller editor.

The Inputs tab lets you define the Special Purpose and General Purpose Inputs for the Controller.

170 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

All of the inputs support event triggers based on their active or inactive states. These triggers can activate alarms, send
emails, run a Roll Call Report, etc.

iSTAR eX Controller Inputs
Special Purpose Inputs
■ Tamper input – Activates when the controller cabinet is opened.
■ Power Failure input – Monitors the AC power failure output of the PMB. When this alarm input activates, it indicates
that the PMB has had an AC Power Failure and is now supplying battery power to the controller.
Similarly, if the eX is the NPS (No Power Supply) version, the Power Fail output of the UPS or apS is monitored with
the same result.
■ External Battery Low input – Activates when the battery connected to the PMB emergency battery has reached a
yellow warning level. This will be followed, after some further use, with a Backup Now condition (Battery really low)
which will backup the configuration and data and then shut down the controller.
If the eX is the NPS (No Power Supply) version, the Battery Low output of the UPS or apS is monitored and will signal
low battery. It is recommended to shut down the unit being powered by the low battery.

Tamper, AC power fail, and Low battery inputs must be programmed for UL applications.
NOTE

General Purpose Inputs

■ iSTAR eX provides 16 general purpose inputs.

iSTAR Edge Controller Inputs

Special Purpose Inputs
■ Tamper input – Activates when the controller cabinet is opened.
■ Power Failure input – Monitors the AC power failure output of the UPS (Un-interruptible Power Supply) or apS and
indicates an AC Power Failure resulting in the UPS or apS supplying battery power to the controller.
■ Battery Low input – Activates when the UPS or apS emergency battery has reached a yellow warning level. It is
recommended to shut down the unit being powered by the low battery. Do not confuse this input with Onboard
Battery Low.

Tamper, AC power fail, and Low battery inputs must be programmed for UL applications.
NOTE

■ Onboard Battery Low input – This input activates when the voltage of all four onboard AA alkaline batteries in series
reaches 4.6 volts, or if a battery is missing or disconnected.

The following Fire Alarm Interface (FAI) features are only supported on these iSTAR Edge models:
NOTE
n 0312-5010-02
n 0312-5010-04

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 171

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

■ FAI Supervision State input – This input represents the F (Fire) Input State - the state of the F (Fire) input coming into
J40 of the iSTAR Edge. In other words, this is the fire alarm. The Fire Alarm Interface activates the relays on the
iSTAR Edge when the F input goes True. This input is supervised as NC (Normally Closed).
■ FAI Relay Control input – The FAI relay control is a pseudo input that indicates the state of the Relay Drive signal
that activates or latches the selected relays when the F (Fire) input is True.
■ FAI Key Supervision Stateinput – This input represents the K (Key) Input State. The K input is used to unlatch the
latched relays, which removes the relay drive signal, once it is clear that the fire emergency is over. The K (Key) input
is usually a momentary contact key switch. The K input is supervised as NO (Normally Open).

General Purpose Inputs

■ iSTAR Edge provides eight general purpose inputs.

Fire Alarm Interface

FAI (Fire Alarm Interface) is a hardware feature on the iSTAR Edge that is typically used to perform the following tasks
when a fire alarm signal is present.
■ Unlock all doors when fire is present.
■ Remove power from various devices when fire is present.

All three of the FAI Inputs support Event triggers based on their active or inactive states. These Event triggers can be
configured to activate alarms, send emails, run a Roll Call Report, etc based on the state changes of the three FAI inputs.

FAI Modes
There are two basic FAI modes that can be configured at the controller.

n FAI without Latch - This method requires the F (Fire) input (NC) of J40 plus the individual enable switches for each
relay (SW2 through SW5).
n FAI with Latch and subsequent Unlatch - This method requires the F (Fire) input of J40 plus the individual enable
switches for each relay (SW2 through SW5), plus SW6 to enable the Latch and J40 K (Key) input (NO) to reset the
Latch.

The Key input is usually a key switch that momentarily closes when the key is inserted and rotated.

The FAI mode chosen at the controller will determine how you might want to use the Triggers and Actions available in the
software to provide notification of a fire alarm and related actions. See the iSTAR Edge Installation and Configuration
Guide for detailed information about wiring the FAI inputs.

To Configure the iSTAR eX/Edge Controller Inputs Tab

1. From the iSTAR Ex/Edge Controller Editor, click the Inputs tab.
2. Create the Special Purpose Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured
check box for only the Inputs you wish to create.
3. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Special Purpose Inputs. See the definitions of the Special Purpose
Inputs in Table 30 on Page 173 and see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240 for configuration instructions.
4. Create the General Purpose Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured
check box for only the Inputs you wish to create.

172 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

5. Click in the Edit column to configure individual General Purpose Inputs. See the definitions of the General
Purpose Inputs in Table 30 on Page 173 and see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240.
6. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Inputs tab, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration.

iSTAR eX/Edge Controller Inputs Tab Definitions

The iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Inputs tabs include the fields and buttons detailed in Table 30 on Page 173.
Table 30:  iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Inputs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Special Purpose Inputs

Create All Inputs Click to create all the Special Purpose Inputs. When you click Create All Inputs the Configured column check boxes are
selected, and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure an Input.

Delete All Inputs When you click Delete All Inputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Special Purpose Inputs,
and all these Inputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). You will need to confirm each
deletion.

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure a Special Purpose Input. See iSTAR Input Editor on
Page 240.

Input Type This column displays the type of each Special Purpose Input.
column

Configured Click in this column to create an input (make it available to be edited) .

column

Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Template column Click in this column, then click to select an Input template to use for creating this Input from the list of available Input
templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the input.

Tamper The Tamper input activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface.
Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor. From the
Input Editor you can configure the settings and link to events through triggers.

Power Failure The Power Failure input monitors the AC power failure output of a battery backup unit, such as the Advanced Power
System (apS). When this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM has lost its primary power source, and is operating
on batteries.

Battery Low The Battery Low input activates when the emergency DC battery is running low on power.

FAI Supervision (iSTAR Edge only) – This is the F (Fire) Input State. Indicates the state of the F (Fire) input coming into J40 of the iSTAR
State Edge. In other words, this is the fire alarm.

FAI Key (iSTAR Edge only) – This is the K (Key) input state. Indicates the state of the K (Key) switch at J40 of the iSTAR Edge.
Supervision State

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 173

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Inputs Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

FAI Relay Control (iSTAR Edge only) – This pseudo input indicates the state of the Relay Drive signal that activates or latches the selected
relays when the F (Fire) input is true,

Onboard Battery The Onboard Battery Low activates when the voltage of all four onboard AA alkaline batteries in series reaches 4.6 volts,
Low (iSTAR Edge or if a battery is missing or disconnected.
only) Upon loss of external or PoE power to the Edge, data is written to onboard flash. Four onboard non-rechargeable alkaline
AA batteries provide power for the backup process and maintaining the clock.
Backup is valid for the period the onboard batteries can maintain the clock. The period has been tested for >3 days, but
should reasonably last for 2 weeks.

General Purpose Inputs

Create All Inputs Click to create all the General Purpose Inputs. When you click Create All Inputs the Configured column check boxes are
selected, and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure an Input.

Delete All Inputs When you click Delete All Inputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all General Purpose Inputs,
and all these Inputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure a General Purpose Input. See iSTAR Input Editor
on Page 240.

Index column This column displays the number of each General Purpose Input.

Configured Click in this column to create an input (make it available to be edited) .

column

Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in
this field.

Template column Click in this column, then click to select an Input template to use for creating this Input from the list of available Input
templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the input.

Index 1 - 8 (iSTAR The General Purpose Inputs can be configured in an iSTAR Door as door switch monitor or request to exit inputs.
Edge)
Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor. From the
Index 1 - 16 editor you can configure the settings for a General Purpose Input.
(iSTAR eX)

iSTAR Edge/eX Controller Outputs Tab

The iSTAR Controller Outputs tab is available only on the iSTAR eX Controller editor and the iSTAR Edge Controller
editor.

The Outputs tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor lets you define four Relay Outputs and four Open Collector Outputs (on the
iSTAR eX only).

To Configure the iSTAR eX/Edge Outputs Tab

1. From the iSTAR Ex/Edge Controller Editor, click the Outputs tab.

174 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

2. Create the Relay Outputs that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting the Configured check box
for only the Outputs you wish to create.
3. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Relay Outputs. See the definitions of the Relay Outputs in Table
31 on Page 175 and see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248 for configuration instructions.
4. On an iSTAR eX, create the Open Collector Outputs that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting
the Configured check box for only the Outputs you wish to create.
5. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Open Collector Outputs. See the definitions of the Open Collector
Outputs in Table 31 on Page 175 and see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248 for configuration instructions.
6. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Outputs tab, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration.

iSTAR eX/Edge Controller Outputs Tab Definitions

The iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Outputs tab includes the fields and buttons detailed in Table 31 on Page 175.
Table 31:  iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Outputs Tab Definitions

Box Description

Relay Outputs (iSTAR ex and iSTAR Edge)

Create All Click to create all the Relay Outputs. When you click Create All Outputs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and
Outputs you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure an Output.

Delete All When you click Delete All Outputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Relay Outputs, and all these
Inputs Outputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure a Relay Output. See iSTAR Output Editor on Page
248.

Index column This column displays the number of each Relay Output.

Configured Click in this column to create an Output (make it available to be edited) .

column

Name column Displays the name for this Output. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Template Click in this column, then click to select an Output template to use for creating this Output from the list of available Output
column templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the Output.

Relay Outputs Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor. From
1-4 the editor you can configure the settings for the Relay Output.

Open Collector Outputs (iSTAR eX Only)

Create All Click to create all the Open Collector Outputs. When you click Create All Outputs the Configured column check boxes are
Outputs selected, and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure an Output.

Delete All When you click Delete All Outputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Open Collector Outputs, and
Outputs all these Outputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 175

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 31:  iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Outputs Tab Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure an Open Collector Output. See iSTAR Output Editor
on Page 248.

Index column This column displays the type of each Open Collector Output.

Configured Click in this column to create an Output (make it available to be edited).

column

Name column Displays the name for this Output. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Template Click in this column, then click to select an Output template to use for creating this Output from the list of available Output
column templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the Output.

Open Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor. From
Collector the editor you can configure the settings for an Open Collector Output.
Outputs 5 - 8

iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs

The COM1, COM2, and COM3 tabs in the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor let you define security objects that are connected
to the COM1, COM2, and COM3 ports. RM readers, I/8s, and R/8s can be connected to the COMx ports.

The iSTAR Edge can support either two or four Readers, depending on the model.

These Readers can be configured on either the Readers tab or on the COM1, COM2, or COM3 tabs in any combination, as
long as the total number of Readers does not exceed the maximum allowed.

The number of I/8 and R/8 bus modules that are supported on the COMx ports depend upon the model:
■ Four I/8 s and four R/8s are supported on the two-reader model.
■ Eight I/8 s and eight R/8s are supported on the four-reader model.

To Configure the iSTAR Edge COM1, COM2, or COM3 Tab

1. From the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor, click the COMx tab.
2. In the Input Boards table, create the Input Boards that you need by clicking Create All Input Boards or by selecting
the Configured check box for only the Input Boards you wish to create.
3. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Input Boards. See the definitions of the Input Boards in Table 35 on
Page 185 and see iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 215 for configuration instructions.
4. In the Output Boards table, create the Output Boards that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting
the Configured check box for only the Output boards you wish to create.
5. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Output Boards. See the definitions of the Output Boards in Table 35
on Page 185 and see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220 for configuration instructions.
6. In the Reader Boards table, create the Readers that you need by clicking Create All Readers or by selecting the
Configured check box for only the Reader you wish to create.

176 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

7. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Readers. See the definitions of the Readers in Table 35 on Page
185 and see iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for configuration instructions.
8. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration.

iSTAR Edge COM Tabs Definitions

Table 32:  iSTAR Edge COM Tabs Definitions

Box Description

Input Boards

Create All Click to create all the Input Boards. When you click Create All Input Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected,
Input and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor to configure an Input Board.
Boards

Delete All When you click Delete All Input Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Input Boards, and all these
Inputs Input Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).
Boards

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor to configure an Input Board. See iSTAR Input Board Editor on
Page 215.

Index This column displays the number of each Input Board.

column

Configured Click in this column to create an Input Board (make it available to be edited) .
column

Name Displays the name for this Input Board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

Input Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor. From the
Boards 1 - editor you can configure the settings for the Input Board.
8

Output Boards

Create All Click to create all the Output Boards. When you click Create All Output Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected,
Output and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board Editor to configure an Output Board.
Boards

Delete All When you click Delete All Output Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Output Boards, and all
Output these Output Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).
Boards

Output Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board Editor. From the
Boards 1 - editor you can configure the settings for the Output Board.
8

Readers

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 177

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 32:  iSTAR Edge COM Tabs Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers
Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Readers 1 - Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor. From the
4 editor you can configure the settings for the Reader.
You can create up to four Readers in this table for an iSTAR Edge, but if your iSTAR Edge is not a 4-reader model, Readers 3 - 4
will not function.
The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader.

iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab

The iSTAR Edge Controller Editor Wiegand tab, shown in Figure 60 on Page 178, allows you to configure direct connect
Reader devices. Readers that are not connected directly are configured on the COM1, COM2, or COM3 tabs.
Figure 60:  iSTAR Edge Controller Editor Wiegand and COM Tabs

The Readers can be configured on either the Wiegand tab or on the COM1, COM2, or COM3 tab in any combination, as
long as the total number of Readers does not exceed the maximum allowed.

The iSTAR Edge supports a maximum of either two readers or four readers depending on the model.

178 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

You can configure up to two Readers on the Wiegand tab, and the remaining Readers, in any combination, on the COM1,
COM2, and COM3 tabs. See the iSTAR Edge Installation and Configuration Guide for more information about the two
models.

Example:
If you configure two Readers on the iSTAR Edge Wiegand tab, the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor makes the Reader 1
- 2 objects on the COM1 and COM2 tabs unavailable (shaded gray) leaving Reader 3 - 4 objects available.

To Configure the iSTAR Edge Wiegand Tab

1. From the iSTAR Edge Controller Editor, click the Wiegand tab.
2. Create the Readers that you need by clicking Create All Readers or by selecting the Configured check box for only
the Readers you wish to create.
3. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Readers. See the definitions of the Readers in Table 33 on Page
179 and see iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for configuration instructions.
4. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Wiegand tab, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration.

iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab Definitions

The iSTAR Edge Wiegand tab includes the fields and buttons detailed in Table 33 on Page 179.
Table 33:  iSTAR Edge Wiegand Tab Definitions

Box Description

Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers, the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers
Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496.
column

Index This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect Wiegand reader.
column

Configured
Click in this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited) .
column

Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

Template Click in this column prior to creating the Reader, then click to select a Reader template from the list of available Reader
column templates.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 179

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 33:  iSTAR Edge Wiegand Tab Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Readers 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Reader and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader
-2 Editor General tab to configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with a Reader. See
iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for detailed instructions for configuring iSTAR Readers.
If the row in this table for a particular reader is unavailable for selection (shaded gray) it indicates that this reader number is
configured on one of the COM tabs in the iSTAR Controller Editor.
The Name column displays a name comprised of the Reader Type and the iSTAR Controller name. You can click in this column to
edit the Reader name.

iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab

The iSTAR eX Wiegand tab, shown in Figure 61 on Page 181, allows you to configure direct connect Reader devices.
Readers that are not connected directly are configured on the COM1 or COM2 tabs.

The iSTAR eX can support up to a total of eight Readers if an iSTAR eX Security Key is installed, or four Readers without
the Security Key.

These Readers can be configured on either the Readers tab or on the COM1 or COM2 tabs in any combination, as long as
the total number of Readers does not exceed the maximum allowed.

For iSTAR eX, you can configure up to four of these Readers on the iSTAR eX Wiegand tab, and the remaining Readers, in
any combination, on the COM1 and COM2 tabs. See the iSTAR eX Installation and Configuration Guide for more
information about the iSTAR eX Security Key.

Example:
If you configure Readers 1 and 2 on the iSTAR eX Wiegand tab, the iSTAR eX Controller Editor makes the Reader 1
and 2 objects on the COM1 and COM2 tabs unavailable (shaded gray). Conversely, when you add Readers 3 and 4 to
one of the COMx tabs, the corresponding readers on the Wiegand tab are unavailable.

180 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Figure 61:  iSTAR eX Wiegand and COM Tabs

To Configure the iSTAR eX Wiegand Tab

1. From the iSTAR eX Controller Editor, click the Wiegand tab.
2. Create the Readers that you need by clicking Create All Readers or by selecting the Configured check box for only
the Readers you wish to create.
3. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Readers. See the definitions of the Readers in Table 34 on Page
181 and see iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for configuration instructions.
4. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller Wiegand tab, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration.

iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab Definitions

The iSTAR eX Wiegand tab includes the fields and buttons detailed in Table 34 on Page 181.

Table 34:  iSTAR eX Wiegand Tab Definitions

Box Description

Create All Readers Click to create all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers, the Configured column check boxes are
selected, and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader.

Delete All Readers When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all
these Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 181

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 34:  iSTAR eX Wiegand Tab Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on
Page 496.

Index column This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect
Wiegand reader.

Configured column Click in this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited).

Name column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in
this field.

Template column Click in this column prior to creating the Reader, then click to select a Reader template from the list of available
Reader templates.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader.

Readers 1 - 8 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Reader and click located in the Edit column to open the
Readers 5 - 8 are only iSTAR Reader Editor General tab to configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are
available if the 8 reader associated with a Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for detailed instructions for configuring iSTAR
USB key is present in Readers.
the GCM. If the row in this table for a particular reader is unavailable for selection (shaded gray) it indicates that this reader
number is configured on one of the COM tabs in the iSTAR Controller Editor. In Figure 61 on Page 181, for example,
Reader #4 is configured on another tab.
The Name column displays a name comprised of the Reader Type and the iSTAR Controller name. You can click in
this column to edit the Reader name.

iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs

The COM1 and COM2 tabs in the iSTAR eX Controller Editor, let you define security objects that are connected to the
COM1 and COM2 ports.

The iSTAR eX Contoller COM1 and COM2 tabs have a Protocol drop-down list that lets you choose the type of serial
communications board is connected to the controller:
■ COM1 or COM2 Schlage Wireless PIM on Page 182
■ COM1 or COM2 RM Communications on Page 183

The options available on the COM1 or COM2 tab depend upon which Serial Communications option you select.

COM1 or COM2 Schlage Wireless PIM

If you select Schlage Wireless from the Protocol drop-down list, the COM1 or COM2 tab displays 16 possible
PIM Boards that you can configure.

To Configure the iSTAR eX COM1 or COM2 Tab for Schlage Wireless PIMs
1. From the iSTAR Ex Controller Editor, click one of the COM tabs.
2. Select Schlage Wireless from the Protocol drop-down list.

182 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

3. In the Schlage Wireles PIMs table that appears, create the PIMs that you need by clicking Create All PIMs or by
selecting the Configured check box for only the PIMs you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to configure individual PIMs. See:
■ iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab Definitions on Page 166 for definitions for the PIM board fields and buttons.
■ iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab on Page 513 for configuration instructions.
5. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs.

COM1 or COM2 RM Communications

If you select the RM option from the Protocol drop-down list, the COM1 or COM2 tab displays 4 Input Boards, 4 Output
Boards, and up to 8 RM Readers that you can configure.

Figure 62 on Page 183 shows the COM1 and COM2 tabs for an iSTAR eX.
Figure 62:  iSTAR eX Controller COM Tabs

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 183

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

The iSTAR eX can support up to four Readers, and an additional four Readers if equipped with an iSTAR eX Security Key.

These Readers can be configured on either the Readers tab or on the COM1 or COM2 tabs, in any combination, as long as
the total number of Readers does not exceed the maximum allowed.

Example:
If you configure two Readers on the iSTAR eX Controller Readers tab and two Readers on the COM1 tab, the Editor
makes the remaining Reader connections on the Reader, COM1, and COM2 tabs unavailable. Sections of the COM
tab are shaded gray (unavailable) to signify that these devices are configured on another tab.

If you select the RM option from the Protocol drop-down list, COM1 and COM2 are configured to support RM bus readers.
The iSTAR eX can support up to four RM reader devices (or eight Readers if the iSTAR eX Security Key is installed). A
total of eight I/8 and eight R/8 devices can also be configured on the iSTAR eX on COM1 and/or COM2.

However you configure iSTAR eX Readers, they must match the setting of the S1 switch on the PMB. The
NOTE S1 switches define which COM port the RM ports are connected to in the hardware. See the iSTAR eX
Installation and Configuration Guide.

To Configure the iSTAR eX COM1 or COM2 Tab

1. From the iSTAR Ex Controller Editor, click one of the COM tabs.
2. Select RM from the Protocol drop-down list.
3. In the Input Boards table, create the Input Boards that you need by clicking Create All Input Boards or by selecting
the Configured check box for only the Input Boards you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Input Boards. See the definitions of the Input Boards in Table 35 on
Page 185 and see iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 215 for configuration instructions.
5. In the Output Boards table, create the Output Boards that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting
the Configured check box for only the Output boards you wish to create.
6. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Output Boards. See the definitions of the Output Boards in Table 35
on Page 185 and see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220 for configuration instructions.
7. In the Readers Boards table, create the Readers that you need by clicking Create All Readers or by selecting the
Configured check box for only the Reader you wish to create.
8. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Readers. See the definitions of the Readers in Table 35 on Page
185 and see iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for configuration instructions.
9. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configuration.

iSTAR eX COM Tabs Definitions

Table 35 on Page 185 contains definitions for the fields and buttons on the iSTAR eX COM tabs.

184 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 35:  iSTAR eX COM Tabs Definitions

Box Description

Input Boards

Create All Click to create all the Input Boards. When you click Create All Input Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected,
Input and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor to configure an Input Board.
Boards

Delete All When you click Delete All Input Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Input Boards, and all these
Inputs Input Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).
Boards

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor to configure an Input Board. See iSTAR Input Board Editor on
Page 215.

Index This column displays the number of each Input Board.

column

Configured Click in this column to create an Input Board (make it available to be edited) .
column

Name Displays the name for this Input Board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

Input Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor. From the
Boards 1 - 8 editor you can configure the settings for the Input Board.

Output Boards

Create All Click to create all the Output Boards. When you click Create All Output Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected,
Output and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board Editor to configure an Output Board.
Boards

Delete All When you click Delete All Output Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Output Boards, and all
Output these Output Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).
Boards

Output Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board Editor. From the
Boards 1 - 8 editor you can configure the settings for the Output Board.

Readers

Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these
Readers Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Readers 1 - Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor. From the
8 editor you can configure the settings for the Reader.
You can create up to eight Readers in this table for an iSTAR eX, but if your iSTAR eX does not have an iSTAR eX Security key,
Readers 5-8 will not function.
The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 185

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor Inputs Tab

The Inputs tab lets you define the Main Board (GCM) inputs for the Controller.

All of the inputs support event triggers based on their active or inactive states. These triggers can activate alarms, send
emails, run a Roll Call Report, etc.

The Input tab fields and buttons are described in Table 36 on Page 186.
Table 36:  Ultra Inputs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Main Board Inputs

Create All Click to create all the Main Board Inputs. When you click Create All Inputs the Configured column check boxes are selected,
Inputs and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure an Input.

Delete All When you click Delete All Inputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Main Board Inputs, and all
Inputs these Inputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). You will need to confirm each deletion.

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure a Main Board Input. See iSTAR Input Editor on Page
240.

Input Type This column displays the type of each Main Board Input.
column

Configured Click in this column to create an input (make it available to be edited) .

column

Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Template Click in this column, then click to select an Input template to use for creating this Input from the list of available Input
column templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the input.

Input Type

Tamper Activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface.
Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor. From the Input
Editor you can configure the settings and link to events through triggers.

Power Failure Monitors the AC power failure output of a battery backup unit. When this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM has lost
its primary power source, and is operating on batteries.

External Activates when the emergency DC battery is running low on power.

Battery Low

Port Power Activates if there is a problem with the power on the port.
RS 485 Port
1/2

CPNI Alarm Activates if the CPNI (Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure) switch S1-2 is changed.

186 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Tamper, AC power fail, and Low battery inputs must be programmed for UL applications.
NOTE

iSTAR Ultra Controller Boards Tab

Use the iSTAR Controller Editor Boards tab, shown in Figure 63 on Page 187, to select the ACM type and to open the
iSTAR ACM Board editor to configure readers, outputs and inputs.

You must select the correct ACM type used by the controller:
NOTE
■ iSTAR Ultra - select iSTAR Ultra ACM.
■ iSTAR Ultra SE - select iSTAR Ultra ACM SE.
The ACMs listed in the table are not configurable until the ACM type is selected.

Figure 63:  iSTAR Ultra Controller Boards Tab

To Configure the iSTAR Controller Boards Tab

1. From the iSTAR Controller editor, click the Boards tab.
2. Select the ACM Type:

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 187

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

• iSTAR Ultra - select iSTAR Ultra ACM.

• iSTAR Ultra SE - select iSTAR Ultra ACM SE.
3. Create the ACM Boards that you need by clicking Create All ACMs, or by selecting the Configured check box for
only the ACMs you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to configure an ACM. See iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor on Page 202
5. Click Save and Close.
Table 37:  iSTAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

ACM Type Select the iSTAR ACM type from the ACM Type drop-down menu.
• iSTAR Ultra - select iSTAR Ultra ACM.
• iSTAR Ultra SE - select iSTAR Ultra SE ACM

Create ACM When you click Create ACM the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you can
click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Ultra ACM Editor to configure the ACM.

Delete ACM When you click Delete ACM, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all
ACMs, and are deleted (all configuration settings are lost).

Index Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to
open the iSTAR Ultra ACM Editor to configure the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that are
associated with the ACM board.

iSTAR Ultra Video Controller Boards Tab

Use the iSTAR Controller Editor Boards tab to select the ACM type and to open the iSTAR ACM Board editor to configure
readers, outputs and inputs.

To Configure the iSTAR Controller Boards Tab

1. From the iSTAR Controller editor, click the Boards tab.
2. Create the ACM Boards that you need by clicking Create All ACMs, or by selecting the Configured check box for
only the ACMs you wish to create.
3. Click in the Edit column to configure an ACM. See iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor on Page 202
4. Click Save and Close.
Table 38:  iSTAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create ACM When you click Create ACM the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you can click in the Edit column to open
the iSTAR Ultra ACM Editor to configure the ACM.

Delete ACM When you click Delete ACM, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all ACMs, and are deleted (all
configuration settings are lost).

188 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 38:  iSTAR Controller Boards Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Configured The check box in this column must be selected to be able to configure the ACM.

Index Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Ultra ACM Editor to
configure the Inputs, Outputs, and Readers that are associated with the ACM board.

iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab

The IP-ACMs tab is used to configure the IP-ACM Offline Mode, readers, inputs, outputs, and triggers.

See Chapter 7, Configuring the IP-ACM for information about configuring the IP-ACM.

iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs

The COM1 and COM2 tabs in the iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor let you define security objects that are connected to the
COM1 and COM2 ports. Aperio Hubs and Schlage PIMs can be configured for the COM1 and COM2 ports.
Figure 64:  iSTAR Ultra Controller COM Tabs

The iSTAR Ultra can support up to 32 Readers. There can be up to 16 ACM Readers and up to 32 Aperio Readers or
Schlage Readers, but the total number of readers cannot exceed 32. If you try to configure any additional readers, an error
message appears. The iSTAR Ultra supports either Aperio or Schlage Wireless Readers. There cannot be a mixture of the
two readers on one iSTAR Ultra.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 189

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

The ACM Readers can be configured as Wiegand direct connect or RM bus as long as the total number of Readers does
not exceed eight per ACM or sixteen per iSTAR Ultra.

The Aperio Readers can be configured on any of the possible 30 Hubs, in any combination, as long as the total number of
Readers does not exceed 32.

There can be up to 15 Aperio Hubs per COMx port, allowing for a total of 30 Hubs per iSTAR Ultra. Each Hub can support
up to 8, or 1, Assa Abloy Readers with a maximum of 16 readers per COMx port. This provides for a maximum of 32
readers per iSTAR Ultra.

If using a 1 Reader Hub, the maximum is 30 Aperio Readers (i.e., 1 Reader per Hub).
NOTE

To Configure the iSTAR Ultra COM1 or COM2 Tab for Aperio

1. From the iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor, click the COMx tab.
2. Select Aperio in the Protocol field. This will also select Aperio in the other COMx tab.
3. In the Aperio Hubs table, create the Aperio Hubs that you need by selecting the Configured check box for only the
Hubs you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Hubs. See the definitions of the Hubs in iSTAR Ultra COM Tabs
Definitions on Page 190 and see iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) on Page 232 for
configuration instructions.
5. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configurations.

To Configure the iSTAR Ultra COM1 or COM2 Tab for Schlage

1. From the iSTAR Ultra Controller Editor, click the COMx tab.
2. Select Schlage in the Protocol field. This will also select Schlage in the other COMx tab.
3. In the Schlage Wireless PIMs table, create the Schlage PIMs that you need by by selecting the Configured check
box for only the PIMs you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to configure individual PIMS.
5. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM tabs, or click another
tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configurations.

iSTAR Ultra COM Tabs Definitions

Table 39:  iSTAR Ultra COM Tabs Definitions

Box Description

Aperio Hubs

Create All Click to create all the Aperio Hubs. When you click Create All Hubs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Hubs can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor to configure an Aperio Hub.

190 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 39:  iSTAR Ultra COM Tabs Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Delete All When you click Delete All Hubs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Hubs, and all these Hubs are deleted
Hubs after you confirm each deletion (any settings you have configured are lost).

Protocol Select Aperio.

Edit Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor to configure an Aperio Hub. See iSTAR Aperio
column RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) on Page 232.

Index This column displays the number of each Hub (from 1 to 15).
column

Configured Click in this column to create an Aperio Hub (make it available to be edited).
column

Name Displays the name for this Aperio Hub. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

Hubs 1 - 15 Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board
editor. From the editor you can configure the settings for the Hub.

Schlage PIMs

Create All Click to create all the Schlage PIMs. When you click Create All PIMs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
PIMs can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board Editor to configure a Schlage PIM.

Delete All When you click Delete All PIMs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all PIMs, and all these PIMs are
PIMs deleted after you confirm each deletion (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board Editor to configure a Schlage PIM.
column

Index This column displays the number of each PIM (from 1 to 16).
column

Configured Click in this column to create a Schlage PIM (make it available to be edited).
column

Name Displays the name for this Schlage PIM. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

PIMs 1 - 16 Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board editor.
From the editor you can configure the settings for the PIM.

iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Inputs Tab

The Inputs tab lets you define the General Control Module (GCM) inputs for the Controller.

All of the inputs support event triggers based on their active or inactive states. These triggers can activate alarms, send
emails, run a Roll Call Report, etc.

The Input tab fields and buttons are described in Table 40 on Page 192.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 191

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 40:  Ultra LT Inputs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Main Board Inputs

Create All Click to create all the Main Board Inputs. When you click Create All Inputs the Configured column check boxes are selected,
Inputs and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure an Input.

Delete All When you click Delete All Inputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Main Board Inputs, and all
Inputs these Inputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost). You will need to confirm each deletion.

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure a Main Board Input. See iSTAR Input Editor on Page
240.

Input Type This column displays the type of each Main Board Input.
column

Configured Click in this column to create an input (make it available to be edited) .

column

Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Template Click in this column, then click to select an Input template to use for creating this Input from the list of available Input
column templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the input.

Input Type

Tamper Activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface.
Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor. From the Input
Editor you can configure the settings and link to events through triggers.

Power Failure Monitors the AC power failure output of a battery backup unit. When this alarm input activates, it specifies that the GCM has lost
its primary power source, and is operating on batteries.

External Activates when the emergency DC battery is running low on power.

Battery Low

Port Power Activates if there is a problem with the power on the port.
RS 485 Port 1

CPNI Alarm Activates if the CPNI (Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure) switch S1-2 is changed.

Tamper, AC power fail, and Low battery inputs must be programmed for UL applications.
NOTE

iSTAR Ultra LT Controller COM Port Tab

The COM Port tab in the iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Editor defines security objects that are connected to the COM port.
Aperio Hubs and Schlage PIMs can be configured for the COM port.

192 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Figure 65:  Ultra LT COM Port Tab

The iSTAR Ultra LT can support up to 8 or 16 readers, with connection to a maximum of sixteen IP-ACM Ethernet Door
Modules.

If you try to configure any additional readers, an error message appears. The iSTAR Ultra LT supports either Aperio or
Schlage Wireless Readers. There cannot be a mixture of the two readers on one iSTAR Ultra LT .

The Aperio Readers can be configured on any of the possible 8 Hubs, in any combination, as long as the total number of
Readers does not exceed 8.

There can be up to 8 or 16 Aperio Hubs for the COM port, allowing for a total of 8 or 16 Hubs per iSTAR Ultra LT . Each Hub
can support up to 8 or 16, ASSA ABLOY Readers with a maximum of 8 or 16 readers per COM port. This provides for a
maximum of 8 or 16 readers per iSTAR Ultra LT .

If using a 1 Reader Hub, the maximum is 8 Aperio Readers (i.e., 1 Reader per Hub).
NOTE

To Configure the iSTAR Ultra LT COM Port Tab for Aperio

1. From the iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Editor, click the COM Porttab.
2. Select Aperio in the Protocol field.
3. In the Aperio Hubs table, create the Aperio Hubs that you need by selecting the Configured check box for only the
Hubs you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Hubs. See the definitions of the Hubs in iSTAR Ultra LT COM Port
Tab Definitions on Page 194 and see iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) on Page 232 for
configuration instructions.
5. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM Port tab, or click
another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configurations.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 193

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

To Configure the iSTAR Ultra LT COM Port Tab for Schlage

1. From the iSTAR Ultra LT Controller Editor, click the COM Port tab.
2. Select Schlage in the Protocol field.
3. In the Schlage Wireless PIMs table, create the Schlage PIMs that you need by selecting the Configured check box
for only the PIMs you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to configure individual PIMs.
5. Click Save and Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Controller COM Port tab, or click
another tab in the iSTAR Controller Editor to perform additional configurations.

iSTAR Ultra LT COM Port Tab Definitions

Table 41:  iSTAR Ultra LT COM Port Tab Definitions

Box Description

Aperio Hubs

Create All Click to create all the Aperio Hubs. When you click Create All Hubs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Hubs can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor to configure an Aperio Hub.

Delete All When you click Delete All Hubs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Hubs, and all these Hubs are deleted
Hubs after you confirm each deletion (any settings you have configured are lost).

Protocol Select Aperio.

Edit Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor to configure an Aperio Hub. See iSTAR Aperio
column RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only) on Page 232.

Index This column displays the number of each Hub (from 1 to 15).
column

Configured Click in this column to create an Aperio Hub (make it available to be edited).
column

Name Displays the name for this Aperio Hub. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

Hubs 1 - 15 Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board
editor. From the editor you can configure the settings for the Hub.

Schlage PIMs

Create All Click to create all the Schlage PIMs. When you click Create All PIMs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
PIMs can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board Editor to configure a Schlage PIM.

Delete All When you click Delete All PIMs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all PIMs, and all these PIMs are
PIMs deleted after you confirm each deletion (any settings you have configured are lost).

194 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 41:  iSTAR Ultra LT COM Port Tab Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Edit Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board Editor to configure a Schlage PIM.
column

Index This column displays the number of each PIM (from 1 to 16).
column

Configured Click in this column to create a Schlage PIM (make it available to be edited).
column

Name Displays the name for this Schlage PIM. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

PIMs 1 - 16 Select the check box in the Configured column and click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Schlage RS-485 PIM Board editor.
From the editor you can configure the settings for the PIM.

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab

The Outputs tab is used to configure the Outputs for the IP-ACM.

Table 42 on Page 195 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Outputs tab.
Table 42:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Name Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking this
field.

Description Enter a textual comment about the Output board, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Output board resides.

Maintenance Click to put the iSTAR Outboard Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Location

Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this Output is attached.

Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this Output board is attached.

Board Index This read-only field identifies the board index (which represents the SW1 address switch setting on the R/8 board) for this Output
board.

Outputs

Create All Click to create all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 195

iSTAR Controller Editor Tabs

Table 42:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Delete All Click to delete all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

Edit column Click in this column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to edit this Output.
NOTE: The Configured check box must be selected to open the Output Editor.

Index column This read-only field identifies the position of each Output (1 - 2) on the IP-ACM board.

Configured indicates that the Output has been configured.

column
indicates that the Output has not been configured.
NOTE: The Configured check box must be selected to open the Output Editor.

Name column Displays the system-generated name for this Output. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Output. If the Output is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to
column select an Output Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

196 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

The iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM editor, shown in Figure 66 on Page 197, is used to configure readers, inputs and outputs.

See the following for more information:

■ Accessing the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor on Page 198
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab on Page 298
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab on Page 299
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab on Page 300
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab on Page 301
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Triggers Tab on Page 304.
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab on Page 304
Figure 66:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor - General Tab

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 197

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Accessing the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

To Access the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

1. From the iSTAR Ultra Controller editor dialog box, click the IP ACMs tab.
2. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row that you want to add/edit.
3. Click in the Edit column of the Index row to open the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM editor.
Table 43:  iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACM Editor General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the IP-ACM into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.

Board Location

Controller This field is read-only.

IP-ACM Number This field is read-only.

MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the IP-ACM.

Offline Mode

Disable offline mode Click the check box to disable offline mode on this IP-ACM.
NOTE: This selection will override the Offline Mode of all IP-ACMs selections in the iSTAR Controller Editor IP-
ACMs tab for this IP-ACM.
See IP-ACM Offline Mode Configuration Information on Page 288.
If using online mode, all components of the door must come from the same IP-ACM board.

Switch Port (J5) Options Select the check box to enable the J5 Switch Port. Clear this check box to disable this port. This check box is selected by
(option for IP-ACM v2 default.
only)

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab

The Wiegand tab is used to configure Wiegand readers connected to the IP-ACM board.

Table 44 on Page 198 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand tab.
Table 44:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab Definitions

Box Description

Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers, the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a direct connect Wiegand Reader.

198 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Table 44:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers
Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496.
column

Index This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect Wiegand reader.
column

Configured Click in this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited).

column

Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

Template Click in this column prior to creating the Reader, then click to select a Reader template from the list of available Reader
column templates.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader.

Readers 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Reader and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader
-2 Editor General tab to configure the Keypad, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with a Reader. See
iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for detailed instructions for configuring iSTAR Readers.
The Name column displays a name comprised of the Reader Type and the iSTAR Controller name. You can click in this column to
edit the Reader name.

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab

The RS-485 tab is used to configure RS-485 ports connected to the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board.

The iSTAR Device Port Editor, accessed by clicking in the Configured check box of the port and click Edit, allows you to
select the RM, BLE, or OSDP protocols. See IP-ACM iSTAR Device Port Dialog Box on Page 302

Table 45 on Page 199 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 tab.
Table 45:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create the RS-485 Ports. When you click Create All Ports the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Ports can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Device Port Editor to configure an RS-485 Port.

Delete All When you click Delete All Ports, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Ports, and all Ports are
Ports immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Device Port Editor to configure Device Ports for the IP-ACM. See iSTAR Ultra
ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor on Page 204.

Index column This column displays the number for each Device Port.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 199

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Table 45:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Configured Click in this column to create a Device Port (make it available to be edited).
column

Name column Displays the name for this Device Port. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in
this field.

Device Ports 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Device Port and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR
-2 Device Port Editor General tab to configure the Readers and ACM extensions that are associated with the Device Port. See
iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for detailed instructions for configuring iSTAR Device Ports.
The Name column displays a name comprised of the Device Port and the iSTAR Controller name. You can click in this column to
edit the Device Port name.

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab

The Inputs tab is used to create and configure the Inputs that are attached to this Ultra IP-ACM Board.

You can use an existing Input Template to create one or more of the IP-ACM Board Inputs. Click in the Template Column,
then click . A list of available iSTAR Input Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using
Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more detailed information about using Templates to
create Inputs.

Table 46 on Page 200 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs tab.
Table 46:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Special Purpose Inputs

Tamper The Tamper input activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface.
NOTE: For UL applications, this field must be enabled.
Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor
General tab to configure the Tamper input. From the Input Editor you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and
State Images that are associated with the Tamper Input.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Input.

Communication A logical unsupervised input that reflects the state of the communication between the GCM board and Processor-A on this IP-
Fail ACM board.

Port Power Power indicator input for each RM / Weigand port.

Alarm Status 1
Port Power
Alarm Status 2

200 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Table 46:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Lock Power IP-ACM can provide power for the locks directly from the 2 Output connectors (Lock Power 1 & 2). There are automatic over-
Alarm Status 1 current shut-off switches on each Lock Power. The Lock Power Alarm Status inputs go Active when the over-current shut-off
Lock Power switches are active (i.e., when Lock Power has been shut off).
Alarm Status 2

General Purpose Inputs

Inputs 1 These standard general purpose supervised inputs are available on iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM boards.
through 4

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab

The Status tab displays a read-only listing of information about the operational status of the selected iSTAR Ultra IP-
ACM Board.

Table 47 on Page 201 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Status tab.
Table 47:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Communication Status Unknown, Offline, or Online.

Firmware Version Processor firmware, such as 00.00.36.00008

IP Address The IP-ACM IP address.

High Latency Alarm Possible status values are True or False.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 201

iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor

iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor

Add-on Access Control Modules (ACM Boards) provide access control functionality by supporting readers, outputs and
inputs.

The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board dialog box is accessed from the iSTAR Controller editor Boards tab.

iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Editor

The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board editor allows you to define and configure inputs, outputs and readers for an ACM Board. The
ACM Wiegand tab allows you to configure Wiegand readers, while the ACM RS-485 tab lets you configure RS-485-
connected devices.

The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board editor has six tabs:

■ iSTAR ACM Board General Tab on Page 208
■ iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab on Page 209
■ iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab on Page 211
■ iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab on Page 202
■ iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab on Page 203
■ iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab on Page 207

For more information see the iSTAR Controller Installation and Configuration Guide.

iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab

The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand tab provides configuration for Wiegand readers connected to the iSTAR Ultra
ACM Board.

iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab Definitions

Table 48 on Page 202 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab.
Table 48:  iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab Definitions

Box Description

Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers, the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a direct connect Wiegand Reader.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers
Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496.
column

Index This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect Wiegand reader.
column

202 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor

Table 48:  iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Wiegand Tab Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Configured Click in this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited).

column

Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

Template Click in this column prior to creating the Reader, then click to select a Reader template from the list of available Reader
column templates.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader.

Readers 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Reader and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader
-8 Editor General tab to configure the Keypad, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with a Reader. See
iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for detailed instructions for configuring iSTAR Readers.
The Name column displays a name comprised of the Reader Type and the iSTAR Controller name. You can click in this column to
edit the Reader name.

iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab

The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 tab provides configuration for RS-485 devices connected to the iSTAR Ultra
ACM Board.

iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions

Table 49 on Page 203 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab.
Table 49:  iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

RS-485 Ports

Create All Click to create the RS-485 Ports. When you click Create All Ports the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Ports can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Device Port Editor to configure an RS-485 Port.

Delete All When you click Delete All Ports, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Ports, and allPorts are
Ports immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Device Port Editor to configure Device Ports for the iSTAR Ultra. See iSTAR
Reader Editor on Page 496.

Index column This column displays the number for each Device Port.

Configured Click in this column to create a Device Port (make it available to be edited).
column

Name column Displays the name for this Device Port. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in
this field.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 203

iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor

Table 49:  iSTAR Ultra ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Device Ports 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Device Port and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR
-8 Device Port Editor General tab to configure the Readers and ACM extensions that are associated with the Device Port. See
iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for detailed instructions for configuring iSTAR Device Ports.
The Name column displays a name comprised of the Device Port and the iSTAR Controller name. You can click in this column to
edit the Device Port name.

iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor

The iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor lets you create and configure RM Readers, and direct-connect Wiegand
Readers.

iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Tabs

■ iSTAR Ultra ACM/IP-ACM RS-485 Device Port General Tab on Page 204
■ iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab on Page 204
■ iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EXT Tab on Page 205

iSTAR Ultra ACM/IP-ACM RS-485 Device Port General Tab

The iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port General tab displays three Read-only fields that identify the Controller, Port Number,
and Protocol for the RM reader and Wiegand Reader Device Port. Table 50 on Page 204 describes the fields on this tab.
Table 50:  iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port General Tab Definitions

Field Description

Controller This field identifies the controller for this ACM RS-485 Device Port.

Port Number This field identifies the index number of the Device Port on the ACM for the Readers.

Protocol Click on the drop-down menu to select the Protocol type.

• RM (Software House Reader Protocol)
• BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy)
• OSDP (Open Supervised Device Protocol) Only one reader can be configured per device port.
• Smart
Default: RM

iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab

The iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers tab lets you create and configure the Readers that are attached to an RS-
485 port on the iSTAR Ultra.

You can use an existing Reader Template to create one or more of the RS-485 Readers. Click in the Template Column,
then click . A list of available iSTAR Reader Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using

204 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor

Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more detailed information about using Templates to
create Readers.

iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab Definitions

Table 51 on Page 205 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers tab.
Table 51:  iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port Readers Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create all the readers. When you click Create All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to edit that reader.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all readers, and all these readers
Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure an Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496.

Index column This column displays the number of each Reader.

Configured Click in this column to create a Reader (make it available to be edited).

column

Name column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in this
field.

Template The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Readers.
column
Click in this column, then click to select a Reader template to use for creating this Reader from the list of available Reader
templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the Reader.

iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM EXT Tab

The iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab lets you create and configure the Input boards and Output boards that
are attached to this iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port.
Figure 67:  iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext Tab

Configuring the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext Tab
When you configure the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab, you are defining the Input boards and Output
boards that are attached to the port. You can then click to open the Input Boards Editor to configure individual Input Boards,
or open the Output Boards Editor to configure individual Output Boards.

To Configure the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext Tab

1. From the iSTAR Ultra Boards tab, create an ACM on either SPI Port 1 or SPI Port 2 by clicking in the Configure
column.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 205

iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor

2. Click to open the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board editor. Access the Input Board Editor for the Input Board you wish to
edit (see iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor on Page 202).
3. Click the RS-485 tab.
4. Create an RS-485 port by clicking in the Configure column, then click to open the iSTAR Ultra Device Port editor.
5. Click the ACM Ext tab.
6. Create an Input board by clicking in the Configure column for one of the Input Boards (1-8), then click to open the
iSTAR Input Board editor. See the iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 215 for configuration instructions.
7. Create an Output board by clicking in the Configure column for one of the Output Boards (1-8), then click .to open
the iSTAR Output Board editor. See the iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220 for configuration instructions.
8. When you have finished configuring the Inputs on the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab, click Save and
Close to save the settings you have configured.

iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab Definitions

Table 59 on Page 213 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext tab.
Table 52:  iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Input Boards

Create All Click to create all the Input Boards. When you click Create All Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected, and
Boards you can click in the Edit column to edit that Input Board.

Delete All When you click Delete All Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Input Boards, and all these
Boards Input Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor. See iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 215.

Index column This column displays the number of each Input Board.

Configured Click in this column to create an Input Board (make it available to be edited).
column

Name column Displays the name for this Input board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in
this field.

Output Boards

Create All Click to create all the Output Boards. When you click Create All Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected, and
Boards you can click in the Edit column to edit that Output Board.

Delete All When you click Delete All Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Output Boards, and all these
Boards Output Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board Editor. See iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220.

Index column This column displays the number of each Output Board.

206 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor

Table 52:  iSTAR Ultra RS-485 Device Port ACM Ext Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Configured Click in this column to create an Output Board (make it available to be edited).
column

Name column Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click
in this field.

iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab

The iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status tab provides a read-only listing of information about the operational status of the
selected iSTAR Ultra ACM Board.

iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab Definitions

Table 53 on Page 207 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status tab.
Table 53:  iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Processor 1 Communications Status Offline or Online.

Processor 2 Communications Status Offline or Online.

Processor 1 Firmware Version Processor firmware, such as 00.00.36.00008

Processor 2 Firmware Version Processor firmware, such as 00.00.36.00008

FAI Key Latch Enabled Status Enabled or disabled.

Lock 1 Power (Volts) Lock power in Volts.

Possible vales are: 0.0V, 12.0V, 24.0V.

Lock 2 Power (Volts) Lock power in Volts.

Possible vales are: 0.0V, 12.0V, 24.0V.

Reader Power Voltage reported for Readers. Reader power is the basic power to the GCM and ACMs.
Typically reads about 13.8V.

FAI Outputs Enabled List of Outputs with FAI enabled.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 207

iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor

iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor

Add-on Access Control Modules (ACM Boards) provide access control functionality by supporting readers, outputs and
inputs.

The ACM Board dialog box is accessed from the iSTAR Controller editor Boards tab.

iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board Editor

The iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board editor allows you to define and configure inputs, outputs and readers for the ACM
Board. The ACM Extension (ACM Ext) tab allows you to configure the I/8 input and R/8 output boards connected to the
ACM Board.

The iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board editor has five tabs:

■ iSTAR ACM Board General Tab on Page 208
■ iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab on Page 209
■ iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab on Page 211
■ iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab on Page 212
■ iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab on Page 213

For more information see the iSTAR Pro Installation and Configuration Guide.

iSTAR ACM Board General Tab

The ACM Board General tab identifies the ACM Board. The fields on this tab are read-only.

iSTAR ACM Board General Tab Definitions

Table 54 on Page 208 provides definitions for the fields on the iSTAR ACM Board General tab.
Table 54:  iSTAR ACM Board General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Name Displays the name for this ACM board. The name is system-generated
by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Description Enter a textual comment about the ACM board, such as its location or
purpose. This text is for information only.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the iSTAR ACM board into Maintenance Mode. See
Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which the iSTAR Controller
for this ACM Board resides.

Board Location

208 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor

iSTAR ACM Board General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Controller This read-only field identifies the Controller to which this board is
attached.

ACM Number/IP-ACM Number This read-only field displays the number of the ACM board or the
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM number.

Board Type This read-only field displays the iSTAR ACM type.

iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab

The ACM Board Inputs tab lets you create and configure the Inputs that are attached to this ACM Board.

You can use an existing Input Template to create one or more of the ACM Board Inputs. Click in the Template Column,
then click . A list of available iSTAR Input Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using
Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more detailed information about using Templates to
create Inputs.

iSTAR ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions

■ Table 55 on Page 209 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the ACM Board Inputs tab.
■ Table 56 on Page 210 provides definitions for the iSTAR ACM Board Inputs tab.
Table 55:  iSTAR Pro/Classic ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create All Inputs Click to create all the Inputs. When you click Create All Inputs the Configured column check
boxes are selected, and you can click in the Edit column to edit that Input.

Delete All Inputs When you click Delete All Inputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for
all Inputs, and all these Inputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are
lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure an Input. See iSTAR
Input Editor on Page 240.

Index column This column displays the number of each Input.

Configured column Click in this column to create an Input (make it available to be edited) .

Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit
this name by clicking in this field.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 209

iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor

Table 55:  iSTAR Pro/Classic ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Template column The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating
the Input.
Click in this column, then click to select an Input template to use for creating this Input
from the list of available Input templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the
input.

Inputs These standard general purpose supervised inputs are available on iSTAR Pro ACM boards.

iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions

Table 56 on Page 210 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra ACM Board Inputs tab.
Table 56:  iSTAR Ultra / Ultra SE/ Ultra Video ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Special Purpose Inputs (iSTAR Ultra/ Ultra SE/ Ultra Video only)

Tamper The Tamper input activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its
mounting surface.
NOTE: For UL applications, this field must be enabled.
Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to
open the iSTAR Input Editor General tab to configure the Tamper input. From the Input Editor
you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are
associated with the Tamper Input.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to
creating the Input.

Comm Fail Processor A logical unsupervised input that reflects the state of the communication between the GCM
1 board and Processor-A on this ACM board.

Comm Fail Processor A logical unsupervised input that reflects the state of the communication between the GCM
2 board and Processor-B on this ACM board.

FAI Alarm This is the Fire Alarm Input signal. It is NC supervised.

FAI Relay Control FAI Relay Control. When the FAI signal is true, the HW drives all selected relays to activate.
Each relay has a switch indicating whether it is selected to behave in this way.

FAI Interlock Key The FAI K input is usually a key switch. It is supervised as NO. It is used in conjunction with
Latch mode. If latching is enabled, the F signal will turn on all selected outputs. They will stay
that way until the Fire Chief inserts the key in the key switch and announces all clear.

Port 1 Power Status Power indicator input for each RM port.

through Port 8 Power
Status

210 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor

Table 56:  iSTAR Ultra / Ultra SE/ Ultra Video ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

General Purpose Inputs (iSTAR Ultra/ Ultra SE/ Ultra Video only)

Inputs 1 through 24 These standard general purpose supervised inputs are available on iSTAR Ultra ACM
(Ultra and Ultra Video) boards.
Inputs 1 though 16
Ultra SE (Ultra Mode)

iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab

The ACM Board Outputs tab lets you create and configure the Outputs that are attached to this ACM Board.

You can use an existing Output Template to create one or more of the ACM Board Outputs. Click in the Template Column,
then click . A list of available iSTAR Output Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using
Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more detailed information about using Templates to
create Outputs.

iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab Definitions

Table 57 on Page 211 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR ACM Board Outputs tab.
Table 57:  iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create all the outputs. When you click Create All Outputs the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Outputs can click in the Edit column to edit that output.

Delete All When you click Delete All Outputs, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all outputs, and all these outputs
Outputs are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure an Output. See iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248.

Index column This column displays the number of each Output.

Configured Click in this column to create an Output (make it available to be edited).

column

Name column Displays the name for this Output. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Template The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Outputs.
column
Click in this column, then click to select an Output template to use for creating this Output from the list of available Output
templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the Output.

Primary Relay Outputs

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 211

iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor

Table 57:  iSTAR ACM Board Outputs Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Outputs 1 These outputs can be used for a Fire Alarm Interface (FAI). They are rated at 5 Amps, and are socket mounted.
through 8
Click in the Configure column, then click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure a Primary
Output. See iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220

Secondary Relay Outputs

Outputs 1 These outputs cannot be used for a Fire Alarm Interface (FAI). They are rated at 0.75 or 1 Amp, and are permanently soldered
through 8 to the ACM.
Click in the Configure column, then click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure a Secondary
Output. See iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220

iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab

The ACM Board Readers tab lets you create and configure the Readers that are attached to this ACM Board.

You can use an existing Reader Template to create one or more of the ACM Board Readers. Click in the Template
Column, then click . A list of available iSTAR Reader Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See
Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more detailed information about using
Templates to create Readers.

iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab Definitions

Table 58 on Page 212 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR ACM Board Readers tab.
Table 58:  iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create all the readers. When you click Create All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to edit that reader.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all readers, and all these readers
Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure an Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496.

Index column This column displays the number of each Reader.

Configured Click in this column to create a Reader (make it available to be edited).

column

Name column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.

Template The Template column shows the template name if you selected a Template prior to creating the Readers.
column
Click in this column, then click to select a Reader template to use for creating this Reader from the list of available Reader
templates. You can only select a Template prior to creating the Reader.

212 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor

iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab

The ACM Board ACM Ext tab lets you create and configure the Input boards and Output boards that are attached to this
ACM Board.

Configuring the iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab

When you configure the iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext tab, you are defining the Input boards and Output boards that are
attached to the ACM. You can then click to open the Input Boards Editor to configure individual Input Boards, or open the
Output Boards Editor to configure individual Output Boards.

To Configure the iSTAR ACM Board ACM EXT Tab

1. From the iSTAR controller Boards tab, create an ACM and click to access the iSTAR ACM Board Editor.
2. Click the ACM EXT tab.
3. Create the Input Boards that you need by clicking Create All Boards or by selecting the Configured check box for
only the Input Boards you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board editor to configure individual Inputs. See the iSTAR Input
Board Editor on Page 215 for configuration instructions.
5. Create the Output Boards that you need by clicking Create All Boards or by selecting the Configured check box for
only the Output Boards you wish to create.
6. Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board editor to configure individual Outputs. See the iSTAR
Output Board Editor on Page 220 for configuration instructions.
7. When you have finished configuring the Input Boards and Output Boards, click Save and Close to save the settings
you have configured.

iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab Definitions

Table 59 on Page 213 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext tab.
Table 59:  iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Input Boards

Create All Click to create all the Input Boards. When you click Create All Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected, and
Boards you can click in the Edit column to edit that Input Board.

Delete All When you click Delete All Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Input Boards, and all these
Boards Input Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Board Editor. See iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 215.

Index column This column displays the number of each Input Board.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 213

iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller ACM Board Editor

Table 59:  iSTAR ACM Board ACM Ext Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Configured Click in this column to create an Input Board (make it available to be edited).
column

Name column Displays the name for this Input board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this
field.

Output Boards

Create All Click to create all the Output Boards. When you click Create All Boards the Configured column check boxes are selected, and
Boards you can click in the Edit column to edit that Output Board.

Delete All When you click Delete All Boards, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Output Boards, and all these
Boards Output Boards are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Board Editor. See iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220.

Index column This column displays the number of each Output Board.

Configured Click in this column to create an Output Board (make it available to be edited).
column

Name column Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this
field.

214 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Input Board Editor

iSTAR Input Board Editor

The iSTAR Input Board editor lets you configure an iSTAR Input Board that you created on the iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM
Board ACM Ext tab, the iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge COM1, COM2, and COM3 tabs, or the iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE, and
Ultra LT COM1, COM2 or COM Port tabs.

The iSTAR Input Board editor (see Figure 68 on Page 216) has the following tabs:
■ iSTAR Input Board General Tab
Lists the Inputs and Status Inputs on an I/8 board that is connected to an iSTAR Classic/Pro, iSTAR eX, or iSTAR
Edge. See iSTAR Input Board General Tab on Page 218.
■ iSTAR Input Board Group Tab
If you have created a Group containing iSTAR Input Boards and added this Input Board to it, the iSTAR Input Board
editor also displays a Group tab.
This tab lists the Input Board groups to which this Input Board belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on
Page 36 for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Input board.

ISTAR Input Board editor Tasks:

■ Accessing the iSTAR Input Board Editor on Page 216
■ Configuring iSTAR Input Boards on Page 217

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 215

iSTAR Input Board Editor

Figure 68:  iSTAR Input Board Editor

Accessing the iSTAR Input Board Editor

You can access the iSTAR Input Board Editor in the following ways:
■ To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller) on Page 216
■ To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 216
■ To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor from the Hardware Tree on Page 217

To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the appropriate COM tab (COM1, COM2, or COM3).
2. In the Input Boards table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the Input board you want to Edit.
3. The iSTAR Input Board Editor opens.

To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab.

216 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Input Board Editor

2. In the ACMs table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the ACM that contains the Input board you want to Edit.
The ACM Board Editor opens.
3. Click the ACM Ext tab.
4. In the Input Boards table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the Input board you want to Edit.
5. The iSTAR Input Board Editor opens.

To Access the iSTAR Input Board Editor from the Hardware Tree
1. Navigate from your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree to the appropriate COM Board (on an iSTAR eX or iSTAR
Edge Controller) or ACM Board (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller).
2. Click on Input Boards, as shown in Figure 69 on Page 217. This figure shows the hardware tree for an iSTAR eX on
the left and an iSTAR Pro on the right.
Figure 69:  iSTAR Input Board in the Hardware Tree

3. Double-click on the Input Board you wish to edit. The iSTAR Input Board Editor opens.

Configuring iSTAR Input Boards

When you configure an iSTAR Input Board, you are defining the Inputs that are attached to a particular I/8 board. You can
then click to open the Inputs Editor to configure individual Inputs.

To Configure an iSTAR Input Board Tab

1. Access the Input Board Editor for the Input Board you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Input Board Editor on
Page 216).
2. If you wish to use an Input Template to configure one or more of the I/8 board Inputs, click in the Template column,
then click to open a dialog box listing the available Input Templates. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs,
Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more information.
3. Create the Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only the
Inputs you wish to create.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 217

iSTAR Input Board Editor

4. Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to configure individual Inputs. See the iSTAR Input Editor
on Page 240 for configuration instructions.
5. If you wish to use an Input Template to configure one or more of the I/8 board Status Inputs, click in the Template
column, then click to open a dialog box listing the available Input Templates. See Using Templates for Controller
Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more information.
6. Create the Status Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for
only the Inputs you wish to create.
7. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Status Inputs. See the definitions of the Status Inputs in Table 60
on Page 218 and see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240.
8. When you have finished configuring the Inputs on the Input Board Editor General tab, click Save and Close to save
the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Input Board editor.

iSTAR Input Board General Tab

The iSTAR Input Board General tab allows you to configure the Inputs on an I/8 board attached to your iSTAR Controller,
as well as the Status Inputs for Tamper and Communications Failure.

iSTAR Input Board General Tab Definitions

Table 60 on Page 218 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Input Board General tab.
Table 60:  iSTAR Input Board General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Identification

Name Displays the name for this Input board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this
field.

Description Enter a textual comment about the Input Board, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only.

Maintenance Click to put the Input Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Input board resides.

Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this Input board is attached.

Location

Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this Input board is attached.

Board Index This read-only field identifies the board index (which represents the SW1 address switch setting on the I/8 board) for this Input
board.

218 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Input Board Editor

Table 60:  iSTAR Input Board General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Inputs

Create All Click to create all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Delete All Click to delete all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Edit column Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to edit this Input.

Index column This read-only field identifies the position of each Input (P1 - P8) on the I/8 board.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

column
indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name column Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select
column an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

Status Inputs

Create All Click to create the Tamper and Communications Fail Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Delete All Click to delete the Tamper and Communications Fail Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Edit column Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to edit this Input.

Input Type The Input Type Column displays:

column Tamper – Represents the Tamper Input on the I/8 board.
NOTE: For UL applications, the Tamper Input on the iSTAR Input Board General tab must be enabled.
Communications Fail – Represents the Communications Fail Input on the I/8 board.
NOTE: For UL applications, the Communications Failure Input on the iSTAR Input Board General tab must be enabled.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

column
indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name column Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select
column an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 219

iSTAR Output Board Editor

iSTAR Output Board Editor

The iSTAR Output Board editor lets you configure an iSTAR Output Board that you created on the iSTAR Classic/Pro
ACM Board ACM Ext tab or the iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge COM1, COM2, and COM3 tabs.

The iSTAR Output Board editor (see Figure 70 on Page 220) has the following tabs:
■ iSTAR Output Board General Tab
Lists the Outputs and Status Inputs on an R/8 board that is connected to an iSTAR Classic/Pro, iSTAR eX, or iSTAR
Edge. See iSTAR Output Board General Tab on Page 222.
■ iSTAR Output Board Group Tab
If you have created a Group containing iSTAR Output Boards and added this Output Board to it, the iSTAR Output
Board editor also displays a Group tab.
This tab lists the Output Board groups to which this Output Board belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on
Page 36 for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Output Board.
Figure 70:  iSTAR Output Board Editor

Accessing the iSTAR Output Board Editor

You can access the iSTAR Output Board Editor in three ways:
■ To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller) on Page 221

220 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Output Board Editor

■ To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 221
■ To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor from the Hardware Tree on Page 221

To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the appropriate COM tab (COM1, COM2, or COM3).
2. In the Output Boards table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the Output board you want to Edit.
3. The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220).

To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab.
2. In the ACMs table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the ACM that contains the Output board you want to
Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens.
3. Click the ACM Ext tab.
4. In the Output Boards table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the Output board you want to Edit.
5. The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220).

To Access the iSTAR Output Board Editor from the Hardware Tree
1. Navigate from your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree to the appropriate COM Board (on an iSTAR eX or iSTAR
Edge Controller) or ACM Board (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller).
2. Click on Output Boards, as shown in Figure 71 on Page 221. This figure shows the hardware tree for an iSTAR eX on
the left and an iSTAR Pro on the right.
Figure 71:  iSTAR Output Board in the Hardware Tree

3. Double-click on the Output Board you wish to edit. The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board
Editor on Page 220).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 221

iSTAR Output Board Editor

Configuring iSTAR Output Boards

When you configure an iSTAR Output Board, you are defining the Outputs that are attached to a particular R/8 board. You
can then click to open the Outputs Editor to configure individual Outputs.

To Configure an iSTAR Output Board

1. Access the Output Board Editor for the Output Board you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Output Board Editor
on Page 220).
2. If you wish to use an Output Template to configure one or more of the
R/8 board Outputs, click in the Template column, then click to open a dialog box listing the available Output
Templates. See Using Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more information.
3. Create the Outputs that you need by clicking Create All Outputs or by selecting the Configured check box for only
the Outputs you wish to create.
4. Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to configure individual Outputs. See the iSTAR Output
Editor on Page 248 for configuration instructions.
5. If you wish to use an Output Template to configure one or more of the R/8 board Status Inputs, click in the Template
column, then click to open a dialog box listing the available Input Templates. See Using Templates for Controller
Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more information.
6. Create the Status Inputs that you need by clicking Create All Inputs or by selecting the Configured check box for
only the Inputs you wish to create.
7. Click in the Edit column to configure individual Status Inputs. See the definitions of the Status Inputs in Table 61
on Page 222 and see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240.
8. When you have finished configuring these Outputs and Inputs on the Output Board Editor General tab, click Save and
Close to save the settings you have configured on the iSTAR Output Board editor.

iSTAR Output Board General Tab

The iSTAR Output Board General tab allows you to configure the Outputs on an R/8 board attached to your iSTAR
Controller, as well as the Status Inputs for Tamper and Communications Failure.

iSTAR Output Board General Tab Definitions

Table 61 on Page 222 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Output Board General tab.
Table 61:  iSTAR Output Board General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Identification

Name Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking this
field.

222 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Output Board Editor

Table 61:  iSTAR Output Board General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Description Enter a textual comment about the Output board, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only.

Maintenance Click to put the iSTAR Outboard Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Output board resides.

Location

Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this Output board is attached.

Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this Output board is attached.

Board Index This read-only field identifies the board index (which represents the SW1 address switch setting on the R/8 board) for this Output
board.

Outputs

Create All Click to create all eight Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

Delete All Click to delete all eight Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

Edit column Click in this column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to edit this Output.

Index column This read-only field identifies the position of each Output (P1 - P8) on the R/8 board.

Configured indicates that the Output has been configured.

column
indicates that the Output has not been configured.

Name column Displays the system-generated name for this Output. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Output. If the Output is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to
column select an Output Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

Status Inputs

Create All Click to create the Tamper and Communications Fail Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Delete All Click to delete the Tamper and Communications Fail Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Edit column Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to edit this Input.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 223

iSTAR Output Board Editor

Table 61:  iSTAR Output Board General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Index column The Input Type Column displays:

Tamper – Represents the Tamper Input on the R/8 board.
NOTE: For UL applications, the Tamper Input on the iSTAR Output Board General tab must be enabled.
Communications Fail – Represents the Communications Fail Input on the R/8 board.
NOTE: For UL applications, the Communications Failure Input on the iSTAR Output Board General tab must be enabled.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

column
indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name column Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select
column an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

224 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers

iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers

The iSTAR Ultra supports either ASSA ABLOY Aperio or Allegion Schlage® wireless readers. The interface is through the
RS-485 ports on the Ultra GCM board. The default setting is Aperio, with Schlage as the only other option currently. Both
ports must use the protocol, and they are synchronized so that both ports change whenever the protocol changes on either
of them.

The protocol cannot be changed while any Schlage PIM or Aperio Hub exists.
NOTE

Assa Abloy Aperio Hubs and Wireless Readers

■ Each RS-485 port (for example, GCM Port1, Port2) supports up to 15 Hubs. The iSTAR Ultra supports up to 32
readers paired to any of the 30 Hubs.
■ If there are fewer than 32 Aperio readers, there can be up to 16 usual (RM bus or direct Wiegand) readers on the iSTAR
Ultra. If only Aperio readers are used, there is no need for an ACM on the Ultra.
■ Either 8 Port or 1 Port Hubs can be used, but usually 8 Port Hubs are configured.
■ There are 11, plus a generic, types of locks that can be configured on the Ultra GCM.
■ Only IN100 v3 readers with upgraded hubs can perform manual actions.
■ Right click on the Aperio Door item in a Dynamic view to display the context menu items Unlock, Lock, Momentary
Unlock, and Show Locked Causes , which are available to those who have permissions to perform these manual
actions. The context menu items display for all Aperio reader types, but not all types will unlock, lock, or momentary
unlock. Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information on Manual Actions.
■ Groups that contain Aperio doors with any reader type will display Unlock, Lock, Momentary Unlock and Show Locked
Causes context menu items if the user has those permissions and the panel that controls the door is online. The
context menu displays, but only the IN100 v3 readers respond to the command

Allegion Schlage PIMs and Wireless Readers

■ Each RS-485 port (i.e., GCM Port1, Port2) supports up to 16 PIMs. The iSTAR Ultra supports up to 32 readers
connected to any of the 32 PIMs. Schlage use a proprietary protocol named RS-485 RSI for communication on the
bus.
■ If there are fewer than 32 Schlage readers, there can be up to 16 usual (RM bus or direct Wiegand) readers on the
iSTAR Ultra. If only Schlage readers are used, there is no need for an ACM on the Ultra.
■ When assigning reader numbers, it is best practice to use sequential numbers, If you configure reader 1 and reader 5,
Schlage will not use readers 2, 3, and 4. Although, those reader numbers are available for the up to 16 ACM RM or
Wiegand readers.

Schlage addresses are one less than the C•CURE index. For example, if you setup a reader on Schlage
NOTE address 1, then it's C•CURE index 2.

■ There are 4 types of PIMs that can be connected to Port 1 or Port 2.

• PIM400-485 (AD-400 Series Locks)
• AD-300 (AD-300 Series Locks)
• PIM-485 (WA Series Locks)

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 225

iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers

• GWE Gateway (NDE/LE Series Locks)

The iSTAR eX and iSTAR Pro support the same PIMs and Locks through the RS-485 ports on the Pro
NOTE GCM and the eX PMB board. The RM ports on the eX PMB are multiplexed to the COM1 and COM2 ports
that are visible in the C•CURE 9000 software.

Figure 72 on Page 226 shows Schlage wireless connection methods.

Figure 72:  Schlage Wireless Connection Methods

iSTAR Ultra Schlage Wireless Types of Connections

The Schlage Readers interface to C•CURE hardware using one of eight basic methods:
1. PIM400-485 (AD400 Wireless to Ultra GCM, Pro GCM and eX PMB)
2. PIM400-485 TD2 (AD400 Wireless to all iSTARs and all apCs) (Can use Wiegand or Magnetic signaling)
3. AD300 Built-in PIM (AD300 Wired to Ultra, Pro and eX)
4. AD300 PIB300 (AD300 Wired to all iSTARs and all apCs)
5. PIM485 (Wyreless Wireless to Ultra GCM, Pro GCM and eX PMB)
6. PIM TD2 (Wyreless Wireless to all iSTARs and all apCs) (2 Reader - Can use Wiegand or Magnetic signaling)
7. PIM TD4 (Wyreless Wireless to all iSTARs and all apCs) (4 reader - Can use Wiegand or Magnetic signaling)
8. GWE Gateway (NDE and LE wireless to Ultra GCM, Pro GMC and eX PMB.

Each of the first four methods are repeated for FIPS-201:

1. PIM401-485 (AD400 Wireless to Ultra, Pro and eX)
2. PIM401-485 TD2 (AD400 Wireless to all iSTARs and all apCs)

226 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers

3. AD301 Built-in PIM (AD300 Wired to Ultra, Pro and eX)

4. AD301 PIB301 (AD301 Wired to all iSTARs and all apCs)

Wireless - PIM400 and PIM400-TD2

■ Up to 16 AD400 wireless readers can be associated with 1 PIM400. Up to 2 AD400 wireless readers can be
associated with 1 PIM400-TD2.
■ The PIM400 interfaces with iSTAR Ultra, Pro and eX using RS-485 RSI.
■ The PIM400-TD2 interfaces with either Wiegand signaling or Clock/Data Magnetic ABA2 signaling. The method is
determined by the type of reader.
■ A magnetic card reader (swipe or insertion) will use Clock and Data which will be passed through the TD2 to the
C•CURE hardware. The magnetic signaling must be connected to an RM4/4E and then to an RM port.
■ A Wiegand signaling reader will use Data 1 and Data 0 which will also be passed through the TD2. the Wiegand
signaling can be connected to any direct Wiegand port or to an RM4/4E.
■ In addition to AD400 Readers, the PIM400-485 can also communicate with WRI400, WPR400, and TK400 devices.

Summary Tables
The tables in this section provides a matrix of the possible connections between Schlage devices and iSTARs and apCs.

AD400 Wireless

Table 62:  AD400 Series

Controller/Panel Locks RS485 RSI Wiegand Signal (D0/D1) to Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA) to
Supported Chain Panel Panel

iSTAR Ultra AD400 (All styles) PIM400-485 PIM400-TD2 to ACM Wiegand PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to ACM RM
iSTAR Pro RSI to GCM PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to ACM
iSTAR Classic RM

iSTAR eX AD400 (All styles) PIM400-485 PIM400-TD2 to GCM Wiegand PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to PMB RM
RSI to PMB PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to PMB
RM

iSTAR Edge AD400 (All styles) PIM400-TD2 to Edge Wiegand PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to Edge RM
PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to Edge
RM

apC/8X AD400 (All styles) PIM400-TD2 to WPSC Wiegand PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to apC RM
PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to apC RM

apC/L AD400 (All styles) PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to apC/L PIM400-TD2 to RM4x to apC/L RM
RM

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 227

iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers

AD401 Wireless (FIPS-201)

The AD401 (FIPS-201) configuration only supports a Multi-technology reader with Keypad and Wiegand
NOTE signaling.

The reader appears as a standard Wiegand reader connected to:

■ iSTAR ACM Wiegand Port
■ iSTAR eX GCM Wiegand Port
■ iSTAR Edge Wiegand Port
■ apC/8X WPSC Wiegand Port
■ RM4 or RM4E to any RM Port on iSTAR or apC.

The PIB401-TD2 is used for all connections.

Table 63:  AD401 Series

Controller/Panel Locks Supported RS485 RSI Wiegand Signal (D0/D1) Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA)
Chain to Panel to Panel

iSTAR Ultra AD401 N/A PIM401-TD2 to ACM N/A

iSTAR Pro (Multi-Technology with Wiegand

iSTAR Classic keypad only) PIM401-TD2 to RM4x to ACM

RM

iSTAR eX AD401 N/A PIM401-TD2 to GCM N/A

(Multi-Technology with Wiegand
keypad only) PIM401-TD2 to RM4x to PMB
RM

iSTAR Edge AD401 PIM401-TD2 to Edge N/A

(Multi-Technology with Wiegand
keypad only) PIM401-TD2 to RM4x to
Edge RM

apC/8X AD401 PIM401-TD2 to WPSC N/A

(Multi-Technology with Wiegand
keypad only) PIM401-TD2 to RM4x to apC
RM

apC/L AD401 PIM401-TD2 to RM4x to N/A

(Multi-Technology with apC/L RM
keypad only)

228 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers

AD300 Hard Wired

Table 64:  AD300 Series

Controller/Panel Locks Wiegand Signal (D0/D1) Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA)

RS485 RSI Chain
Supported to Panel to Panel

iSTAR Ultra AD300 (All Built in PIM400-485 RSI PIB300-TD2 to ACM Wiegand PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to ACM RM
iSTAR Pro styles) to GCM PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to ACM
iSTAR Classic RM

iSTAR eX AD300 (All Built in PIM400-485 RSI PIB300-TD2 to GCM Wiegand PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to PMB RM
styles) to PMB PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to PMB
RM

iSTAR Edge AD300 (All PIB300-TD2 to Edge Wiegand PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to Edge RM
styles) PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to Edge
RM

apC/8X AD300 (All PIB300-TD2 to WPSC PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to apC RM

styles) Wiegand
PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to apC
RM

apC/L AD300 (All PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to apC/L PIB300-TD2 to RM4x to apC/L RM

styles) RM

AD301 Hard Wired FIPS-201

The AD301 (FIPS-201) configuration only supports a Multi-technology reader with Keypad and Wiegand
NOTE signaling.

The PIB301-TD2 is used for all connections.

Table 65:  AD301 Series

Controller/Panel Locks Supported RS485 RSI Wiegand Signal (D0/D1) Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA)
Chain to Panel to Panel

iSTAR Ultra AD301 N/A PIB301-TD2 to ACM N/A

iSTAR Pro (Multi-Technology with Wiegand

iSTAR Classic keypad only) PIB301-TD2 to RM4x to ACM

RM

iSTAR eX AD301 N/A PIB301-TD2 to GCM N/A

(Multi-Technology with Wiegand
keypad only) PIB301-TD2 to RM4x to PMB
RM

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 229

iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers

Table 65:  AD301 Series (continued)

Controller/Panel Locks Supported RS485 RSI Wiegand Signal (D0/D1) Magnetic Signal (CLK/DATA)
Chain to Panel to Panel

iSTAR Edge AD301 PIB301-TD2 to Edge N/A

(Multi-Technology with Wiegand
keypad only) PIB301-TD2 to RM4x to Edge
RM

apC/8X AD301 PIB301-TD2 to WPSC N/A

(Multi-Technology with Wiegand
keypad only) PIB301-TD2 to RM4x to apC
RM

apC/L AD301 PIB301-TD2 to RM4x to N/A

(Multi-Technology with apC/L RM
keypad only)

Readers per Controller/Panel

Aperio Wireless Readers

Table 66:  Aperio Wireless Readers

Controller/Panel Max # Max # of

Max # of Max # of
Interface of Non-
Aperio both Notes
Device Aperio Aperio
Readers Combined
Hubs Readers

iSTAR Ultra Aperio 30 16 32 32 iSTAR Ultra is the

Hub (8 15 per only iSTAR that
Port or 1 RS-485 supports Wireless
Port) Port Aperio Hubs.

Schlage Wireless Readers

Table 67:  Readers per Controller/Panel - including Schlage Readers

Controller/Panel Max # of Non- Max # of Max # of

Interface Device Schlage Schlage both Notes
Readers Readers Combined

iSTAR Ultra PIM, AD300 to GCM 16 32 32 Max of 32 PIM(s) and 32

Readers

iSTAR Pro PIM, AD300 to GCM 16 16 16 Max of 16 PIM(s) and 16

Readers

230 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra Wireless Readers

Table 67:  Readers per Controller/Panel - including Schlage Readers (continued)

Controller/Panel Max # of Non- Max # of Max # of

Interface Device Schlage Schlage both Notes
Readers Readers Combined

iSTAR eX 4 door PIM, AD300 to PMB 4 16 16 16, but non-Schlage readers

must be numbered 1-4

iSTAR eX 8 door PIM, AD300 to PMB 8 16 16 16, but non-Schlage

Readers must be numbered
1-8

iSTAR Pro Direct TD2, PIB to ACM 16 16 16 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB

iSTAR eX 4 door TD2, PIB to GCM or 4 4 4 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB

Direct PMB

iSTAR eX 8 door TD2, PIB to GCM or 8 8 8 Requires USB key

Direct PMB 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB

iSTAR Edge 1 door TD2, PIB to Edge 1 1 1 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB
Direct board

iSTAR Edge 2 door TD2, PIB to Edge 2 2 2 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB
Direct board

iSTAR Edge 4 door TD2, PIB to Edge 4 4 4 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB
Direct board

apC/8X Direct TD2, PIB to apC, 8 8 8 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB

WPSC, or Star
Coupler

apC/L Direct TD2, PIB to apC/L 2 2 2 2 Readers per TD2 or PIB

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 231

iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only)

iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only)

The iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board editor allows you to configure wireless Aperio Readers on the Hub. The Hub
supports either one or eight Aperio wireless readers.

The iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor has three tabs:

■ General tab - see iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor General Tab on Page 232
■ Inputs tab - see iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab on Page 234
■ Readers tab - see iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Readers Tab on Page 234

iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor General Tab

The iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board editor General tab lets you specify the Aperio RS-485 Hub on which you can create
Aperio readers.

You select the type of Hub you want to configure by choosing a type from the HUB Type drop-down list. That selection
determines the options that are available on the other tabs.

To access the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board editor General tab, click on the COM 1 or COM 2 tab in the iSTAR
Controller editor dialog box. Then, click on Edit in the row name of the RS-485 Port that you want to edit.

Figure 73 on Page 233 shows the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board General tab.

232 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only)

Figure 73:  iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board General Tab

iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor General Tab Definitions

The fields and buttons on the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board editor General tab are described in Table 68 on Page 233.
Table 68:  iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board Editor General Tab

Field/Button Description

Name This field displays the name of the Aperio Hub

Description You can enter a textual description of the Aperio Board in the Description field.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the Aperio RS-485 Hub Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more
information.

Controller The name of the iSTAR Ultra controller; this is a read-only field.

HUB Type This drop-down list allows you to select the type of Aperio board you are configuring. The default selection is 8 Port Hub

HUB Number This read-only field contains the HUB number - the same HUB Index number as shown on the iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2
Tabs on Page 189.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 233

iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only)

iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board Editor General Tab (continued)

Field/Button Description

Product Version Displays the Product Version. For example, 2.0.0.

Firmware Version Displays the Firmware Version. For example: 6.2.28176.

Communication This read-only field displays whether the controller is in Online, Offline or Unknown state.
Status

Save and Close Click to save your configuration changes and close the iSTARAperio Hub Board editor.

iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab

This tab allows you to configure a Communications Fail input for the Aperio Hub board.

iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Input Tab Definitions

The fields and buttons on the iSTAR Aperio Board editor Input tab are described in Table 69 on Page 234.
Table 69:  iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board Editor

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create the Communication Fail Input. When you click Create All Inputs, the Configured column check box is selected,
Inputs and you can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input editor (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240.

Delete All When you click Delete Input, the check box in the Configured column is cleared for the Communications Fail Input, and the
Inputs Input is deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the Input Editor to configure the Communications Fail Input. See iSTAR Input Editor on
Page 240.

Input type This column displays the input type (Communications Fail).
column

Configured Click in this column to create the Communications Fail Input (make it available to be edited) .
column

Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated, but you can edit the name.

Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the Aperio Hub Board editor.
Close

iSTAR Aperio Hub Board Editor Readers Tab

The iSTAR Aperio Hub Board editor Readers tab allows you to identify the readers you want to configure, and to access
the iSTAR Aperio Reader editor to configure the readers.

The following Aperio Reader types can be configured: C100, E100, L100, PR100, IN100, A100, H100, K100, M100,
KS100, R100, AS100, and Generic types.

234 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Hub Board Editor (iSTAR Ultra only)

iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board Hub Editor Readers Tab Definitions

The fields and buttons on the iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board editor Readers tab are described in Table 70 on Page 235.
Table 70:  iSTAR Aperio RS-485 Board Editor Readers Tab

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create all 8 readers. When you click Create All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you can
Readers click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor
on Page 516.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all 8 Readers, and all 8
Readers Readers are deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).
NOTE: If you Delete all Readers on this tab, the Aperio Door objects that were created automatically for these readers are also
deleted.

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Aperio Reader editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor
on Page 516.

Reader Index This column displays the number of each Reader.

column

Configured Click in this column to create a Reader (make it available to be edited).

column
Clearing this check box deletes this Aperio Reader, and any automatically created Aperio Door associated with this Reader,
after you click Yes to confirm the deletion in the Warning box that appears.

Name column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated, and the Name field is editable.

Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the iSTAR Aperio Hub Board editor.
Close

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 235

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor

The iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor on iSTAR Pro or iSTAR eX allows you to configure Schlage Wireless Readers that are
connected to a PIM-485 Panel Interface Module (PIM). This board supports up to 16 wireless readers connected via RS-
485.

The following PIMs are supported:

■ PIM400-485 (AD400 Series Locks)
■ AD300 (AD300 Series Locks)
■ PIM-485 (WA Series Locks)

The iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor has three tabs:

■ General tab - see iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab on Page 236
■ Inputs tab - see iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab on Page 238
■ Readers tab - see iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab on Page 239

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab

The iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor General tab lets you specify the type of PIM Board to which you can configure Schlage
Wireless readers. You select the type of PIM you want to configure by choosing a type from the PIM Type drop-down list.
That selection determines the options that are available on the other tabs.

If you choose the AD300 (AD300 Series Locks), the Input tab is removed, because the AD300 does not support a Tamper
Input.

Figure 74 on Page 237 shows the iSTAR PIM-485 Board General tab.

236 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor

Figure 74:  iSTAR PIM-485 Board General Tab

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab Definitions

The fields and buttons on the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor General tab are described in Table 71 on Page 237.
Table 71:  iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab

Field/Button Description

Name This field displays the name of the PIM Board

Description You can enter a textual description of the PIM Board in the Description field.

Maintenance Click to put the iSTAR PIM-485 Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Controller The name of the controller; this is a read-only field.

PIM Type This drop-down list allows you to select the type of PIM board you are configuring.
• PIM400-485 (AD400 Series Locks)
• AD300 (AD300 Series Locks)
• PIM-485 (WA Series Locks)

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 237

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor General Tab (continued)

Field/Button Description

PIM Number This read-only field contains the PIM number - the same PIM Index number as shown on the iSTAR Schlage Wireless PIMs Tab
on Page 165 or the iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 182.

Wake on Wake on Radio allows a battery-powered lock device to receive an immediate command from the iSTAR panel that is out of
Radio sequence with the regular heartbeat communications between the panel and the lock (the default heartbeat interval is 10
minutes). The Wake on Radio interval is 10 seconds.
Enabling this feature allows the reader and lock to respond more quickly (within ten seconds rather than within ten minutes) to
manual actions. Typically the command from the iSTAR panel to the device will be for a lock or unlock.

Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor.
Close

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab

This tab allows you to configure a Tamper input for the PIM400-485 and PIM-485.

If you select the AD300 series lock in the PIM Type Drop-down list on the General tab, the Input tab is removed because
the AD300 series does not have a Tamper Input.

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Input Tab Definitions

The fields and buttons on the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor Input tab are described in Table 72 on Page 238.
Table 72:  iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor

Field/Button Description

Create Input Click to create the Tamper Input. When you click Create Input, the Configured column check box is selected, and you can click
in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input editor (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240.

Delete Input When you click Delete Input, the check box in the Configured column is cleared for the Tamper Input, and the Tamper Input is
immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the Input Editor to configure the Tamper Input. See iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240.

Input type This column displays the input type (Tamper).

column

Configured Click in this column to create the Tamper Input (make it available to be edited) .
column

Name column Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated and is read-only.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select
Column an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor.
Close

238 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab

The iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor Readers tab allows you to identify the readers you want to configure, and to access the
iSTAR PIM-485 Reader editor to configure the readers.

iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab Definitions

The fields and buttons on the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor Readers tab are described in Table 73 on Page 239.
Table 73:  iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create all 16 readers. When you click Create All Readers the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR PIM-485 Reader
Editor on Page 512.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all 16 Readers, and all 16
Readers Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR PIM-485 reader Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR PIM-485 Reader
Editor on Page 512.

Reader Index This column displays the number of each Reader.

column

Configured Click in this column to create a Reader (make it available to be edited) .

column

Name column Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated, and the field is read-only.

Save and Click to save your configuration changes and close the iSTAR PIM-485 Board editor.
Close

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 239

iSTAR Input Editor

iSTAR Input Editor

The iSTAR Input editor lets you configure an iSTAR Input that you created on an iSTAR Input Board.

The iSTAR Input editor (see Figure 75 on Page 241) has the following tabs:
■ iSTAR Input General Tab on Page 244
Identifies the Controller and Board this Input is configured on, the type of the Input (such as Door Switch), and the
object the Input is assigned to, such as a Door.
■ iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab on Page 245
This tab appears only if you have included this iSTAR Controller in an Intrusion Zone and added this Input as a
Controlled Input.
■ iSTAR Input Triggers Tab on Page 246
This tab lets you define Triggers that can activate C•CURE 9000 Events and activate outputs.
See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.
■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
If you have created a Group containing iSTAR Inputs and added this Input to it, the iSTAR Input editor also displays a
Group tab.
This tab lists the Input groups to which this Input belongs. for information on using the Group tab for your iSTAR Input.
■ iSTAR Input Status Tab on Page 246
This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Active, Armed, Hardware, and Supervision status of the Input.
■ iSTAR Input State Images Tab on Page 246
This tab shows the images that are displayed in the Monitoring Station to represent this input. You can change the
image used for any of the Input states.

240 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Input Editor

Figure 75:  iSTAR Input Editor

Accessing the iSTAR Input Editor

You can access the iSTAR Input Editor in several ways:
■ To Access the iSTAR Input Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller) on Page 241.
■ To Edit a Main Board Input (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 242.
■ To Edit an ACM Board Input (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 242.
■ To Edit an Input on an ACM Ext I/8 Board (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller) on Page 242.
■ To Edit a Main Board Input from the Hardware Tree on Page 242.
■ To Edit a COM1/COM2/COM3 or ACM Input from the Hardware Tree on Page 242

To Access the iSTAR Input Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Controller)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the appropriate tab (Inputs, COM1, COM2, or COM3).
2. Click in the Configured column to create a Main Board or General Purpose Input.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 241

iSTAR Input Editor

3. Click the Edit button for the Input you want to edit.
• To edit a Main Board or General Purpose Input from the Inputs tab, click in the Edit column for the Input you
want to edit.
• To edit I/8 Inputs from the COM1/COM2/COM3 tab, click in the Edit column for the Input Board containing the
Input you want to Edit. The iSTAR Input Board Editor opens. Click in the Edit column for the Input you want to
edit.
The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240).

To Edit a Main Board Input (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab.
2. Click in the Edit column for the Input you want to edit.
The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240).

To Edit an ACM Board Input (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab.
2. Click in the Edit column for the ACM that contains the Input you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens.
3. Click the Inputs tab.
4. Click in the Edit column for the Input you want to edit.
The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240).

To Edit an Input on an ACM Ext I/8 Board (iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab.
2. Click in the Edit column for the ACM that contains the Input you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor opens.
3. Click the ACM Ext tab.
4. Click in the Edit column for the Input board that contains the Input.
5. In the Inputs table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the Input you want to Edit.
The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240).

To Edit a Main Board Input from the Hardware Tree

1. Navigate to your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree and click .

2. Click the Inputs folder.
3. Double-click on the Input you want to edit.
The iSTAR Input Editor opens (see iSTAR Input Editor on Page 240).

To Edit a COM1/COM2/COM3 or ACM Input from the Hardware Tree

1. Navigate from your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree to the appropriate COM Board (on an iSTAR eX or iSTAR
Edge Controller) or ACM Board (on an iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller).

242 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Input Editor

2. Click on Input Boards, as shown in Figure 71 on Page 221.

Figure 76:  iSTAR Input Boards in the Hardware Tree

3. Click on the Input board that contains the Input you wish to edit.

4. Click on Inputs under that board.

5. Double-click on the Input you wish to edit.
The iSTAR Input Editor opens.

Configuring an iSTAR Input

When you configure an iSTAR Input, you use the Input Editor tabs to define the Options, Default State, Triggers, and State
Images for the Input.

To Configure an iSTAR Input

1. Access the Input Editor for the Input you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Input Editor on Page 241).
2. Click the Input General tab:
• Modify the name of the Input in the Name field, if desired.
• Add a textual description of the Input to the Description field.
• Enable the Input by clicking the Enabled field.
• Modify the Options settings for the Input. See the definitions for the Options fields in on Page 244.
• Set the Default State for the Input to Armed ( ) or not Armed ( ).
3. Click the Intrusion Zone tab (if available) to view the name of the Intrusion Zone this Input is part of, and the Display
Name used by the Intrusion Zone for this Input.
4. Click the Input Triggers tab. iSTAR Input Triggers Tab on Page 246 defines the Input Properties you can use in
triggers. Configure the triggers you need for this Input by following the steps in Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on
Page 278.
5. Click the Input Status tab to view the Active, Armed, Hardware, and Supervision status of the Input.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 243

iSTAR Input Editor

6. Click the Input State Images tab to view the state images for this Input. If you wish to customize the state images for
this Input, follow the steps in State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281.
7. When you have finished configuring this Input in the Input Editor, click Save and Close to save the settings you have
configured.

iSTAR Input General Tab

The iSTAR Input General tab displays information that identifies the Input and allows you to configure the Options and
Default State for the input.Figure 75 on Page 241 shows the iSTAR Input General tab.

iSTAR Input General Tab Definitions

Table 74 on Page 244 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Input General tab.
Table 74:  iSTAR Input General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Name Displays the name for this Input. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this
field.

Description Enter a textual comment about the Input, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only.

Enabled Click to enable the Input.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the iSTAR Input into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Input resides.

Identification

Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this Input is attached.

Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this Input is attached.

Type Reflects whether the Input has been assigned to a Door or other object. These include:
• General
• Door Switch
• Request to Exit
• Elevator

Assigned to Displays the Elevator or Door object name with which this Input is configured.

Connection Identifies the Input number on the hardware board to which this Input is connected.

244 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Input Editor

Table 74:  iSTAR Input General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Options

Debounce Threshold In this field, enter the time that an input must be in a particular state before it is reported as a state change. It is used to
(1/10 sec) filter out spurious changes. The units range from 0 – 60 seconds, the default is 0.
NOTE: For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Debounce Threshold field must be programmed for a
maximum of 90 seconds.

Supervised This field indicates that the inputs on the board are Supervised. This is a read-only field.
NOTE: For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Supervised check box must be selected.

Send state changes to To have a notification of changes in state of the Input sent to the guard station, select the Send state changes to the
monitoring station monitoring station check box.
NOTE: For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Send state changes to the monitoring station option must
be selected.

Send state change to To have a notification of changes in state of the Input sent to the journal, select the Send state changes to journal
journal check box. This option will be selected by default.

Reverse sense When this option is selected, the interpretation of the board’s Supervised Resistors is reversed.

Activate on Supervision When this option is selected, the Input will be activated on a Supervision error.
Error

Default State

Armed When this option is selected, the Input is armed by default. This is useful if you are not providing arming via an event.

iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab

The iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone tab appears only if the iSTAR Input is included in an Intrusion Zone.

An Input assigned as an iSTAR Intrusion Zone Controlled or Protected Input displays read-only assignment information on
the Intrusion Zone tab of the Input Editor. This tab only displays when the Input is assigned to a zone. At the same time,
the value in the Type field on the Input General tab changes from ‘General’ to ‘Intrusion Zone’.

The iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone tab displays read-only fields that give Intrusion Zone assignment information for this Input.

Table 75:  iSTAR Input Intrusion Zone Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Intrusion Zone Name of iSTAR Intrusion Zone this Input is assigned to

Display Name Displays the name you entered for this Input on the iSTAR Intrusion Zones Editor Inputs tab in the Controlled Inputs table.
NOTE: This is the unique LCD display name for this Input that is used whenever the Intrusion Zone needs to display this door as
an ‘offnormal’ point on the Reader LCD.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 245

iSTAR Input Editor

The Dynamic View for iSTAR Inputs also allows you to add a column that identifies the Intrusion Zone to
NOTE which the Inputs belong.

iSTAR Input Triggers Tab

You can create iSTAR Input Triggers for the properties shown in Table 76 on Page 246.

For iSTAR Main Board and Special Purpose Inputs such as Tamper, Power Failure, and Battery Low, you can only create
Triggers for the Active Status property.
Table 76:  iSTAR Input Trigger Properties

Property Description

Active Status Values that you can use for Triggers are “Active” and “Inactive”.

Armed Status Values that you can use for Triggers are “Armed” and “No Error”.

Supervision Error Status Values that you can use for Triggers are “Error” and “No Error”.

See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.

iSTAR Input Status Tab

The iSTAR Input Status tab displays several Input properties in read-only fields. Table 77 on Page 246 lists the fields on
the iSTAR Input Status tab.
Table 77:  iSTAR Input Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Active Status Displays whether the Input is Active or Inactive.

Armed Status Displays whether the Input is Armed or Disarmed.

Hardware Status Displays the Hardware Status value for the Input. Possible values are Secure, Active, Open Loop, Shorted Loop, Fault, or
Ground.

Supervision Displays the Supervision Status value for the Input. Possible values are:
Status • Unknown - the host has not received the input status reported from the panel yet.
• Uninitialized - the panel reports no error on the input.
• Error - the input is in error state, and the detail can be seen in the Hardware Status field.

iSTAR Input State Images Tab

The iSTAR Input State Images tab provides a means to change the default images that are displayed on the C•CURE
9000 Monitoring Station to indicate iSTAR Input states.

See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281 for information on using the State Images tab for an iSTAR Input.

246 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Input Editor

iSTAR Input State Images Tab Definitions

Table 78 on Page 247 shows the iSTAR Input States and the default State Images.
Table 78:  STAR Input State Images
Tab Definitions

Icon Description

Unknown

Active

Armed Enabled

Disarmed Enabled

Supervision Error

Disabled

Update Disabled

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 247

iSTAR Output Editor

iSTAR Output Editor

The iSTAR Output editor lets you configure an iSTAR Output that you created on an iSTAR Output Board.

The iSTAR Output editor (see on Page 248) has the following tabs:
■ iSTAR Output General tab
Identifies the Controller and Board this Output is configured on, the type of the Output (such as Alternate Shunt Relay),
and the object the Input is assigned to, such as a Door. See iSTAR Output General Tab on Page 252.
■ iSTAR Output Groups tab
If you have created a Group containing iSTAR Outputs and added this Output to it, the iSTAR Output editor also
displays a Group tab.
This tab lists the Output groups to which this Output belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36 for
information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Output.
■ iSTAR Output Status tab
This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Active, Armed, Hardware, and Supervision status of the
Output. See iSTAR Output Status Tab on Page 253.
■ iSTAR Output State Images tab
See iSTAR Output State Images Tab on Page 253.
Figure 77:  iSTAR Output Editor

248 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Output Editor

Accessing the iSTAR Output Editor

You can access the iSTAR Output Editor in several ways:
■ To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Outputs Tab) on Page 249.
■ To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge COM Tabs) on Page 249.
■ To Edit a Main Board Output (iSTAR Classic/Pro Boards Tab) on Page 249.
■ To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board Outputs Tab) on Page 249
■ To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board ACM Ext Tab) on Page 250
■ To Edit a Main Board Output from the Hardware Tree on Page 250.
■ To Edit a COM1/COM2/COM3 or ACM Output from the Hardware Tree on Page 250

To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge Outputs Tab)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Outputs tab.
2. Click in the Configured column to create a Relay Output or an Open Collector Output.
3. Click the Edit button for the Output you want to edit.
The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248).

To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR eX/Edge COM Tabs)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the COM1, COM2, or COM3 (iSTAR Edge only) tab.
2. Click in the Configured column of the Output Boards table to create an Output Board.
3. Click in the Edit column for the Output board you want to edit.
The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220).
4. Click in the Configured column of the Outputs table to create an Output.
5. Click the Edit button for the Output you want to edit.
The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248).

To Edit a Main Board Output (iSTAR Classic/Pro Boards Tab)

1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab.
2. Click in the Configured column to create a Main Board Output.
3. Click in the Edit column for the Main Board Output.
The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248).

To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board Outputs Tab)
1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab.
2. Click in the Configured column of the ACMs table to create an ACM Board.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 249

iSTAR Output Editor

3. Click in the Edit column for the ACM Board that contains the Input you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor
opens.
4. Click the Outputs tab on the ACM Board Editor.
5. Click in the Configured column to create an Output.
6. In the Outputs table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the Output you want to Edit.
The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248).

To Access the iSTAR Output Editor (iSTAR Classic/Pro ACM Board ACM Ext Tab)
1. From the iSTAR Controller Editor, click on the Boards tab.
2. Click in the Configured column of the ACMs table to create an ACM Board.
3. Click in the Edit column for the ACM Board that contains the Input you want to Edit. The ACM Board Editor
opens.
4. Click the ACM Ext tab on the ACM Board Editor.
5. Click in the Configured column of the Output Boards table to create an Output Board.
6. In the Output Boards table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the Output Board you want to Edit.
The iSTAR Output Board Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Board Editor on Page 220).
7. Click in the Configured column of the Outputs table to create an Output .
8. In the Output Boards table on this tab, click in the Edit column for the Output Board you want to Edit.
The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see Figure 77 on Page 248).

To Edit a Main Board Output from the Hardware Tree

1. Navigate to your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree and click .

2. Click the Outputs folder.
3. Double-click on the Output you want to edit.
The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248).

To Edit a COM1/COM2/COM3 or ACM Output from the Hardware Tree

1. Navigate from your iSTAR Controller in the Hardware Tree to the appropriate COM Board (on an iSTAR eX or iSTAR
Edge Controller) or ACM Board (on an iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller).

2. Click on Output Boards, as shown in Figure 78 on Page 251.

250 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Output Editor

Figure 78:  iSTAR Output Boards in the Hardware Tree

3. Click on the Output board that contains the Input you wish to edit.

4. Click on Outputs under that board.

5. Double-click on the Output you wish to edit.
The iSTAR Output Editor opens (see iSTAR Output Editor on Page 248).

Configuring an iSTAR Output

When you configure an iSTAR Output, you use the Output Editor tabs to define the Options and State Images for the
Output.

To Configure an iSTAR Output

1. Access the Output Editor for the Output you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Output Editor on Page 249).
2. Click the Output General tab:
• Modify the name of the Output in the Name field, if desired.
• Add a textual description of the Output to the Description field.
• Enable the Output by clicking the Enabled field.
• Modify the Options settings for the Output. See the definitions for the Options fields in Table 79 on Page 252.
3. Click the Output Status tab to view the Active Status of the Output.
4. Click the Output State Images tab to view the state images for this Output. If you wish to customize the state images
for this Output, follow the steps in State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281.
5. When you have finished configuring this Output in the Output Editor, click Save and Close to save the settings you
have configured.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 251

iSTAR Output Editor

iSTAR Output General Tab

The iSTAR Output General tab displays information that identifies the Output and allows you to configure the Options for
the Output. Figure 77 on Page 248 shows the iSTAR Output General tab.

iSTAR Output General Tab Definitions

Table 79 on Page 252 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Output General tab.
Table 79:  iSTAR Output General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Identification

Name Displays the name for this Output. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in
this field.

Description Enter a textual comment about the Output, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only.

Enabled Click to enable the Output.

Maintenance Click to place the iSTAR Output into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Output resides.

Output Identification

Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this Output is attached.

Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this Output is attached.

Type Reflects whether the Output has been assigned to a Door or other object. These include:
• General
• Door Lock
• Shunt Expiration Relay
• Alternate Shunt Relay
• Elevator Button
NOTE: The Elevator output assignment has not been evaluated by UL.

Assigned to Displays the Elevator or Door object name with which this Output is configured.

Connection Identifies the Input number on the hardware board to which this Output is connected.

Options

Pulse Duration This is a momentary activation which is entered in second intervals with a default of 0 seconds.
(1/10 sec)

252 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Output Editor

Table 79:  iSTAR Output General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Normally This field is used to specify whether the Output is wired such that current is normally on or not. The default setting (not
energized selected) signifies that the Output is wired so that the current is normally off and when the Output is in an On state, the circuit
is energized.

Send state To have a notification of changes in state of the Output sent to the Monitoring station, select the Send state changes to the
changes to monitoring station check box.
monitoring station NOTE: For Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications, the Send state changes to the monitoring station option must be
selected.
This selection is unavailable for an iSTAR Door Output. State changes for a Door Output are not sent to the Monitoring
Station.

Send state To have a notification of changes in state of the Output sent to the journal, select Send state changes to journal. This
changes to journal option is selected by default.
This selection is unavailable for an iSTAR Door Output. State changes for a Door Output are not sent to the journal.

iSTAR Output Status Tab

The iSTAR Output Status tab displays the State of the Output.
Table 80:  iSTAR Output Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Active Status Displays the status of the Output - either Active or Inactive.

iSTAR Output State Images Tab

The iSTAR Output State Images tab provides a means to change the default images that are displayed on the C•CURE
9000 Monitoring Station to indicate iSTAR Output states.

See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281 for information on using the State Images tab for an iSTAR Output.

iSTAR Output State Images Tab Definitions

Table 81 on Page 253 shows the iSTAR Output States and the default State Images.
Table 81:  iSTAR Output State Images Tab Definitions

Icon Description Icon Description

Unknown Inactive

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 253

iSTAR Output Editor

Table 81:  iSTAR Output State Images Tab Definitions

(continued)

Icon Description Icon Description

Active Disabled

Flashing

254 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader Editor

The iSTAR Reader editor lets you configure an iSTAR Reader that you created on an iSTAR Controller.

The iSTAR Reader editor (see Figure 79 on Page 256) has the following tabs:
■ iSTAR Reader General tab
Lists the Reader name, connections, and card formats for a reader connected to an iSTAR. See iSTAR Reader
General Tab on Page 498.
■ iSTAR Reader I/O tab
This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See iSTAR Reader I/O Tab on Page 500.
■ iSTAR Reader Keypad tab
This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad. See iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab on Page
501.
■ iSTAR Reader Triggers tab
See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.
■ iSTAR Reader Groups tab
If you have created a Group containing iSTAR readers and added this Reader to the Group, the iSTAR Reader editor
displays a Group tab.
This tab lists the Reader groups to which this Reader belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36 for
information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Reader.
■ iSTAR Reader Options tab
Use this tab to enable two factor authentication on the reader and to configure LED Control and Beep on Card Read for
Wiegand Readers. See iSTAR Reader Options Tab on Page 505.
■ iSTAR Reader Status tab
This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, PIN Required, and Keypad Command
Allow Status of the Reader. See iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 504.
■ iSTAR Reader After-Hours tab
This tab enables the After-Hours Readers Group feature. See After-Hours on Page 506 for further information and
procedures to configure this feature.
Use this tab to select the Innometriks reader high assurance settings. See High Assurance Tab on Page 509
■ Touchscreen tab
Use this tab to set the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader's Automatic Dim brightness and time. This tab also
displays the card types supported and allows you to reporder the card type priority. See iSTAR Reader Touchscreen
Tab on Page 508.
■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab
This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to
customize these state images. See iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 510.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 255

iSTAR Reader Editor

Figure 79:  iSTAR Reader Editor

You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers on the iSTAR Reader Dynamic View. See Add or Remove
Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

Accessing the iSTAR Reader Editor

You can access the iSTAR Reader editor in several ways:
■ From the iSTAR Ultra iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 167, iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-
ACMs Tab on Page 189, and iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 189.
■ From the iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab on Page 239.
■ From the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab on Page 301
■ From the iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 180 or iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 178.
■ From the iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 182 or iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 176
■ From the iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab on Page 212.
■ From the Hardware Tree, edit a Reader on a COM board or ACM board.

In each case, you must select the Configure column to configure the reader, then click to open the iSTAR Reader
editor.

256 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

Configuring iSTAR Readers

When you configure an iSTAR Reader, you use the Reader Editor tabs to define the Options and State Images for the
Reader.

To Configure an iSTAR Reader

1. Access the Reader Editor for the Reader you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 497).
2. Click the Reader General tab:
• Modify the name of the Reader in the Name field, if desired.
• Add a textual description of the Reader to the Description field.
• Enable the Reader by clicking the Enabled field.
• For some Readers, you need to select the correct Reader type from the drop-down list.
• Add the Card Formats that the Reader uses to the Card Format table. See Configuring iSTAR Readers on Page
257.
• Select options in the Reader Options section if it applies. For instance, if you are configuring a Touchscreen
reader.
3. Click the Reader Status tab to view the Active Status of the Reader.
4. Click the Reader State Images tab to view the state images for this Reader. If you wish to customize the state images
for this Reader, follow the steps in State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281.
5. When you have finished configuring this Reader in the Reader Editor, click Save and Close to save the settings you
have configured.

iSTAR Reader General Tab

The iSTAR Reader General tab displays information that identifies the Reader and allows you to configure the Options for
the Reader. Figure 143 on Page 497 shows the iSTAR Reader General tab.

iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions

Table 82 on Page 257 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Reader General tab.
Table 82:  iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Identification

Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit
this name by clicking in click in this field.

Description Enter a textual comment about the Reader, such as its location or purpose. This text is for
information only.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 257

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Enabled Click to enable the Reader.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the iSTAR Reader into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for
more information.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this reader resides.

Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this reader is attached.

Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this reader is attached.

Assigned to Displays the Elevator or Door object name with which this reader is configured.

Connection Identifies the Reader number on the hardware board to which this reader is connected.

Device ID The 15-character ID of the Aperio Reader. (Aperio Reader only.)

Reader Type Displays the reader type:

• RM (Software House Reader Protocol)
• BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy) Future feature.
• OSDP (Open Supervised Device Protocol)
• Smart (select for the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader)
Default: RM

Card Format

Add Click Add to add a Card Format.

If the card format you desire is not in the Name Selection dialog box list, click in the Select
Type field to select a card format.

Remove
Click the row selector to select one or more Card Format rows (hold down SHIFT or Ctrl to
select multiple rows), then click Remove to delete the row(s) for this field.

Name Displays the Name of each Card Format you have chosen for this Reader.

Description Displays the Description for the Card Format. This field is read-only.

Clearance Filter

Default Clearance Select a Clearance Filter Level for the reader from the drop-down list. The available Clearance
Filter Level Filter Levels are numbered 1 through 6. Personnel assigned with lower Clearance Filter Levels,
in the Personnel than the reader configuration are denied access.
• Level 6 is the highest level.
• Level 1 is the lowest level and the default setting.

258 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Reader Options (available only for Smart protocol)

Beep on Key Press Select this check box for the TS-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader to beep when pressing a key.

Beep on Card Read Select this check box for the TS-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader to beep on a card read.

Date Format Select the date format and/or the time format to use.
Time Format

iSTAR Reader I/O Tab

The iSTAR Reader I/O tab displays information that identifies the Reader and allows you to configure the Options for the
Reader.

iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions

Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader I/O tab are described in Table 83 on Page 259.

Definitions for the Inputs on the iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab are described in iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab on Page 518.

The fields on this tab vary depending upon the type of Reader you are configuring. For example, a Direct Connect Wiegand
Reader displays only the Communications Fail Input on the I/O tab.
Table 83:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Inputs

Create All Inputs Click to create all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Delete All Inputs Click to delete all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Edit Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to edit this Input.

Connection This read-only field identifies the position of each Input on the I/O tab.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to
select an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

Supervised 1 Represents Supervised Input #1 on iSTAR Readers. Not available on direct connect Wiegand Readers.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 259

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Supervised 2 Represents Supervised Input #2 on iSTAR Readers. Not available on direct connect Wiegand Readers.

Tamper Represents the Tamper Input on iSTAR Readers. Not available on direct connect Wiegand Readers.

Communications Represents the Communications Failure Input on iSTAR Readers.

Fail

Outputs

Create All Click to create all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

Delete All Click to delete all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

1 Represents Output #1 on iSTAR Readers.

2 Represents Output #2 on iSTAR Readers. Not available on direct connect Wiegand Readers.

iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab

The iSTAR Reader Keypad tab allows you to configure settings for the keypad on the Reader. You can specify how the
Reader accepts PIN entries, and whether the Reader accepts Keypad Commands.

Some features may not be supported by your reader.

NOTE

260 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

Figure 80:  iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab

iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions

Table 84:  iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

PIN is not If selected, only a card swipe is required for successful access to the door connected to this reader.
required

PIN only If selected, this reader can be used for PIN-Only access.
NOTE: PIN only cannot be used as a Query filter value for the PIN Required Status field.

Card and PIN If selected, this reader requires both a card swipe and a PIN entry at the keypad for access.
required

Schedule If Card and PIN Required is selected, you can select a Schedule object to determine when Card and PIN Required is
enforced. When the Schedule is active, both Card and PIN are required for access. When the Schedule is inactive, only a card
swipe is required.

Allow PIN If Card and PIN Required is selected, Personnel records configured with PIN Exempt (ADA) are exempt from having to
Exempt (ADA) enter a PIN for access.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 261

iSTAR Reader Editor

Table 84:  iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Allow card If you have selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required, you can enable Allow card numbers to be entered
numbers to be from the keypad by selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only, this option is unavailable because the Keypad must be
entered from used to enter a PIN.
keypad

Use PIN+1 as If you have selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required, you can enable Use PIN+1 as duress code by
duress code selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only, this option is unavailable.

Keypad Indicates whether or not Keypad Commands can be entered on this Reader’s Keypad and when. Select one of the following
Commands options from the drop-down list. The default is Not Allowed.
Allowed • Not Allowed – Keypad Commands cannot be used at the Reader
• Always Allowed – Keypad Commands can always be used at the Reader
• Allowed during specified schedule – Keypad Commands can be used at the Reader during the period specified in the
following field. When you select this option, the Schedule for Keypad Commands field becomes available.

Scramble TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader using the Smart Protocol only.
Keypad If the reader is using the Smart protocol on the reader, you must select this check box to enable Scramble Keypad on the reader.
When the PIN is being entered, the LED displays a randomly allocated set of numbers from 0 to 9. The position of the numbers
changes every time the keypad is activated.
NOTE: This field is not visible if the reader is using the RM Protocol. To enable Scramble Keypad on a reader using the RM
protocol, place the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader S2-5 switch to the ON position.

Schedule for Select a Schedule from the list to specify when Keypad Commands can be used at this Reader. When the Schedule is active,
Keypad Keypad Commands can be used. When the Schedule is inactive, Keypad Commands cannot be used.
Commands

iSTAR Reader Triggers Tab

The iSTAR Reader Triggers tab allows you to configure triggers for the Reader. You can set up triggers based on
Communication Status, PIN Required Status, and Tamper Status.

See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.

For iSTAR Readers you can create Triggers for the properties shown in Table 85 on Page 262.
Table 85:  iSTAR Reader Trigger Properties

Property Description

Communication Possible values are Normal or Comm Fail.

Status

PIN Required Status Possible values are Not Required or Card and PIN Required, based on the setting for PIN Requirements on the
Keypad tab.

Tamper Status Boolean value; True if the Tamper input has been activated, or False if the Tamper Input has not been activated.

262 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader Status Tab

The iSTAR Reader Status tab displays read-only status fields that allow you to see the current status of the Reader. The
type of reader determines the fields displayed on this tab.

l iSTAR Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 263.

l iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 263.
l iSTAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 264

iSTAR Reader Status Tab Definitions

Table 86:  iSTAR Reader Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Firmware Version The version number of the reader firmware.

Communications Communications displays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fail if the
Controller cannot communicate with the Reader.

PIN Required PIN Required displays the value True if PIN Required has been selected on the Keypad tab or False otherwise.

Tamper Displays the status of the Tamper Input. Not available on Direct Connect Wiegand readers.

Keypad Command This field displays status of the Keypad Commands Allowed setting from the Reader Editor Keypad tab:
Allow Status • Not Allowed
• Allowed
• Allowed during specified schedule.

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions

Table 87:  iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Firmware Version The version number of the reader firmware.

Communications Communications displays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fail if the
Controller cannot communicate with the Reader.

PIN Required PIN Required displays the value True if PIN Required has been selected on the Keypad tab or False otherwise.

Tamper True if a Tamper status is detected for the PIM Reader, or False if no Tamper condition is detected.

Keypad Command This field displays status of the Keypad Commands Allowed setting from the Reader Editor Keypad tab:
Allow Status • Not Allowed
• Allowed
• Allowed during specified schedule.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 263

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

[PIM1-pro 1] - PIM True if a Tamper status is detected for the PIM-485 board to which this reader is attached, or False if no Tamper condition
Tamper is detected.

Motor Stall True if a Motor Stall condition (a problem with the latching mechanism of the door strike) is detected, or False if no Motor
Stall condition is detected.
Available only for PIM-485 WA Series Locks, not for other AD Locks.

Low Battery True if a Low Battery condition is detected for the PIM Reader, or False if no Low Battery condition is detected. Available
only for PIM-485 connected Readers.

Manual Lock True if the Manual Lock Overrride has been activated (unlocked by a physical key), or False if the Manual Lock Override
Override has not been activated. Available only for PIM-485 connected Readers.

Push Button True if the Push Button on the lock panel (inside the room) has been pressed, or False if the Push Button has not been
pressed. Available only for PIM-485 connected Readers.

iSTAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions

Table 88:  iSTAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Communications Communications displays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fail if the Controller
cannot communicate with the Reader.

Tamper True if a Tamper status is detected for the Reader, or False if no Tamper condition is detected.

Low Battery True if a Low Battery condition is detected for the Reader, or False if no Low Battery condition is detected.

iSTAR Reader Options Tab

■ Use this tab to enable two factor authentication on the reader.
■ Use this tab to configure OSDP Secure Channel and Installation Mode.
Table 89 on Page 265 lists the additional fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Reader Options tab for
iSTAR Ultra Wiegand Readers.

264 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

Table 89:  iSTAR Ultra Wiegand Reader Options Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Dual Authentication

Enable Dual Authentication on Select to enable, deselect to disable.

this Reader See Configuring iSTAR Readers and Doors for Two Factor Authentication on Page 547 for more information.

OSDP Options

Installation Mode Enabled When enabled, allows C•CURE 9000 to communicate securely with a new reader that does not have encryption
keys. The OSDP Secure Channel Enabled check box must be also selected.
• If OSDP Secure Channel Enabled is On (selected) and Installation Mode Enabled is Off (deselected)
and a new reader is presented, it will not communicate with C•CURE 9000.
• If OSDP Secure Channel Enabled is Off (deselected), then communication is always available and the
installation mode is disabled.
• If Installation Mode Enabled is On (selected), then the keys will be exchanged and communication will
begin.
Default: Enabled.
Software House recommends that you disable (clear) this feature for maximum security.

OSDP Secure Channel When enabled, the 485 communication port is encrypted using keys exchanged between the panel and the
Enabled readers. See Installation Mode Enabled.
IMPORTANT:
Enabling or disabling the OSDP Secure Channel requires the reader to be restarted for the changes take
effect. This can be accomplished by power cycling the reader, resetting the ACM, or by resetting the
controller.
Default: Enabled

Reader Options Reader Options (available only for Smart protocol)

(available only for Smart
protocol)

Beep on Key Press Select this check box for the TS-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader to beep when pressing a key.

Beep on Card Read Select this check box for the TS-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader to beep on a card read.

Date Format Select the date format and/or the time format to use.
Time Format

Enable Dual Authentication on Select to enable, deselect to disable.

this Reader See Configuring iSTAR Readers and Doors for Two Factor Authentication on Page 547 for more information.

After-Hours
When configured, the After-Hours Reader feature defines a schedule, an enabling reader, and an iSTAR reader group.
Cardholders with clearance gain access by an enabling door to normally restricted, secure spaces after business hours.
Within this schedule, readers configured as members of an After-Hours Reader Group will reject access to all
cardholders that have not first presented their card to the enabling reader for that particular reader group, even when those
cardholders have valid clearance to member readers. Once a card has been presented and accepted at the enabling

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 265

iSTAR Reader Editor

reader, it will then have access to any members of the associated After-Hours group to which it has a valid clearance for
the remainder of the schedule.

The After-Hours feature supersedes clearance restrictions only relative to admission during the schedule. Outside of the
defined schedule, cardholders will have the normally expected access to readers within the After-Hours Reader Group.
Refer to After-Hours Readers Under Offline State Conditions on Page 267 for information regarding After-Hours enabled
readers during offline conditions.

The After-Hours restriction can be overridden for certain cardholders by using the AntiPassback Exempt Flag to indicate
After-Hours Exemption. The AntiPassback Exempt Flag is on the General tab of the Personnel record. Use of the
AntiPassback Exempt Flag to override After-Hours is set in System Variables. Refer to Setting the AntiPassback
Exempt Flag on Page 267 for instructions on setting the AntiPassback Exempt Flag.

For proper functionality, when configuring an After-Hours Reader feature, the After-Hours Reader Group, the enabling reader, and
NOTE the schedule that is assigned to these units must all be configured in the same time zone.

Configuring the After-Hours Readers Feature

This section provides instructions for configuring the After-Hours Reader Group, Schedule, and Enabling Readers required
for the After-Hours Readers feature.

Configuring an After-Hours Reader Group

1. If creating the first After-Hours Reader Group, open the Hardware pane and right-click the Hardware folder at the
top of the Hardware tree. Select After-Hours Reader Groups from the drop-down menu. Click New and an After-
Hours Reader Group editor appears.
or
If the After-Hours Reader Group folder already exists in the Hardware tree, select the After-Hours Reader Group
folder and click New.

2. Enter information in the Name and Description fields.

3. In the Objects in Group section, select Add and choose previously configured readers to add to this group.
4. Save and close the After-Hours Reader Group editor. A folder appears in the Hardware tree containing all configured
After-Hours Reader Groups.

Configuring an After-Hours Enabling Reader

1. Open the Reader editor that you want to enable as an After-Hours reader. Follow the procedures for accessing a
Reader editor as described in Reader Overview on Page 470.
2. Select the After-Hours tab.
3. Select the Enable After-Hours Reader Group check box. By default, this feature is disabled.
4. Click to select an After-Hours Reader Group to associate with the Enabling Reader.
5. Click to select an After-Hours Schedule during which the After-Hours feature is active.

If required, follow the instructions for creating and configuring an After-Hours Schedule as explained in the C•CURE 9000 Software
NOTE Configuration Guide.

266 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

6. Save and close the reader editor.

Setting the AntiPassback Exempt Flag

1. In the Administration Station, select Options & Tools and click System Variables. The System Variables screen
appears.
2. Expand the iSTAR Driver section and select the After-Hours AntiPassback Exempt system variable. Enter True
into the value field. The default setting is False.
3. Close the System Variables window. A restart of the iSTAR is required to implement this system variables change.

After-Hours Readers Under Offline State Conditions

The After-Hours Enabling Reader is a host-based feature which does not operate effectively if the iSTAR controller that
controls the enabling reader (or member readers of a reader group) is in an offline or communication failure state. During
such communication failures, readers which are out of communication with the host will not have a means of granting
access to cardholders.

If the enabling reader is controlled by a panel that is offline:

■ Any card holder that is already granted access by the enabling reader before a panel is put offline will still be able to
gain access to all member readers.
■ Any new cardholder that is not granted access by the enabling reader before the panel is put offline will not be able to
gain access at any member readers

If the enabling reader is not controlled by a panel that is offline:

■ Any cardholder that is already granted access by the enabling reader before a panel is put offline will still be able to
gain access to all member readers.
■ Any new cardholder that is not granted access by the enabling reader before the panel is put offline will not be able to
gain access at the member readers on this offline panel. If this cardholder is then granted access by the enabling
reader, it will be able to gain access to the other remaining member readers that are not on an offline panel.

Once communication with the host is restored, the panel controlling the enabling reader resumes normal operation.

High Assurance Tab

Use this tab to configure the Innometriks reader high assurance settings.

High assurance is supported on the iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE (Ultra Mode), and Ultra LT controllers.

The CHUID (Cardholder Unique Identifier) container is always sent.

NOTE

CAK, PIN, and Biometrics are single factor authentications when used alone. Any two together are a double factor
authentication, and all three together are a triple factor authentication.

See Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration on Page 480 for configuration information.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 267

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader High Assurance Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

High Assurance Reader

Support High Assurance Reader When selected (enabled), the High Assurance Operation Modes become available for selection.
Default: Disabled (clear)

High Assurance Operation Mode

Normal Mode Select the authentications listed to run in normal mode.

Secure Mode Select the authentications listed to support high assurance.

CAK Card authentication.

PAK Physical Access Control System (PAK). Card plus PIN authentication.
NOTE: If you select PAK, Card PIN is automatically selected.

Card PIN Personal Identification Number (PIN) authentication from a card or panel.

If you select Card PIN, PAK is automatically selected.

Biometrics Biometric authentication from card.

iSTAR Reader State Images Tab

The State Images tab for a Reader provides a means to change the default images used to indicate iSTAR Reader device
states on the Monitoring Station.

See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281 for information on using the State Images tab for an iSTAR
Reader.

See Table 90 on Page 268 for default State Images for an iSTAR RM reader

See Table 91 on Page 269 for default State Images for an iSTAR PIM-485 reader (Schlage wireless lock and reader).

iSTAR Reader State Images Tab Definitions

Table 90:  iSTAR Reader State Images Tab Definitions

Icon Description Icon Description

Unknown Tampered

Comm Fail Normal

268 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

Table 91:  iSTAR PIM 485 Reader State Images Definitions

Icon Description Icon Description Icon Description

Unknown Normal Low Battery

Comm Fail Motor Stall (Schlage Wireless Only) Manual Lock Override (Schlage Wireless
Only)

Tampered PIM Tamper (Schlage Wireless Push Button (Schlage Wireless Only)

Only)

Table 92:  iSTAR Aperio Reader State Images Definitions

Icon Description Icon Description

Unknown Key Cylinder Override (Aperio only)

Comm Fail Lock State Locked (Aperio only)

Tampered Lock State Jammed (Aperio only)

Normal

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 269

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor allows you to configure the settings for a Schlage PIM-485 reader/lock wirelessly
connected to an iSTAR Pro or eX controller PIM-485 board.

iSTAR Schlage Doors do not support Momentary Unlock.

NOTE

The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader editor is shown in Figure 81 on Page 270.

Figure 81:  iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader editor dialog box has the following tabs.
■ iSTAR Reader General tab
Lists the Reader name, connections, and card formats for a reader connected to an iSTAR Classic/Pro, or iSTAR eX.
See iSTAR Reader General Tab on Page 498.
■ iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O tab
This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See the iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab
on Page 513.
■ iSTAR Reader Keypad tab
This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad on iSTAR Schlage Readers. See iSTAR
Reader Keypad Tab on Page 501.
Only Schlage Keypad Mode 1 keypad output format (4 data bits per key with no parity) is supported. The mode is
configured on the Schlage device.
■ iSTAR Reader Triggers tab
See the Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.

270 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

You can define triggers for the following Properties of the iSTAR PIM-485 Reader:

Property Value

Communication Status Normal or Comm Fail

Low Battery Active or inactive

Manual Lock Override Active or inactive

Motor Stall Active or inactive

Parent PIM Tamper Active or inactive

PIN Required Status Not Required, Card and PN Required, or PIN Only

Push Button Active or inactive

Tamper Status Active or inactive

■ iSTAR Reader Groups tab

If you have created a Group containing iSTAR readers and added this Reader to it, the iSTAR Reader editor also
displays a Groups tab.
This tab lists the Reader groups to which this Reader belongs. See the Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Reader.
■ iSTAR Reader Status tab
This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, PIN Required, and Keypad Command
Allow Status of the Reader. See the iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 504.
■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab
This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to
customize these state images. See the iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 510.

You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Dynamic View. See Add or
Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab

The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O tab lets you configure the inputs and outputs for the reader. Each input and output is pre-
assigned to a specific function for the reader. Typically you can use the Create All buttons to create the inputs and
outputs, and then click the button in the Edit column to configure each input and output individually.

You can configure these inputs and outputs by clicking on in the Edit column. You can then create triggers that can
activate Events based on state changes.

Example:
You can create a trigger to activate an Event if the Low Battery Input status changes to Active (indicating that the
reader battery charge is low). See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278.

Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader I/O tab are described in Table 93 on Page 272.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 271

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

Table 93:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Inputs

Create All Inputs Click to create all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Delete All Inputs Click to delete all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Edit Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input editor to edit the Input.

Connection This read-only field identifies the position of each Input on the I/O tab.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to
select an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

Wireless DSM Represents the Wireless Door Switch Monitor (DSM) for the door.

Wireless REX Represents the Wireless Request To Exit (REX) for the door.

Wireless Reader Represents the Tamper Input on the Wireless Reader.

Tamper

Wireless Reader Represents the Communications Failure Input on the Wireless Reader.
Communications
Fail

Motor Stall Represents the Motor Stall Input on the Wireless Reader.

Low Battery Represents the Low Battery Input on the Wireless Reader.

Manual Lock When this input is active, it indicates that the lock has been unlocked by a physical key.
Override The Manual Lock Override status is available on the Status tab for this reader. This property is available for use in triggers.

Push Button When this input is active, it indicates that the push button on the lock panel (inside the room) has been pushed.
The Push Button Input status is available on the Status tab for this reader. This property is available for use in triggers.

Outputs

Create All Outputs Click to create all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Delete All Outputs Click to delete all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Door Latch Relay Represents the Door Latch Relay Output that is used to unlock the door.

Edit Click in this column to open the iSTAR Output editor to edit the Output.

272 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

Table 93:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Connection This read-only field identifies the position of the Output on the I/O tab.

Configured indicates that the Output has been configured.

indicates that the Output has not been configured.

Name Displays the system-generated name for this Output. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Output. If the Output is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then
click to select an Output Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 273

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor allows you to configure the settings for an Aperio reader/lock wirelessly connected to an
iSTAR Ultra controller Aperio RS-485 Hub board.

The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor is shown in Figure 82 on Page 274.

Figure 82:  iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

When you add an iSTAR Aperio Reader, Enable it in the Aperio Reader editor, and Save and Close the editor, a Door
object for that reader is added to the parent Ultra controller in the iSTAR Aperio Doors folder in the Hardware tree.

If you delete an iSTAR Aperio Reader, the iSTAR Aperio Door associated with the reader is also deleted.

If you display a list of iSTAR Doors, the new Aperio Door appears on the list. See iSTAR Aperio Door Editor on Page 420
for more information on Aperio Doors.

274 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

Figure 83:  iSTAR Aperio Doors

The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor dialog box has the following tabs.
■ iSTAR Reader General tab
Lists the Ultra controller name, Hub board, Assigned to Door, Reader number, Device ID, and Reader type. See
iSTAR Reader General Tab on Page 498.
■ iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O tab
This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See the iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab on
Page 518.
■ iSTAR Reader Keypad tab
This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad on iSTAR Aperio Readers. See
iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab on Page 277.
■ iSTAR Reader Triggers tab
See the Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR Ultra device.
You can define triggers for the following Properties of the iSTAR Aperio Reader:

Property Value

Communication Status Normal or Comm Fail

Key Cylinder Override Active or inactive

Lock State Jammed Active or inactive

Lock State Locked Active or inactive

Low Battery Status Active or inactive

Tamper Status Active or inactive

■ iSTAR Reader Status tab

This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, Tamper, and Low Battery status of the
Reader. See the iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 504.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 275

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab

This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to
customize these state images. See the iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 510.

You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an iSTAR Aperio Reader Dynamic View. See Add or
Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab

The iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O tab lets you configure the inputs for the reader. Each input is pre-assigned to a specific
function for the reader. Typically you can use the Create All buttons to create the inputs, and then click the button in the
Edit column to configure each input individually.

The number of inputs available on this tab varies, depending upon the reader model configured on the General tab in the
Reader Type field.

When an Aperio reader input is changed from active to inactive while the iSTAR Controller is offline, the
NOTE controller continues to report the input as active when the controller comes back online.
Workaround: Activate and then deactivate the input to synchronize the input with the controller.

You can configure these inputs by clicking on in the Edit column. You can then create triggers that can activate
Events based on state changes.

Example:
You can create a trigger to activate an Event if the Lock Low Battery Input status changes to Active (indicating that
the reader battery charge is low). See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278.

Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader I/O tab are described in Table 94 on Page 276.

Definitions for the input types are described in Table 95 on Page 277.
Table 94:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create all Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Delete All Click to delete all Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Edit Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input editor to edit the Input.

Connection This read-only field indicates the three standard inputs (Comm Fail, Low Battery, and Lock State Jammed.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select
an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

276 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

Table 95:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Input Definitions

Field/Button Description

Lock Reader Tamper Represents the state of the Tamper input on the lock.

Handle State / Request to Exit Represents the state of the Request to Exit input associated with the door handle.

Lock State Locked Represents the

Key Cylinder Override Represents the state of the Key Cylinder Override.

Door Position State Represents state of the Door Switch Monitor for the door associated with this reader.

Lock Communications Fail Represents the Lock Communications Failure Input on the Aperio Reader.

Lock State Jammed Represents the Lock State Jammed Input on the Aperio Reader.

Lock Low Battery Represents the Lock Low Battery Input on the Aperio Reader.

iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab

The iSTAR Reader Keypad tab allows you to configure settings for the keypad on the Reader. You can specify how the
Reader accepts PIN entries.

iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab Definitions

Table 96:  iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

PIN is not required If selected, only a card swipe is required for successful access to the door connected to this reader.

PIN only If selected, this reader can be used for PIN-Only access.
NOTE: PIN only cannot be used as a Query filter value for the PIN Required Status field.

Card and PIN If selected, this reader requires both a card swipe and a PIN entry at the keypad for access.
required

Schedule If Card and PIN Required is selected, you can select a Schedule object to determine when Card and PIN Required is
enforced. When the Schedule is active, both Card and PIN are required for access. When the Schedule is inactive, only a
card swipe is required.

Allow card If you have selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required, you can enable Allow card numbers to be
numbers to be entered from the keypad by selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only, this option is unavailable (because the
entered from Keypad must be used to enter a PIN).
keypad

Use PIN+1 as If you have selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required, you can enable Use PIN+1 as duress code by
duress code selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only, this option is unavailable.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 277

Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices

Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices

C•CURE 9000 uses Triggers, which are configured procedures for activating actions, to activate Events or Outputs for an
iSTAR device. A Trigger automatically executes a specified Action when a particular Condition occurs (when the object
Property specified in the Trigger reports the Value specified in the Trigger).

Example:
To provide an audible and visible alarm for a power failure condition, you can create two triggers for the AC Power Fail
Input on an iSTAR controller that are activated when the Input's status changes:
Activate Output that energizes an audible sounder.
Activate Output that energizes an LED alarm light installed near an arming/disarming keypad reader.

Table 97 on Page 278 provides an example of a configured iSTAR Trigger.

Table 97:  Triggers Tab Settings Example

The following Triggers Tab settings:

Property Value Action Details Schedule Time Zone

Active Status Active Activate Event iSTAR Input Event Always Time Zone of the iSTAR
controller

Would create the following Trigger:

Any time (Always Schedule) the Active Status (Property) equals Active (Value), activate the event (Action) named iSTAR Input Event
(Details).
iSTAR Input Event is an Event that you would need to create using the Event Editor.

You cannot assign a Schedule to an iSTAR Controller trigger. Effectively, iSTAR Controller triggers use an
NOTE Always Schedule.

From the Triggers tab of an iSTAR device (such as a Controller, Input, or Reader), you can perform the following tasks.
■ Defining a Trigger for an iSTAR Device on Page 278.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279.

iSTAR Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 280 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an iSTAR Device Triggers
tab.

Defining a Trigger for an iSTAR Device

You can use the Triggers tab to define a Trigger for an iSTAR device. The typical usage for an iSTAR Trigger is to activate
an Event or an Output as the result of a state change of an iSTAR device Property.

Example:
When an iSTAR Tamper Input changes from the Inactive (normal) to Active (abnormal) state, you wish to activate an
Event and activate an audible alarm (an iSTAR Output).

278 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices

Time Zones for iSTAR Triggers

If you specify a Time Zone in your Trigger definition, you can control when the Schedule for the Trigger is active. You can
only select the C•CURE 9000 server Time Zone or the Time Zone of the iSTAR you are editing.

Example:
If you have iSTAR controllers that are in different Time Zones than your C•CURE 9000 server, you may want to have
some Triggers activate according to the iSTAR controller's Time Zone, while other Triggers are activated according to
the server Time Zone.
When you specify the Time Zone for a Trigger definition to be the same as the iSTAR controller Time Zone, the
Schedule activation times for the Trigger occur according to the iSTAR controller Time Zone.
If you have an iSTAR controller in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT - 08:00) and a server in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT -
05:00), a Schedule that is active from Midnight to 6:00 AM is activated from Midnight to 6:00 AM in Pacific Time (GMT
- 08:00) rather than Eastern time (three hours later).

To Define a Trigger for an iSTAR Device

1. Click on the Triggers tab for your iSTAR device.
2. Click Add on the Triggers tab to create a new Trigger.
3. Click within the Property column to open the Property dialog box showing the Properties available for the device.
4. Click a Property in the list to select it and add it to the Property column.
5. Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have
selected. Click a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. (If there is no set
list of Values, you can type in a Value.)
6. Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to
include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.
7. When you select an Action, the lower pane in the Triggers box displays an entry field or group of entry fields, specific
to the selected Action, so that you can configure the Details for the Action.
8. Once you define the Action details, the Details column displays information about how the Action has been
configured.
9. For example, if an Event field is displayed in Details, you can click to select an Event that you want to associate with
the Trigger.
10. If the Triggers tab includes a Time Zone column, click within the Time Zone column to display a drop-down list of
available Time Zones. Most of the time, you will want to select a Time Zone that is the same as the iSTAR controller
Time Zone. If you do not select a Time Zone, the Time Zone of the C•CURE 9000 server is used by default.
11. Click Save and Close to save the iSTAR Trigger.

Removing a Trigger
If you no longer need a Trigger defined for a Device, you can remove the Trigger.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 279

Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices

To Remove a Trigger
1. Click the Triggers tab for your device.

2. Click the row selector to select a Trigger row.

3. Click Remove to delete the selected row.
4. Click Save and Close to save the device.

iSTAR Triggers Tab Definitions

Table 98 on Page 280 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an iSTAR Triggers tab.
Table 98:  iSTAR Triggers Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Add Click Add in the Triggers tab to create a new trigger.

Remove
Click the Row Selector , then click Remove in the Triggers tab to delete a trigger.

Click the Row Selector to select a row in the Triggers table.

Property Click within the Property column, and then click . The Property browser opens presenting properties available for the
Comm Port. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column.

Value Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click a
Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.

Action Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to include as a
parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.
As you select an Action, a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, appear at the bottom of the dialog box.
Click to select entries for these fields.

Details Displays details about how the Action was configured.

Schedule Click within the Schedule column to select a Schedule.

Click to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane.
Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information on creating Schedules.

Time Zone Click within the Time Zone column to select a Time Zone for Schedule activation.
Click to select a Time Zone that you want to associate with the trigger Schedule. Typically you can chose either the
C•CURE 9000 server (host) Time Zone or the Time Zone of the iSTAR controller.
If you specify a Time Zone, the Schedule start and end times are calculated using that Time Zone.
Example:
A Schedule that becomes active at 3:00 AM would become active at 3:00 AM in the Pacific Time Zone, if that Time Zone was
specified. Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information on Time Zones and Events.

280 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices

State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices

The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate iSTAR device states on the
Monitoring Station.

From the State Images tab of an iSTAR device (such as a Controller, Input, Output, or Reader), you can perform the
following tasks.
■ Customizing State Images for an iSTAR Device on Page 281
■ Restore a Default State Image on Page 282

You can replace the default images with JPG formatted files of your choice, to uniquely identify your objects when
activities are displayed on the Monitoring Station Client.

iSTAR State Images Tabs Definitions on Page 281 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an iSTAR Device
State Images tab.

iSTAR State Images Tabs Definitions

iSTAR State Images Tabs have the State Images tabs as shown in Table 99 on Page 281.
Table 99:  iSTAR State Images Tabs Definitions

Field/Button Description

State This column lists the states that are defined for this iSTAR device. These are the states that are reported on the Monitoring
Station to reflect the status of this iSTAR device.

Image This column shows the images that are assigned to each of the iSTAR device states. There are images assigned by default to
every iSTAR device you create. For any individual iSTAR device, you can use the State Images tab to substitute a
different.JPG/JPEG image for the default image. See Customizing State Images for an iSTAR Device on Page 281 for
instructions.

Save and After you have made changes to any settings for the iSTAR device, click Save and Close to save those changes and Close the
Close editor for the device.

Customizing State Images for an iSTAR Device

From the State Images tab, you can change the images that appear in the Monitoring Station to represent an iSTAR
device.

To Customize an iSTAR Device State Image

1. Navigate to the State Images tab for the iSTAR device.
2. Double-click the existing image.
A Windows Open dialog box appears, allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
3. When you locate the replacement image, select it and click Open to replace the default image with this image.
4. When you are done editing the device, click Save and Close to save the configuration.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 281

State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices

Restore a Default State Image

You can restore the default state image for any of the states of an iSTAR device.

To Restore the Default State Image

1. From the State Images tab, select an existing image.
2. Right-click the image and select Restore Default.
3. Click Save and Close to save the configuration.

282 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT)

Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT)

■ The information this section only applies to the iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE, and Ultra LT.
NOTE
■ If CPNI mode is enabled on the controller, then all database and transactions are stored in RAM. The
database and transactions are not backed up on the SD card.

The iSTAR Ultra SE configuration data (doors, personnel, etc.) is held in volatile RAM during normal operation (IP settings
are stored in the controller’s onboard flash memory). This data is backed up to non-volatile SD Card memory on a periodic
basis during normal operation. Data is automatically backed up after a fast download to the panel, and, upon a soft reset on
the GCM board.

The non-rechargeable lithium coin cell battery maintains the controller’s clock only during a power outage
NOTE for up to 30 days.

To ensure that the database backup is always current, Software House recommends that you create an event to trigger a
database backup when the Low Battery or AC Fail input is activated on the GCM board. An event with the action
“Backup iSTAR Database” can trigger the event from the Low Battery or AC Fail input. If your power supply does not
support the Low Battery or AC fail, then you can trigger the database backup event using a schedule. For example, set a
schedule to run every Monday at 2AM.

When power is restored after an outage, the controller first attempts to connect to its host server. If successful, the host
will download the current time to the controller, and download the current database. However, if the host is not present,
then the controller will use its local backed-up time, and it will use the last saved database from the SD card.

When the host is offline, transaction buffers of card activity and other activity are automatically written to non-volatile
memory, and do not require database backup configuration.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 6 283

Creating a Local Backup (Ultra, Ultra SE, Ultra LT)

284 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 7

Chapter 7 - Configuring the IP-ACM

This chapter explains how to configure the IP-ACM in C•CURE 9000.

In this chapter

IP-ACM Overview 286

IP-ACM Offline Mode Configuration Information 288
IP-ACM v1 to IP-ACM v2 Board Conversion 291
Configuring the IP-ACM 294
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor 297

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 285

IP-ACM Overview

IP-ACM Overview
The IP-ACM provides connection and management of readers. There are two types of IP-ACM boards:
■ IP-ACM v1 - contains one Ethernet port
■ IP-ACM v2 - contains two Ethernet ports

The IP-ACM contains RJ45 ports:

■ Port 1: Ethernet port, internally bound to MAC with the MAC address and used as the network connection port for the
board (10/100/1000)
■ Port 2 (IP-ACM v2 only): Switch port, not a secondary port, used for iSTAR Ultra LT connection (10/100, no PoE)

The IP-ACM, when configured in Offline mode (enabled), acts as its own entity if it becomes disconnected from the
iSTAR. Readers will remain active, with limitations. Offline access operation is buffered, and will be reported to the
iSTAR Controller when communication is restored (determined by available memory.) Refer to IP-ACM Offline Mode
Configuration Information on Page 288 for further details regarding the offline mode of the IP-ACM.

Limitations
■ C•CURE 9000 only supports four readers (any combination of RM, Wiegand, Smart and OSDP readers) or up to two
BLE readers connected to an IP-ACM.
■ The IP-ACM is supported on the iSTAR Ultra, the iSTAR Ultra SE in Ultra Mode, the iSTAR Ultra Video, and the
iSTAR Ultra LT.
■ Offline mode is not supported for two RM readers. Two reader configuration for a single door must be: one RM for entry
and one Wiegand for exit.
■ Offline mode is not supported for BLE or OSDP readers connected to the IP-ACM v1.
■ Offline mode is not supported for BLE, RM, Smart or OSDP readers connected to the IP-ACM v2.

IP-ACM Configuration Sequence

The IP-ACM configuration sequence is described in Table 100 on Page 286.
Table 100:  IP-ACM Configuration Sequence

Step Task See...

1 Connect the IP-ACM to the network. IP-ACM Hardware

Configuration Guide

286 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

IP-ACM Overview

Table 100:  IP-ACM Configuration Sequence (continued)

Step Task See...

2 Add the IP-ACM to the subnet: iSTAR Configuration

1. Open the iSTAR Configuration Utility (ICU). Utility User Guide

2. Click IP-ACM to discover all IP-ACMs in the subnet.

3. Right-click on the IP-ACM in the list and select Configure IP-ACM.
Recommended browsers: Internet Explorer 10, Internet Explorer 11, Firefox, or Chrome.
NOTE: If you are using Internet Explorer 9, and the web page does not display properly or if the session page
expires and was not directed to the log in page, relaunch the web page.

3 Ensure that the iSTAR Controller (Ultra or Ultra SE in Ultra Mode) is configured in the C•CURE 9000. Creating an
iSTAR Controller on
Page 127

4 Access the iSTAR Controller dialog box IP-ACMs tab: iSTAR Ultra

1. Add the IP-ACM(s) to the controller. Controller IP-ACMs
Tab on Page 294
2. Configure the IP-ACMs Offline Mode.
3. Configure the readers to connect to the IP-ACM.
iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM
4. Configure the inputs, outputs, and triggers. Editor on Page 297

5 Configure a door with the readers connected to the IP-ACM. iSTAR Door Editor
on Page 397

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 287

IP-ACM Offline Mode Configuration Information

IP-ACM Offline Mode Configuration Information

Offline Mode allows a limited level of access and control if communication is interrupted between the IP-ACM and the
iSTAR. Offline mode allows up to the last 1,000 valid credentials and/or a specific personnel group of no more than 100.
Offline Access stores a set of credentials in non-volatile memory on the IP-ACM. Clearances are not downloaded to the
IP-ACM and are not stored.

Offline Mode is configured in the iSTAR Controller dialog box in the IP-ACMs tab.

Card + PIN access is not supported in Offline Mode. Card-only access is supported.

■ Offline Mode is only supported on IP-ACM v1 when connected to an iSTAR Ultra

NOTE controller with firmware 6.5.2 and higher.
■ Wiegand readers are supported on IP-ACM v2 when connected to an iSTAR Ultra
controller with firmware 6.5.4 and higher.
■ OSDP readers are supported on the IP-ACM when connected to an iSTAR Ultra controller
with firmware v6.6.3 and higher.
■ All readers on the IP-ACM must be of the same type, either Wiegand or OSDP.

See the following:

■ Stored Credentials on Page 288
■ Door Configuration on Page 289

Stored Credentials

Predefined Credentials
Predefined credentials are downloaded from the iSTAR controller in the form of raw data (Static Card Data). When the IP-
ACM is offline, access is granted when the predefined credentials (from the Static Card Data stored on the IP-ACM) are
presented to the readers.

The following restrictions apply to stored predefined credentials in Offline Mode:

■ Personnel groups configured for Offline Mode must all share the same card format and facility code.
■ Card formats supported are:
• Wiegand 26
• Wiegand 37
• Two-parity bit style formats
• 32-bit serial number type formats
■ The Offline Mode Personnel Group can only be configured or edited in C•CURE. Offline Mode Personnel Group
changes are sent to the IP-ACM immediately (including deleting credentials, if necessary), if the iSTAR controller and
the IP-ACM are online. Any change in the Personnel Group deletes and recreates the IP-ACM static records.

288 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

IP-ACM Offline Mode Configuration Information

Credentials Last Granted Access

In Offline Mode, the IP-ACM board admits cards that are among the last xxx previous admitted cards in addition to a pre-
defined personnel group.
■ Admits cards up to the last 1,000 credentials most previously admitted (number of admits configurable), including
personnel in personnel groups.
■ Maximum 100 personnel in the personnel group.
■ If you set the Personnel system variable "Maximum Cards Per Person", then that value must be taken into
consideration.

Example:
If you set the "Maximum Cards Per Person" value to 3, then only 1000 - 100 x 3 = 700 is allowed in the "Admit the
last admitted cards" field for configuration.

Door Configuration
■ In Offline Mode, all components of the door must come from the same IP-ACM board.
NOTE

In Offline Mode, the readers, inputs, and outputs must be configured on the IP-ACM as detailed below:
■ Wiegand:
• A reader configured on Wiegand Port 1 as the entry reader.
• A reader configured on Wiegand Port 2 as the exit reader.
■ RS-485 (used for OSDP readers):
• A reader configured on RS-485 Port 1 assigned to OSDP address 0 as the entry reader.
• A reader configured on RS-485 Port 2 assigned to OSDP address 0 as the exit reader.
■ An input configured on Input 1 as the DSM (Door State Monitor).
■ An input configured on Input 2 as the REX (Request to Exit).
■ An output configured on Output 1 as the Door lock.

■ Door configurations not complying with the above restrictions may result in unexpected operation
between online and offline modes.
■ If the readers, in the list above, inputs/outputs are configured for a different purpose in C•CURE, the
Offline Mode door controller will use them for the door control functions listed above, even if they are
not configured for the door in C•CURE.

The door operation parameters are fixed when the IP-ACM goes into offline mode and cannot be changed. The door
parameters revert to their configured settings when the IP-ACM goes back online.

Offline fixed parameters:

■ Shunt time: 10 seconds
■ Unlock time: 5 seconds
■ Relock delay time: ½ second

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 289

IP-ACM Offline Mode Configuration Information

■ Debounce time: ½ second

■ Unlock on RTE: Enabled
■ Shunt on RTE: Enabled
■ DSM shunted full shunt time: Disabled
■ Delay Relock full shunt time: Disabled

290 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

IP-ACM v1 to IP-ACM v2 Board Conversion

IP-ACM v1 to IP-ACM v2 Board Conversion

This section describes the configuration steps required to complete the IP-ACM v1 to IP-ACM v2 board conversion.

Requirements and Limitations

■ The IP-ACM v1 board must be physically replaced with the IP-ACM v2 board.
■ The IP-ACM v2 cables and power must be connected.
■ Personnel performing the board upgrade must have the proper privilege. Step 1 of this conversion procedure explains
how to assign the privilege.
■ The controller must be disabled during the conversion. If there is one controller in the cluster, the cluster can be
disabled.
■ The conversion procedure must be repeated on each IP-ACM v1 board.

To complete the conversion:

1. Ensure that the user has the privilege Upgrade Board selected in the assigned Privilege configuration:
a. Click the Configuration pane button.
b. Select Privilege from the drop-down menu.

c. Click to view a list of configured privileges in the Dynamic view.

d. Double-click on the privilege to open the Privilege dialog box.
e. Click Hardware.
f. Click iSTAR and select iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM, as shown in Figure 84 on Page 292.
g. Click in the Upgrade board row and select the Grant check box.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 291

IP-ACM v1 to IP-ACM v2 Board Conversion

Figure 84:  Privilege Editor - iSTAR IP-ACM

h. Click Save and Close.

2. Click the Hardware pane button.
a. Locate the Cluster and the iSTAR Controller where the IP-ACM v1 resides.
b. Open the iSTAR Controller editor dialog box.
c. Disable the iSTAR Controller by clearing the Enabled check box.

If there is only one controller in the cluster, you can disable the cluster.
NOTE

l Click on the IP-ACMs tab.

d. Select the IP-ACM v1 board you want to convert to an IP-ACM v2 board and click Edit.
e. Under Upgrade Options, click Upgrade.

292 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

IP-ACM v1 to IP-ACM v2 Board Conversion

The Upgrade button is only enabled if the controller or the cluster is disabled.
NOTE

f. Enter the MAC address of the new board in the prompt and click OK.
A prompt appears to confirm that you want to perform the upgrade.
g. Click Yes to confirm the upgrade.
h. Click OK in the dialog box displaying the results of the conversion.
— If the conversion is successful, the iSTAR Controller dialog box automatically closes.
— If the conversion is not successful, the iSTAR Controller dialog box remains open.
i. If there are additional IP-ACM v2 boards you want to convert for this controller, and other controllers in the same
cluster, repeat steps b through step i.
3. Open the iSTAR Controller editor (for each controller disabled in the cluster), or the Cluster dialog box, and click
Enabled.
4. Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 on each IP-ACM v1 board you want to convert.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 293

Configuring the IP-ACM

Configuring the IP-ACM

The IP-ACM configuration is accessed through the iSTAR Controller editor dialog box IP-ACMs tab. Figure 85 on Page
294 shows the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACMs tab.

See Table 101 on Page 295 for descriptions of the fields.

Figure 85:  iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACMs Tab

To Configure the IP-ACM

1. From the iSTAR Controller editor, click the IP ACMs tab, as shown in Figure 85 on Page 294.

Be sure to select the correct configuration table for the IP-ACM.

NOTE
■ IP-ACMv1s for IP-ACM boards with one Ethernet port.
■ IP-ACMv2s for IP-ACM boards with two Ethernet ports.

2. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row where you want to add, or edit, an IP-ACM.
3. Click in the Edit column of the Index row to open the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor on Page 297. The iSTAR Ultra
IP-ACM editor is used to configure the inputs, outputs, and readers (Wiegand, RM, BLE, OSDP, and Smart).
4. Configure the Offline Mode of All IP-ACM's configured on this controller.
See Table 101 on Page 295 for descriptions of the fields.
5. When the IP-ACMs configuration is complete, click in the Enabled check box, and click Save and Close.

294 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring the IP-ACM

Table 101:  iSTAR Controller IP-ACMs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

IP-ACMs

Create All IP-ACMv1s Click to create the IP-ACMs. When you click Create All IP ACMv1s, or Create All IP ACMv2s, the
Create All IP-ACMv2s Configured column check boxes are selected,
Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Ultra IP ACM Editor to configure the IP ACM.

Delete All IP-ACMv1s When you click Delete All IP-ACMv1s,or Delete All IP-ACMv2s, the check boxes in the Configured
Delete All IP-ACMv2s column of the table are cleared for all IP-ACMs.
When the configuration is saved, a prompt appears to confirm deletion of each IP-ACM.

Offline Mode of All IP-ACMs

NOTE: The selections made in the Offline Mode of All IP-ACMs section will apply to all IP-ACMs (iP-ACMv1s and IP-ACMv2s) configured on the
controller.
In offline mode, the IP-ACM board will admit cards that are among the last xxx previous admitted cards in addition to a pre-defined personnel group.
- A total of 1000 credentials (not personnel) for both previous admitted credentials and credentials in the personnel group.
- Maximum 100 personnel in the personnel group.
- If you set the Personnel system variable "Maximum Cards Per Person", then that value must be taken into consideration.
Example: If you set the "Maximum Cards Per Person" value to 3, then only 1000 - 100 x 3 = 700 is allowed in the "Admit the last admitted
cards" field for configuration. This is true, even if the personnel count in the personnel group selected is less than 100.

Admit the last admitted cards Select a number from the menu that will apply to the previous cards that were admitted.
Default: 0
Value: 0 to 1000

Card Format used for Offline Mode Select a card format to be used for personnel when in offline mode. Only individual card formats are
selectable. The card format is used to determine the card data stream for each person in the personnel
group. All personnel will use the same card format. The first facility code and site code in the list will be used
if that format has multiple values.

Admit the members of this Click to select a pre-configured personnel group.

personnel group
NOTE: The maximum value is 1000 admitted cards. If a Personnel Group is configured to have 100
personnel members, the maximum value is reduced by 100 times the maximum number of cards
per person configured in the System Variable.

Number of seconds before Offline The time in seconds that the IP ACM waits to enter offline mode after it loses communication with the GCM
Mode is enabled. board.
This setting will apply to all IP ACMs on this controller unless specified in the iSTAR Ultra IP ACM Editor
General tab.
Default: 10 seconds.
Range: 5 to 30 seconds.

Number of Days to Keep The number of days a credential is kept while in offline mode.
Credentials in Offline Mode A value of 0 indicates not to keep a credential when in offline mode.
Default: 30 days
Range: 0 to 9999 days

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 295

Configuring the IP-ACM

Table 101:  iSTAR Controller IP-ACMs Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

High Latency Threshold in The number of milliseconds that will cause a round-trip latency alarm. This value will apply to all IP-ACM's
milliseconds configured for this controller.
Default: 200 milliseconds (0.2 seconds)
Range: 100- 2000 milliseconds (0.1 to 2 seconds)

296 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

The iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM editor, shown in Figure 86 on Page 297, is used to configure readers, inputs and outputs.

See the following for more information:

■ Accessing the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor on Page 298
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab on Page 298
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab on Page 299
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab on Page 300
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab on Page 301
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Triggers Tab on Page 304.
■ iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab on Page 304
Figure 86:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor - General Tab

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 297

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Accessing the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

To Access the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

1. From the iSTAR Ultra Controller editor dialog box, click the IP ACMs tab.
2. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row that you want to add/edit.
3. Click in the Edit column of the Index row to open the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM editor.
Table 102:  iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-ACM Editor General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the IP-ACM into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.

Board Location

Controller This field is read-only.

IP-ACM Number This field is read-only.

MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the IP-ACM.

Offline Mode

Disable offline mode Click the check box to disable offline mode on this IP-ACM.
NOTE: This selection will override the Offline Mode of all IP-ACMs selections in the iSTAR Controller Editor IP-
ACMs tab for this IP-ACM.
See IP-ACM Offline Mode Configuration Information on Page 288.
If using online mode, all components of the door must come from the same IP-ACM board.

Switch Port (J5) Options Select the check box to enable the J5 Switch Port. Clear this check box to disable this port. This check box is selected by
(option for IP-ACM v2 default.
only)

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs Tab

The Inputs tab is used to create and configure the Inputs that are attached to this Ultra IP-ACM Board.

You can use an existing Input Template to create one or more of the IP-ACM Board Inputs. Click in the Template Column,
then click . A list of available iSTAR Input Templates appears. Click on the Template you wish to use. See Using
Templates for Controller Inputs, Outputs, and Readers on Page 44 for more detailed information about using Templates to
create Inputs.

Table 103 on Page 299 provides definitions for the buttons and fields on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Inputs tab.

298 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Table 103:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Inputs Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Special Purpose Inputs

Tamper The Tamper input activates when the controller cabinet is opened or removed from its mounting surface.
NOTE: For UL applications, this field must be enabled.
Select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Input Editor
General tab to configure the Tamper input. From the Input Editor you can configure the Options, Triggers, Groups, Status and
State Images that are associated with the Tamper Input.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Input.

Communication A logical unsupervised input that reflects the state of the communication between the GCM board and Processor-A on this IP-
Fail ACM board.

Port Power Power indicator input for each RM / Weigand port.

Alarm Status 1
Port Power
Alarm Status 2

Lock Power IP-ACM can provide power for the locks directly from the 2 Output connectors (Lock Power 1 & 2). There are automatic over-
Alarm Status 1 current shut-off switches on each Lock Power. The Lock Power Alarm Status inputs go Active when the over-current shut-off
Lock Power switches are active (i.e., when Lock Power has been shut off).
Alarm Status 2

General Purpose Inputs

Inputs 1 These standard general purpose supervised inputs are available on iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM boards.
through 4

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab

The Outputs tab is used to configure the Outputs for the IP-ACM.

Table 104 on Page 299 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Outputs tab.
Table 104:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Name Displays the name for this Output board. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking this
field.

Description Enter a textual comment about the Output board, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Output board resides.

Maintenance Click to put the iSTAR Outboard Board into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Location

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 299

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Table 104:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Outputs Tab General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this Output is attached.

Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this Output board is attached.

Board Index This read-only field identifies the board index (which represents the SW1 address switch setting on the R/8 board) for this Output
board.

Outputs

Create All Click to create all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

Delete All Click to delete all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

Edit column Click in this column to open the iSTAR Output Editor to edit this Output.
NOTE: The Configured check box must be selected to open the Output Editor.

Index column This read-only field identifies the position of each Output (1 - 2) on the IP-ACM board.

Configured indicates that the Output has been configured.

column
indicates that the Output has not been configured.
NOTE: The Configured check box must be selected to open the Output Editor.

Name column Displays the system-generated name for this Output. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Output. If the Output is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to
column select an Output Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab

The Wiegand tab is used to configure Wiegand readers connected to the IP-ACM board.

Table 105 on Page 300 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand tab.
Table 105:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab Definitions

Box Description

Create All Click to create all the Readers. When you click Create All Readers, the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Readers can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a direct connect Wiegand Reader.

Delete All When you click Delete All Readers, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Readers, and all these Readers
Readers are immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader Editor to configure a Reader. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496.
column

300 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Table 105:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Wiegand Tab Definitions (continued)

Box Description

Index This column displays the number for each reader. This number is the physical port number for a Direct Connect Wiegand reader.
column

Configured Click in this column to create a reader (make it available to be edited).

column

Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in this field.
column

Template Click in this column prior to creating the Reader, then click to select a Reader template from the list of available Reader
column templates.
The Template column shows the template name chosen if you selected a Template prior to creating the Reader.

Readers 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Reader and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Reader
-2 Editor General tab to configure the Keypad, Triggers, Groups, Status and State Images that are associated with a Reader. See
iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for detailed instructions for configuring iSTAR Readers.
The Name column displays a name comprised of the Reader Type and the iSTAR Controller name. You can click in this column to
edit the Reader name.

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab

The RS-485 tab is used to configure RS-485 ports connected to the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board.

The iSTAR Device Port Editor, accessed by clicking in the Configured check box of the port and click Edit, allows you to
select the RM, BLE, or OSDP protocols. See IP-ACM iSTAR Device Port Dialog Box on Page 302

Table 106 on Page 301 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 tab.
Table 106:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create the RS-485 Ports. When you click Create All Ports the Configured column check boxes are selected, and you
Ports can click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Device Port Editor to configure an RS-485 Port.

Delete All When you click Delete All Ports, the check boxes in the Configured column are cleared for all Ports, and all Ports are
Ports immediately deleted (any settings you have configured are lost).

Edit column Click in the Edit column to open the iSTAR Device Port Editor to configure Device Ports for the IP-ACM. See iSTAR Ultra
ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor on Page 204.

Index column This column displays the number for each Device Port.

Configured Click in this column to create a Device Port (make it available to be edited).
column

Name column Displays the name for this Device Port. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click in
this field.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 301

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Table 106:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board RS-485 Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Device Ports 1 Select the check box in the Configured column for a Device Port and click located in the Edit column to open the iSTAR
-2 Device Port Editor General tab to configure the Readers and ACM extensions that are associated with the Device Port. See
iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for detailed instructions for configuring iSTAR Device Ports.
The Name column displays a name comprised of the Device Port and the iSTAR Controller name. You can click in this column to
edit the Device Port name.

IP-ACM iSTAR Device Port Dialog Box

Use the iSTAR IP-ACM Device Port dialog box, shown in Figure 87 on Page 303, to select the Protocol, select or
configure the reader, and configure the Inputs.

There are four protocols supported by the IP-ACM readers:

■ BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy): supported on the Software House BLE reader module.
■ RM (Software House Reader Protocol): supported on RM readers, Touchscreen readers, RM modules, I8, and R8
modules.
■ OSDP (Open Supervised Device Protocol): supported on HID iCLASS SE readers and Allegion aptiQ readers.
■ Smart: supported on the Touchscreen reader.

Limitations
■ C•CURE 9000 only supports up to two readers (any combination of RM/Wiegand/OSDP readers, and up to two BLE
readers) connected to an IP-ACM.
■ Offline mode is not supported for BLE readers or OSDP readers connected to the IP-ACM.
■ One I8 input module and one R8 module may be assigned to each device port when the port is assigned as an
RM protocol.

302 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

Figure 87:  iSTAR Device Port Dialog Box

To Configure the IP-ACM Readers, Inputs, and Outputs

1. On the General tab, select the Protocol from the drop-down menu.

■ If you select OSDP, you can select a supported Baud Rate. In most cases, the default, 9600
NOTE baud, is acceptable.
■ Readers that are configured with the wrong Baud Rate may cause communication problems with
other readers. Connecting a chain of readers with any mismatched Baud Rate can keep the entire
chain offline.

2. Click the Reader tab to configure the readers.

3. Click in the Configured check box of the Reader you want to configure, and click Edit. The iSTAR Reader editor
opens. See Configuring iSTAR Readers on Page 498.
4. Click the ACM ext tab to configure the inputs and outputs.
5. Click in the Configured check box of the Input/Output you want to configure, and click Edit. See iSTAR Ultra RS-485
Device Port ACM EXT Tab on Page 205.
6. Click Save and Close when done.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 303

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Triggers Tab

The Triggers tab is used to configure Triggers, which are configured procedures for activating actions, to activate Events or
Outputs for an iSTAR device. A Trigger automatically executes a specified Action when a particular Condition occurs
(when the object Property specified in the Trigger reports the Value specified in the Trigger).

For the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM, you can create the IP-ACM High Latency Alarm Trigger for an iSTAR.

To Define a Trigger for an iSTAR Device

1. Click on the Triggers tab.
2. Click Add on the Triggers tab to create a new Trigger.
3. Click in the Property column and click to open the Property dialog box showing the Properties available for the
device.
4. Click the Property (IP-ACM High Latency Alarm) in the list to select it and add it to the Property column.
5. Click the Action column drop-down menu to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action (Activate Event)
that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.
When you select Activate Event, the lower pane in the Triggers box displays Event.
6. Click the Event field to select an event to associate with the property.
7. Click in the Value column to enable the trigger. Checked is enabled, cleared is disabled.
8. Click Save and Close to save the iSTAR Trigger.

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Status Tab

The Status tab displays a read-only listing of information about the operational status of the selected iSTAR Ultra IP-
ACM Board.

Table 107 on Page 304 provides definitions of the fields and buttons on the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Status tab.
Table 107:  iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Board Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Communication Status Unknown, Offline, or Online.

Firmware Version Processor firmware, such as 00.00.36.00008

IP Address The IP-ACM IP address.

High Latency Alarm Possible status values are True or False.

Viewing the IP-ACM Board Serial Numbers

You can view a list of IP-ACM board manufacturer unique serial numbers in the Dynamic View.

304 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

To View the Serial Numbers:

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all IP-ACM boards and the controllers they are connected to.
4. Right-click on a column heading and select Serial Number Status. The serial numbers are listed under the Serial
Number Status column.

Once you select Serial Number Status the serial numbers are visible whenever the iSTAR Ultra IP-
NOTE ACM Dynamic View is displayed.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 7 305

iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor

306 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 8

Chapter 8 - Configuring Advanced Processing Controllers (apC)

This chapter explains how to configure the apC, apC/8X, and apC/L software components to work with C•CURE 9000.

In this chapter

apC Panel Overview 308

apC Controller Configuration Summary 320
apC Comm Port Editor 322
apC Controller Editor 330
apC Input Editor 340
apC Output Editor 343
apC Reader Editor 346
apC Add-on Board Editor 350
apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab 355
apC Input Board Editor (I32 and I8) 357
apC Star Coupler Board Editor 360
Triggers Tab for apC Devices 363
Mini Star Coupler Board Editor 366
Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor 367

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 307

apC Panel Overview

apC Panel Overview

The advanced processing Controller (apC) panel is an intelligent field device that performs basic access control tasks.
The apC, apC/8X, and apC/L are access control field panels that coordinate communication between the C•CURE 9000
server and the system security hardware, such as card readers.

The apC/L is a smaller version of the apC, making it ideal for parking garages and small office buildings. All apC/8Xs and
some apC/Ls provide Flash ROM support, which lets you download firmware from the server to the panel. Up to three
versions of firmware are available for download. See the Monitoring Station User’s Guide for information about
downloading firmware.

Each apC, apC/8X, or apC/L in the system supports Wiegand, proximity, magnetic stripe, and RFID card technologies.
The apC (apC/8X) configuration supports eight card readers wired in a daisy-chain arrangement. The apC/L configuration
supports two card readers.

The apC and apC/L have not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

See the following sections for more information:

■ Features of apC Panels on Page 308
■ Inputs and Alarm Device States on Page 311
■ Outputs and Readers on Page 311
■ Optional Boards on Page 311
■ apC Time Zones on Page 312
■ Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller on Page 314
■ apC Time Zone Reports on Page 315
■ apC Firmware Update on Page 318
■ apC Controller Configuration Summary on Page 320

Features of apC Panels

Several different types of add-on module expansion boards can be used for additional inputs and outputs.The apC firmware
offers software-controlled features such as timed activation/deactivation commands, 32-bit card numbers, elevator
access and anti-passback control. An apC panel can use multiple card technologies, site codes, and company codes. The
apC’s full-year real time calendar/clock allows activation and deactivation of cards on specified days. The apC panels can
be connected via serial RS-232/485 or networked terminal servers.

apC Panel
The basic apC panel has eight supervised inputs, eight relay outputs and one reader port, capable of handling a maximum
of eight readers, which are wired in a multi-drop configuration. Expansion boards can add reader ports, supervised inputs
and additional outputs. By using expansion boards, bus modules and RM-4s, an apC can have as many as 128 inputs and
192 outputs. Depending on the amount of available memory, an apC panel can hold up to 40,000 cards in its database. See
Table 108 on Page 309 for a listing of the standard apC panel’s inputs, outputs and readers. Total indicates that this is the
total number of inputs, outputs or readers for the apC panel.

There are three Star Coupler expansion boards that can be used with the apC panel to add inputs, outputs and readers :

308 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Panel Overview

■ Star Coupler – 8 RM readers, 8 relay outputs, 8 unsupervised inputs (see apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on
Page 355 for more information)
■ Mini-Star Coupler – 8 RM Readers (this is the same board as Star Coupler but inputs and outputs are not populated)
■ WPSC – Wiegand Prox Star Coupler includes 2 boards:
• Lower board – 4 Wiegand signaling readers and 4 supervised inputs
• Upper board – 4 Wiegand signaling readers and 4 supervised inputs (the upper board plugs into lower board)

A Star Coupler Reader is an RM reader connected to a Star Coupler. The Mini Star Coupler Reader is an RM reader
connected to the Mini Star Coupler and it differs from the Star Coupler only due to its having no inputs or outputs. The
readers used by these Star Coupler expansion boards are RM or Wiegand signaling readers that are connected to a Star
Coupler.
Table 108:  apC Inputs, Outputs and Readers Available

Board Inputs Outputs Readers

Tamper Input 1

Power Failure Input 1

Supervised Inputs 8

Outputs 8

Readers 8 total

Supervised Reader Inputs 16 total

Reader Outputs 16 total

Add-On Boards

I32 Supervised Input Board 32

I8 Supervised Input Board 64

R48 Output Board 96

R8 Output Board 64

Star Coupler Readers 8 total

Star Coupler Reader Supervised Inputs 16 total

Star Coupler Reader Outputs 16 total

Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs 8

Star Coupler Outputs 8

Star Coupler - Ministar Readers 8 total

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 309

apC Panel Overview

Table 108:  apC Inputs, Outputs and Readers Available (continued)

Board Inputs Outputs Readers

Star Coupler - Ministar - Reader Supervised Inputs 16 total

Star Coupler - Ministar - Reader Outputs 16 total

Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Readers 8 total

[Upper and Lower Boards]

Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Reader Supervised Inputs [Upper and Lower Boards] 8

apC/L Panel
A basic apC/L panel has two readers and two relay outputs. An apC/L is expandable up to 36 inputs and 38 outputs using
RM-4s and bus modules. Depending on the amount of available memory, an apC/L panel can hold up to 40,000 cards in its
database. apC/L panels with Flash EPROMS installed can have firmware upgrades downloaded from the host system.

The apC/L has not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

Table 109:  apC/L Standard Inputs, Outputs and Readers Available

Board Inputs Outputs Readers

Tamper Input 1

Power Failure Input 1

Outputs 2

Readers 2

Supervised Reader Inputs 4

Reader Outputs 4

Add-On Boards

I8 Supervised Input Board 32

R8 Output Board 32

apC/8X Panel
A basic apC/8X panel has eight supervised inputs, eight relay outputs and one reader port, capable of handling a maximum
of eight readers, which are wired in a multi-drop configuration. Expansion boards can add reader ports, supervised input
and additional outputs. Depending on available memory, an apC/8X panel can hold up to 160,000 cards in its database.
apC/8X panels with Flash EPROMS installed can have firmware upgrades downloaded from the host system. See Table
108 on Page 309 for a listing of the apC/8X panel’s inputs, outputs and readers. Total indicates that this is the total number
of inputs, outputs or readers for the apC panel.

310 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Panel Overview

Inputs and Alarm Device States

An input is an object that associates an alarm device with an input on the panel or on an input board. There are two kinds of
inputs: supervised and unsupervised. All alarm devices can be in one of two states: active or inactive. An input reports the
state of the alarm device.

A supervised input reports on the status of the wiring between the panel and the alarm device when changes in circuit
resistance are detected. If wiring is cut, the system reports an open circuit. If someone attempts to create a jumper across
the wiring (to prevent the device from reporting), the system reports a shorted circuit. Supervised inputs can report a total
of five conditions to the apC: Short, Open Loop, Line Fault, Inactive or Active. The main board on the apC has eight
supervised inputs.

An unsupervised input does not monitor the wiring. Unsupervised inputs can report two conditions to the panel: Active or
Inactive. With the star couplers, the apC has eight unsupervised inputs available. See To Configure apC Controller Inputs
on Page 333 for more information.

Unsupervised inputs have not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

Supervised inputs can report five states:

■ Short
■ Open Loop
■ Normal
■ Alert
■ Line Fault

Outputs and Readers

Outputs
An output is an object that associates an alarm device with an output on the panel board or add-on module. The output
turns alarm devices, such as closed circuit TV or alarm dialers, on or off. See apC Controller Outputs Tab on Page 334 for
more information.

Readers
A reader is a hardware device that accepts access requests. To make an access request, a person swipes or presents a
card at the reader. The card reader scans the information encoded on the card and sends it to the apC panel, which grants
or denies access. See apC Controller Readers Tab on Page 334 for more information.

Optional Boards
apCs and apC/8X panels support these optional (add-on) boards and controller:
■ 8 apC I/8 - input modules and 1 apC I/32 input board, and
■ 8 apC R/8 - output modules and 2 apC R/48 output boards, and

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 311

apC Panel Overview

■ 1 Standard Star Coupler, or

■ 1 Mini Star Coupler, or
■ 1 Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler

Star couplers enable you to wire the apC panel’s 8 readers in a star, daisy-chain, or combination configuration. Star
couplers also provide unsupervised inputs and additional outputs and readers for the apC and apC/8X.

apC/L controllers and Mini Star Couplers have not been evaluated by UL.
NOTE

The apC/L supports two types of optional boards: four I/8 - input modules and four R/8 - output modules.
NOTE

See apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 334 for more information.

Before you configure apC panels, the apC Hardware Interface must be started using the Server
NOTE Management application - Server Components tab. Right-click the apC Hardware Interface and click Start
Server Component.

apC Time Zones

You can specify the Time Zone for an apC panel, so that the apC panel can support panel-based operations using the local
date/time, and the display of the local date/time at door readers, in controller status screens, in Journal Messages, and in
Reports.

Example:
If you specify that an apC panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT- 08:00), and the C•CURE 9000 server is in the
Eastern Time Zone (GMT- 05:00), a timed-based action that occurs at the apC panel, such as unlocking a Door,
happens at local time (Pacific Time Zone) for the apC panel.

Example:
If you specify that an apC panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT- 08:00), and the C•CURE 9000 server is in the
Eastern Time Zone (GMT- 05:00), a server-based Journal message shows the server date/time (EST), while a panel-
based Journal Message shows the panel date/time (PST) as highlighted in Figure 88 on Page 312.
Figure 88:  Journal Message Showing Local Date/Time

Example:
If you specify that an apC panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT- 08:00), and the C•CURE 9000 server is in the
Eastern Time Zone (GMT- 05:00), a Credential with an Expiration Date set as today at 5:00 PM will expire at 5:00
PM Eastern time, rather than Pacific Time, because the expiration occurs at the server, which is in the Eastern Time
Zone.

312 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Panel Overview

The Time Zone setting is configured on the apC controller General tab by selecting a Time Zone from the Time Zone field.
See apC Controller General Tab on Page 331 for more information.

You can change the value of the apC controller Time Zone field only when the apC Controller is not enabled (Enabled field
is blank ). See Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller on Page 314 for more information.

apC Time Zones and Schedules

Schedules in C•CURE 9000 are not configured directly with any Time Zone. They are dynamically associated with a local
Time Zone when they are used in the C•CURE 9000 Server or are downloaded to a controller. That means that the same
schedule can be activated at different times if it is used in different Time Zones.

This is flexible, but also potentially complicated if you have controllers in different Time Zones.

Example:
You create a Schedule to manage Clearances for your night shift. When downloaded to an apC in another Time Zone,
the Schedule works as expected. However, if you apply the Schedule to a C•CURE 9000 Server-based Event ("Lock
all Doors" using the All Doors Group) that affects the Pacific Time Zone apC, the Event's actions would be triggered
in the Server's Time Zone, rather than the Time Zone where the apC resides, perhaps causing Doors to be locked at
the wrong time.

However, if you create separate Schedules and name them to make it clear which Time Zone (or which controller) they are
intended to be used with, you can avoid problems with Time Zone differences.

Example:
You create a Schedule to assign to Door and Elevator Clearances on your apC in the Pacific Time Zone called "Doors
& Elevators - Pacific" and only use this Schedule for Pacific Zone. The Door and Elevator Clearances are downloaded
to the apC controller

The schedules used in an apC panel for timed actions are primarily associated with Door or Elevator clearances.

When a Schedule becomes active, the Journal Message that is displayed identifies the Time Zone associated with the
object (such as an apC panel) to which the Schedule is related.

You can see the active/inactive status of your Schedules with the Schedule by Time Zones Dynamic View, accessible
from the Configuration pane. See the Schedules chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more
information.

Using apC Panel Time Zones with Trigger Schedules

apC Triggers support the ability to designate a Time Zone for a Trigger, so that you can specify that the Schedule for
activating the Trigger uses the same Time Zone as the apC panel. If you do not specify a Time Zone for the Trigger, the
Trigger Schedule uses the C•CURE 9000 server Time Zone to determine when the Trigger can be activated.

See Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 363 for more information about specifying a Time Zone for an
apC Trigger.

Using apC Panel Time Zones with Events

You can add a Time Zone to an Event if you intend to activate a timed Action with that Event. The Event General tab
includes a Time Zone field that you can use to determine when a Schedule you attach to the Event is Activated. See the

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 313

apC Panel Overview

Events chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide.

Time Zone for apC Panel Events

For timed Actions defined in an Event (the Event is armed and/or activated by a Schedule) that the apC driver downloads
to an apC panel to execute , the Time Zone for the Action is automatically set to the Time Zone of the apC Panel. You
cannot change the Time Zone setting to a different Time Zone.

Example:
The C•CURE 9000 server is in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT - 05:00). The apC Panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT
- 08:00). If the Event is activated by a Schedule at 10:00 AM, it will be activated at 10:00 AM Pacific Time (the apC
panel's Time Zone), not 10:00 AM Eastern Time.

For an apC time-based action defined in a Event, if a Time Zone is specified in the Event, the apC driver only downloads
the action to apC controllers with the same time zone as the Event.

If the apC panel is online when the Event is activated by the Schedule, the apC driver sends the timed Action command to
the apC panel.

If the apC Panel is offline when the Event is activated by the Schedule, the apC panel performs the timed Action.
However, the apC does not have the capability, after communication is re-established, to display activation and
deactivation messages for an Event that occurred while the apC was offline.

Time Zone for apC Host Events

For a host Event (an Event that is initiated at the C•CURE 9000 server, without timed Actions downloaded to the
apC Panel), you can specify any Time Zone for the Schedule on the Event General tab. The Time Zone does not need to
match the time Zone of the apC panel.

However, if the Time Zone of the Event Schedule and the Time Zone of the apC panel are different, a warning message
appears to inform you of the discrepancy, called a Time Zone Mismatch, so that you will be aware that the timed Action will
be activated according to the host Time Zone, not the apC panel Time Zone.

Example:
The C•CURE 9000 server is in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT - 05:00). The apC Panel is in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT
- 08:00). If the Event is activated by a Schedule at 10:00 AM, it will be activated at 10:00 AM Eastern Time (server
time), not 10:00 AM Pacific Time.

If the apC panel is online when the host Event is activated by the Schedule, the apC driver sends the timed Action
command to the apC panel.

If the apC Panel is offline when the host Event is activated by the Schedule, the apC panel does not perform the timed
Action, because the Event was not downloaded to the apC panel, and the panel is offline from the host.

Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller

You can change the value of the apC controller Time Zone field only when the apC Controller is not enabled (Enabled field
is blank ). To change the Time Zone, you must edit the controller, clear the Enabled field, save the controller, then re-
open it to change the Time Zone.

314 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Panel Overview

If you change the Time Zone of the apC controller, the Time Zone settings of all child objects of that apC controller are
changed as well. A warning message appears if you change the Time Zone and any Events have controller-based actions
on this apC controller and the Event is configured to use a different Time Zone than this apC controller.

To Change the Time Zone of an apC Controller

1. From the Hardware pane, select the apC controller you wish to change. Right-click and select Edit.
2. Clear the Enabled field (change to ).
3. Click Save and Close to save the change.
4. From the Hardware pane, select the apC controller again. Right-click and select Edit.
5. When the apC controller editor opens, the Time Zone field can be changed.
6. Click Save and Close to save the change.

apC Time Zone Reports

C•CURE 9000 provides several pre-defined Reports (and Queries) that can help you find Time Zone mismatches - where
the C•CURE 9000 server and the apC panel are in different Time Zones, such that a host Event will be unable to activate
an object on an apC that is offline.) for Events associated with apC panels in different Time Zones than the C•CURE 9000
server.
Table 110:  apC Time Zone Reports/Queries

Report Query

SWH70 - apC Input Groups with Time Zones

SWH71 - apC Door Groups with Time Zones

SWH 72 - apC Time Zone Mismatch Actions SWHrep72 - apC Time Zone Mismatch Actions

SWH 73 - apC Online Only Actions SWHrep73 - apC Online Only Actions

SWH 74 - Actions with Time Zone Mismatch SWHrep74 - Actions with Time Zone Mismatch Query

See the Reports chapter of the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about these Reports and Queries.

Creating Custom Reports for apC Actions and Time Zones

In addition, you can use the Report Editor to create custom reports on apC controller actions, including Time Zone
information. You can use the pre-defined Reports as starting points for your own custom Reports by clicking Create Copy
and then customizing the copy.

apC Controller Actions Report

You can create a custom Report that lists apC Controller objects and all the actions triggered by the controller and its child
objects (like doors, readers and inputs), as well as action items that should be loaded into the apC because they are
configured in Event objects.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 315

apC Panel Overview

If a Report Query is not specified, the report lists all the apC Controllers and all the actions, noting each action is Online
Only - performed only if the apC panel is Online - if the custom fields in the Action Item class are selected.

Specifying a Report Query allows you to select any apC Controller field and any Action Item field, including these custom
fields:
■ Online Only - whether the action can occur only on an online apC)
■ Online Only Reason - the reason that an action can only occur on an online apC. Possible values are:
• Time Zone Mismatch - The Time Zone of the timed action is different from the Time Zone of the controller.
• No Firmware Support - The action is not supported by the controller, so it must be executed on the host.
• Cross Panel Action - The action is activated by one controller and modifies an object on another controller.
• Invalid Configuration - The action cannot be activated (for example, a change in Comm Fail status should cause an
Event to activate an Output on the same controller, but the Comm Fail prevents the Event from communicating
with the Output.)

To Create an apC Controller Actions Report

1. Create a new Report - From the Data Views pane, select Report from the drop-down list of objects, then click New.
2. Select apC Controller as the Report type field.
3. Select apC Controller Actions as the Sub type field.
4. Click on apC Controller in the Class Selector.
5. In in the Field Selector, select the fields for the apC Controller class that you want to display in the Report.
6. Click on Action Item in the Class Selector.
7. In the Fields Selector, select any fields you want in the report (including the custom fields Online Only and Online
Only Reason) for the Action Item class.
8. Optionally, you can click to select a Report Query as the basis of the report. SWHrep72 and SWHrep73 are available
in the Report Query drop-down list for this purpose.
9. Click Save and Close to save the Report.
10. The Report is added to the Reports Dynamic View. You can double-click the Report to run it.

Action Item Time Zones Report

You can create a custom Report that lists Action Item objects (with the ability to query on any Action Item property) and
additionally query on three additional custom fields in the Action Item Time Zone Sub type:
■ Source Time Zone - the Time Zone of the Source object of the action item (if any).
■ Target Time Zone - the Time Zone of the Target object (if any).
■ Time Zone Mismatch - set to TRUE if the Time Zone of the Action Item is not equal to the Time Zone of the Source
object and/or not equal to the Time Zone of the Target.

To Create an Action Item Time Zones Report

1. Create a new Report - From the Data Views pane, select Report from the drop-down list of objects, then click New.

316 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Panel Overview

2. Select Action Items as the Report type field.

3. Select Action Item Time Zone in the Sub type field.
4. Click on apC Controller in the Class Selector.
5. In the Field Selector, select the fields for the apC Controller class that you want to display in the Report.
6. Click on Action Item Time Zone in the Class Selector.
7. In the Fields Selector, select any fields you want in the report (including the custom fields Online Only and Online
Only Reason) for the Action Item Time Zone class.
8. Optionally, you can click to select a Report Query as the basis of the report. SWHrep74 is available in the Report
Query drop-down list for this purpose.
9. Click Save and Close to save the Report.
10. The Report is added to the Reports Dynamic View. You can double-click the Report to run it.

apC Door Group and Input Group Time Zones Report

You can create a custom Report that lists either apC Door Groups or apC Input Groups and their Time Zones by editing the
following pre-defined Reports, creating a copy, adding a Query, or customizing the Report Layout:
■ SWH70 - apC Input Groups with Time Zones
■ SWH71 - apC Door Groups with Time Zones

Both of these pre-defined Reports:

■ Start with a Group Report
■ Use the Group Member field Time Zone Name to output the Time Zone of the objects in the Report.

To Create an apC Door Group or apC Input Group with Time Zones Report

1. From the Data Views pane, select Report from the drop-down list of objects, then click .
2. Select either:
■ SWH70 - apC Input Groups with Time Zones
■ SWH71 - apC Door Groups with Time Zones
3. Right-click and choose Edit. The Report editor opens.
4. Click Create Copy. A new Report opens in the Report editor, based on the pre-defined Report you chose.

5. Click in the Report form field if you want to select a different Report From.

6. Click in the Report query field if you want to select a Query for the Report.

7. Select Prompt for Query if you want to display a Query Parameter Prompt when the report is run.
8. Click the drop-down list for the Layout style if you want to change the Report layout.
9. Change the fields in the Class selector and the Field selector if you want to change the fields displayed on the
Report.
10. Click the Layout Design tab if you want to manually change the Report design.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 317

apC Panel Overview

11. Click the Layout Preview tab to see a preview of how the Report will look.
12. Click Save and Close to save the Report.
13. The Report is added to the Reports Dynamic View. You can double-click the Report to run it.

apC Firmware Update

You can update the apC, apC/8X or apC/L firmware on apC panels from either the Admin Client or the Monitoring Station
client. You can initiate a firmware update by right-clicking on the apC controller:
■ In the Hardware Tree.
■ In a Dynamic View in the Administration Client.
■ In the Status List - Controller in the Monitoring Station.

The UL approved firmware to be used for the apC/8x panel is x.7ZF

NOTE

To Update Firmware on an apC

1. Right-click on the apC that you want to update.
2. Select Update Firmware from the context menu that appears (see Figure 89 on Page 318).
Figure 89:  apC Context Menu

The Update Firmware selection does not appear if the apC is not Enabled or is off-line.
NOTE

3. The apC Firmware Download dialog box opens (see Figure 90 on Page 319).

318 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Panel Overview

Figure 90:  apC Firmware Download Dialog Box

4. Select the firmware version that you want to download from the list in the dialog box.
5. Click Start firmware download. A progress bar shows you the when the download is completed.
6. When the download has completed, click Close to close this dialog box.

Do not attempt to download firmware to more than one apC panel on a chain at one time, and do not
TIP attempt to download firmware if that chain is busy doing a personnel download.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 319

apC Controller Configuration Summary

apC Controller Configuration Summary

Configuring an apC is a multiple task process because of the number of options available on the apC.

The following summary gives you an outline of the configuration process, with links to topics that provide the details.
Table 111:  apC Configuration Summary

Configuration See...

1. Create and configure an apC Comm Port. apC Comm Port Editor on Page
322

2. Create an apC Controller. To Create an apC Controller on

Page 330

3. Use the apC Controller General Tab to configure the Connection Type, Comm Port, Reader LCD apC Controller General Tab on
Message set, apC Type, Time Zone, and apC Address. Page 331

4. Use the apC Controller Communications Tab to configure communications parameters for the apC. apC Controller Communications
Tab on Page 333

5. Use the apC Controller Inputs Tab to configure Panel Status Inputs and Supervised Inputs. apC Controller Inputs Tab on
Page 333

Edit each apC Input on the apC Input Editor Triggers tab, and State Images tab, and view the Input's apC Input Editor on Page 340
status on the Status tab.

6. Use the apC Controller Outputs Tab to configure apC Outputs. apC Controller Outputs Tab on
Page 334

Edit each apC Output on the apC Output General Tab and State Images tab, and view the Input's apC Output General Tab on Page
groups and status on the Groups tab and Status tab. 343

7. Use the apC Controller Readers Tab to configure apC Readers and options. apC Controller Readers Tab on
Page 334

Edit each apC Reader on the apC Reader General Tab, I/O tab, Keypad tab, Triggers tab, and State apC Reader General Tab on Page
Images tab, and view the Input's status on the Status tab. 520

8. Use the apC Controller Add-On Board Tab to create and configure an apC add-on board. apC Controller Add-On Board Tab
on Page 334

Edit each apC Add-on Board from the apC Add-on Board Editor, configuring Input Boards, Output apC Add-on Board Editor on Page
boards, and Star Couplers. 350

Edit the apC Input boards from the apC Input Editor, creating I/32 and I/8 Input boards, as needed. apC Input Editor on Page 340
Edit each apC Input from the apC Input Editor, configuring Supervised Inputs and Status Inputs.

If you created a Star Coupler, use the apC Star Coupler Board Editor to create Readers, apC Star Coupler Board Editor on
unsupervised inputs, and outputs. Page 360

If you created a Mini Star Coupler, use the Mini Star Coupler Board Editor to create apC Readers. Mini Star Coupler Board Editor on
Page 366

320 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Controller Configuration Summary

apC Configuration Summary (continued)

Configuration See...

If you created a WPSC, use the Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor to create Readers and Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler
Inputs. Editor on Page 367

9. Use the apC Controller Triggers Tab to set up triggers for Actions based on apC controller property apC Controller Triggers Tab on
states. Page 335

10. Use the apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab to add Holiday Lists to the apC. apC Controller Holiday Groups
Tab on Page 335

11. You can view Controller Status from the apC Controller Status Tab. apC Controller Status Tab on
Page 335

12. You can change the state images that appear in the Monitoring Station to represent this controller on apC Controller State Images Tab
the apC Controller State Images Tab. on Page 338

13. You can view the apC Controller groups to which this apC belongs on the Groups Tab for Hardware Groups Tab for Hardware Devices
Devices on. on Page 36

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 321

apC Comm Port Editor

apC Comm Port Editor

You need to create and configure an apC Comm Port object for your apC to establish communications with C•CURE
9000.

An apC panel can communicate with serial port connections, using RS-232 connections to an RS-485 converter, or via an
Ethernet-connected network.

For general instructions about the Hardware pane see Using the Hardware Pane on Page 28.

To Configure an apC Comm Port

1. To configure an apC Comm Port, open the Hardware Pane,select the Hardware Folder in which you want the apC
Comm Port to reside, and right-click to display the Hardware Folder context menu. Click apC Comm Port then click
New.
Figure 91:  Creating an apC Comm Port

The apC Comm Port editor appears (see Figure 92 on Page 323). See Table 112 on Page 325 for definitions of the
fields on the Comm Port editor General Tab
.

322 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Comm Port Editor

Figure 92:  apC Comm Port Editor

You may also choose New Template. For further information about creating Templates, see Creating a Template on
Page 41.
2. Enter a unique Host Communications Port Name (required).
3. Optionally, enter a textual description of the apC Comm Port in the Description field.
4. Select the Enabled check box if you want the Comm Port online after you have completed the configuration
procedure.
5. Select the Communications Type.
• For an apC Controller that uses a network communications path, click Network Port. See Configuring an apC
Comm Port Network Connection on Page 324.
• For an apC that uses a serial connection to the C•CURE 9000 server, click Serial Port. See Configuring an apC
Comm Port Serial Port on Page 324
• For an apC that uses a redirected serial connection to the C•CURE 9000 server, click Redirect Serial Port. See
Configuring an apC Comm Port Redirect Serial Port on Page 325.
6. You can set a Port Timeout Delay Time in tenths of a second units by typing it within the entry field or by using the
selection arrows. The range is 0 through 99; the default entry is 0.
7. When you have completed configuring the apC Comm Port General tab, you can click Save and Close to save your
changes, or you can click the Triggers tab (see apC Comm Port Triggers Tab on Page 327) to continue configuring the
apC Comm port.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 323

apC Comm Port Editor

Configuring an apC Comm Port Network Connection

To Configure an apC Comm Port Network Connection

1. Type a unique IP Address in the IP Address field. This must be the IP Address of the terminal server being used to
communicate with the C•CURE 9000 system.
2. Select a TCP Port, the address of the node from which the apC Host TCP Port communicates with the C•CURE
9000 system. The values range from 0 through 9999. The default entry is 3001.
3. Select a Re-connection Retry Period in tenths of a second units by typing it within the entry field or by using the
selection arrows. The values range from 0 through 99. The default entry is 30 (3 seconds).

Configuring an apC Comm Port Serial Port

To Configure an apC Comm Port Serial Port

1. When you choose to configure a Serial Port, select the Communications Type Serial Port from the drop-down list.
The Name field will reflect the port number that you select. The range is COM1 through COM256.
2. As in the Network Comm Port, you can set a Port Timeout Delay Time in tenths of a second. The range is 0 through
99, the default entry is 0.
Figure 93:  apC Comm Port Editor, Serial Port options

324 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Comm Port Editor

Configuring an apC Comm Port Redirect Serial Port

To Configure a Redirect Serial Port

1. When you choose to configure a Redirect Serial Port, select the Communications Type Redirect Serial Port
button. In the Port Settings box, select a com port from the drop-down list. The Name field will reflect the port number
that you select. The range is COM1 through COM256.
2. As in the Network Comm Port, you can set a Port Timeout Delay Time in tenths of a second. The range is 0 through
99, the default entry is 0.
Figure 94:  apC Comm Port Editor, Redirect Serial Port Options

The Fields on the apC Comm Port General tab are described in Table 112 on Page 325.
Table 112:  apC Comm Port Field Definitions

Field Description

Name Enter a unique name up to 50 characters long for the controller. If you enter the name of an existing object, the system returns an
error message indicating there is a conflict.

Description Enter a textual comment about the controller, such as its location or purpose. This text is for information only.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 325

apC Comm Port Editor

apC Comm Port Field Definitions (continued)

Field Description

Enabled This setting determines whether or not the apC Comm Port is able to provide communication between the apC Controller and the
C•CURE 9000 Server. Select Enabled to set the Comm Port online. To take the Comm Port offline, you can clear the Enabled
selection.
NOTE: If the apC Comm Port is currently in use by apC controllers, you must disable all of the controllers before you attenpt to
take the Comm Port offline. If any apC controllers are enabled when you attempt to take the apC Comm Port offline, an
error message is displayed - "Port cannot be disabled with enabled controllers. Please disable controllers first. When the
controllers are re-enabled they will do a full personnel download."
The message explains that when you re-enable the apC Comm Port, then re-enable the apC controllers, each controller
will perform a full personnel download.

Maintenance Click to put the apC Comm Port into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this Controller resides.
If you are creating a new Controller, the Partition that is currently the New Object Partition for your Operator account is
automatically assigned to each Controller you create.
If you want to change the Partition of a Controller, you must move the Cluster in which the Controller resides. See Using Drag and
Drop in the Hardware Tree on Page 35.

Communications Type

Network Select Network Port if you are using a terminal server to connect your apC to C•CURE 9000.
Port

Serial Port Select Serial Port if you are using a serial connection for your apC.

Redirect Select Redirect Serial Port if you are redirecting the serial connection for an apC to a serial port that is physically on a Terminal
Serial Port Server, but logically on the C•CURE 9000 Server.

Port Settings

Port Timeout The Port Timeout Delay Time is the extra interval that the host waits for a response from the apC panel after sending a
Delay Time message to the panel. If the host does not receive a response in the specified time, the host retransmits the message or declares a
(1/10 sec) communications failure. This field allows you to set the timeout delay for all panels that use a specific port.Software House
recommends that you set this period to 20 (2 seconds). However, if you require additional delay time because apC panels run on a
Digiboard, Equinox board, or over a network, you may need to increase this value. Keep this value as small as possible, or system
performance may be affected. If your panel goes into communications failure often, try setting this value between 30 (3 seconds)
and 50 (5 seconds).

Re- Re-connection Retry Period is the duration that the host waits to declare an unresponsive panel to be in failure. Software
connection House recommends that you set this period to 300 (30 seconds) which is the default value.
Retry Period
(1/10 sec)

IP Address The IP address of the terminal server C•CURE 9000 that is being used to communicate with the C•CURE 9000 system.

TCP Port The address of the node from which the apC Host TCP Port communicates with the C•CURE 9000 system. The values range
from 0 through 9999. The default entry is 3001.

Serial Port and Redirect Serial Port Options

326 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Comm Port Editor

apC Comm Port Field Definitions (continued)

Field Description

COM Port Select the Communications Type Serial Port from the drop-down list. The Name field will reflect the port number that you select.
The range is COM1 through COM256.

apC Comm Port Triggers Tab

The apC Comm Port Triggers tab allows you to set up Triggers – configured procedures used by C•CURE 9000 to activate
specific actions when a particular predefined condition occurs.

This tab provides you with ability to activate an event based on the Comm Status of the apC Comm Port. If the Comm
Status property of the apC Comm Port changes, you can specify the event you want to activate.

A typical use for a Comm Port trigger would be to warn the Monitoring Station of a communications failure. You can
configure an event that would send a message requiring acknowledgment when the apC panels are unable to
communicate with the host.
1. Click the apC Comm Port Triggers tab to provide a means to link the Comm Port to an event.
Example:
A typical use for a Comm Port trigger would be to warn the Monitoring Station of a communications failure. You can
configure an event that might send a message requiring acknowledgment when the apC panels are unable to
communicate with the host, as shown in Figure 95 on Page 327.
Figure 95:  apC Comm Port Triggers Tab

2. Choose a Property for the Trigger from the Property drop-down list.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 327

apC Comm Port Editor

3. Select the value that you want to activate the Trigger from the Value drop-down list.
4. Pick the Action you want the Trigger to perform from the Action drop-down list.
5. Depending upon the Action you chose, you may need to select the Action details from the Details field. For example, if
you chose to Activate an Event with the Action, you need to select an Event from the Details field. Click and
select an Event from the selection box that appears.
6. Click Save and Close to save the Trigger settings for the apC Comm Port.

apC Comm Port Status Tab

The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Comm
Port including:
■ Communications Status - displays the values Unknown or CommFail.
■ Online Status - displays the values: Online, Disabled or Offline.
Figure 96:  apC Comm Port - Status Tab

apC Comm Port State Images Tab

The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate communication port states.
These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent.
The apC Comm Port - State Images tab is shown in Figure 97 on Page 329.

328 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Comm Port Editor

Figure 97:  apC Comm Port State Images Tab

To Change a State Image

1. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you
have placed replacement images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it and click Open to add it to the image listing.
3. If you are done editing the apC Comm Port, click Save and Close to save the Comm Port’s configuration.
Alternatively, if you want to save the Comm Port and create a new one, click Save and New. The Comm Port Editor
remains open to allow you to create a new Comm Port.

To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 329

apC Controller Editor

apC Controller Editor

The apC Controller editor allows you to configure apC, apC/8X, and apC/L panels and their connected Input boards,
Output Boards, Readers, Inputs, and Outputs in C•CURE 9000. For more detailed information about the apC panel and its
options, see the apC Panel Overview on Page 308.

The apC Controller Editor has the following tabs:

■ apC Controller General Tab on Page 331
■ apC Controller Communications Tab on Page 333
■ apC Controller Inputs Tab on Page 333
■ apC Controller Outputs Tab on Page 334
■ apC Controller Readers Tab on Page 334
■ apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 334
■ apC Controller Status Tab on Page 335
■ apC Controller Triggers Tab on Page 335
■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
■ apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab on Page 335
■ apC Controller User Defined Fields Tab on Page 338
■ apC Controller State Images Tab on Page 338

To Create an apC Controller

1. To configure an apC controller from the C•CURE 9000 Administration Hardware pane, select the Hardware folder for
which you want to configure an apC Controller and right-click to display the context menu, as shown in Figure 98 on
Page 330.
Figure 98:  Hardware Pane apC Controller Selection

330 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Controller Editor

2. From the Hardware context menu, choose apC Controller and New. The apC Controller General tab appears, as
shown in Figure 99 on Page 331.
You may also choose New Template. For further information about creating Templates, see Templates on Page 41.
If the New and New Template selections are unavailable, you may be trying to create an apC in a Partition that is not
your New Object Partition, or you do not have Privileges to create objects in this Partition. Check the C•CURE 9000
Menus to verify that your New Object Partition setting is correct, and check with your C•CURE 9000 administrator
that you have the correct Privileges.

apC Controller General Tab

The apC Controller General tab provides a means to select the Communications Port, Reader LCD Message Sets, and to
identify the apC panel type.
Figure 99:  apC Controller GeneralTab

To Configure the apC Controller General Tab

1. In the apC Controller General tab, type a unique controller Name and a corresponding Description (optional) in the
identification fields at the top of the apC Controller dialog box.
2. Maintenance Mode - Click to put the apC Controller and/or its components into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3:
Maintenance Mode for more information.
3. Click the Enabled check box when you are ready for the apC to establish communications with the C•CURE 9000
server. You should wait until you have configured the controller settings and some or all of the Inputs, Outputs, and
Readers before enabling the apC.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 331

apC Controller Editor

The apC Comm Port you choose in Step 5 must also be Enabled; otherwise, the apC cannot remain
NOTE enabled. If you save the apC controller after assigning a disabled apC Comm Port, the apC will go
offline and when you open the apC object again in the apC editor, the Enabled check box will no longer
be checked.

4. Select Direct Connect as the type of connection between the host and the apC. Use the Port field in this dialog box
to specify a port to which the apC chain is connected.
5. To select a host communications Port for the apC controller, click in the Port field to select an apC Comm Port.

Software House strongly recommends that you select an apC comm port that is in the same partition
NOTE as your apC.

The example in Figure 99 on Page 331 shows the selection of a Serial Port connection.
6. To select a particular customized set of LCD messages for the RM Readers, click to display a Reader LCD
Message Set selection list. If you leave this field blank (the default), the Readers use the default messages.
7. Select the Time Zone in which your apC panel resides by clicking and selecting the Time Zone from the list that
appears. If you leave this field blank, the apC panel Time Zone defaults to the C•CURE 9000 server setting. You can
only change the value of the apC controller Time Zone when the apC Controller is not enabled (Enabled field is blank
). See Changing the Time Zone of an apC Controller on Page 314.
8. Select the type of apC panel you are configuring from the apC Type and Address box:
• apC
• apC/8X
• apC/L
9. Rotary switch settings can also be set on the apC panels using the two Switch entry fields.
For apC/L panels, the rotary switches are labeled 3-8 and 1. For all the other apC types, switches 4 and 5 are
displayed. The range of settings is 0 through 9 or A through F for all but Switch 3-8, which has a range of 0 or 1.
The values you enter for Switch 4, Switch 5, Switch 1, and Switch 3-8 should match the switch settings on the
physical apC controller.
10. The Panel is nearly full when it reaches the percent of capacity field allows you to enter a range from 0% to 99%.
11. The final entry field on the apC Controller - General tab is in the Priority box. Select a numeric value to assign a Base
Priority for Cause. The range is from 0 to 255.
When configuring an Event, you can assign an Event Priority. The Event Priority allows you to rank the importance of
a particular Event relative to other Events in the system. If Events occur simultaneously, Event Priorities enable the
system to execute responses in the proper sequence.
C•CURE 9000 provides eight priority ranges, each containing 25 priority settings, for a total of 200 possible Event
Priorities.
12. Click the Communications tab to display it, as shown in on Page 333.
You can also click Save and Close to return to the Hardware Pane and finish the apC Controller configuration later.

332 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Controller Editor

apC Controller Communications Tab

To Configure the apC Panel Communications Tab

1. In the Communications tab enter the period in tenths of a second that the panel driver (on the Server) attempts to
communicate with this panel in the Poll Period field. For example, if you enter 10, the panel driver communicates with
this panel a minimum of once per second.
You can set different poll periods for each panel that you configure. This field is not available when Dialup is selected
in the Connection Type list box.
Software House recommends that you set the poll period to 20 (2 seconds). Setting this value lower than 20 causes
the host to receive activity from the panel more quickly but could cause the driver to interfere with other programs
running on the server at larger installations. This is especially true if the panel is on a network port. The range is 0 - 850.

Setting the poll period to more than 30 will result in up to a 3 or 4 seconds delay between reading the card
NOTE and opening the door.

2. Enter the extra interval in tenths of a second that the host waits for a response from this panel after sending a message
to the panel in the Poll Timeout delay time field. If the host does not receive a response in the specified time, the
host retransmits the message or declares a communications failure.
Software House recommends that you set this period to 80 (8 seconds). However, if you require additional delay time
because the panel runs on a Digiboard, Equinox board, or over a network, you may need to increase this value. Keep
this value as small as possible, or system performance may be affected. If your panel goes into communications
failure often, try setting this value between 80 to 110. The range is 0 - 999.
3. Enter the interval in tenths of a second that the host waits to declare an unresponsive panel to be in failure in the Panel
communications failure delay time. A message appears on the Monitoring Station in the case of a panel failure.
Software House recommends that you set this period to 200 (20 seconds). The range is 0 - 850.
4. Enter the interval in tenths of a second that the system polls the panel while it is in communications failure in the Poll
period while in communications failure entry field. Typically, you should set this value higher than the value for the
initial poll period to avoid slowing down polling of other units on the chain.
Software House recommends that you set this period to 200 (20 seconds). The range is 0 - 999.
5. Enter the time period in minutes and seconds (mm:ss format) that the panel waits for a message from the host after
receiving the communications failure message from the host in the Host communications failure delay time entry
field. If the panel does not receive a message in the specified time, the panel declares a communications failure.
Software House recommends that you set this period to 1:00 (1 minute).
6. Click the Inputs tab to display it.

apC Controller Inputs Tab

To Configure apC Controller Inputs

To configure Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column and click located in the Edit column to display
the apC Input editor General tab. See the apC Input Editor on Page 340.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 333

apC Controller Editor

Click the Delete All check box where ever it appears and then click Save and Close if you want to
NOTE eliminate all the Inputs, Outputs, or Readers that you have configured in a given dialog box.
To take an apC panel offline, remove the check from the Enabled option check box located below each
Reader, Input, or Output board Description entry field (located in General tabs).

Use the Template column to quickly configure all in a particular set of inputs, outputs or readers.
TIP

apC Controller Outputs Tab

To Configure apC Outputs

1. To configure Outputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Outputs tab.
2. Click located in the Edit column to display the apC Output Board General tab.
3. Use the apC Output editor to configure the output (See apC Output Editor on Page 343)

apC Controller Readers Tab

The apC Controller Readers tab allows you to configure devices that supply Wiegand, magnetic stripe and proximity card
signaling.

To Configure an apC Reader

1. Select the check box in the Configured column for the apC Reader (Index 1 through 8) you want to configure.
2. Click located in the Edit column to open the apC Readers General tab(see apC Reader General Tab on Page
520).
3. Choose either of the following options for all readers on the Readers tab:
• Allow card numbers to be entered from the keypad.
• Use PIN+1 as duress code.
• Always use Shunt Expire Output on Door

You may configure an apC Reader from the apC panel Readers tab or from the Add-on Board tab. A
NOTE reader index configured on one tab will be unavailable on the other tab. The location chosen will affect the
possible reader type and reader input/output option selection.

apC Controller Add-On Board Tab

The Add-On Board tab provides a means to expand the capabilities of the apC panels. Expansion boards can add reader
ports, supervised inputs and additional outputs.

334 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Controller Editor

To Configure Add-On Boards Using the apC Add-On Board Tab

To start the configuration of Add-On Boards, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board
tab and click located in the Edit column to display the apC Add-On BoardGeneral tab (see apC Add-on Board Editor
on Page 350).

apC Controller Status Tab

The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Controller
including:
■ Online Status - indicates whether the controller is online and communicating with the system.
■ Firmware Version - the version of the firmware used by the controller.
■ Communications Status - displays the values Unknown, CommFail, Comm. Normal, Comm. Loss, Comm.
Password Fail, Firmware Download, Card Download, Comm. Tamper, Comm. Power Fail or Comm. Battery Low.
■ Connection Type Status - displays the values: Unknown, Conn. Normal, Conn. Direct, Conn. Dialup, Conn. Dialing,
Conn. Disconnected, or Conn. Connected.
■ Current Personnel Records - displays the number of records.
■ Panel state status – displays the values Unknown, Panel Normal, Panel Tamper, Panel Power Failure, Configuration
Download, Full Personnel Download, Full Download, Database Backup or Panel Battery Low.

apC Controller Triggers Tab

See the following for information on apC Triggers:
■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 363.
■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 363.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279.

You can click Save and Close after configuring apC triggers, or navigate to the Status tab.

apC Controller Holiday Groups Tab

A Holiday is a day or set of days that you configure to allow scheduling access control variations to time-based events and
to vary the normal lock and unlock time specifications.

You can include a Holiday in a Holiday Group and assign a Holiday Group to a schedule.

You need to configure the Holiday Groups that should apply to each apC, so that schedules on that apC respect the correct
Holidays. If a Holiday Group is not listed on this tab, the Holidays it contains are not applied to this apC.

Holiday Groups were called Holiday Lists in C•CURE 800/8000.

NOTE

If a schedule downloaded to the apC has a Holiday Group assigned, and that Holiday Group is listed on this tab, the
activation times in the Holiday Group are evaluated. If the schedule is active and one of the Holidays in the Holiday Group
is active, the start time and end time assigned with the Holiday Group become the schedule’s start time and end time.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 335

apC Controller Editor

For more information about apC Holiday Groups, see the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide.

To use the Holiday Groups tab, see Configuring Holiday Groups for an apC Panel on Page 336 for more information.

Configuring Holiday Groups for an apC Panel

You can download any holiday Group to an apC panel from the Holiday Group Configuration dialog box.

A Holiday Group downloaded to an apC panel acts as an override to prevent activation of normally scheduled clearances
on the Holidays defined in the Holiday Group. You can configure up to 8 holiday groups for each apC panel.

Only Holiday Groups that are downloaded to an apC panel will affect access control at that panel.

To Select Holiday Groups for the Panel

1. On the Holiday Groups tab of the apC Controller dialog box, click the Add button.
The Group selection box appears allowing you to choose the Holiday Groups that you have configured, as shown in
Figure 100 on Page 337.
2. For each Group that you want to download to the apC panel, click that Holiday Group in the Group box and click OK to
add it to the Holiday Group(s) box. You can select more than one Holiday Group when you click the Control (Ctrl) key
as you select the available Holiday Group.

336 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Controller Editor

Figure 100:  apC Controller HolidayGroups Tab

3. Click OK to save add the selected Holiday Groups.

4. A selected Holiday Group appears in the Holiday Group(s) box, as shown in Figure 101 on Page 338.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 337

apC Controller Editor

Figure 101:  apC Controller HolidayGroups Tab

5. To remove one or more Holiday Groups, click a Holiday Group to select it (use CTRL+Left-click to select multiple
Groups), then click Remove to remove the selected Holiday Groups from the panel.
6. Click the State Images tab to display it, as shown in on Page 338.
- Or -
Click Save and Close to return to the Hardware Pane to finish the apC Controller configuration.

apC Controller User Defined Fields Tab

The User Defined Fields tab displays user-defined fields in the system for hardware. User-defined fields are configured in
the Configuration pane. If there are no user-defined fields configured, then the tab is empty.

See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information.

apC Controller State Images Tab

The apC Controller State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states.
These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent.

338 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Controller Editor

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image.
A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default.
4. Click Save and Close to finish the apC Controller configuration and return to the Hardware Pane.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 339

apC Input Editor

apC Input Editor

The apC Input Editor is used to configure apC Inputs that you have created on the apC Controller Inputs tab.
■ apC Input General Tab on Page 340
■ apC Input Board Triggers Tab on Page 341
■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
■ apC Input Board - Status Tab on Page 342
■ apC Inputs State Images Tab on Page 342

apC Input General Tab

The apC Input - General Tab, shown in Figure 102 on Page 340, displays five read-only the Identification fields. The apC
Controller name is shown in the Controller field and the Input Board in the Board field.
Figure 102:  apC Controller Inputs - General Tab

The following Input fields are read-only:

Type - reflects whether the Input has been assigned to a Door or other object or has a special purpose. These include:

340 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Input Editor

■ Tamper
■ Comm Fail
■ General
Assigned To - displays the name of an associated Door or Elevator Button. If the Input is used for a door, then the
Name field is read-only displaying the name of the controlled door.
Connection - specifies the input connection point on the Input Board and is assigned when the Board is configured.

To Configure the apC Inputs General Tab

1. When the Supervised check box is selected, this read-only field indicates that the panel supports input supervision.

The Supervised check box must be selected for Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications.
NOTE

2. To have a notification of changes in state of the Input sent to the guard station, select the Send state changes to the
monitoring station check box.

The Send state changes to the monitoring station option must be selected for Proprietary Burglar
NOTE Alarm applications.

3. To have a notification of changes in state of the Input sent to the journal, select the Send state changes to journal
check box. This option will be selected by default.

You may limit the transmission of state change messages to the journal exclusively, when you click to
NOTE de-select the Send state changes to the monitoring station option and instead, select the Send
state changes to journal option. Use of the latter option can decrease the messaging traffic derived
from the apC Input during normal operations. To further limit messaging, you may also leave both
check boxes unselected.
You may select multiple Inputs in a dynamic view and use the Set Property option to limit the
transmission of state changes. See Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller on Page 137, for more
information.

4. Activate on Supervision Error – Select this check box if the input is supervised and you want it to activate when a
supervision error occurs.
5. Click Save and Close or the Triggers tab to display it, as shown in on Page 341.

apC Input Board Triggers Tab

The Triggers tab allows you to set up Triggers, configured procedures used by C•CURE 9000 to activate specific actions
when a particular predefined condition occurs.

See the following for information on apC Triggers:

■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 363.
■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 363.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 341

apC Input Editor

apC Input Board - Status Tab

The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Input
including:
■ Active Status - displays the values Active or Inactive.
■ Armed Status - displays the values Armed or Disarmed.
■ Hardware Status - displays the values: Secure, Active, Open Loop, Shorted Loop, or Fault.
■ Supervision Status - displays the values: Un-initialized (not in supervision error), Open Loop, Shorted Loop, or Fault.

apC Inputs State Images Tab

The apC Inputs State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate input states. These
images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent.

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image.
A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default.
4. Click Save and Close.

342 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Output Editor

apC Output Editor

The apC Output Editor is used to configure apC Outputs that you have created on the apC Controller Outputs tab.
■ apC Output General Tab on Page 343
■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
■ apC Output Status Tab on Page 344
■ apC Output State Images Tab on Page 344

apC Output General Tab

To Configure Outputs Using the apC Output General Tab

The apC Output General tab lists the following read-only fields:
Type - reflects whether the Output has been assigned to a Door or other object. For apC panels, General is the un
assigned output type.
Assigned To - displays the Elevator or Door object name. For any Output, the Connection field indicates the index
number on the board.
Figure 103:  apC Controller Outputs General Tab

1. The following Options are configurable for an Output:

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 343

apC Output Editor

a. Pulse Duration – (momentary activation) is entered in tenths of a second intervals with a default of 0 seconds. The
range is 0 to 1000.
b. Normally Energized – When checked, the output is energized (power is supplied to the relay) when it is inactive.
When the output is activated, power is removed.
c. To have a notification of changes in state of the Output sent to the Monitoring station, select the Send state
changes to the monitoring station check box. This selection is unavailable for an apC Door Output. State
changes for a Door Output are not sent to the Monitoring Station.
d. To have a notification of changes in state of the Output sent to the journal, select the Send state changes to
journal check box. This option is selected by default. This selection is unavailable for an apC Door Output. State
changes for a Door Output are not sent to the journal.

You may limit the transmission of state change messages to the journal exclusively, when you click
NOTE to de-select the Send state changes to the monitoring station option and instead, select the Send
state changes to journal option. Use of the latter option can decrease the messaging traffic derived
from the apC Output during normal operations. To further limit messaging, you may also leave both
check boxes unselected.
You may select multiple Outputs in a dynamic view and use the Set Property option to limit the
transmission of state changes. See Using Set Property for an iSTAR Controller on Page 137, for
more information.

2. Click Save and Close or the apC Outputs - Status tab to display it, as shown in on Page 344.
For further information about the use of the Groups tab, see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36.

apC Output Status Tab

The Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected apC Board
Output including:
■ Active Status - displays the values Active or Inactive.
■ Active State - displays Unknown.
■ Mode - displays Unknown
■ Active Reason - displays Unknown

apC Output State Images Tab

The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate output states. These images
appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object that they represent.

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image.
A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click the new image and select Restore.

344 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Output Editor

4. Click Save and Close.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 345

apC Reader Editor

apC Reader Editor

The apC Reader Editor is used to configure apC Readers that you have created on the apC Controller Readers tab.

The apC Reader editor has the following tabs:

■ apC Reader General Tab on Page 520
■ apC Reader Input/Output Tab on Page 521
■ apC Reader Keypad Tab on Page 522
■ Hardware Groups Tab Definitions on Page 36
■ apC Reader Triggers Tab on Page 522
■ apC Reader Status Tab on Page 522
■ apC Reader State Images Tab on Page 522

You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an apC Reader Dynamic View. See Add or Remove
Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

apC Reader General Tab

To Configure a Reader Using the apC Reader General Tab

1. Select a Reader Type: MRM, Direct Connect Wiegand, or RM, as shown in Figure 104 on Page 347.
The Reader Type selected should match the connected apC panel since the type will affect the inputs and outputs
available on the Reader I/O tab.
Example:
• The RM has 2 supervised inputs and 2 outputs.
• the MRM has 2 supervised inputs and 1 output.
The Identification area in the Readers - General tab displays read-only, previously-configured information.
2. To choose a card format for the reader that you have selected, click Add in the Card Format area. The Card Format
browser appears, as shown in Figure 104 on Page 347.

You may configure an apC Reader from the apC panel Readers tab or from the Add-on Board tab. A
NOTE reader index configured on one tab will be unavailable on the other tab. The location chosen will affect
the possible reader type and reader input/output option selection.
See the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide - Table 1-5 for a list of UL approved card formats and
readers.

346 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Reader Editor

Figure 104:  apC Controller - Readers - General Tab

3. Click the applicable row in the Card Format browser to select Card Format. Repeat for multiple formats.
4. Navigate to the Input/Output (I/O) tab (see on Page 521).

apC Reader Input/Output Tab

Dedicated Supervised Inputs and Outputs vary on the apC Readers I/O tab, depending upon the Reader Type selected in
the Reader General tab.

To Configure the I/O Tab

1. To configure the Inputs, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 333.
2. To configure Outputs, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Outputs on Page 334.
3. Navigate to the Keypad tab to configure the PIN requirements for the reader.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 347

apC Reader Editor

apC Reader Keypad Tab

The apC Readers - Keypad tab provides a means to control reader keypads. Keypad configuration on an apC panel allows
specification of Card and PIN required. The Schedule is configurable when a PIN is required and restricts the time when
the PIN must be entered. The default Schedule is Always and is the initial value of the Schedule browser.

To Configure the apC Readers - Keypad Tab

1. Choose one of three options for PIN Requirements:
• PIN is not required - to require a card swipe only;
• PIN Only
• Card and PIN required - to require a both a card swipe or presentation with a PIN entry.
2. Click to select a Schedule, which is set up in the Configuration Pane.
If you selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required for PIN Requirements, two choices appear in the
Options area.
3. Choose either of the following options:
• Allow card numbers to be entered from the keypad.
• Use PIN+1 as duress code.

apC Reader Triggers Tab

See the following for information on apC Triggers:
■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 363.
■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 363.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279

You can click Save and Close after configuring apC Reader triggers, or navigate to the Status tab.

apC Reader Status Tab

The apC Reader Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected
apC Readers including:

n Communications - displays the values Normal or Comm Fail

n Tamper - displays the values True or False.
n PIN Required - displays the values True or False.

apC Reader State Images Tab

The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate reader states These images appear
on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object.

348 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Reader Editor

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you
have placed replacement images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default.
4. Click Save and Close.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 349

apC Add-on Board Editor

apC Add-on Board Editor

The apC Add-on Board Editor provides a means to configure boards that expand the capabilities of the apC panels.
Expansion boards can add reader ports, supervised inputs and additional outputs.

The apC Add-On Board Editor displays the following tabs:

■ apC Add-On Board General Tab on Page 350
■ apC Add-On Board Input Boards Tab on Page 351
■ apC Add-On Board Output Boards Tab on Page 351
■ apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page 355

apC Add-On Board General Tab

The apC Add-On Board General tab displays the Board Location Controller field, which is a read-only field that displays
the associated apC panel. Navigate to the Input Boards tab. See Figure 105 on Page 351.

350 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Add-on Board Editor

Figure 105:  apC Controller Ad d-On Board General Tab

apC Add-On Board Input Boards Tab

The apC Add-On Board Input Boards tab allows you to add a Supervised I32 Input Board (Index 1) and eight Supervised I8
Input Boards (Index 1 through 8).

To Configure the I32 Input Board Using the apC Input Boards Tab
■ To configure the I32 Input Board, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board - Input
Boards tab and click located in the Edit column of the Supervised I32 Input Board box to display the apC I32
Input BoardGeneral tab.

apC Add-On Board Output Boards Tab

The apC Add-On Board Output Boards tab allows you to add two R48 and eight R8 Output Boards.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 351

apC Add-on Board Editor

■ R48 Output Board on Page 352

■ R8 Output Board on Page 352

R48 Output Board

To Configure the R48 Output Board

1. To configure the R48 Output Board, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board Output
Boards tab and click located in the Edit column of the R48 Output Boards box to display the apC R48 Output
Board General tab.

The apC R48 Output Board General tab displays three read-only fields:
■ Controller
■ Board
■ Board Index
These fields locate the Output that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add-On Board Outputs for
this controller, the Board Index field reflects the output placement on the R48 output board, ranging from 1 through 2.

2. To configure Outputs, select the apC R48 Output 1-16 Outputs tab.

3. To configure the Outputs on the Add-On Board R48 Outputs 1-16 Outputs, 17-32 Outputs and 33-48 Outputs tabs,
follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Outputs on Page 334.
4. Once you have finished configuring the R48 Outputs, click Save and Close to return to the apC Add-On Board Output
Boards tab.

R8 Output Board

To Configure an R8 Output Board

1. To configure the R8 Output Boards, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board Output
Boards tab and click located in the Edit column of the R8 Output Boards box to display the apC R8 Output Board
General tab.

352 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Add-on Board Editor

Figure 106:  apC Controller Add-On Board Output Boards General Tab

The apC R8 Output Board General tab displays three read-only fields:
■ Controller
■ Board
■ Board Index
These fields locate the Output that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add-On Board Outputs for
this controller, the Board Index field will reflect the output placement on the R8 output board, ranging from 1 through 8.
There are also two Status inputs available for the R8 Output Board:

n Board Tampered, which indicates tampering with the Add-On Board

n Communications Fail, which detects a communications failure.

You will not see comm fail or tamper until at least one of the inputs or outputs is configured.
NOTE

2. To configure the R8 Output, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC R8 Output Board General tab
and click located in the Edit column of the R8 Outputs box, as shown in Figure 106 on Page 353.
3. To configure each R8 Output, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Outputs on Page 334.
4. Once you have finished reader the R8 Outputs, click Save and Close to return to the apC Add-On Board Output
Boards tab.
5. Click the Star Coupler tab to configure Star Coupler Readers, Inputs and Outputs, Mini Star Readers and WPSC
(Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler) Readers and Supervised Inputs.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 353

apC Add-on Board Editor

Because the apC can only support 8 readers, some of the Reader ports on the Star Coupler may be
NOTE unavailable to configure on C•CURE 9000 if readers are configured directly on the apC Readers tab. For
example, if Readers 1 and 6 are configured on the Readers tab, Readers 1 and 6 will be unavailable on the
Star Coupler (Configured check box is read-only). Conversely, if Readers 1 and 6 are configured on the
Star Coupler, then Readers 1 and 6 on the Readers tab will be unavailable.

354 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab

apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab

The apC Add-On Board Star Coupler tab allows you to add one of the following:
■ Star Coupler, with up to 8 Star Coupler Readers, 8 Unsupervised Inputs and 8 Outputs. See the apC Star Coupler
Board Editor on Page 360.
or
■ Mini Star with up to 8 Mini Star Readers. See the Mini Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 366.

The Mini Star Reader has not been evaluated by UL and cannot be used in UL Listed applications.
NOTE

or
■ WPSC (Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler) with up to 8 WPSC Readers and 8 Supervised Inputs on upper and lower
boards. See the Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor on Page 367.

Unsupervised inputs cannot be used in Proprietary Burglar Alarm applications.

NOTE

Configuring the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab

You use the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler tab to configure the type of Star Coupler board you have connected to your
apC controller.

To Configure the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab

1. Open the apC Add-On Board Editor by navigating in the Hardware Tree to the apC controller you want to edit, then
navigating in the tree to the apC Add-On Board you want to edit.
2. Double-click on the apC Add-On Board. The apC Add-On Board Editor opens.
3. Click on the Star Coupler tab.
4. For the Star Coupler board type that is attached to your apC, click in the Configured column to enable that board.
Example:
If you have attached a Mini Star Coupler to your apC, click Configured for the Mini Star in the Star Coupler table.

If you select a Star Coupler and then try to enable a different one, a message appears
NOTE asking "Are you sure you want to delete the Star Coupler object ,object-name>?"
because you can only have one Star Coupler configured.
Click Yes if you want to delete the Star Coupler you configured and replace it with your
new choice.
Click No if you want to keep the Star Coupler you configured and cancel this action.

apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab Definitions

The apC Add-On Board Star Coupler tab has the following file and buttons.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 355

apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab

Table 113:  apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Edit Column Click in the Edit column to open the editor for the Star Coupler you have enabled.

Star Coupler This column displays the type of each Star Couplers you can enable and configure.
Column

Configured Click in this column to enable a Star Coupler, Mini Star, or WPSC (make it available to be edited) .

Name Displays the name for this Star Coupler. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit this name by clicking in click
in this field.

Star Coupler The Star Coupler is a single expansion board that attaches to the apC/8X or apC to allow the RM readers, I/8 inputs, and R/8
outputs to be wired in a Star topology.

Mini Star A Mini Star is a single expansion board that attaches to the apC/8X or apC panels to allow the RM readers to be wired in a star
topology.

WPSC The Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler (WPSC) consists of a two board set that attaches to the apC or apC/8X to allow direct
connection of up to 8 read heads using Wiegand signaling.

356 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Input Board Editor (I32 and I8)

apC Input Board Editor (I32 and I8)

The apC Input Board editor is used to configure apC Input Boards that you have created on the apC Add-on Boards tab.

The apC Input Board editor has the following tabs:

■ apC I32 Input Board General Tab on Page 357
■ apC I32 Input Board 1-16 Inputs Tab on Page 358
■ apC I32 Input Board 17-32 Inputs Tab on Page 359
■ apC I8 Input Board General Tab on Page 359

apC I32 Input Board General Tab

The apC I32 Input Board - General tab, as shown in Figure 107 on Page 358, displays the Input Location - Controller,
Board and Board Index fields. These are read-only fields that display the apC panel, the apC Add-On Board and Index
(for the I32 Inputs the Index is 1) associated with the I32 Supervised Inputs.

These fields identify the Input board that you have chosen to configure. The Board Index field reflects the position of the
I32 input board on the apC.

Navigate to the 1-16 Inputs tab.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 357

apC Input Board Editor (I32 and I8)

Figure 107:  apC Controller I32 Add-On Board General Tab

apC I32 Input Board 1-16 Inputs Tab

The apC I32 Input Board 1-16 Inputs tab allows you to add 16 Supervised Inputs on the I32 Input Board (Board Index 1).

To Configure the 1-16 Inputs Board

1. To configure the 1-16 Supervised Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board
- I32 Input Board - 1-16 Inputs tab and click located in the Edit column of the Supervised Inputs box to display
the apC Input (Index Numbers 1 through 16) I32 Input Board1 - General tab.

358 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Input Board Editor (I32 and I8)

The apC Input General tab displays the Input Location - Controller, Board and Connection fields. These are read-
only fields that display the apC panel, the apC Add-On Board and Input Number associated with an I32 Supervised
Input. These fields locate the Input that you have chosen to configure.
2. To configure the Inputs on the I32 Input Board - 1-16 Inputs tab, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC
Controller Inputs on Page 333.
3. Navigate to the 17-32 Inputs tab.

apC I32 Input Board 17-32 Inputs Tab

The apC I32 Input Board 17-32 Inputs tab allows you to add 16 Supervised Inputs on the I32 Inputs Board (Board Index
1).

To Configure the 17-32 Inputs Board

1. To configure the 17-32 Supervised Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On
Board - I32 Input Board - 17-32 Inputs tab and click located in the Edit column of the Supervised I32 Input
Board box to display the apC Input (Index Numbers 17 through 32) I32 Input Board1 General tab.
2. To configure the Inputs on the I32 Add-On Board - 17-32 Inputs tab, follow the instructions given in To Configure
apC Controller Inputs on Page 333.

apC I8 Input Board General Tab

You can also add-on up to 64 Supervised Inputs (8 Inputs available on 8 I8 Input Boards) with Triggers available for each
input.

To Configure the I8 Input Board

1. To configure an I8 Input Board, select the check box in the Configured column on the apC Add-On Board - Input
Boards tab and click located in the Edit column of the Supervised I8 Input Board box to display the apC I8
Input Board - General tab.
2. To configure Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC I8 Inputs tab and click located in
the Edit column to display the apC Add-On Board - apC I8 Input Board - General tab.
3. To configure the Inputs on the I8 Add-On Board - I8 Inputs tab, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC
Controller Inputs on Page 333.
There are also two Status inputs available for the I8 Input Board:
■ Board Tampered, which indicates tampering with the Add-On Board
■ Communications Fail, which detects a communications failure.
4. Once you have finished reader the I8 Inputs, click Save and Close.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 359

apC Star Coupler Board Editor

apC Star Coupler Board Editor

The apC Star Coupler Board Editor is used to configure apC Star Coupler boards.

Star Couplers are single expansion boards that attach to the apC/8X or apC to allow the RM readers, I/8 inputs, and R/8
outputs to be wired in a Star topology. The Star Coupler Board allows addition of:
■ 8 MRM/RM Reader ports
■ 8 Unsupervised Inputs
■ 8 dry contact, form C, relay Outputs

The Star Coupler can be installed on apC and apC/8X panels. For more information, see the Star Coupler - Mini Star
Coupler Quick Start Installation Guide.

This editor is accessed from the apC Add-on Board Editor Star Coupler tab (see apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on
Page 355).

To Configure the Star Coupler Board

1. To configure the Star Coupler Board, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On Board
Star Coupler tab and click located in the Edit column of the Star Coupler box (see on Page 355) to display the
Star Coupler General tab, as shown in Figure 108 on Page 360.
The apC Star Coupler Board General tab displays three read-only fields:
— Controller
— Board
— Board Index
These fields are located on the Star Coupler that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add-On Boards
for this controller, the Board Index field will reflect each placement, to differentiate board locations.
Figure 108:  apC Star Coupler General Tab

2. Click the Readers tab to configure the Star Coupler readers. See Star Coupler Readers Tab on Page 361 for the Star
Coupler Readers tab.

360 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Star Coupler Board Editor

3. Click the Unsupervised Inputs tab to configure the Star Coupler unsupervised inputs. See Star Coupler
Unsupervised Inputs Tab on Page 361 for the Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs tab.
4. Click the Outputs tab to configure the Star Coupler outputs. See Star Coupler Outputs Tab on Page 362 for the Star
Coupler Outputs tab.
5. When you have completed configuring the Star Coupler and its attached devices, you can click Save and Close to
save your changes.

Star Coupler Readers Tab

The Star Coupler Readers tab allows you to configure the readers connected to your Star Coupler.

To Configure Star Coupler Readers

1. Navigate from the apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 334 to the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page
355
2. Click Star Coupler to open the apC Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 360.
3. Click the Readers tab to configure readers for the Star Coupler.
4. To create all available readers for the Star Coupler, click Create All Readers. apC Readers that have previously been
created on other board connections are unavailable (shaded gray) to be created here.
5. To create an individual reader, select the check box in the Configured column for the Star Coupler Readers (Index 1
through 8) and click located in the Edit column. The apC Reader Editor opens to allow you to configure this
reader. See apC Reader Editor on Page 520 for details on configuring an apC Reader.
6. When you have finished creating and configuring readers for the Star Coupler, you can click Save and Close to save
your changes.

Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs Tab

The Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs tab allows you to configure the inputs connected to your Star Coupler.

To Configure Star Coupler Unsupervised Inputs

1. Navigate from the apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 334 to the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page
355, and click Star Coupler to open the apC Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 360.
2. Click the Unsupervised Inputs tab to configure Unsupervised Inputs for the Star Coupler.
3. To create all Unsupervised Inputs for the Star Coupler, click Create All Inputs.
4. To create an individual input, select the check box in the Configured column for the Star Coupler Inputs (Index 9
through 16) and click located in the Edit column. The apC Input Editor opens to allow you to configure this input.
See apC Input Editor on Page 340 for details on configuring an apC Input.
5. When you have finished creating and configuring inputs for the Star Coupler, you can click Save and Close to save
your changes.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 361

apC Star Coupler Board Editor

Star Coupler Outputs Tab

The Star Coupler Outputs tab allows you to configure the outputs connected to your Star Coupler.

To Configure Star Coupler Outputs

1. Navigate from the apC Controller Add-On Board Tab on Page 334 to the apC Add-On Board Star Coupler Tab on Page
355
2. Click Star Coupler to open the apC Star Coupler Board Editor on Page 360.
3. Click the Outputs tab to configure outputs for the Star Coupler.
4. To create all outputs for the Star Coupler, click Create All Outputs.
5. To create an individual output, select the check box in the Configured column for the Star Coupler Outputs (Index 9
through 16) and click located in the Edit column. The apC Output Editor opens to allow you to configure this
output. See apC Output Editor on Page 343 for details on configuring an apC Output.
6. When you have finished creating and configuring outputs for the Star Coupler, you can click Save and Close to save
your changes.

362 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Triggers Tab for apC Devices

Triggers Tab for apC Devices

C•CURE 9000 uses Triggers, which are configured procedures for activating actions, to activate Events or Outputs for an
apC device. A Trigger automatically executes a specified Action when a particular Condition occurs (when the object
Property specified in the Trigger reports the Value specified in the Trigger).Navigate to the Triggers tab.

A triggers tab provides you with the ability to define the activation/deactivation, enable/disable, and arm/disarm, etc. of
such objects as: events, inputs, outputs, camera actions, door status changes, etc. Triggers can also be used to launch
imports and exports, email and reports, viewer and message displays, personnel ID number state changes, controller
downloads, sound activation, communication notifications, etc.

Table 114 on Page 363 provides an example of a configured apC Trigger.

Table 114:  Triggers Tab Settings Example

The following Triggers Tab settings:

Property Value Action Details Schedule Time Zone

Active Status Active Activate Event apC Input Event Always (Time Zone of apC or C•CURE 9000
Server)

Would create the following Trigger:

Any time (Always Schedule) the Active Status (Property) equals Active (Value), activate the event (Action) named iSTAR Input Event (Details).
iSTAR Input Event is an Event that you would need to create using the Event Editor.

From the Triggers tab of an apC device (such as a Controller, Input, or Reader), you can perform the following tasks.
■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 363.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279.

apC Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 364 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an apC Device Triggers tab.

Defining a Trigger for an apC Device

You can use the Triggers tab to define a Trigger for an apC device. The typical usage for an apC Trigger is to activate an
Event or an Output as the result of a state change of an apC device Property.

This tab provides you with the ability to define the activation/deactivation, enable/disable, and arm/disarm, etc. of such
objects as: events, inputs, outputs, camera actions, door status changes, etc. Triggers can also be used to launch imports
and exports, email and reports, viewer and message displays, personnel ID number state changes, controller downloads,
sound activation, communication notifications, etc.

Example:
When an apC Tamper Input changes from the Inactive (normal) to Active (abnormal) state, you wish to activate an
Event and activate an audible alarm (an apC Output).

Time Zones for apC Panel Triggers

If you specify a Time Zone in your Trigger definition, you can control when the Schedule for the Trigger is active. You can
only select the C•CURE 9000 server Time Zone or the Time Zone of the apC panel you are editing.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 363

Triggers Tab for apC Devices

Example:
If you have apC panels that are in different Time Zones than your C•CURE 9000 server, you may want to have some
Triggers activate according to the apC panel's Time Zone, while other Triggers are activated according to the server
Time Zone.
When you specify the Time Zone for a Trigger definition to be the same as the apC Panel Time Zone, the Schedule
activation times for the Trigger occur according to the apC Panel Time Zone.
If you have an apC panel in the Pacific Time Zone (GMT - 08:00) and a server in the Eastern Time Zone (GMT - 05:00),
a Schedule that is active from Midnight to 6:00 AM is activated from Midnight to 6:00 AM in Pacific Time rather than
Eastern time (three hours later).

To Define a Trigger for an apC Device

1. Click on the Triggers tab for your apC device.

2. Click Add on the Triggers tab to create a new Trigger.
3. Click within the Property column to open the Property dialog box showing the Properties available for the device.
4. Click a Property in the list to select it and add it to the Property column.
5. Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have
selected. Click a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column. (If there is no set
list of Values, you can type in a Value.)
6. Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to
include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.
7. When you select an Action, the lower pane in the Triggers box displays an entry field or group of entry fields, specific
to the selected Action, so that you can configure the Details for the Action.
8. Once you define the Action details, the Details column displays information about how the Action has been
configured.

For example, if an Event field is displayed in Details, you can click to select an Event that you want to associate with
the Trigger.

9. If the Triggers tab includes a Schedule column, click within the Schedule column to display a drop-down list of pre-
configured schedules. Click to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are
created in the Configuration Pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information.
10. If the Triggers tab includes a Time Zone column, click within the Time Zone column to display a drop-down list of
available Time Zones. If the Time Zone column is blank, or you do not select a Time Zone, the Time Zone of the
C•CURE 9000 server is used by default.
11. Click Save and Close to save the apC trigger.

Triggers related to apC objects cannot activate an Event that is downloaded to an iSTAR controller.
NOTE

apC Triggers Tab Definitions

Table 115 on Page 365 provides definitions for the fields and buttons on an apC Triggers tab.

364 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Triggers Tab for apC Devices

Table 115:  apC Triggers Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Add Click Add in the Triggers tab to create a new trigger.

Remove
Click the Row Selector , then click Remove in the Triggers tab to delete a trigger.

Click the Row Selector to select a row in the Triggers table.

Property Click within the Property column, and then click . The Property browser opens presenting properties available for the
Comm Port. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column.

Value Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click a
Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.

Action Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click an Action that you want to include as a
parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.
As you select an Action, a corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, appear at the bottom of the dialog box.
Click to select entries for these fields.

Details Displays details about how the Action was configured.

Schedule Click within the Schedule column to select a Schedule.

Click to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane.
Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information on creating Schedules.

Time Zone Click within the Time Zone column to select a Time Zone for Schedule activation.
Click to select a Time Zone that you want to associate with the trigger Schedule. If you specify a Time Zone, the Schedule
start and end times are calculated using that Time Zone. For example, a Schedule that becomes active at 3:00 AM would
become active at 3:00 AM in the Pacific Time Zone, if that Time Zone was specified. Refer to the C•CURE 9000 Software
Configuration Guide for more information on Time Zones.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 365

Mini Star Coupler Board Editor

Mini Star Coupler Board Editor

Mini Star Couplers are single expansion boards that attach to the apC/8X or apC panels to allow the RM readers to be
wired in a star topology. For more information, see the Star Coupler - Mini Star Coupler Quick Start Installation Guide.

Mini Star Coupler Boards have not been evaluated by UL and cannot be used in UL Listed applications
NOTE

To Configure the Mini Star Coupler Board

1. To configure the Mini Star Coupler Board, select the check box in the Configured column in the apC Add-On
Board - Star Coupler tab and click located in the Edit column of the Star Coupler box to display the Mini Star
Coupler - General tab.
The Mini Star Coupler Board - General tab displays three read-only fields:
— Controller
— Board
— Board Index
These fields are located on the Mini Star Coupler that you have chosen to configure. As you configure more Add-On
Boards for this controller, the Board Index field will reflect each placement, to differentiate board locations.
2. Click the Readers tab to configure readers for the Mini Star Coupler.
3. Select the check box in the Configured column for the Mini Star Coupler Readers (Index 1 through 8) and click
located in the Edit column to display the Mini Star Coupler Readers - General tab.
The 8 available Mini Star Coupler Readers allow up to 2 Supervised Inputs and 2 Outputs. For further instructions for
reader readers, see To Configure an apC Reader on Page 334.

Readers that are unavailable have already been configured on the apC panel Readers tab.
NOTE

4. Click Save and Close to return to the apC Controller - Add-On Board - Star Coupler tab.
Be sure that the Mini Star Coupler Board is installed correctly on the apC or apC/8X. For more information, see the
Star Coupler - Mini Star Coupler Quick Start Installation Guide.
5. Click Save and Close to return to the apC Controller - Add-On Board tab.

366 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor

Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor

The Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler (WPSC) consists of a two board set that attaches to the apC or apC/8X to allow
direct connection of up to 8 read heads using Wiegand signaling. The WPSC board set consists of a Lower Board and an
Upper Board. The Lower Board provides connections for 4 readers indexed 1-4 and 4 inputs indexed 17-23. The Upper
Board provides connections for 4 readers indexed 5-8 and 4 inputs indexed 25-31.

When using the WPSC Add-On Board, the standard Star Coupler cannot be used because the WPSC board set attaches
to the same bus connector as the Star Coupler.

Each board provides one supervised input for each reader, which should be used in conjunction with one of the 8
supervised inputs on the apC main board to provide a total of two supervised inputs for each reader.

The supervised inputs on the WPSC remain inactive in the Monitoring Station unless readers are configured
NOTE in the WPSC editor.

Since the WPSC board set does not provide output relays, it is recommended that the 8 on-board apC relays be used. For
more information, see the WPSC Quick Start Installation Guide.

To Configure the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Board

1. To configure the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler (WPSC) Board, select the WPSC check box in the Configured
column in the apC Add-On Board - Star Coupler tab and click located in the WPSC Edit column of the Star
Coupler box.
The Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Board General tab displays three read-only fields:
— Controller
— Board
— Board Index
These fields are located on the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler that you have chosen to configure. As you configure
more Add-On Boards for this controller, the Board Index field will reflect each placement, to differentiate board
locations.
2. Click the Lower Board tab to display the 4 available WPSC Readers and 4 Unsupervised WPSC Inputs.
3. Select the check box in the Configured column for the WPSC Readers (Index 1 through 4) and click located in
the Edit column to display the apC Readers - General tab.
You can configure the reader keypad and triggers for each of the 4 available WPSC Readers. For further instructions
see apC Controller Readers Tab on Page 334.
4. To configure Inputs, select the check box in the Configured column in the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler -
Inputs tab and click located in the Edit column to display the apC Add-On Board - Wiegand/Proximity Star
Coupler Input - General tab.
5. To configure the Inputs on the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Add-On Board - Inputs tab, follow the
instructions given in To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 333.
6. Click Save and Close to return to the apC Controller - Add-On Board - Star Coupler tab.
Be sure that the Wiegand/Proximity Star Coupler Board is installed correctly on the apC or apC/8X. For more
information, see the WPSC Quick Start Installation Guide.
7. Click Save and Close to return to the apC Controller - Add-On Board tab.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 8 367

Wiegand Proximity Star Coupler Editor

8. Click the Status tab to display it.

- Or -
Click Save and Close to return to the Hardware Pane and finish the apC Controller configuration later.

368 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 9

Chapter 9 - Floors

This chapter explains how to configure Floors in C•CURE 9000. Floors are part of Elevator access control. An Elevator
associates a Floor with an Input or Output.

In this chapter

Floors Overview 370

Configuring Floors 371

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 9 369

Floors Overview

Floors Overview
Floors are configured to define Elevator control. Floors are paired with inputs and outputs to control floor access through
elevators. Before you can configure elevators, you must configure floors and/or floor groups. See Elevator Configuration
Overview on Page 552 for more information.

When a person presents a card at an elevator, the system checks the clearances associated with the card for the elevator
and associated floors. If the person’s clearances do not allow access, the access attempt is rejected before the person
presses an elevator button. If the person has access to a floor, the system grants access to the person and activates the
output attached to the button for that floor.

A Floor has only Name, Description and Enabled properties. If the Floor has been assigned to any Elevators, they will
appear in a read-only list on the Floor General tab.

Elevator controls have not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

370 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring Floors

Configuring Floors

Accessing the Floor Editor

You can access the Floor editor from the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane.

To Access the Floor Editor

1. Click the Hardware pane button.
2. Click the Hardware drop-down list and select Floor.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects.
4. Double-click the Floor in the list that you want to edit, and the Floor General tab opens, as shown in Figure 109 on
Page 371.
Figure 109:  Floor General Tab

5. Type a name for the Floor in the Floor Name field.

6. Type a description for the Floor in the Description field.
7. Select Enable to indicate that the Floor is available for use. Elevators that are assigned to the Floor will be shown in
the Accessed Elevators box.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 9 371

Configuring Floors

8. Maintenance Mode - Click to put the Floor into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more
information.
9. Click Save and Close when you are finished.
10. When you create a Floor group, a Group tab will appear with the Floor General tab, as shown in Figure 110 on Page
372.
Figure 110:  Floor Groups Tab

Floor Definitions
The definitions for the fields and buttons on the Floor General tab are listed in Table 116 on Page 372.
Table 116:  Floor General Tab

Field/Button Description

Name Enter a name for the floor.

Description Enter a brief description for this floor.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the floor into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.

372 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring Floors

Table 116:  Floor General Tab (continued)

Field/Button Description

Enabled Check this box to put the floor online. When the floor is offline, the C•CURE 9000 System ignores the floor.

Accessed Displays a list of elevators with buttons associated with this floor. These associations are set when you configure the
Elevators Elevators.

Save and Close Click Save and Close to accept your changes to the Floor configuration.

Creating a Floor
You can create a new Floor.

To Create a Floor
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click New to create a new Floor. The Floor Editor opens and you can configure the Floor.
4. To save your new Floor, click Save and Close.
Alternatively, if you want to save the Floor and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Floor is
saved and closed, but the Floor Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Floor.

Creating a Floor Template

You can create a new template for a Floor. A Floor template saves you time because you can reuse the same configuration
repeatedly.

To Create a Floor Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Template.
4. The Floor Template opens and you can configure the Floor template.
5. To save your new Floor Template, click Save and Close.

The new Floor template appears under Templates in the Template drop-down list.

To Select a Floor Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Template.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 9 373

Configuring Floors

4. Select the template you wish to use under Templates.

Deleting a Floor
You can delete a Floor.

To Delete a Floor
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects.
4. Right-click the Floor in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu.
5. Click Yes on the “Are you sure you want to delete the selected Floor?” message box.

Modifying a Floor
You can edit a Floor.

To Edit a Floor
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects.
4. Double-click the Floor in the list that you want to modify and select Edit from the context menu. The Floor Editor
opens.

Viewing a List of Floors

You can view a list of Floors.

To View a List of Floors

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects.

Using Set Property to Configure Floors

You can use Set Property to quickly set a property for a Floor without opening a Floor. Set Property allows you to select
multiple Floors in the dynamic list, and right-click to use Set Property to set a specific property for all of them. So, for
example, if you wanted to change a setting for 20 Floors, you could select all of them and do it in one step.

374 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring Floors

To Set a Property for a Floor

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects.
4. Right-click the Floor in the list for which you want to set the property and select Set Property from the context menu.
5. Specify the property for the Floor. Click the drop-down button to see a list of properties.
6. Enter the value for the property and click OK.
7. Click OK on the Setting Properties of Floor message box.

Add Floors to a Group

You can use Add To Group for Floors. Add Floors To Group enables you to add the Floor object to the group. When you
create a Floor group, a Group tab will appear with the Floor - General tab.

To Add Floors To a Group

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Floor from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Floor objects.
4. Right-click the Floor in the list that you want to add to a group and select Add To Group from the context menu.
Figure 111 on Page 375 displays the Hardware pane and the context menu from which you can add a floor object to a
Group.
Figure 111:  Hardware Pane - Adding a Floor to a Group

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 9 375

Configuring Floors

376 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 10

Chapter 10 - Doors

A Door in C•CURE 9000 provides access control by specifying the controllers, readers, inputs, and outputs associated
with an entrance. From the application’s hardware tree, you will configure the specific controller type first, then configure
the associated readers, inputs, and outputs, and then configure the Door. This sequence of reader the security
components is necessary because each door requires the associated components to operate with their apC or iSTAR
controllers.

In this chapter

Door Overview 378

Door Tasks 379
apC Door Editor 384
apC Door Definitions 392
iSTAR Door Editor 397
iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab 409
iSTAR Door Definitions 411
iSTAR Aperio Door Editor 420

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 377

Door Overview

Door Overview
In general, a door is a logical structure that ties together a controller and its associated readers, inputs, and outputs for
access control. In C•CURE 9000, before you configure the door you must first configure the type of controller that is to be
used for the readers, input, and outputs. Then you can configure the door associated with the components.

Figure 112 on Page 378 represents the way readers, inputs, outputs, events, and areas are related to Doors in C•CURE
9000, while Table 117 on Page 378 describes typical door components.
Figure 112:  Typical Door Configuration

Table 117:  Typical Door Components

Component Description

RTE Input A Request To Exit (RTE) input sends a signal that lets C•CURE 9000 know that someone is going to open the door to exit.
Typically this device is a motion sensor or a press to exit button.

DSM Input A Door Switch Monitor (DSM) sends a signal that lets C•CURE 9000 know whether the door is open or closed.

DLR Output A Door Latch Relay (DLR) is used to send a signal from C•CURE 9000 to a door latch to lock or unlock the door.

ADA Output An output that activates a door assistance mechanism, usually installed for compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA).

Reader Defines the card readers that control entry or egress through this door.
In/Out

Events Door events are usually triggered by state changes in the Door inputs and outputs. You specify the Event you want to activate
when a change, such as “Door held open,” occurs.

Area In/Out Defines the Area a cardholder enters and the area a cardholder leaves through this door.
Example:
A cardholder passing through a door named “Sales” is leaving an Area called “Lobby” and entering an Area called “Sales
Office.”

378 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Door Tasks

Door Tasks
You can perform the following general tasks to configure iSTAR and apC Doors.
■ Creating a Door on Page 379
■ Creating a Door Template on Page 380
■ Deleting a Door on Page 381
■ Modifying a Door on Page 381
■ Viewing a List of Doors on Page 381
■ Using Set Property to Configure Doors on Page 382
■ Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View on Page 383

Creating a Door
A door object must be configured for the type of controller to which it is connected: iSTAR or apC controllers. The process
is essentially the same when creating each door object type. First you must create the controller, then configure the
controller’s General tab and Board tab to configure inputs, outputs and readers. One exception is that with the iSTAR
controllers, you are required to first create an iSTAR cluster and then create controllers within that cluster.

Once you have created and configured the door controller, you may create as many doors as that type of controller can
accommodate.

To Create a Door

Follow the steps below to create a door for an apC controller. To create an iSTAR door, first refer to the next set of steps
for reader the iSTAR Cluster and Controller before reader the iSTAR door.
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. In the Hardware tree, expand the facility folder where you want to create a door. You must create a door by highlighting
a controller icon, board icon, or door icon in the hardware tree:
• apC - highlight the apC controller icon, right click, and select apC Door > New.
• iSTAR - highlight the iSTAR controller icon, right click, and select iSTAR Door > New.
You can also create a new door from the door icon in a folder: highlight the door icon, right click, and select Door >
New. A new Door Dialog box opens. When the Door Dialog box opens on the General tab, configure the Door.
3. Enter a Name and Description.
4. Maintenance Mode - Click to put the door into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more
information.
5. Configure the fields on the General tab, as needed. The fields listed below are on the apC and iSTAR Door dialog
boxes.
• Controller - This is a read-only field that indicates the controller associated with the door.

• Door Switch Monitor - Click to display a list of inputs available for the controller. This signal is true when the
door is open. It is used to determine Admit Unused, Door Held, and Door Forced. Click an Input to select it and
assign it to the Door Switch Monitor field.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 379

Door Tasks

• Door Lock Relay - Click to display a list of outputs available for the controller. T his output is used to open the
door. Click an Output to select it and assign it to the Door Lock Relay field.

• Alternate Shunt Relay - Click to display a list of outputs available for the controller. Alternate Shunt is used
for cardholders with disability and sometimes for aircraft loading doors. Click an Output to select it and assign it to
the Alternate Shunt Relay field .

• Shunt Expiration Relay - Click to display a list of outputs available for the controller. This output will indicate
the expiration of the shunt. Click an Output to select it and assign it to the Shunt Expiration Relay field.

• Inbound Reader - Click to display a list of Readers available. Inbound and Outbound Readers are required for
Area related functions such as Occupancy and Anti-Passback Click a Reader to select it and assign it to the
Inbound Reader field.

• Outbound Reader - Click to display a list of Readers available. Inbound and Oubound Readers are required
for Area related functions such as Occupancy and Anti-Passback Click a Reader to select it and assign it to the
Outbound Reader field.
• Readers are continuously active - Click this check box to enable continuous reader activity. Continuously Active
is not normally used. It is typically used for subway gates and other high volume applications.

• Request to Exit Input - Click to display a list of Inputs available. Click an Input to select it and assign it to the
field.
• Unlock Door on RTE - Click this check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit. This is usually checked, but
certain high security areas may use the REX as a signal to the Security Officer who verifies the person and opens
the door.
• Shunt DSM while RTE is active - Click this check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is
Active. This is frequently used to correct a race condition between REX and DSM.
6. To save your new Door, click Save and Close.
To save the Door and create a new one, click Save and New. The current Door is saved and closed, but the Door
Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Door.
The following controller creation provides a sample of the steps involved in the creation of an iSTAR Cluster and
Controller. For more detailed information about the creation of iSTAR Clusters, refer to Configuring iSTAR Clusters on
Page 91. For more detailed information about the creation of controllers, refer to:
■ Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 127
■ Configuration Overview for iSTAR Controllers on Page 121
■ apC Panel Overview on Page 308.

Creating a Door Template

You can create a template for a Door. A Door template saves you time because you can reuse the same configuration
repeatedly.

To Create a Door Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Template.

380 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Door Tasks

4. The Door Template opens and you can configure it.

5. To save your new Door Template, click Save and Close.

The new Door template appears in the Template drop down list under Templates.

To Select a Door Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Template.
4. Select the template you wish to use under the Templates list and configure the door as explained in Creating a Door
on Page 379.

Deleting a Door
You can delete a Door from a controller.

To Delete a Door
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing Door objects of the same type.
4. Right-click the Door in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu.
5. Click Yes on the “Are you sure you want to delete the selected Door?” message box.

Modifying a Door
You can edit a Door.

To Edit a Door
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing Door objects of the same type.
4. Double-click the Door in the list that you want to modify, and the Door Editor opens. Or, you can select the door in
the list, right click, and select Edit from the context menu.

Viewing a List of Doors

You can view a list of Doors.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 381

Door Tasks

To View a List of Doors

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing Door objects of the same type.

In the Dynamic View, you can right-click the column header and select new columns from the list to add
NOTE them to the Dynamic View. (For iSTAR Doors you can add a column that identifies the Intrusion Zone to
which the Doors belong.)

If you right-click a row in the Door Dynamic View, a context menu is displayed. This menu contains a number of standard
selections, as well as selections that are specific for Doors.

See Using the Object List Context Menu in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for more information about the
object context menu.

See Table 118 on Page 382 for context menu selections that are specific to Doors.

There are additional context menu selections for Advanced Door monitoring. See Advanced Door Monitoring Details on
Page 459 for more information.
Table 118:  Doors Context Menu Selections

Selection Description

Lock Opens a Manual action dialog box that lets you lock the selected Door.

Unlock Opens a Manual action dialog box that lets you unlock the selected Door.

Momentary Opens a Manual action dialog box that lets you momentarily unlock the selected Door.
Unlock

Show Opens the Cause List viewer for this Door.

Locked
Causes

Door Opens the Doors Monitoring Screen for the Door you selected.
Monitoring See Door Monitoring Screen on Page 461 for information about the Doors Monitoring screen.

Show Click this menu selection to view a list of Security Objects associated with this iSTAR or apC Door. For more information, see
Association "Showing Associations for an Object" in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide.

Monitor Click this menu selection to view activity for the selected iSTAR and apC Door(s), and any Input, Output, Reader, and Trigger-
with-target-Event children, on an Admin Monitor Activity Viewer.
For more information, see "Monitoring an Object from the Administration Station" in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide.

Using Set Property to Configure Doors

You can use Set Property to quickly set a property for an iSTAR or apC Door without opening an iSTAR or apC Door
editor. Set Property allows you to select multiple Doors objects in the dynamic list, and right-click to use Set Property to
set a specific property for all of them.

382 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Door Tasks

Example:
If you wanted to change an unlock property setting for 20 apC Doors, you could select all of them listed in the dynamic
list and do it in one step.

To Set a Property for a Door

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select either an apC or iSTAR Door from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Door objects.
4. Right-click the Door (or set of doors) in the list for which you want to set a property and select Set Property from the
context menu.
5. Specify the property for the Door. Click the Browse button to see a list of properties.
6. Enter the value for the property and click OK.
7. Click OK on the Select a property and value for object message box.

Add a Hardware Device to Group from a Dynamic View

When you select a Hardware device from a Dynamic View and then right-click for the context menu, Add to group
appears as a menu selection. This function enables you to add the object(s) to a Group. For more information about the
Group function see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36.

To Add a Hardware Device To a Group

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select a Hardware device from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all objects of that type.
4. Right-click on the object that you want to add to a Group and select Add To Group. A list of Groups is displayed.
5. Select the Group from the list, and the object is added to that group.
6. Click OK to confirm your choice.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 383

apC Door Editor

apC Door Editor

The apC Door editor has the following tabs:
■ apC Door General Tab on Page 385
■ apC Door Readers Tab on Page 387
■ apC Door Timing Tab on Page 388
■ apC Door Triggers Tab on Page 389
■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
■ apC Door Status Tab on Page 389
■ apC Door Special Actions Tab on Page 390
■ apC Door State Images Tab on Page 389

Configuring an apC Door

To configure a Door associated with an apC controller, first you must configure an apC panel, along with its readers, input,
and outputs. For more information see apC Controller Configuration Summary on Page 320. To configure the door, perform
the following tasks.

The apC and apC/L controllers have not been evaluated by UL.
NOTE

To Configure the apC Door

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware
pane.
2. Configure the apC panel’s Readers, Inputs, and Outputs.
3. In the Hardware tree, find the apc Controller to which you want to associate the new apC Door, and click the “+” to
expand the contents of that directory. A list displays that includes Doors, Elevators, Inputs, Outputs, and Readers.
These objects are also directories.
If you already have some apC doors configured, you can display all existing doors for the controller. Highlight Doors
and click to open a Dynamic View showing all Door objects of this type (see Figure 113 on Page 385). Edit an
existing door by double-clicking the door in the Dynamic View to open the door’s editor window.
4. Highlight the Doors directory in the Hardware tree, right-click to display the context menu, and select New. A new
apC Door editor displays. See apC Door - General tab, as shown in Figure 114 on Page 386.
Another way to create the new apC door is to highlight the Controller in the Hardware tree, right click, and select apC
Door>New.

384 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Door Editor

Figure 113:  Hardware Pane - Create an apC Door

5. Configure the door on the General tab and any other tabs, as needed. You will need to have already configured the
apC Readers, Inputs, and Outputs to fully configure an apC door.
6. Configure remaining tabs for this door, or click Save and Close. The new door displays under the Doors directory in
the Hardware tree.

apC Door General Tab

Configure the door on the General tab and other tabs, as required. You will need to have configured the apC Readers,
Inputs, and Outputs to configure an apC door. Refer to the apC Controller Configuration Summary on Page 320 for further
information.

The following section documents the tasks required to configure a basic Door object for apC panel access control. The
Door Reader buttons and entry fields on the Door General tab, shown in Figure 114 on Page 386, allow you to specify the
card readers associated with this Door, and to configure door-specific settings for these readers.

To Configure the apC Door General Tab

1. Use the Identification box to enter a Name and brief Description (optional) of the door that you are reader.
The Controller that you have chosen to operate the door is listed in the read-only Controller field.
2. Click for the Door Switch Monitor. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Switch
Monitor, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to
the entry field (see Figure 114 on Page 386).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 385

apC Door Editor

Figure 114:  apC Door General Tab

3. Click for the Door Lock Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Door Lock Relay,
a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the
entry field.
4. Click for the Alternate Shunt Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Alternate
Shunt Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and
add it to the entry field.
5. Click for the Shunt Expiration Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Shunt
Expiration Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it
and add it to the entry field.
6. Click for the Request to Exit Input. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Request to
Exit, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an RTE Input to select it and add it
to the entry field.
7. Select the Unlock Door on RTE check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit.
8. Select the Shunt DSM While RTE is Active check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is
Active.
9. Navigate to the Readers tab, or click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane.

386 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Door Editor

apC Door Readers Tab

The apC Door - Readers tab allows configuration of inbound and outbound access readers and for bi-directional readers
installed at apC controlled doors. All the readers on the door must be located on the same apC panel.

The Readers tab also lets you configure doors as "ordinary" or turnstile for escorted access for visitors by selecting the
Readers Are Continuously Active check box.

To Configure the apC Door Readers Tab

1. Click for the Inbound Access Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Inbound
Access Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the panel. Click a Reader to select it and
add it to the entry field.
When specifying an access reader, follow these guidelines:
• Both access readers on the door must be located on the same apC panel.
• If you are using a bi-directional reader, specify the same reader in the inbound and outbound access reader fields.
2. Click for the Outbound Access Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Outbound
Access Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the controller. Click a Reader to select it
and add it to the entry field.
3. Select the Readers are Continuously Active check box to enable continuous reader activity, enabling readers to
read and process cards even when the doors associated with them are unlocked or open because of another card
access request. This mode is typically used for turnstiles or other high traffic situations that would result in
unacceptable delays if the reader went through its normal sequence of read-open-close for each cardholder.
Example:
Suppose a user swipes their card and unlocks a door. Before the door opens and closes, another person swipes his
card. If this box is checked, the system treats the second swipe as an access request. If you leave this box cleared,
the system ignores the second swipe. This feature is useful at high volume doors where you don’t want to wait for the
door to close after every access.
For escorted access for visitors to work at:
• "Ordinary" doors — multiple person access on each access cycle — select the Readers Are Continuously Active
check box.
• "Turnstiles" (or Mantraps) — one person access only on each access cycle — clear the Readers Are Continuously
Active check box.
4. Click to select an input for the apC Bi-directional Reader in the Activation of the Input Determines Inbound
Movement entry field. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the inbound input, a browser opens
presenting a list of inputs available for the panel. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field.
The selected input tests for inbound movement at the apC controlled door. When this input activates within the
directional link time, the system determines that the card is moving in the inbound direction. The apC panel uses this
information for access control decisions.
The inbound input must be on the same apC as the bi-directional readers on this door.
5. If the door has an inbound input defined in the Activation of This Input Determines Inbound Movement field, enter
the time in tenths of seconds that the panel waits between card reads and input state changes to determine that the

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 387

apC Door Editor

card is entering the area in the Must Activate Within entry field. The range for this field is from 0 to 99.99 seconds in
units of 0.1 seconds.
If the input changes state within the specified time, the panel determines that the card is moving into the inbound area.
6. Click to select an input for the apC Bi-directional Reader in the Activation of the Input Determines Outbound
Movement entry field. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the outbound input, a browser opens
presenting a list of inputs available for the panel. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field.
The selected input tests for outbound movement at the apC controlled door. When this input activates within the
directional link time, the system determines that the card is moving in the outbound direction. The apC uses this
information for access control.
The outbound input must be on the same apC as the bi-directional readers on this door.
7. If the door has an outbound input defined in the Activation of This Input Determines Outbound Movement field,
enter the time in tenths of seconds that the panel waits between card reads and input state changes to determine that
the card is entering the area in the Must Activate Within entry field. The range for this field is from 0 to 99.99 seconds
in units of 0.1 seconds.
If the input changes state within the specified time, the panel determines that the card is moving into the outbound
area.
8. Navigate to the Timing tab, or click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane.

apC Door Timing Tab

A door that is controlled by an apC panel is constrained to a single set of door timing values for each side of the door.
Required apC door sequences use the same set of timing values regardless of schedule. Only one alternate set of timer
values is used in each door sequence. This corresponds to a personnel record configured to use Alternate Shunt Time.

Setting apC Door Timing

1. Delay Relock – Enter the number of seconds to delay door relock after the door is opened (after a request to exit, for
example). The range in seconds is 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:0.
2. Shunt Time – Enter the number of seconds that the door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated
within the range of 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:10 (10 seconds).
3. Unlock Time – Enter the number of seconds the Door remains unlocked after a valid card swipe, RTE activation, or
momentary unlock within the range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:15 (255 seconds); the default is 0:0:5 (5 seconds).
4. Alternate Shunt Time – Enter the number of hours, minutes, and seconds the Door can remain open before a door
held open alert is generated after a valid card swipe by a cardholder with the Alternate Shunt flag set in their
personnel record. This value is used only if it is set to a greater time than the Shunt time value within the range of
00:00:00 (default) to 18:00:00 (18 hours).
5. Shunt Expiration Warning Time – If set, the Shunt expiration relay is fired regardless of the shunt time used. If set
to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay will only be fired if the Alternate shunt time was used. The Shunt Expiration
Warning has a range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:0 (4 minutes).
6. Door Close Debounce Time - Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer. The range is 0 - 25.5 seconds
units of 0.1 seconds.

388 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Door Editor

7. Door Open Grace Time – Also known as Door Open Debounce Time. Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is
no timer; as soon as the door opens, door forced open is reported. The range for this field is from 0 to 25.5 seconds in
units of 0.1 seconds.
8. Navigate to the Triggers tab, or click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane.

apC Door Triggers Tab

You can create Triggers for apC Doors using the apC Doors Triggers tab. A Trigger executes a specified Action when a
particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property selected

See the following for information on apC Triggers:

■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 363.
■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 363.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279

You can click Save and Close after configuring apC Door triggers, or navigate to the Status tab.

apC Door Status Tab

The Door Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected Door
including:
■ Alarm State - displays the values Normal, Forced, Held Open, or Unknown.
■ Admit Status - displays the values Admit, Reject Admit, Duress, Admit Visitor, Reject Visitor, Request To Exit,
Reject No Escort, Reject No PIN, Reject Not Time, Reject Unknown, Reject Unknown PIN, or Reject Duress.
■ Open Status - displays the values Open, Closed, or Unknown.
■ Mode - displays the values Locked, Unlocked, No Access, or Unknown.
■ Navigate to the State Images tab or click Save and Close.

apC Door State Images Tab

The State Images tab on the Inputs Board provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller
states.

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image.
A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click the new image and select Restore Default.
4. Click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 389

apC Door Editor

apC Door Special Actions Tab

Use the apC Door Special Actions to configure Doors with Visitor Management and Access Management actions. You
can configure a door to automatically Check-in and Check-out Visitors, and configure a door so that an access request is
automatically created and sent to the C•CURE Portal when a card swipe is rejected.

For more information about Check-in and Check-out of a Visitor via Visitor Management, and access requests via Access
Management and the C•CURE Portal, see the C•CURE 9000 Visitor and Access Management Guide.

To Configure a Door Action for Check-In

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure.
2. Click the Special Actions tab.
3. Click Add Action.
4. Chose the Visitor Management Action Check Visitors In.
5. Select the Direction for the action to take place.
• Choose In for Visitors to Check-in using an inbound reader.
• Choose Out for Visitors to Check-in using an outbound reader.
• Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-in using either the inbound or outbound reader.
6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active.
7. Click Save and Close

To Configure a Door Action for Check-out

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure.
2. Click the Special Actions tab.
3. Click Add Action.
4. Chose the Visitor Management Action Check Visitors Out.
• Check Out Visitors and Return Badge.
5. Select the Direction for the action to take place.
• Choose In for Visitors to Check-out using an inbound reader.
• Choose Out for Visitors to Check-out using an outbound reader.
• Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-out using either the inbound or outbound reader.
6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active.
7. Click Save and Close

To Configure a Door Action for Check-out

This presumes that a Badge Return mechanism is set up at the Check-out reader.
1. In the C•CURE 9000 Admin Client, navigate to the Door you wish to configure.

390 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Door Editor

2. Click the Special Actions tab.

3. Click Add Action.
4. Select the Check Visitors Out and Return Badge.
5. Select the Direction for the action to take place.
• Choose In for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using an inbound reader.
• Choose Out for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using an outbound reader.
• Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-out and Return the Badge using either the inbound or outbound reader.
6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active.
7. Click Save and Close

Configuring a Door Action for Creating Access Requests

1. In the C•CURE 9000 navigation pane, navigate to the Door you want to configure.
2. Click the Special Actions tab.
3. Click Add Action.
4. From the Door Action dropdown, select Create Access Request.
5. Select the Direction for the action to take place.
• Select In to create an access request for an inbound reader.
• Select Out to create an access request for an outbound reader.
• Select In and Outto create an access request for an inbound or outbound reader.
6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active.
7. Select a Clearance to apply to the door.
8. Click Save and Close.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 391

apC Door Definitions

apC Door Definitions

The definitions of the various fields and buttons on the apC Door editor are given in the following tables.
apC Door General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Name Use the Identification box to enter a name (up to 50 characters long) and brief description of the door you are configuring.

Description A description of the door that you are configuring.

Maintenance Click to put the apC door into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Partition The Partition label indicates to which partition the door belongs.

Hardware

Door Switch Click for the Door Switch Monitor. When you click this button to select inputs to assign to the Door Switch Monitor, a
Monitor browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click a Switch or other pre-configured Input to select it and
add it to the entry field.

Door Lock Click for the Door Lock Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Door Lock Relay, a browser
Relay opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click a Lock or other pre-configured Output to select it and add it
to the entry field.

Alternate Click for the Alternate Shunt Relay. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Alternate Shunt Relay,
Shunt Relay a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field.

Shunt Click for the Shunt Expiration Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Shunt Expiration
Expiration Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry
Relay field.

Request to Exit

Request to Click for the Request to Exit Input. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Request to Exit Input,
Exit Input a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field.

Unlock Door Select the Unlock Door on RTE check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit.
on RTE

Shunt DSM Select the Shunt DSM While RTE is Active check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is Active.
while RTE is
active

apC Door Readers Tab Definitions

Table 119:  apC Door Readers Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Access Readers

392 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Door Definitions

apC Door Readers Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Inbound Access When you click to select an Inbound Access Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the panel.
Reader Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field.

Outbound When you click to select an Outbound Access Reader, a browser opens presenting a list of readers available for the
Access Reader panel. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field.

Readers are Select the Readers Are Continuously Active check box if you want readers to read and process cards even when the
Continuously doors associated with them are unlocked or open because of another card access request.
Active

Bi-directional Readers

Activation of the Click to select an input for the apC Bi-directional Reader in the Activation of the Input Determines Inbound Movement
Input entry field. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the inbound input, a browser opens presenting a list of
Determines inputs available for the panel. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field.
Inbound
The selected input tests for inbound movement at the apC controlled door. When this input activates within the directional link
Movement
time, the system determines that the card is moving in the inbound direction. The apC panel uses this information for access
control decisions.
The inbound input must be on the same apC as the bi-directional readers on this door.

Must Activate If the door has an inbound input defined in the Activation of This Input Determines Inbound Movement field, enter the time in
Within tenths of seconds that the panel waits between card reads and input state changes to determine that the card is entering the
area in the Must Activate Within entry field. The range for this field is from 0 to 99.99 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds.
If the input changes state within the specified time, the panel determines that the card is moving into the inbound area.

Activation of the Click to select an input for the apC Bi-directional Reader in the Activation of the Input Determines Outbound Movement
Input entry field. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the outbound input, a browser opens presenting a list of
Determines inputs available for the panel. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field.
Outbound
The selected input tests for outbound movement at the apC controlled door. When this input activates within the directional link
Movement
time, the system determines that the card is moving in the outbound direction. The apC uses this information for access control.
The outbound input must be on the same apC as the bi-directional readers on this door.

Must Activate If the door has an outbound input defined in the Activation of This Input Determines Outbound Movement field, enter
Within the time in tenths of seconds that the panel waits between card reads and input state changes to determine that the card is
entering the area in the Must Activate Within entry field. The range for this field is from 0 to 99.99 seconds in units of 0.1
seconds.
If the input changes state within the specified time, the panel determines that the card is moving into the outbound area.

apC Door Timing Tab Definitions

Table 120:  apC Door Timing Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Timers

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 393

apC Door Definitions

apC Door Timing Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Delay Relock Type the number of seconds to delay door relock after the door is opened (after a request to exit, for example). The range in
seconds is 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:0.

Shunt Time Shunt Time – type the number of seconds that the door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated within the
range of 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:10 (10 seconds).

Unlock Time Unlock Time – type the number of seconds the Door remains unlocked after a valid card swipe, RTE activation, or momentary
unlock within the range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:15 (255 seconds); the default is 0:0:5 (5 seconds).

Alternate Alternate Shunt Time – type the number of hours, minutes, and seconds the Door can remain open before a door held open
Shunt Time alert is generated after a valid card swipe by a cardholder with the Alternate Shunt flag set in their personnel record (This value
is used only if it is set to a greater time than the Shunt time value) within the range of default/minimum: 0:0:0; maximum:18:0:0
(18 hours).

Shunt If set, the Shunt expiration relay fires regardless of the shunt time used. If set to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay fires
Expiration only if the Alternate shunt time is used. The Shunt Expiration Warning has a range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:0 (4 minutes).
Warning Time

Door Close Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 ignores DSM inputs, to allow for bouncing doors.
Debounce Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer. The range for this field is from 0 to 25.5 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds.
Time

Door Open Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 waits for an RTE, card admit, or momentary unlock
Grace Time signal after receiving the signal from the DSM. Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer; as soon as the door opens,
door forced open is reported. The range for this field is from 0 to 25.5 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds.

apC Door Triggers Tab Definitions

Table 121:  apC Door Triggers Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Triggers

Add Click Add in the Triggers tab to create a new trigger.

Remove
Click the row selector , then click Remove to delete a trigger.

Property Click within the Property column to display , When you select this button, the Property browser opens presenting
properties available for the controller. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column.

Value Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click on
a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.

394 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Door Definitions

apC Door Triggers Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Action Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click on an Action that you want to include as a
parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.
When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that will occur when the object’s
selected Property receives the selected Value. As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box will show a
corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action. Click to select entries for these fields. Once
the field (or group of fields) is completed, the Details column will show information about how the Action has been configured.

Details Displays details concerning the security objects that are associated with the selected Action.

Schedule Click within the Schedule column to display a drop-down list of pre-configured schedules. Click to select a Schedule that
you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software
Configuration Guide for more information.

apC Door Trigger Properties

Table 122:  apC Door Trigger Properties

Property Description

Admit Status For any one of the Admit Status values (see the Value column list) you can choose one of the following Actions to create a
Values are: Trigger:

AdmitReject Activate Event – When this status occurs and the Schedule is Active (you can choose any Schedule).

Duress Activate Event Outside Schedule – An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is Inactive (choose any
Schedule).
Noticed
Admit Activate Output – When this status occurs (only works with the Always Schedule).

Noticed Only these three Actions are supported for Admit Status.
Reject

Alarm 1. Choose a value for the Property from the Values column.
StateStatus 2. Select an Action from the Action drop-down list:
Values are: Activate Event - Select an Event to activate when this status occurs.
Forced Activate Event Outside Schedule - Select an Event to activate when this status occurs while the Schedule is inactive.
Held Open Activate Output - Select an Output to activate when this status occurs. Must use the Always Schedule.
3. Select a Schedule by clicking in the Schedule column, then click to select the Schedule that you want to associate with
the trigger.
For example, if you chose Forced as an Alarm State Status for which you want to define an action, you could then select
Activate Event. In Details, select the Event you want to activate. Then select a Schedule to determine during what time
periods you want the Forced Alarm State Status to activate an Event.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 395

apC Door Definitions

apC Door Groups Tab Definitions

Table 123:  apC Door Groups Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Groups

For more information about the use of the Toolbar buttons, see Chapter 2, “Dynamic Views” in the C•CURE 9000
Data Views Guide

Name This column displays the name entered for the group when it was configured. The selected door is a member of any
group(s) listed in this column.

Description This column displays the description entered for the group when it was configured.

apC Door Status Tab Definitions

Table 124:  apC Door apC Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Alarm Status Displays the values Normal, Forced, Held Open, or Unknown.

Admit Status Displays the values Admit, Reject Admit, Duress, Admit Visitor, Reject Visitor, Request To Exit, Reject No Escort, Reject No PIN,
Reject Not Time, Reject Unknown, Reject Unknown PIN, or Reject Duress.

Open Status Displays the values Open, Closed, or Unknown.

Mode Displays the values Locked, Unlocked, No Access, or Unknown.

apC Door State Images Tab Fields and Icons

Table 125:  apC Door State Images Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description Field/Button Description

Unknown Locked

Forced Unlocked

Held Open No Access

Open Momentary Unlock

396 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Editor

iSTAR Door Editor

You use the iSTAR Door editor to configure iSTAR Doors.

To configure a Door associated with an iSTAR controller, first you must:

■ Create an iSTAR cluster
■ Create the iSTAR controller in that cluster
■ Create the inputs, outputs and readers that are associated with the Door.

iSTAR Door Editor Tabs

The iSTAR Door Editor includes the following tabs:
■ iSTAR Door General Tab on Page 397
■ iSTAR Door Timing Tab on Page 400
■ iSTAR Door Areas & Zones Tab on Page 401
■ iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab on Page 401
■ iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab on Page 405
■ iSTAR Door Triggers Tab on Page 407
■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
■ iSTAR Door Status Tab on Page 408
■ iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab on Page 409
■ iSTAR Door Special Actions tab on Page 409
■ iSTAR Door State Images Tab on Page 409

iSTAR Door General Tab

Perform the following steps to configure a basic Door object for iSTAR Controller access control. The Door Reader buttons
and entry fields on the Door dialog box General tab, shown in Figure 115 on Page 398, allow you to specify the card readers
associated with this Door, and to configure door-specific settings for these readers.

If the first Input, Output, or Reader you assign is a Shlage Wireless I/O component, a message box
NOTE appears asking if you wish to auto-fill the remaining objects for the door. If you click Yes the remaining
objects are selected automatically. This option only appears if all of the options are blank when you assign
the first object. See iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab on Page 513 for information about Schlage Wireless
Reader I/O components.

An iSTAR Aperio Door does not have the following tabs: Areas & Zones, Double Swipe, and Door
NOTE Monitoring. Also, for Aperio Doors, some of the General tab settings are unavailable because these Inputs
and Outputs are integral to the reader and not user-selectable.

To Configure the iSTAR Door General Tab

1. Use the Identification box to enter a Name and brief Description (optional) of the door that you are configuring.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 397

iSTAR Door Editor

Figure 115:  iSTAR Door General Tab

The Controller that you have chosen to operate the door is listed in the Controller read-only field.
2. Click for the Door Switch Monitor. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Switch
Monitor, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to
the entry field (see Figure 115 on Page 398).
3. Click for the Door Lock Relay. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Lock Relay, a
browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the
entry field.
4. Click for the Alternate Shunt Relay. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Alternate
Shunt Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and
add it to the entry field.
5. Click for the Shunt Expiration Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Shunt
Expiration Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it
and add it to the entry field.
6. Click to select a reader for the Inbound Reader. A selection dialog box opens presenting a list of readers
available for the controller. Click a reader to select it and addit to the entry field.
7. Click to select a reader for the Outbound Reader. A selection dialog box opens presenting a list of readers
available for the controller. Click a reader to select it and add it to the entry field.

398 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Editor

The Secondary Inbound Reader and Secondary Outbound Reader fields only allow BLE
NOTE readers. These fields are only available for online doors and if the primary readers are
configured.

8. Click to select a reader for the Secondary Inbound Reader. A selection dialog box opens presenting a list of
readers available for the controller. Click a reader to select it and add it to the entry field.
9. Click to select a reader for the Secondary Outbound Reader. A selection dialog box opens presenting a list of
readers available for the controller. Click a reader to select it and add it to the entry field.
10. Select the Readers are Continuously Active check box to enable continuous reader activity, enabling readers to
read and process cards even when the doors associated with them are unlocked or open because of another card
access request. This mode is typically used for turnstiles or other high traffic situations that would result in
unacceptable delays if the reader went through its normal sequence of read-open-close for each cardholder.
Example:
Suppose a user swipes their card and unlocks a door. Before the door opens and closes, another person swipes his
card. If this box is checked, the system treats the second swipe as an access request. If you leave this box cleared,
the system ignores the second swipe. This feature is useful at high volume doors where you don’t want to wait for the
door to close after every access.
• "Ordinary" doors — multiple person access on each access cycle — select the Readers Are Continuously
Active check box.
• "Turnstiles" (or Mantraps) — one person access only on each access cycle — clear the Readers Are
Continuously Active check box.
Selecting this option for a Reader on an iSTAR Area Door permits the Area to be configured for Escorted Access in
Companion mode. Leaving this option unselected causes Escorted Access to operate in Remote Escort (or Turnstile)
mode.
11. Click for the Request to Exit Input. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Request to
Exit, a browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to the
entry field.
12. Select the Unlock Door on RTE check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit.
13. Select the Shunt DSM While RTE is Active check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is
Active.
14. Select the Send non-alarms input status to the host check box to instruct the system to send non-alarm input
status to the host.
Leaving the checkbox unselected (the default setting) instructs the system not to send non-alarm input status to the
host. Doing this reduces network traffic demand when expecting large volumes of non-critical activity notifications.
15. Select the Requires Manual Action Instructions check box to prompt the user to enter instructions whenever a
momentary unlock manual action is performed. The instructions must be entered before a momentary unlock manual
action can be performed. The information entered in the Instruction dialog box is displayed in the journal in the
Message Text column.
16. Select the Enable Random Screening check box to activate the Random Screening feature, which rejects a
selected percentage of card access requests.
Example:

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 399

iSTAR Door Editor

An airport has a security entrance that passengers must go through before boarding. A selected percentage of access
requests from individuals are denied for subsequent random screening. When their access request is rejected, an
event is activated. This event can be associated with an output, such as a light or buzzer which notifies the guard or
operator for further action. This feature is useful at high volume access points where random screening of personnel is
required.
To configure the Percent field, increase or decrease the percentage of card swipes randomly screened. Click to
associate this feature with an event. When you click this button selecting an event to associate with Random
Screening, a browser opens presenting a list of configured events. Select an event and add it to the field.

Random Screening is supported on the iSTAR Ultra and Ultra SE (in Ultra Mode) with firmware version
NOTE 6.5 or later.

17. Click Save and Close or navigate to the Timing tab.

iSTAR Door Timing Tab

Like the Door General tab, the layout of this tab depends upon the controller type. For an iSTAR-connected Door, Timings
are configured using separate entry fields.

Setting iSTAR Door Timing

The following timers and check boxes appear on the iSTAR Door Timing tab:
1. Delay Relock – Type the number of seconds to delay door relock after the door is opened (after a request to exit, for
example). The range in seconds is 0 to 999 seconds (0:16:39); the default is 0.
2. Shunt Time – Type the number of seconds that the door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated
within the range of 00.00.00 to 2:46:00 (2 hours and forty-six minutes), the default is 00.00.00.
3. Unlock Time – Type the number of seconds the Door remains unlocked after a valid card swipe, RTE activation, or
momentary unlock within the range of 0 to 255 seconds (0:4:15); the default is 5seconds.

A value of 0 actually represents a token unlock time (300 microseconds) that can be used, for example, to
NOTE unlock a turnstile so that one person may pass, but tailgating is not possible.
Also, a setting of 0 disables Momentary Unlock manual actions, so choose a non-zero Unlock Time if you
need to use Momentary Unlock with this Door.

4. Alternate Shunt Time – Type the number of hours, minutes, and seconds the Door can remain open before a door
held open alert is generated after a valid card swipe by a cardholder with the Alternate Shunt flag set in their
personnel record (see the C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide) within the range of default/minimum:
00:00:00; maximum: 18:00:00 (18 hours). This value is used only if it is set to a greater time than the Shunt time
value.
5. Shunt Expiration Warning Time – If set, the Shunt expiration relay is fired regardless of the shunt time used. If set
to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay will only be fired if the Alternate shunt time was used. The Shunt Expiration
Warning has a range of 0:0 to 15:0 (15 minutes).
6. Door Close Debounce Time - Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer. The range is from 0 to 25.5
seconds in units of 0.1 seconds.

400 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Editor

7. Door Open Grace Time – Also known as Door Open Debounce Time. Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is
no timer; as soon as the door opens, door forced open is reported. The range is from 0 to 25.5 seconds in units of 0.1
seconds.
8. Door Unlock Grace Time – Specifies the time that the system waits for a door open signal after the door unlock time
has expired. This timing prevents a false door forced message in situations where signals are nearly simultaneous.
The range is from 0 to 100 seconds in units of 0.1 seconds.
9. Always Use Shunt Expire Output – If this check box is selected, the Shunt expiration relay is fired regardless of the
shunt time used. If the Shunt Expiration Warning Time is set to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay shall only
be fired if the Alternate shunt time was used.
10. Delay Relock While Door Open After Valid Access - If access is valid, delays the relock of the door until the door
closes, if this check box is selected. This differs from standard relock operations, where relock occurs when the door
opens and the relock delay expires. If the door is open, the lock is energized. The C•CURE 9000 system sends an
alarm when the shunt time expires.
11. Shunt Door for full Shunt Time - If this check box is selected, the door is shunted for the full shunt time. If selected
with Delay relock while door open for valid access, the lock is energized and the door unlocked for the full shunt time,
regardless of whether the door is open or closed.

iSTAR Door Areas & Zones Tab

If this Door is assigned to an iSTAR Cluster Area and/or an iSTAR Intrusion Zone, the Areas & Zones tab displays read-
only assignment information about the Door.

If the Door is not assigned to either an iSTAR Cluster Area or Intrusion Zone, the relevant box is blank.

The Dynamic View for iSTAR Doors allows you to add a column that identifies the Intrusion Zone to which
NOTE the Doors belong.

The Areas & Zones tab has the read-only fields shown in iSTAR Door Definitions on Page 411.

iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab

In addition to the typical, single-swipe use of a card at a door's card reader, the Double Swipe tab of the Door editor
configures a door to enable its reader to interpret a double card swipe as a means to unlock the door's lock state for an
indefinite amount of time in a mode called Toggle Mode or configures the requirement of two separate personnel card
swipes to unlock a door in a mode called Two Person Mode.

Toggle Mode configures a door to enable its reader to interpret a double card swipe as a means to toggle the door’s lock
state until a subsequent double swipe resets the lock state. For example, this can be used when a guard double swipes
their card to unlock the common area door at the beginning of the day and then double swipes at the end of the day to lock
the common area door.

Two Person Mode for iSTAR Ultra hardware requires the swipe of two personnel with clearance before they can unlock a
door. This mode can be configured to require personnel card swipes from two different Personnel Groups to allow entry.
For instance, if an employee requires entrance into a restricted area, the door requires the swipe of the employee and a
supervisor to allow entry.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 401

iSTAR Door Editor

• If the door being configured is assigned a Schlage Wireless Reader, the contents of this tab are disabled because the Schlage
NOTE readers do not support this feature.
• Do not configure Toggle mode or Two Person mode on a Door that is used with Antipassback, Escort, Conditional Access,
Areas, Area Counting, or Intrusion Zone functionality.
• Toggle Mode requires iSTAR firmware version 4.3 or later for Classic, Pro, or eX.
• Two Person Mode requires version 6.5 or later for Ultra.
• The iSTAR Ultra SE does not support Two Person Mode while configured in Pro mode.
• Aperio doors do not support Two Person Mode.
• A Double Swipe to Lock or Unlock a door also may be configured to trigger an Event. This is configured on the Triggers tab (see
Using Double Swipe to Trigger an Event on Page 407).

402 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Editor

Table 126:  Fields of the Double Swipe tab

Field Description

Double Swipe Operation Mode

None If None is selected, Double Swipe is not enabled at the door. If Double Swipe is active at the door, you
may turn off Double Swipe by selecting None on this tab. Normal card swipe access at the reader is still in
effect, if so configured. This is the default setting.

Toggle Mode Selecting this option enables the Double Swipe feature. This is configured in the Permission to
cardholders section.

Two Person This option enables entry to a door only when personnel from the selected Personnel Groups both swipe
their cards. This feature is only available for the Ultra with firmware version 6.5 or later.

Permission to cardholders

With clearance Selecting this option enables the door to require that cardholders who use Double Swipe at the reader
must have a clearance for access to this particular door configured for them in the Personnel screen,
Clearances tab.

With clearance and in personnel Selecting this option will require that cardholders who use Toggle mode or Two Person mode at the
group(s) reader must have a clearance for access to this door configured for them in the Personnel screen,
Clearances tab, and they also must be in the personnel group whose members have access to this
door.

Personnel Group Click to select a personnel group. If a group is selected for Double Swipe, each cardholder who
uses Double Swipe at the reader must be a member of the selected Personnel Group. The personnel
group may be configured in the Configuration pane, Group dialog box. If selecting groups for Two
Person mode, ensure two groups are selected.

Options
NOTE: The Options section is not available when configuring the Double Swipe tab if configuring Two Person mode.

Priority (0 - 200) Select a Priority for Double Swipe requests at the door. The default is 75.
In the case of a manual action with higher priority than the priority configured for the door, the manual
action takes precedence. If the door’s priority is higher, the double swipe takes precedence. For two
actions with the same priority, the most recent one takes precedence.

NOTE: If you change the Priority setting on the Double Swipe tab while a double swipe cause is active
for the door, that cause will be removed from the cause list, and any the double swipe action is canceled.

Double Swipe Cancellation Click to select a schedule. The cancelling schedule will delete any existing double swipe causes on
Schedule the door at the start of the schedule. Any double swipe actions currently in effect will be canceled.

NOTE: This field applied to Toggle Mode only.

Configuring Toggle Mode

Follow the steps to access the door editor in the Admin application, as described in Creating a Door on Page 379.
1. In the Door editor, select the Double Swipe tab and then select the Toggle Mode radio button.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 403

iSTAR Door Editor

2. In the Permission to cardholders section, select either With clearance or With clearance and in personnel
group(s) radio button. If selecting With clearance and in personnel group(s), click to select a personnel group.
3. If required, select a priority setting in the Options section. In the case of a manual action with higher priority than the
priority configured for the door, the manual action takes precedence. If the door’s priority is higher, the double swipe
takes precedence. For two actions with the same priority, the most recent one takes precedence.
4. Click to select a Double Swipe Cancellation Schedule.

For the Monitoring Station’s Activity Viewer to display Double Swipe lock/unlock messages, the Application Layout must
have an Activity Viewer pane configured to display Double Swipe messages. The Activity Viewer pane may be added, if
needed, as described below.

Configuring Two Person Mode

Follow the steps to access the door editor in the Admin application, as described in Creating a Door on Page 379.
1. In the Door editor, select the Double Swipe tab and then select the Two Person Mode radio button.
2. Select the With clearance or With clearance and in personnel group(s) radio button depending on configuration. If
selecting With clearance, the Personnel Groups section is unavailable.
3. In the Personnel Groups section, click to select personnel groups. If a group is selected, each cardholder who
uses this feature at the reader must be a member of the selected Personnel Group. The personnel group may be
configured in the Configuration pane, Group dialog box.
4. Save and close the door editor.

For the Monitoring Station’s Activity Viewer to display Double Swipe lock/unlock messages, the Application Layout must
have an Activity Viewer pane configured to display Double Swipe messages. The Activity Viewer pane may be added, if
needed, as described below.

To Edit the Application Layout for Double Swipe

1. In the Admin application, select the Data Views pane.
2. At the top of the pane, select Application Layout from the drop-down menu, and click the green arrow. In the right-
hand pane, a new tab displays with a list of application layouts.
3. Select a layout to edit for Double Swipe messages, right click, and select Edit. The application layout screen opens.
4. To add an Activity Viewer pane, click Add Pane, and a new pane displays.
a. Click and drag the Activity Viewer icon from the left side of the application layout screen to the new pane. The
Activity Viewer dialog box displays.
b. Select the Double Swipe check box to display Double Swipe messages at the Monitoring Station. If the box is clear,
messages will not display at the Monitoring Station. By default, the Activity Viewer displays all these Message
Types.
c. Click Save and Close .
5. To edit an existing Activity Viewer pane to display Double Swipe messages at the Monitoring Station, click the
Activity Viewer tab on the pane, right click and select Properties. The Activity Viewer dialog box displays.

404 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Editor

a. Select the Double Swipe check box to display Double Swipe messages at the Monitoring Station. If the box is clear,
messages will not display at the Monitoring Station. By default, the Activity Viewer displays all these Message
Types.
b. Click Save and Close .

Using Double Swipe at the Door

To Use Double Swipe at a Card Reader:

Double Swipe is enabled by:

n the cardholder(s) having a clearance to the specific door

- or -

n the cardholder(s) having a clearance to the specific door and being a member of the personnel group, if the “With
clearance and in personnel group” option is selected on the Double Swipe tab.

The following steps describe how a double swipe at the card reader toggles the door lock, to lock or unlock the door.

To Unlock a Door if the Current State is Lock:

Cardholder swipes the card twice at the reader, within the shunt time.
If the cardholder has the correct clearance set for access to the door or has the correct clearance and is in the correct
personnel group, the door toggles to Unlock. The card reader displays the state of the door, and the door remains
unlocked until it is locked again by another double swipe, or by other causes such as manual action, scheduled
events, and so forth.
If the cardholder swipes only once, a Momentary Unlock occurs for an authorized cardholder.

To Lock a Door if the Current State is Unlock:

Cardholder swipes the card twice at the reader, within the shunt time.
If the cardholder has the correct clearance set for access to the door or has the correct clearance and is in the correct
personnel group, the door toggles to Lock. The card reader displays the state of the door, and the door remains locked
until it is unlocked by another double swipe, or by other causes such as manual action, scheduled events, and so forth.

For continuous card reader activity, make sure that the Readers are Continuously Active check box is selected in the
Readers section of the General tab.

To associate Double Swipe with a trigger to cause an event, refer to Using Double Swipe to Trigger an Event on Page 407.

iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab

The Conditional Access tab allows you to configure a door so that appropriately authorized Personnel can grant access
to Personnel without Clearance for that Door.

This tab is available on the iSTAR Doors Editor only if the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel
Downloads option in the Conditional Access box is selected on the General tab of the door's iSTAR controller editor.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 405

iSTAR Door Editor

The Conditional Access process can only be started by Personnel Credentials rejected for having no
NOTE Clearance at the door. Rejections for Lost, Stolen, Not Active, Expired, or Unknown Card or for
Antipassback, Occupancy, Lockout, or PIN cause immediate rejection.

This feature is usually used on doors into iSTAR Areas where a person inside can grant entry to the Area to personnel
lacking clearance, after validating their identities. (In the latter situation, it can also be used in conjunction with Dynamic
Area Manager. See the Areas chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Guide.)

Example:
A bank has a secure area that it uses for counting cash. Two authorized employees with clearance for the entry door
(Susan and Tom) have already entered the room and are working. A third employee without clearance (Martin) needs
to confer with them and swipes his card at the door. Since the door is configured for Conditional Access, a
Conditional Access event is activated and triggers an output inside the room, such as a flashing light or bell, to
announce that someone wants to enter. Through the glass pane in the door, Susan sees that it is Martin waiting
there. She pushes the button on the wall, activating a 'Conditional Access Response' event whose action opens the
door. Martin enters the room. (The iSTAR Area Status tab would show that there were currently a total of three
people in the area and that one of them had been admitted conditionally.)

The iSTAR Area Status tab keeps track of the number of Personnel currently in the area who were admitted via
Conditional Access. See the Areas chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Guide. The iSTAR Door Status tab
indicates whether or not Conditional Access is configured for an iSTAR door. See iSTAR Door Status Tab on Page 408.

This feature could also be used on any door to allow a guard at a Monitoring Station, with video capability to validate a
person's identity, to activate the 'Conditional Access Response' event and let that person through the door.

■ Conditional Access is only supported on doors on iSTAR Pro, eX, Edge, and Ultra Controllers.
NOTE
■ The controller must also have the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel Downloads
option in the Conditional Access box selected on the General tab. (Normally credentials for personnel
without clearance for any doors on the controller are not downloaded to the controller.)
■ Conditional Access should not be configured on a door that is used with Escort or Double Swipe
functionality.

See iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab Definitions on Page 414 for definitions of the fields on the Conditional Access
tab.

Configuring Conditional Access

To Configure Conditional Access for this iSTAR Door

1. Follow the steps to create/edit the iSTAR Pro, eX, Edge, or Ultra controller that this door will be on, as described in
Creating an iSTAR Controller on Page 127 and in Editing an iSTAR Controller on Page 132.
2. On the General tab of the iSTAR Controller editor, select the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel
Downloads option in the Conditional Access box, as described in To Configure the iSTAR Controller General Tab
on Page 151.
3. Configure the Events needed for the feature:
a. Configure a panel event for this door's controller that will act as the Conditional Access Event on the iSTAR Door
Conditional Access tab—and initiate the 'Conditional Access' process. This event should trigger an output, such as

406 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Editor

a buzzer or flashing light, that notifies appropriate personnel that someone without the requisite clearance wants to
go through this door.
b. Configure a host or panel event with the action Allow Conditional Access Cycle to be activated to open the door
conditionally.
For information, see the Events Chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide.
4. Follow the steps to access the iSTAR Door editor in the Administration application, as described in Creating a Door on
Page 379, and then open the Conditional Access tab.
5. Click for Conditional Access Schedule to select the schedule during which Conditional Access is enabled for
this door.
6. Click for Conditional Access Event to select the event that requests Conditional Access at this door for a
person without Clearance. (Only panel events within this controller's cluster are available for selection.)
7. In the Conditional Access Response Time field, enter the number of seconds that the door will wait for the 'Allow
Conditional Access Cycle' event action to open the door after the Conditional Access event entered in the preceding
field has been activated. (The range is 1 - 150 seconds with a default of 10 seconds.)
8. Click Save and Close to save the settings and close the window, or click Save and New to save the settings and
configure a new door.

iSTAR Door Triggers Tab

You can create Triggers for iSTAR Doors using the iSTAR Door Triggers tab. A Trigger executes a specified Action when
a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property selected.

See the following for information on iSTAR Triggers:

■ Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278.
■ Defining a Trigger for an iSTAR Device on Page 278.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279

Using Double Swipe to Trigger an Event

You can create a trigger to associate Double Swipe activity with the ability to activate an event on a schedule when the
door’s reader receives a double-swipe to Lock or Unlock.

To Create the Trigger for an Event

1. Navigate to the Triggers tab.
2. Click Add on the Triggers tab to create a new trigger.
3. Click within the Property column to display the browse button . A window opens, presenting the list of properties
for the door.
a. Select the Double Swipe Property to add it to the column.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 407

iSTAR Door Editor

Selecting the Reject Limit Reached property requires setting the System Variables iSTAR Driver
NOTE "Number of Consecutive Rejects Cause Event" and "Reader Consecutive Rejects Timer". Otherwise, the
default values of 0 is used. See the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide or "Consecutive Rejects
Activate an Event" on page 464 for more information.

4. Click in the Value column to display the list of Values associated with the Double Swipe Property. Select either
Locked or Unlocked as the value for the trigger and add it to the column. Do not select “Unknown” as a value because
it is not a valid option and would be ignored.
5. Click in the Action column to display a drop-down list of actions. Select Activate Event as the action for the trigger
and add it to the column. The other actions in the list are not valid for the double swipe trigger and will be ignored. The
lower pane on the Triggers tab will display an event entry field that is specific to the selected Action.
For the combination of Double Swipe Property and Locked or Unlocked Value, Activate Event is currently the only
action supported.
6. In the Event field, click to display a list of pre-configured Events. Click on an event in the list to add it to the field.
This Event will occur when the conditions of the trigger are met.
Events may be created from the Configuration pane and “Event” in the drop-down menu on the Administration
application. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information.
7. Click in the Schedule column, then click to select a Schedule to associate with the trigger. Notice that when you
click in the Schedule column, the details of the Event you selected display in the Details column. If the event has no
description entered, the Details cell will remain empty.
Schedules may be created from the Configuration pane and “Schedule” in the drop-down menu on the Administration
application.
8. Navigate to another tab or click Save and Close to save the trigger, or click Save and New to open a new door
editor.

iSTAR Door Status Tab

The Door Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected Door
including:
■ Alarm State - displays the values Normal, Forced, Held Open, or Unknown.
■ Open Status - displays the values Open, Closed, or Unknown.
■ Mode - displays the values Locked, Unlocked, No Access, or Unknown.
■ Double Swipe Lock Status - displays the values Locked, Unlocked, or Unknown.
■ Conditional Access Mode - displays the values True, False, or Unknown. (This field displays only if Conditional
Access has been enabled by selecting the Include Personnel Without Clearance in Personnel Downloads option
in the Conditional Access box on the General tab of the iSTAR Controller editor.)

Navigate to the State Images tab or click Save and Close.

408 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab

iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab

The iSTAR Door Monitoring tab lets you configure Doors with additional monitoring inputs and lock sensing equipment.
You can use this tab to integrate with third-party lock release inputs, such as fire and crash bar devices, that control
emergency exit from C•CURE 9000 doors. For more information about Door Monitoring, see Understanding Advanced
Door Monitoring on Page 422.

See Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions on Page 425 for definitions of the fields on the Door Monitoring tab.

iSTAR Door State Images Tab

The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states.

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image.
A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click the new image and select Restore Default.
4. Click Save and Close to return to the Hardware pane.

iSTAR Door Special Actions tab

You can configure Doors with Door Actions on the iSTAR Door Special Actions tab to automatically Check-in and
Check-out Visitors. You can also use the Special Actions tab to configure Doors with an Access Management actions
that creates an access request when a card swipe at a door is rejected.

For more information about Check-in and Check-out of Visitor via Visitor Management, and Access Requests via Access
Management, see the C•CURE 9000 Visitor and Access Management Guide

Configuring a Door Action for Check-In

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Administration Station, navigate to the Door you wish to configure.
2. Click the Special Actions tab.
3. Click Add Action.
4. From the Door Action drop-down list, select Check Visitors In.
5. Select the Direction for the action to take place.
• Choose In for Visitors to Check-in using an inbound reader.
• Choose Out for Visitors to Check-in using an outbound reader.
• Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-in using either the inbound or outbound reader.
6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active.
7. Select a Clearance for the Door Action.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 409

iSTAR Door Monitoring Tab

8. Click Save and Close.

Configuring a Door Action for Check-out

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Administration Station, navigate to the Door you wish to configure.
2. Click the Special Actions tab.
3. Click Add Action.
4. From the Door Action drop-down list, select Check Visitors Out.
• Check Out Visitors and Return Badge.
5. Select the Direction for the action to take place.
• Choose In for Visitors to Check-out using an inbound reader.
• Choose Out for Visitors to Check-out using an outbound reader.
• Choose In and Out for Visitors to Check-out using either the inbound or outbound reader.
6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active.
7. Click Save and Close.

Configuring a Door Action for Creating Access Requests

1. In the C•CURE 9000 navigation pane, navigate to the Door you want to configure.
2. Click the Special Actions tab.
3. Click Add Action.
4. From the Door Action dropdown, select Create Access Request.
5. Select the Direction for the action to take place.
• Select In to create an access request for an inbound reader.
• Select Out to create an access request for an outbound reader.
• Select In and Outto create an access request for an inbound or outbound reader.
6. Select a Schedule for the action to be active.
7. Select a Clearance to apply to the door.
8. Click Save and Close.

410 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Definitions

iSTAR Door Definitions

The fields and buttons are described in Table 127.
Table 127:  iSTAR Door General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Name Use the Identification box to enter a name (up to 100 characters long) and brief description of the door you are configuring.

Description A description of the door that you are configuring.

Maintenance Click to put the iSTAR door into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Location

Controller This read-only field displays the iSTAR Controller that is connected to the Door.

Hardware

Door Switch Click for the Door Switch Monitor. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Switch Monitor, a
Monitor browser opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field.

Door Lock Click for the Door Lock Relay. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Door Lock Relay, a browser
Relay opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry field.

Alternate Click for the Alternate Shunt Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Alternate Shunt
Shunt Relay Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry
field. Timing for this output is set on the iSTAR Door Timing Tab on Page 400. Cardholders with the Alternate Shunt ADA setting
enabled on the Personnel General tab (See the C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide) are granted the additional
Alternate Shunt time before a door held alarm is generated.

Shunt Click for the Shunt Expiration Relay. When you click this button to select an output to assign to the Shunt Expiration
Expiration Relay, a browser opens presenting a list of outputs available for the controller. Click an Output to select it and add it to the entry
Relay field.

Readers

Entrance Click for the Entrance Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Entrance Reader, a browser
Reader opens presenting a list of readers available for the controller. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field.

Exit Reader Click for the Exit Reader. When you click this button to select a reader to assign to the Exit Reader, a browser opens
presenting a list of readers available for the controller. Click a Reader to select it and add it to the entry field.

Readers are Select the Readers are Continuously Active check box to enable continuous reader activity.
Continuously Selecting this option for a Reader on an iSTAR Area Door permits the Area to be configured for Companion mode Escorted
Active Access. Leaving this option unselected causes Escorted Access to operate in Remote Escort (or Turnstile) mode.

Request to Exit

Request to Click for the Request to Exit. When you click this button to select an input to assign to the Request to Exit, a browser
Exit opens presenting a list of inputs available for the controller. Click an Input to select it and add it to the entry field.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 411

iSTAR Door Definitions

Table 127:  iSTAR Door General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Unlock Door Select the Unlock Door on RTE check box to unlock the door at a Request to Exit.
on RTE

Shunt DSM Select the Shunt DSM While RTE is Active check box to Shunt Door Switch Monitor While Request to Exit is Active.
While RTE is
Active

iSTAR Door Timing Tab Definitions

Table 128:  iSTAR Door Timing Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Timers

Delay Relock Type the number of seconds to delay door relock after the door is opened (after a request to exit, for example). The range in
seconds is 0:0:0 to 0:16:39 (999 seconds); the default is 0:0:0.

Shunt Time Shunt Time – type the number of seconds that the door can remain open before a door held open alert is generated within the
range of 0:0:0 to 2:46:00 (9999 seconds); the default is 0:0:10 (10 seconds).

Unlock Time Unlock Time – type the number of seconds the Door remains unlocked after a valid card swipe, RTE activation, or momentary
unlock within the range of 0:0:0 to 0:4:15 (255 seconds); the default is 0:0:5 (5 seconds).

Alternate Alternate Shunt Time – type the number of hours, minutes, and seconds the Door can remain open before a door held open
Shunt Time alert is generated after a valid card swipe by a cardholder with the Alternate Shunt flag set in their personnel record (This value
is used only if it is set to a greater time than the Shunt time value) within the range of default/minimum: 0:0:0; maximum:18:0:0
(18 hours).

Shunt If set, the Shunt expiration relay fires regardless of the shunt time used. If set to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay fires
Expiration only if the Alternate shunt time is used. The Shunt Expiration Warning has a range of 0:0:0 to 0:15:0 (15 minutes).
Warning Time

Door Close Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 ignores DSM inputs, to allow for bouncing doors.
Debounce Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer. The range is 0 - 25.5 seconds.
Time

Door Open Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 waits for an RTE, card admit, or momentary unlock
Grace Time signal after receiving the signal from the DSM. Setting this value to 0 indicates that there is no timer; as soon as the door opens,
door forced open is reported. The range is 0 - 25.5 seconds.

Door Unlock Specifies the time (in 1/10th of a second intervals) that the C•CURE 9000 waits for a door open signal after the door unlock time
Grace Time has expired. This timing prevents a false door forced message in situations where signals are nearly simultaneous. The range is
0 - 100 seconds.

Options

Always Use if this option is selected, the Shunt expiration relay is fired regardless of the shunt time used. If the Shunt Expiration Warning
Shunt Expire Time is set to 0 (the default), the Shunt expiration relay shall only be fired if the Alternate shunt time was used.
Output

412 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Definitions

Table 128:  iSTAR Door Timing Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Delay Relock If access is valid, delays the relock of the door until the door closes, if this check box is selected.
While Door This differs from standard relock operations, where relock occurs when the door opens and the relock delay expires
Open After
Valid Access If the door is open, the lock is energized. The C•CURE 9000 sends an alarm when the shunt time expires.

Shunt Door If this option is selected, the door is shunted for the full shunt time. If selected with Delay relock while door open for valid access,
for full Shunt the lock is energized and the door unlocked for the full shunt time, regardless of whether the door is open or closed.
Time

iSTAR Door Areas and ZonesTab Definitions

Table 129:  iSTAR Door Areas & Zones Tab Fields

Box/Fields Description

Areas

Entry Area Name of Area to which this Door is an ‘Access In’ Door.

Exit Area Name of Area to which this Door is an ‘Access Out’ Door.

Intrusion Zones

Intrusion Zone Name of iSTAR Intrusion Zone this Door is assigned to

Zone Direction I n indicates that this Door is assigned as an Entrance Door for the Intrusion Zone.
Out indicates that this Door is assigned as an Exit Door for the Intrusion Zone.

Display Name Displays the name you entered for this Door on the iSTAR Intrusion Zones Editor General tab.

iSTAR Door Double Swipe Tab Definitions

Table 130:  iSTAR Door Double Swipe tab definitions

Field/Button Description

Permission to Cardholders

None If this option is selected, Double Swipe is not enabled at the door. If Double Swipe is active at the door, you may turn off Double
Swipe by selecting None on this tab. Normal card swipe access at the reader is still in effect, if so configured.

With clearance Selecting this option will enable the door to require that a cardholder who uses Double Swipe also has Double Swipe clearance
configured for them in the Personnel screen, Clearances tab.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 413

iSTAR Door Definitions

Table 130:  iSTAR Door Double Swipe tab definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

With clearance Selecting this option will require that a cardholder who uses Double Swipe at the reader have a Double Swipe clearance set
and in and also be in the personnel group that may be selected in the next fields
personnel
group

Personnel Click to select a personnel group whose members may be admitted on Double Swipe as long as each member has the
group proper clearance set for them in the Personnel screen, Clearances tab.

Options

Priority Select a priority (from 0 - 200) for Double Swipe requests at the door.
In the case of a manual action with higher priority than the priority configured for the door, the manual action takes precedence.
If the door’s priority is higher, the double swipe takes precedence. For two actions with the same priority, the most recent one
takes precedence.

Double Swipe Click to select a schedule. The cancelling schedule will delete any existing double swipe causes on the door at the start of
Cancellation the time spec. Any double swipe actions currently in effect will be cancelled.
Schedule

iSTAR Door Conditional Access Tab Definitions

Table 131:  iSTAR Conditional Access Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Conditional Access Click to select the schedule during which the door is 'Conditional Access-enabled'. This can be any schedule in the
Schedule same time zone as the controller.
The iSTAR Door Status tab will indicate whether Conditional Access is enabled or not.

Conditional Access Click to select the event that requests 'Conditional Access' at this door for a person without Clearance.
Event
Only panel events within this controller's cluster are available for selection. This event cannot be the same one that
targets this door with the 'Allow Conditional Access Cycle' action—lets the person through the door.

Conditional Access Specifies the time (in seconds) that the door waits for an 'Allow Conditional Access Cycle' event action in response to
Response Time the activation of the Conditional Access event. The range is 1 - 150 seconds with a default of 10 seconds.

NOTE: You can choose to display columns on the iSTAR Door Dynamic View that indicate for a given door:
• Whether or not Conditional Access is enabled.
• The selected Conditional Access schedule, event, and response (delay) time.

414 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Definitions

iSTAR Door Triggers Tab Definitions

Table 132:  iSTAR Door Triggers Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Triggers

Add Click Add in the Triggers tab to create a new trigger.

Remove
Click the row selector , then click Remove to delete a trigger.

Property Click within the Property column to display , When you select this button, the Property browser opens presenting
properties available for the controller. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column.

Value Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click on
a Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.

Action Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click on an Action that you want to include as a
parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.
When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that will occur when the object’s
selected Property receives the selected Value. As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box will show a
corresponding entry field, or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action. Click to select entries for these fields. Once
the field (or group of fields) is completed, the Details column will show information about how the Action has been configured.

Details Displays details concerning the security objects that are associated with the selected Action.

Schedule Click within the Schedule column, then click to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules
are created in the Configuration Pane. See the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 415

iSTAR Door Definitions

iSTAR Triggers Properties

Table 133:  iSTAR Triggers Properties

Property Description

Admit Status For any one of the Admit Status, Mode Status, or Open Status values (see the Value column drop-down list) you
Admit can choose one of the following Actions to create a Trigger:

Admit Visitor Activate Event – When this status occurs and the Schedule is Active (you can choose any Schedule). You must set a
Minimum Activation Time in the Event or the actions in the Event will not activate.
Reject Visitor
Activate Event Outside Schedule – An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is Inactive
Reject (choose any Schedule).
Duress Activate Output – Activate an Output when this status occurs (only works with the Always Schedule).
Noticed Admit
Noticed Reject Pre-Admit status is a special case used to activate a panel Event on a card swipe before the door is opened. It is used
Pre-Admit with the Activate Event action to activate an Event that can, for example, change the state of an output on the
iSTAR panel.
Mode Status
Unlocked
Locked
No Access
Momentary
Unlock

Open Status
Open
Closed

Double Swipe Status For any one of the Double-Swipe Status values (see the Value column drop-down list) you can choose one of the
Locked following Actions to create a Trigger:

Unlocked Activate Event – When this status occurs and the Schedule is Active (you can choose any Schedule). You must set a
Minimum Activation Time in the Event or the actions in the Event will not activate.
Activate Event Outside Schedule – An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is Inactive
(choose any Schedule).

Alarm State Status 1. Choose a value for the Property from the Values column.
Normal 2. Select an Action from the Action drop-down list.
Forced See iSTAR Trigger Actions in Table 134 on Page 417.
Held Open 3. Select a Schedule by clicking in the Schedule column, then click to select the Schedule that you want to associate with
the trigger.
For example, if you chose Forced as an Alarm State Status for which you want to define an action, you could then select
CCTV Action if you wanted to send a command to a CCTV Switch, then in Details, select the Switch and the Command
(such as Call Up Camera) that you wanted to activate when a Forced status occurred.

416 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Definitions

iSTAR Triggers Actions

Table 134:  iSTAR Triggers Actions

Action Description

Activate Select an Event to activate when this status occurs

Event

Activate Select an Event to activate when this status occurs while the Schedule is inactive.
Event
Outside
Schedule

Activate Select an Output to activate when this status occurs. Must use the Always Schedule.
Output

Arm Event Select an Event to arm. An armed Event can be activated; a disarmed Event cannot be activated.

Arm Input Select an Input to arm. An armed Input can be activated. A disarmed Input cannot be activated.

CCTV Action Select a CCTV Action to perform by choosing a CCTV Switch and Command from the Details area, and filling in one or more
Values for the Command's parameters.

Control Select an Elevator Button which you want the Action to set for controlled access, turning on security restrictions on the use of this
Access button.

Deactivate Select an Event to be deactivated. If the Event is Active when this action occurs, the action deactivates the Event.
Event

Deactivate Select an Output to be deactivated. If the Output is Active when this action occurs, the action deactivates the Output.
Output

Disable Disable Keypad Commands on the iSTAR Reader you select in Details.

Keypad
Commands

Disable PIN Set the Reader you select to no longer require that a cardholder perform a card swipe, then enter a PIN to be granted access.

Disarm Select an Event to disarm. A disarmed Event cannot be activated; an Event must be armed to be activated.
Event

Disarm Input Select an Input to disarm. A disarmed Input cannot be activated; an Input must be armed to be activated.

Enable Set the Reader you select to accept Keypad Commands on the reader.
Keypad
Commands

Enable PIN Set the Reader you select to require that a cardholder perform a card swipe, then enter a PIN to be granted access.

Lock Door Select a Door to Lock from the Door field in the Details area.

Momentary Select a Door to Momentarily Unlock from the Door field in the Details area.
Unlock Door

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 417

iSTAR Door Definitions

Table 134:  iSTAR Triggers Actions (continued)

Action Description

Pulse Output Select an Output to activate for the duration specified in the Output's Pulse Duration field.

Secure Door Select a Door that you want to secure. A secure Door cannot be unlocked; this action disarms the reader associated with the
Door.

Send Email Send an email message to the email address specified in the Details area Recipient Email Address field. You can designate an
Event to activate if the email attempt fails. You can click the Message tab to type the text of the message and optionally choose to
send the date, time, and name of the Event triggered. For Send Email to work, you must configure the Email Server and the
Sender Email Address in Options & Tools>System Variables in the Customer Support area.

Uncontrol Select an Elevator Button which you want the Action to set for uncontrolled access, turning off security restrictions on the use of
Access this button.

Unlock Door Select a Door to unlock from the Door field in the Details area.

Video Select a Video Camera Action to perform by choosing a Video Server and Camera from the Details area Camera tab, and
Camera choosing one of the following Action Types.
Action • Record Camera lets you set a Pre Alarm Time and Post Alarm Time for retrieving recorded video.
• Camera Preset Command allows you to designate a Camera Preset to activate when this action is triggered.
• Camera Pattern Command lets you designate a Camera Pattern to activate when this action is triggered.

iSTAR Door Groups Tab Definitions

Table 135:  iSTAR Door Groups Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Groups

For more information about the use of the Toolbar buttons, see Chapter 2, “Dynamic Views” in the C•CURE 9000
Data Views Guide

Name This column displays the name entered for the group when it was configured. The selected door is a member of any
group(s) listed in this column.

Description This column displays the description entered for the group when it was configured.

iSTAR Door Status Tab Definitions:

Table 136:  iSTAR Door Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Alarm State Displays the values Normal, Forced, Held Open, or Unknown.

Open Status Displays the values Open, Closed, or Unknown.

418 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Door Definitions

Table 136:  iSTAR Door Status Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Mode Displays the values Locked, Unlocked, No Access, or Unknown.

Double Swipe Lock Status Indicates the current status of a door configured for Double Swipe access: Locked, Unlocked, or Unknown.
If the door is not configured for double swipe access, the field displays Unknown.

Conditional Access Mode Displays the values True, False, or Unknown.

iSTAR Door State Images Tab Definitions:

Table 137:  iSTAR Door State Images Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description Field/Button Description

Unknown Locked

Forced Unlocked

Held Open No Access

Open Momentary Unlock

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 10 419

iSTAR Aperio Door Editor

iSTAR Aperio Door Editor

You use the iSTAR Aperio Door editor to configure iSTAR Aperio Doors.

iSTAR Aperio Doors are created automatically when you configure and enable an iSTAR Aperio Reader (see iSTAR
Aperio Reader Editor on Page 516). You cannot manually create an iSTAR Aperio Door.

If you delete an iSTAR Aperio Door, the iSTAR Aperio Reader associated with the door is also deleted.

iSTAR Aperio Doors do not support manual actions for Lock, Unlock, and Momentary Unlock.
NOTE
You cannot create Door Groups that combine iSTAR Aperio Doors with other types of iSTAR Doors.

The iSTAR Aperio Door Editor includes the following tabs:

■ iSTAR Door General Tab on Page 397
■ iSTAR Door Timing Tab on Page 400
■ iSTAR Door Triggers Tab on Page 407
■ Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
■ iSTAR Door Status Tab on Page 408
■ iSTAR Door Special Actions tab on Page 409
■ iSTAR Door State Images Tab on Page 409

420 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 11

Chapter 11 - Configuring Advanced Door Monitoring

This chapter explains the concepts of Advanced Door monitoring, and also includes the procedures that are used to create
various types of monitored doors.

In this chapter

Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring 422

Hardware Requirements 424
Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions 425
Advanced Door Monitoring Components 427
Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations 431
Configuration Overview 437
Configuring an Advanced Door 438
Understanding Timing 445
Monitoring Door Activity 450
Understanding Door Alarms 451
Advanced Door Monitoring Details 459
Door Monitoring Screen 461
Consecutive Rejects Activate an Event 464

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 421

Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring

Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring

Advanced Doors are C•CURE 9000 doors that provide increased security for sites with complex requirements, like
airports or hospitals. Standard Doors use the Door State Monitor (DSM) to monitor for Admit Used, Admit Unused, Door
Forced and Door Held.

Advanced Doors support additional monitoring inputs and lock sensing equipment. Advanced Doors also integrate with
third-party lock release inputs, such as fire and crash bar devices, that control emergency exit from C•CURE 9000 doors.

Features
Use Advanced Door Monitoring to configure:
■ Multiple inputs – Advanced Doors provide up to 16 inputs, 14 more than on a standard door configuration.
■ More complex door configurations – including single- and double-leaf doors with multiple DSM or Request To Exit
(RTE) inputs.
■ Lock sensing devices – to monitor locking on magnetic bonds, bolts, and cams.
■ Integrated lock releases – to integrate door unlocking with fire, crash bar, power fail, and key switch inputs.
■ Special events and actions – to create keypad commands that lock, unlock, and secure doors for a specific time
period.
■ Alarm Suppression and RTE control on a per door basis.
■ Enhanced Shunt control.
■ Grace and change timing options – to fine tune C•CURE 9000 timing to avoid the effects of ‘door bounce’ and to
correct other door timing situations at the site.
■ Journal reports and Monitor Station activities – to manage the system and monitor door activity.
■ Additional Event Actions related to Advanced Doors.

422 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Understanding Advanced Door Monitoring

Example:
Figure 116 on Page 423 shows a double-leaf Advanced Door, configured into A and B sides. Each side contains a
maglock, bond sensor, and DSM input that connects to RM4 modules in a nearby junction box. Access on the
public side of the door is controlled using the public-side read head. This read head is also configured to accept
keypad commands that allow personnel to lock and unlock the door for specific time intervals. Exit from the secure
side of the door is controlled by the secure-side read head.
Locks can be released for fire alarm, crash bar, power failure, or manual key switch. Inputs from the fire pull and key
switch over-ride are shown connected to an I/8 board in the local junction box.
Figure 116:  Typical Advanced Door Configuration

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 423

Hardware Requirements

Hardware Requirements
The following guidelines apply to Advanced Doors:
■ Advanced Door monitoring is available only on iSTAR configurations.
■ Advanced Door inputs can be any mix of lock sensors, lock releases, or DSM or RTE connections.
■ Each Advanced Door supports up to 16 input connections. However, the number of available inputs per door is limited
by the number of doors in the configuration and the input capacity of the fully loaded iSTAR controller.
■ All Door components, Readers, Inputs, and Outputs, must reside on the same Controller. The table below shows that
some controllers may not have enough Inputs for the maximum configuration. In actual practice, these limits will
rarely, if ever, be reached.,
Table 138:  Maximum Inputs per iSTAR

Controller Max Max Max Inputs Result

Doors Advanced on Controller
Door Inputs

iSTAR Ultra 16 16 x 16 = 256 336 Adequate Inputs

iSTAR Pro 16 16 x 16 = 256 192 - 64 Inputs

iSTAR eX 8 Door 8 8 x 16 = 128 96 - 32 Inputs

iSTAR eX 4 Door 4 4 x 16 = 64 88 Adequate Inputs

iSTAR Edge 4 Door 4 4 x 16 = 64 64 Adequate Inputs

iSTAR Edge 2 Door 2 2 x 16 = 32 32 Adequate Inputs

iSTAR Edge 1 Door 1 1 x 16 = 16 4 - 12 Inputs

■ Advanced Doors support the same number and types of outputs as standard doors—which are as follows:
• Door Latch Relay (1)
• Alternate Shunt (ADA) Relay (1)
• Shunt Expiration warning Relay (1)

424 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions

Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions

New Definitions, Acronyms, and Abbreviations

■ Lock Sensor - An input that monitors the state of the lock on a door. This is not the same as the Door Switch Monitor
(DSM) that monitors whether the door is physically open or closed.
• Bond Sensor - A type of lock sensor input that monitors the condition of a magnetic lock on door. A normal bond
sensor input will be active when the door is unlocked (meaning that the door latch relay is active), regardless of
whether the door is open or closed, but will also be active when the door is open, regardless of whether the door is
unlocked or not unlocked. In other words, it should be active when the door is unlocked and/or when the door is
open. The bond sensor should not be active when the door is closed and locked.
• Cam Detector - A type of lock sensor input that monitors the condition of the cam on an electric strike on a door. A
normal cam detector input will be active when the door is unlocked. The Cam detector should not be active when
the door is locked.
• Latch Bolt Detector - A type of lock sensor input that monitors the condition of a latch bolt on an electric strike on
a door. A normal latch bolt will be active or inactive while the door is unlocked, and will be active when the door is
open. The latch bolt should not be active when the door is closed and locked.
■ Lock Release Device - A external device that may unlock a door that is also controlled by the access control system.
Indication that the lock release device is active will be supplied through an input.
• Fire Alarm Lock Release - An input that indicates that the fire alarm system has unlocked the door.
• Crash Bar Lock Release - An input that indicates that the door has been unlocked by local crash bar / panic
hardware.
• Key Switch Lock Release - An input that indicates that the door has been unlocked by local key switch override.
• Power Fail Lock Release - An input that indicates that the door has been unlocked by a lock release device
because of power fail.

Lock Sensor States

Table 139 on Page 425 indicates operational differences in the Lock Sensors.

0 = False or Not Active

1 = True or Active
Table 139:  Lock Sensor States

Door and Lock State DSM Bond Cam Latch Bolt

Sensor Detector Detector

1. Door Closed and Locked 0 0 0 0

2. Door Closed and Unlocked 0 1 1 1

3. Door Open and Unlocked 1 1 1 1

4. Door Open and Locked 1 1 0 1

1. When the door is Closed and Locked, none of the sensors are active.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 425

Advanced Door Monitoring Definitions

2. When the door is Closed and Unlocked, all of the sensors are active except for the DSM because the Door is still
closed.
3. When the door is Open and Unlocked, all of the sensors are active including the DSM because the Door is now open.
4. When the door is Open and Locked, all of the sensors are active except for the Cam Detector because the Door is
Locked.

In this case, the Latch Bolt Detector is active because the door is Locked. When the Latch Bolt Detector is active,
along with the door being open, there is a possibility of damaging the door frame. The Latch Bolt lock is like a dead bolt
in that the bolt is extended when the door is locked.

426 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Advanced Door Monitoring Components

Advanced Door Monitoring Components

In addition to standard door components, Advanced Doors support:
■ Lock sensor devices
■ Lock release devices
■ Alarms based on lock sensor, lock release, and multiple DSM inputs to the C•CURE 9000
■ Expanded Door Triggers
■ Expanded Event Actions

Lock Sensor Devices

A lock sensing device monitors the state of a door lock.

Table 140 on Page 427 shows the types of lock sensing devices that can be configured on an Advanced Door.
Table 140:  Lock Sensing Devices

Lock Sensing Device Function

Bond sensor Monitors the condition of a magnetic lock on a door.

Cam detector Monitors the condition of the cam on an electric strike on a door.

Latch bolt detector Monitors the condition of a latch bolt on an electric strike on a
door.

Lock Release Devices

A lock release device is a third-party device that controls door unlock activities. Lock release devices operate
independently from C•CURE 9000 and function even if the C•CURE system is not running.

To inter-operate, the lock release device has an output, called a lock release input, that is input to the C•CURE 9000. The
C•CURE 9000 uses the lock release input to:
■ Monitor the lock release activities on a door
■ Monitor lock sensor activity
■ Decide if an open door is reported as door forced open, door open, or door open by one of the lock release inputs.

Table 141 on Page 427 and Figure 117 on Page 428 show the types of lock release devices that can be configured on an
Advanced Door.
Table 141:  Lock Release Devices

Lock Release Device Function

Crash bar lock release Input to C•CURE 9000 from crash bar or panic hardware

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 427

Advanced Door Monitoring Components

Lock Release Devices (continued)

Lock Release Device Function

Key override switch lock Input to C•CURE 9000 from a key override switch
release

Power failure lock release Input to C•CURE 9000 from power fail hardware

General Lock Release Input to C•CURE 9000 from a Fire Alarm System or iSTAR.

Fire alarm lock release Input to C•CURE 9000 from a Fire Alarm System

Figure 117:  Lock Release Devices in the Door Monitoring Tab

Expanded Door Inputs

In addition to the Lock Sensors, there are also additional inputs for multiple DSMs and RTEs as shown in Figure 118 on
Page 428.
Figure 118:  Expanded Door Inputs in the Door Monitoring Tab

428 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Advanced Door Monitoring Components

Advanced Door Alarms

Table 142 on Page 429 and Figure 119 on Page 429 show the alarm operations available for Advanced Doors. Each alarm
reports the name of the input (lock sensor, lock release device, DSM) that caused the alarm.
Table 142:  Advanced Door Alarms

Alarm Description

Door Open Door opens without valid card or RTE, and one of the lock release devices is active.

Lock Unsecured A lock sensor activates when it should be inactive. Indicates that the hardware failed to return to the
locked position after a valid lock release.

Lock Tamper A lock sensor is inactive when it should be active. Indicates lock tampering while the door is open, or
failure of lock hardware.

DSM Tamper For doors with multiple DSM devices on a single side. Indicates that one DSM changed state, and
that the corresponding change did not occur to other DSMs devices on the same side of the door.

Expanded Door Triggers

There are four additional Door Triggers for Advanced Doors Alarms in the triggers Tab.
Figure 119:  Additional Door Triggers

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 429

Advanced Door Monitoring Components

Expanded Event Actions

In addition to the Triggers on the Door, there are seven pairs of actions that toggle the allowance of the various alarms,
including Door Held, Door Forced, and RTE Functions. Associate an iSTAR door with each entry. Door Groups are not
supported.
Figure 120:  Expanded Event Actions

430 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations

Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations

Advanced Doors support configurations that include multiple RTE and DSM inputs. These are described in the following
sections.

Multiple RTE Configurations

Multiple RTE devices are typically configured to:
■ Provide tight security screens
■ Increase coverage over wide areas

Configuration Guidelines
You must specify the first RTE in the Request to Exit field of the Configure Door dialog box. This activates other
request to exit options on the Configure Door dialog box. Specify additional RTEs by adding them on the Configure
Advanced Door Monitoring dialog box.

To Display the Configure Door Dialog Box

■ Select Hardware Pane >Cluster>iSTAR>Doors>Door Name

To Display the Configure Advanced Door Monitoring Dialog Box

■ Select Hardware Pane >Cluster>iSTAR>Doors>Door Name>Door Monitoring

If a door has multiple RTEs and is configured to shunt the DSM while RTE is active, the C•CURE 9000
NOTE will shunt the DSM when any RTE on the door is active.

Figure 121:  Door Editor - Door Monitoring Tab

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 431

Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations

Figure 122:  Door Editor General Tab

Multiple DSM Configurations

Multiple DSM configurations are used for double-leaf doors (side by side), and also to provide a tighter security screen (top
and bottom). The following sections describe typical multiple DSM configurations.

Single-leaf Doors (DSM top and bottom)

Figure 123 on Page 433 shows a single-leaf door with a DSM at the top and bottom. C•CURE 9000 uses the following to
determine door state:
■ If the door is closed, with both DSMs inactive, and then a DSM activates, the door state is open.
■ If either DSM is active, the door state is open. If both DSMs are inactive, the door state is closed.

All DSMs on a single side must activate and deactivate together. If the DSMs do not activate together, C•CURE 9000
issues a DSM Tamper alarm and identifies the DSM that did not change state.

432 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations

Figure 123:  Single-leaf Door with DSM Top and Bottom

Double- Leaf Doors (DSM each side)

Figure 124 on Page 434 shows a double-leaf door with a DSM on side A and another on side B. C•CURE 9000 uses the
following to determine door state:
■ If either DSM is active, the door state is open
■ If both DSMs are inactive, the door state is closed.

Because double-leaf door configurations with one DSM per side are designed to operate with one leaf open and the other
leaf closed, C•CURE 9000 does not issue DSM tamper alarms for this configuration.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 433

Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations

Figure 124:  Double-leaf Door with DSM on Each Side

Double-leaf Doors (DSM top and bottom)

Figure 125 on Page 435 shows a double-leaf door with a DSM at the top and bottom of both side A and side B. C•CURE
9000 uses the following to determine door state:
■ If the side is closed, and a DSM activates, the side is open
■ If the side is open, and a DSM de-activates, the side is closed
■ If either side is open, the door is open
■ If both sides are closed, the door is closed

All DSMs on a single side must activate and deactivate together. If the DSMs do not activate together, the C•CURE 9000
issues a DSM Tamper alarm and identifies the DSM that did not change state.

434 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations

Figure 125:  Double-leaf Door with DSM Top and Bottom of Each Side

DSM Configuration Guidelines

You can configure DSM inputs in the Door Switch Monitor field on the Configure Door dialog box, or by adding them on
the configure Door Monitoring dialog box.

If you specify a DSM in the Door Switch Monitor field of the Configure Door dialog box, C•CURE 9000 uses that input
as the DSM for side A of the door. DSM inputs that are added using the configure Door Monitoring dialog box can be
either A or B side.

Unlike multiple RTEs, you do not have to use the General Tab for DSM 1. Although the examples show two DSMs and two
RTEs, it is possible to have more than two of each.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 435

Advanced Door Monitoring Configurations

Figure 126:  Multiple DSM Configuration

436 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuration Overview

Configuration Overview
Although Advanced Door configuration procedures vary based on site requirements, most configurations involve the tasks
and activities described in Table 143.

Table 143:  General Configuration Procedure

Task Configuration Dialog Box Description Additional Information

1. Configure Hardware Pane > Cluster > Configure inputs, readers, and outputs See Configuring RM4-1 and
Monitoring Controller > Boards > 1st on the iSTAR controller using standard RM4-2 Reader, Inputs, and
Inputs, ACM/2nd ACM procedures and dialog boxes. Output on Page 438
Readers, and
Outputs.

2. Configure Hardware Pane > Cluster > Configure lock release components on See Configuring Lock
Lock Releases Controller > Boards > 1st the iSTAR controller using standard Releases on the I/8 on Page
ACM/2nd ACM controller configuration procedures 441
and dialog boxes.

See Annunciating Lock

Specify how C•CURE 9000 Releases Inputs on Page 441
annunciates the lock release inputs.

3. Configure Hardware Pane > Cluster > Configure the first RTE and the door See Configuring the
the Advanced Controller > Doors > Door Name latch relay using the standard Door Advanced Door on Page 442
Door dialog box (required). You can also use
the Door dialog box to configure the
DSM for side A.
Hardware Pane > Cluster >
Controller > Doors > Door Name Add additional components using the
> Door Monitoring Configure Advanced Door
Monitoring dialog box.

4. Configure Hardware Pane > Cluster > Specify timing requirements for unlock See Understanding Timing on
Grace and Controller > Doors > Door Name grace timers. Also specify the change Page 445
Change Time > Door Monitoring time options for individual door
parameters components, and for door shunts.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 437

Configuring an Advanced Door

Configuring an Advanced Door

This section provides step-by-step configuration information for a sample Advanced Door configuration.

Sample Door
The configuration for this example, shown in Figure 127 on Page 438, is a double-leaf door with multiple read heads, lock
sensors, DSMs, and lock release inputs.
Figure 127:  Door Configuration Example

Configuring RM4-1 and RM4-2 Reader, Inputs, and Output

Configuring RM4 inputs for the door in Figure 127 on Page 438 involves using standard controller configuration procedures
to configure the monitoring inputs, door latch relays, and read heads for A and B sides of the door. This is detailed in the
following procedure.

438 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring an Advanced Door

To Configure RM4 (RS-485) Inputs for the Sample Configuration

1. From the main menu, select Hardware Pane > Cluster > Controller. From the iSTAR Controller Selection
browser, select the name of the iSTAR that includes Advanced Door components, and select Edit.
2. Select the tab that includes the inputs to be configured. This will vary, depending on the iSTAR model. In some cases
you will have to first select the ACMn board and a Port.
The RM Readers are configured under the following Tabs:
■ iSTAR Ultra - Boards > ACM 1 or 2> RS-485 Port> Reader Port > Readers
■ iSTAR Pro - Boards > ACM 1 or 2> Readers
■ iSTAR Edge - COM1 or COM2 or COM3 > Readers
■ iSTAR eX - COM1 or COM2 > Readers
To configure the inputs for side A in Figure 127 on Page 438 (on RM 1), create an RM Reader.

Software House recommends that the Communication failure option be configured for all security
NOTE devices that connect to the iSTAR. Select the I/O Tab from the Reader Editor, to configure this option.

3. In the General tab of the Reader Editor enter the following:

• Name - the name of the reader
• Enabled - activated
4. Go to the I/O Tab
5. In the Inputs box, select an input and configure it. Enter at least the following:
■ Name - the name of the input
■ Enabled - check box checked
■ Send State changes to Monitoring Station (and Journal)
■ Armed - check box checked. It’s good practice to Arm Inputs, but if the Input is a door component, it will be
automatically armed.
To configure the inputs for the example in Figure 127 on Page 438, enter information for DSM side A and the Magnetic
Bond Sensor.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 439

Configuring an Advanced Door

Figure 128:  iSTAR Input DSM side A

6. Click OK and Close.

7. Repeat step 5 to configure the Bond Sensor Input.

For consistency, Advanced Doors that include more than one instance of the same input (two
NOTE DSMs, for example) should use a naming convention that indicates the area of the door that the
device monitors.

Example:
DSM-Lobby-sideA.

8. In the Outputs box, select an output and configure it. Enter at least the following:
■ Name - the name of the output

440 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring an Advanced Door

■ Enabled - check box checked

■ Normally energized - activated or de-activated, depending on site requirements. Magnetic Locks are usually
Normally Energized.
To configure the outputs for the example in Figure 127 on Page 438, enter information for the magnetic lock output.
Figure 129:  Reader I/O Tab

9. Click Save and Close until you return to the Controller editor.
10. Repeat steps 1 through 7 to configure the RM4-2 for the B side of the door.

Configuring Lock Releases on the I/8

Configuring lock releases for the door in Figure 127 on Page 438 involves using standard controller configuration
procedures.

You must also specify how C•CURE 9000 annunciates the lock release inputs. For configuration guidelines, see the next
section.

Annunciating Lock Releases Inputs

If the lock release input is configured to annunciate, C•CURE 9000 reports input activation and de-activation. Annunciation
of inputs has no impact on door actions or lock release operations.

To reduce message traffic, most configurations will choose to annunciate lock release inputs to test or troubleshoot the
system, but will not annunciate them for normal door operations.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 441

Configuring an Advanced Door

To Configure Lock Releases for the Sample Configuration

1. From the main menu, select Hardware>Cluster>Controller. Right-click the iSTAR that includes lock release
components and then Edit from the context menu.
2. Select the tab that includes the I/8 to be configured. This will vary, depending on the iSTAR model. In some cases you
will have to first select the ACM board and a Port.
The I/8 boards are configured under the following Tabs:
■ iSTAR Ultra - Boards > ACM 1 or 2> RS-485 Port> ACM Ext > I/8 >Input
■ iSTAR Pro - Boards > ACM 1 or 2> ACM Ext > I/8 >Input
■ iSTAR Edge - COM1 or COM2 or COM3 > I/8 >Input
■ iSTAR eX - COM1 or COM2 > I/8 >Input
3. On the I/8 Editor, select an input and click Edit.
4. On the Input Editor, enter at least the following:
■ Name - the name of the input
■ Enabled - check box checked
■ Armed - check box checked
■ Send state changes to monitoring station - activated (includes sending to the journal) or deactivated,
according to the site requirements
■ Send state changes to journal - Read only. Will be activated if Send state changes to Monitoring station is true.
5. Click Save and Close. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to configure additional inputs.
Figure 130:  I/8 Inputs for Sample Door

6. Click Save and Close until you return to the main menu.

Configuring the Advanced Door

Configuring the Advanced Door involves adding door components using both the standard Door editor and the Door
Monitoring Tab editor.

To Configure the Advanced Door in the Sample Configuration:

1. From the Hardware Pane, right click on iSTAR to Configure>Door and select New. Or select an existing door in the
controller to edit.
2. On the iSTAR Door Editor, click the General Tab and enter at least the following:
■ Door has RTE - the name of RTE input (if required by the door)
■ Door switch monitor - the name of the side A DSM input
■ Door latch relay - the name of the door latch relay output
■ Optional - Send non-alarm input status to the host. Similar to input annunciation, this will increase traffic but it is a
good mode to understand Advanced Doors.

442 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring an Advanced Door

3. Enter the Readers for the Inbound and Outbound reader fields.
4. Click Save and Close until you return to the main menu.

To configure the door in Figure 131 on Page 443, enter the name of the side A DSM and the door latch relay. The sample
door uses a read head instead of an RTE. However, doors that use one or more RTE devices must configure the first RTE
on the Door Editor.
Figure 131:  Sample Door

5. Select the Door Monitoring tab.

6. To add door components:
a. Select Add Input and pick the appropriate input to add to the Input list.
7. To specify component type:
a. In the Input list box, select an input.
b. Click on the Type field and use the drop-down list to select the component’s type.
To configure components and types in Figure 132 on Page 444, add inputs for the key override, fire pull, A and B side
bond sensors, and B side DSM. Specify the component type for each of the corresponding inputs. This field is
required.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 443

Configuring an Advanced Door

8. Click Save and Close.

Figure 132:  Door Monitoring

444 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Understanding Timing

Understanding Timing

Time Delays
Use timing options to prevent false alerts caused by nearly simultaneous inputs to C•CURE 9000, and also to fine tune
timing to meet specialized door and site requirements.

In addition to the normal door de-bounce and grace times, on the Timing Tab, there are seven other timing tweaks that are
used to avoid race conditions. The Timers default to zero but it is good practice to set them all at 0.2 or 0.3, and then
adjust, as necessary. See Figure 133 on Page 445.

Since input changes cannot occur simultaneously, and if almost simultaneous may be read by our hardware in any order,
some input change time values are provided. This change time will be used whenever one of the inputs changes, to allow
the system to wait and see if any of the normally accompanying inputs is also going to change.

For example, every time the door is open (meaning the DSM input is active), the latch bolt or bond sensor input should also
be active. Therefore, every time the door opens, if the input is not already active, a timer will be started with the value of the
lock sensor change value. If the timer times out without the lock sensor input activating, then a Lock Tamper alarm will be
reported. Then when the door closes and locks, this time value will be the time we allow the lock sensor input to change
from active to secure before reporting Lock Unsecured.

Use the Timers box on the Configure Advanced Door Monitoring dialog box to fine tune timing delays for Advanced
Door components.

To Display the Configure Advanced Door Monitoring Dialog Box

■ Select Door>Door Monitoring tab.
Figure 133:  Timers

Kinds of Timing Options

C•CURE 9000 includes timing options that provide:
■ Grace times - a wait period that prevents false alerts caused by door open, door unlock, and door bouncing inputs.
■ Change times - a wait period that defines the amount of time allowed for changes in input states. Change times are
used with timing values from other door inputs to define how long C•CURE 9000 waits before issuing lock tamper or
lock unsecure alarms.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 445

Understanding Timing

■ Shunt /Delay Relock times - a wait period that defines the number of seconds the door can remain open before
relock or before an alert is sounded.

Grace Time Options

Table 144 on Page 446 describes grace time options.
Table 144:  Grace Timing Options

Option Description Example

Unlock Grace Time Specifies the time that C•CURE 9000 waits for a Personnel who are granted card access delay
door open signal after the door unlock timer has opening a door until unlock time is nearly expired,
expired. thereby causing nearly simultaneous DSM and
Prevents a false “door forced” message in unlock timer expiration inputs to C•CURE 9000.
situations where the signals are nearly If configured, C•CURE 9000 waits the number of
simultaneous. seconds you specify for a door open input, thereby
preventing a false “door forced open” message.

Door Open Grace Time Specifies the time that C•CURE 9000 waits for Personnel lean on a door release mechanism while
an RTE, card admit, or momentary unlock signal pressing the RTE switch, causing nearly
after receiving the signal from the DSM. simultaneous door open and RTE inputs to
Prevents a false “door forced open” message in C•CURE 9000.
situations where signals are nearly If configured, C•CURE 9000 waits the number of
simultaneous. seconds you specify for the RTE, card admit, or
For additional information, see Special Timing momentary unlock signal, thereby preventing a
Considerations on Page 448. false “door forced open” message.

Door Close De-bounce Time Specifies the time that C•CURE 9000 ignores Unintended door movement (bouncing) can
DSM inputs, to allow for bouncing doors. activate a DSM input to C•CURE 9000 and cause
false “door forced open” messages.
If configured, the Door close de-bounce time option
ignores DSM inputs for the time specified after the
door closes to allow for bouncing doors.

Change Time Options

C•CURE 9000 determines change time based on the door components you have configured (DSM, RTE, lock releases,
for example) and the door operation (card access, RTE access, door forced, for example).

446 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Understanding Timing

Change time is specified in units of 1/10 second. Enter 1 to specify 1/10 second, 5 to specify 5/10 (1/2)
NOTE second and so forth.
Software House recommends that you set all change times to at least 5/10 second and make
adjustments only as necessary.

Table 145 on Page 447 describes how change time options work for lock releases, lock sensors, and DSM and RTE
devices.
Table 145:  Change Timing Options

Option Function Associated Inputs Activation Criteria

Crash bar Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the crash bar Activated by the bond sensor, latch bolt,
change time 9000 allows, after a crash bar state change time to determine changes to or cam sensor.
change, for a lock sensor change corresponding:
• Bond sensors
• Latch bolts
• Cam sensors

Bond sensor Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the greatest The bond sensor should be active if:
change time 9000 allows for a bond sensor state value of the following: • Door is open
change. • Door open grace time • Door latch relay is active
C•CURE 9000 uses this time, and the • Door close de-bounce time
time of the other door inputs, to • Lock release input(s) are active
determine the wait before issuing a • Crash bar change time The bond sensor should be inactive
“lock tamper” or “lock unsecure” alarm. • Bond sensor change time when:
• RTE change time • Latch relay is inactive, the door is
closed, and the lock release inputs
are inactive

Latch bolt Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the greatest The latch bolt should be active if the
change time 9000 allows for a latch bolt state value of the following: door is open.
change. • Door open grace time The latch bolt should be inactive if:
C•CURE 9000 uses this time, along • Door close de-bounce time • Door is closed
with the time of the other door inputs, to
determine the wait before issuing a • Crash bar change time • Door latch relay is inactive
“lock tamper” or “lock unsecure” alarm. • Latch bolt change time • Lock release inputs are inactive
• RTE change time The latch bolt can be active or inactive if:
• Door latch relay is active
• Lock release input(s) are active

Cam sensor Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the greatest The cam sensor should be active if:
change time 9000 allows for a cam sensor state value of the following: • Door latch relay is active
change. • Crash bar change time • Lock release input(s) are active
C•CURE 9000 uses this time, along • Cam sensor change time
with the time of the other door inputs, to The cam sensor should be inactive if the
determine the wait before issuing a • RTE change time door latch relay is inactive and all lock
“lock tamper” or “lock unsecured” releases are inactive
alarm.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 447

Understanding Timing

Table 145:  Change Timing Options (continued)

Option Function Associated Inputs Activation Criteria

DSM side A Specifies the amount of time C•CURE Additional DSM inputs on the same DSM change time is active when the first
change time 9000 allows for a DSM state change. door side DSM in a group changes state. (DSMs
- or - C•CURE 9000 uses this value to must be located on the same side of the
determine the wait period before door).
DSM side B
change time activating a DSM tamper for multiple
DSM devices on one side of the door.

RTE change Specifies the amount of time C•CURE C•CURE 9000 uses the RTE change Activated by the bond sensor, latch bolt,
time 9000 allows, before or after an RTE time to determine changes to or cam sensor.
state change, for a lock sensor change. corresponding:
For additional information, see "Special • Bond sensors
Timing Considerations" below • Latch bolts
• Cam sensors

Shunt Time Options

Table 146 on Page 448 describes options that control shunt time.
Table 146:  Shunt Time Options

Option Description

Delay relock while door open after valid access If access is valid, delays the relock of the door until the door closes. This differs from
standard relock operations where relock occurs when the:
• Door opens.
• Door opens and the relock delay expires.
If the door is open, the lock is energized.
C•CURE 9000 sends an alarm when the shunt time expires.

Shunt door for full shunt time Activates the shunt for the full time specified.
If selected with Delay relock while door open after valid access, the lock is
energized and the door unlocked for the full shunt time, regardless of whether the door
is open or closed.

Special Timing Considerations

Sites that use an RTE motion detector angled over a door can cause C•CURE 9000 to report a valid RTE that is caused by
door motion, instead of a forced open alarm. This situation occurs because of a race condition in which the RTE caused by
forced motion on the door reports to C•CURE 9000 before the DSM, thereby causing C•CURE 9000 to execute a valid exit
instead of a door forced alarm.

You can correct the situation by:

■ Repositioning door hardware – adjust the position of any RTE motion detectors angled over doors. You should also
replace any slow DSM components that may be contributing to the problem.

448 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Understanding Timing

■ Adjusting the timing of door components – use the RTE change time option to specify timing for incoming traffic
and also to change the function of the Door open grace time option.

The RTE change time option specifies the amount of time that C•CURE 9000 ignores RTE inputs after the door is closed.
Use this value to prevent false door forced reports caused by door components (slow bolts or sensors, bouncing door, for
example) for outgoing traffic.

The RTE change time option also changes the function of the Door open grace time option. If you specify a value for
RTE change time, the Door open grace time option now specifies the time C•CURE 9000 ignores RTE changes before
the door open occurs. This prevents RTE signals from the motion detector that are caused by door mechanics rather than
human access. If C•CURE 9000 sees an RTE on a closed door, and then sees the door open within the period you
specify, it cancels the RTE and issues a door forced alarm.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 449

Monitoring Door Activity

Monitoring Door Activity

You can monitor Advanced Door activities using:
■ Door, alarm, and show cause features on the Monitoring Station
■ Journal reports from the Administration application

Using Monitoring Station Commands

To Display Information about Alarms, Alarm Causes, and Door Component Status
1. Select Doors from the Non-Hardware Pane on the Monitoring Station Explorer Bar.
2. Right click on a Door and select Door Monitoring.
3. Use Door Monitoring to Show Locked Causes and various Alarm States.
4. Door Monitor Inputs are also shown at the top of the Door Monitoring Editor. Right click on an input for further context
menu options.

Using Journal Reports

To Display Journal Messages about Advanced Doors

1. From the Administration application, select Options & Tools.
2. Select Journal
3. Enter a range for Start date/time and End date/time.
4. Use the Journal Query Assistant to select:
■ Object Changed State Message Type
■ iSTAR Doors Object Type
■ Door Name(s)
■ You can also use Journal Triggers to get detailed information.

450 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Understanding Door Alarms

Understanding Door Alarms

Alarms
This section describes how C•CURE 9000 manages alarm traffic and contradictory component reports that can
sometimes accompany Advanced Door configurations.

Door Open Alarm - this alarm occurs whenever the door opens without benefit of card or request to exit access, and one
of the lock release devices is active. This alarm indicates that some kind of emergency unlock is occurring. The alarm
message includes the name of the lock release device as the reason for the door open alarm. In the case that none of the
lock release devices is active, this is a normal door forced open alarm.

Lock Unsecured Alarm - this alarm occurs whenever a lock sensor is active when it should be inactive. This indicates
that the lock hardware failed to return to locked position after being unlocked by one of the lock release devices or by
regular door control. The alarm message includes the name of the lock sensor input that caused the alarm.

Lock Tamper Alarm - this alarm occurs whenever one of the lock sensors is inactive when it should be active. This is
whenever one of the lock release devices is active or the door latch relay has been activated by the door or the DSM
indicates that the door is open. This may indicate that someone is tampering with the lock sensor while the door is opening
or that the lock hardware has failed. The alarm message includes the name of the lock sensor input that caused the alarm.

DSM Tamper Alarm - this alarm is reported if multiple DSM inputs monitor the same door and one of them does not
become active when it should. The alarm message includes the name of the input that is not active.

New Activity / Journal Reports

New door activity reports will be added:
■ Lock Tamper Alarm (reported with input name indicating which input caused the lock tamper alarm condition)
■ Lock Unsecured Alarm (reported with input name indicating which input caused the lock unsecured alarm condition)
■ Door Open Alarm (reported with input name indicating which input caused the door open alarm condition)
■ DSM Tamper Alarm (reported with input name indicating which input caused the DSM tamper alarm condition)

Managing Message Traffic

To reduce the redundant door open, lock tamper, DSM tamper, and lock unsecured alarms generated by multiple inputs on
Advanced Doors, C•CURE 9000 reports Monitoring Station and journal activity only when the alarm changes from an
inactive to an active state. Additional inputs to the same alarm are not reported. C•CURE 9000 also clears the alarm only
when all inputs deactivate.

The example in Figure 134 on Page 453 shows the General Activity Monitor for a simplified door that includes two bond
sensor inputs and a DSM. The following actions occurred:
1. Door closed (no inputs inactive).
2. Card admitted, door open (DSM activates, bond sensor 1 activates as expected, bond sensor 2 does not activate).
3. Door Lock unsecured reported (bond sensor 1).
4. Bond sensor 1 deactivates while the door is open, causing a second input to the lock tamper alarm.
C•CURE 9000 does not display an additional alarm report for bond sensor 2 on the General Activity window.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 451

Understanding Door Alarms

5. Door closed (DSM deactivates).

452 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Understanding Door Alarms

Figure 134:  General Activity Alarm Reports Example

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 453

Understanding Door Alarms

454 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Understanding Door Alarms

Figure 135 on Page 455 shows the Monitoring Status for the example door activities. C•CURE 9000 reports the first lock
tamper (bond sensor 2) and does not clear the alarm. The second lock tamper (bond sensor 1) on the same door does not
display on the General Activity Monitor.
Figure 135:  General Activity Alarms Reports Example

Clearing Alarms
Advanced Door alarms may occasionally appear “stuck” because C•CURE 9000 waits for the input to change state before
clearing the alarm. This is to reduce unnecessary alarm traffic. If all inputs are functioning properly, you can clear all door
and input alarms by performing a normal door access cycle (opening and closing the door).

Door Triggers
In addition to the usual five Door Triggers:
■ Admit Status - Admit, Reject, Noticed Admit, Noticed Reject, Duress
■ Double Swipe Status - Locked, Unlocked
■ Mode Status - Unlocked, Locked, No Access
■ Open Status - Open, Closed
■ Alarm State Status - Normal, Forced, Held Open

There are four additional Advanced Door Triggers shown in Figure 136 on Page 456.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 455

Understanding Door Alarms

Figure 136:  Advanced Door Triggers

Privilege Modifications

iSTAR Door Permission list

■ Enable Door forced alarms
■ Disable Door forced alarms
■ Enable Door held alarms
■ Disable Door held alarms
■ Enable RTE functions
■ Disable RTE functions

456 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Understanding Door Alarms

■ Enable Lock Tamper alarms

■ Disable Lock Tamper alarms
■ Enable Lock Unsecured alarms
■ Disable Lock Unsecured alarms
■ Enable Door Open Tamper alarms
■ Disable Door Open Tamper alarms
■ Enable DSM Tamper alarms
■ Disable DSM Tamper alarms
■ Door Monitoring Details

Reports
A standard iSTAR Door Report can be used to list all of the Advanced Door components.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 457

Understanding Door Alarms

Figure 137:  iSTAR Door Report

458 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Advanced Door Monitoring Details

Advanced Door Monitoring Details

If you have Advanced Door Monitoring, additional selections are displayed on the Door context menu from a Dynamic
View or a Monitoring Station Status List of Doors. 

Each of these selections let you initiate a Manual Action to enable or disable the selected function.

See Viewing a List of Doors on Page 381 for more information about the context menu for Doors.

Advanced Door Monitoring has 7 Cause List type states, and 14 possible manual actions that may be associated with
these:
■ RTE enable/disable,
■ door forced alarm enable/disable,
■ door held open alarm enable/disable,
■ door open alarm enable/disable,
■ lock tamper alarm enable/disable,
■ lock unsecured alarm enable/disable,
■ DSM tamper alarm enable/disable.

Enter the Door Monitoring Status screen for iSTAR doors by right clicking on the Door and selecting Door Monitoring
from the context menu. You can also execute the Manual Actions listed above, from this context menu.
Figure 138:  Door Context Menu

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 459

Advanced Door Monitoring Details

See Door Monitoring Screen on Page 461 for more information about the Door Monitoring screen.

460 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Door Monitoring Screen

Door Monitoring Screen

The Door Monitoring screen shows all inputs monitored by a door, their state, and any door alarm condition derived from
them as well as the Cause Lists.

The upper dynamic view displays Door Monitoring Inputs status. The bottom part displays cause lists and all ‘cause list’
standard functionality is available (right mouse click on selected row will activate "Details/Cancel" context menu).

Figure 139 on Page 461 shows an example of the Door Monitoring Screen.

Table 147 on Page 462 provides definitions for the fields and selections on the screen.

Also see Table 142 on Page 429 for an explanation of the Alarms.
Figure 139:  Door Monitoring Screen

The availability of manual actions depends on input assignments. The rules to show/hide manual action on the Door
Monitoring Screen and show/hide executors on iSTAR Door Dynamic Views are:
■ If there is an RTE input then show Enable/Disable RTE;
■ If there is a DSM input then show Enable/Disable Door Forced Alarms, Enable/Disable Door Held alarms, if there is
also any DSM side A inputs, then Enable/Disable DSM Tamper
■ If there is a Bond Sensor input then show Enable/Disable Lock Tamper alarms, Enable/Disable Lock unsecured
alarms;

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 461

Door Monitoring Screen

■ If there is a Latch Bolt Detector input then show Enable/Disable Lock Tamper alarms, Enable/Disable Lock unsecured
alarms;
■ If there is a CAM detection input then show Enable/Disable Lock Tamper alarms, Enable/Disable Lock unsecured
alarms;
■ If there is a DSM Side A input then show Enable/Disable Door Forced Alarms, Enable/Disable Door Held alarms, if
there is also a main DSM, or another DSM side A, then Enable/Disable DSM Tamper;
■ If there is a DSM Side B input then show Enable/Disable Door Forced Alarms, Enable/Disable Door Held alarms, if
there is more than one DSM side B, then Enable/Disable DSM Tamper;
■ If there is an RTE2 input then show Enable/Disable RTE.
Table 147:  Doors Monitoring Screen Definitions

Field/Button Description

Click this button to refresh the values of all Inputs on the screen.
Refresh All

This toolbar lets you perform Dynamic View functions on the list of Door Inputs, such as filtering, printing, and
switching to Card View.

Name This column displays the name of the Input.

Input type This column displays the function that the Input serves in Door Monitoring.

Armed Status This column displays the Armed Status of the Input. Inputs associated with Doors are automatically Armed and
are reported as unknown.

Active Status This column displays the Active Status of the Input.

Cause Selection This drop-down list lets you choose the Cause type to display in the Status Information and Cause List section of
the screen.

Status Information This read-only field displays the current state of the selected Input.

Cause This read-only field displays the Cause State for the Input.

Action This read-only field displays the Lock and Unlock actions that are in effect on the door.

DateTime This read-only field displays the Date and Time the cause occurred.

Priority This read-only field displays the Event Priority of the cause.

Lock Click this button to initiate a manual action to lock the Door.

Unlock Click this button to initiate a manual action to unlock the Door for a defined period.

Momentary Unlock Click this button to momentarily unlock the Door for the Door Unlock period (usually 5 seconds).

462 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Door Monitoring Screen

Table 147:  Doors Monitoring Screen Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Enable _____ The Enable button changes to match the selected Cause Selection in the drop-down list. Click this button to
enable the selected Cause type.
Example:
If the Cause Selection is Door Forced Alarms, then the button reads Enable Door Forced Alarms.

Disable _____ The Disable button changes to match the selected Cause Selection in the drop-down list. Click this button to
disable the selected Cause type.
Example:
If the Cause Selection is Door Forced Alarms, then the button reads Disable Door Forced Alarms.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 463

Consecutive Rejects Activate an Event

Consecutive Rejects Activate an Event

This section describes how to configure the number of consecutive rejects and the time period during which consecutive
rejects are counted. Consecutive rejects can be cards, keypad entry of card numbers, keypad commands, or pin number
rejects. If the number of consecutive rejects occurs before the timer expires, a pre-defined and assigned event message
displays on the Monitoring Station.

If a door has one IN and OUT reader, rejects are counted separately for each direction.

The reject count and timer are reset when the following occurs:
■ a subsequent reject does not happen in the configured time period. For example, if the configured time period expires
after the first reject, then the configured number of rejects and time period are reset to zero.
■ the reject timer expires.
■ if there is a good card swipe (access granted) following rejects.
■ when the iSTAR is rebooted.

Example: Consecutive Rejects from a Single Cardholder

The number of consecutive rejects is set to 3, and the timer is set to 30 seconds. A single cardholder is rejected three
times in a row within 30 seconds.
1. Cardholder A presents a card at the door reader and is rejected, reject count = 1.
2. Five seconds later, cardholder A presents the card again and is rejected, reject count = 2.
3. Five seconds later, cardholder A presents the card again and is rejected, reject count = 3.

When the number of consecutive rejects reaches 3, a configured event is activated and sent to the Monitoring Station. The
reject count and the reject timer resets to 0.

Example: Consecutive Rejects from Multiple Cardholders

The number of consecutive rejects is set to 3, and the timer is set to 30 seconds. Multiple cardholders (cardholder A with
credential X, cardholder B with credential Y, and cardholder C with credential Z) present their cards at the door reader. All
three cardholders are rejected within 30 seconds.
1. Cardholder A with credential X presents a card at the door reader and is rejected, reject count = 1.
2. Five seconds later, cardholder B with credential Y presents a card at the door reader and is rejected, reject count = 2.
3. Five seconds later, cardholder C with credential Z presents a card at the door reader and is rejected, reject count = 3.

When the number of consecutive rejects reaches 3, a configured event is activated and sent to the Monitoring Station. The
reject count and the reject timer resets to 0.

Example: Consecutive Rejects for Occupancy

The number of consecutive rejects is set to 3, and Area Occupancy is configured with maximum 3 and minimum 2.
1. Cardholders A, B, C, and D plan to enter the area.
2. Cardholder A presents card at the door reader to enter. Cardholder A is rejected because area occupancy minimum set
to 2. Reject count = 1.

464 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Consecutive Rejects Activate an Event

3. Cardholder B present card at the door reader and both cardholder A and cardholder B enter the area (area occupancy
minimum set to 2).
4. Cardholder C presents card at the door reader and enters the area (area occupancy maximum set to 3).
5. Cardholder D present card at door reader and is rejected. Area occupancy maximum was reached with cardholder C.
Reject count = 2.
6. Cardholder D presents the card again at the door reader and is rejected, and the reject count = 3.

When the number of consecutive rejects reaches 3, a configured event is activated and sent to the Monitoring Station. The
reject count resets to 0.

Example: Consecutive Rejects PIN only

The number of consecutive rejects is set to 3. A single cardholder is rejected three times within 30 seconds.
1. Cardholder A enters the wrong PIN and is rejected, reject count =1.
2. Five seconds later, cardholder A enters the wrong PIN again, and is rejected, reject count = 2.
3. Five seconds later, cardholder A enters the wrong PIN again and is rejected, reject count = 3.

A configured event is activated and sent to the Monitoring Station. The reject count and reject timer are reset to 0.

Example: Consecutive Rejects Bi-directional Door - Two Readers

The number of consecutive rejects is set to 3. The timer is set to 60 seconds. Two cardholders swipe their cards at a door
IN and OUT reader and gets rejected three times within 60 seconds.
1. Cardholder A swipes the IN direction reader and is rejected, the IN door reader reject count = 1.
2. Five seconds later, cardholder A swipes the IN direction reader again and is rejected, IN door reader reject = 2.
3. Five seconds later, cardholder B swipes the OUT direction reader and is rejected, OUT door reject count = 1.
4. Five seconds later, cardholder B swipes again at the OUT direction reader and is rejected, OUT door reject count = 2.
5. Five seconds later, cardholder A swipes at the IN direction reader again and is rejected, the IN door reader reject count
= 3.
6. Five seconds later, cardholder B swipes the OUT direction reader again and gets rejected, OUT door reader reject
count = 3.

Configured IN and OUT direction events are activated and sent to the Monitoring Station. The IN and OUT direction reject
count and reject timers are reset to 0.

Configuring an Event Activation After Consecutive Rejects

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Administration Station, open the Options & Tools pane and then select System Variables.
2. Expand the iSTAR Driver section and select Number of Consecutive Rejects Cause Event field to configure the
number of consecutive rejects that will cause a message to appear on the Monitoring Station and trigger an event.
3. Enter a value by clicking in the Value field.
The range is 0 to 100. Zero, the default setting, disables the feature.
4. In the System Variables, select the Reader Consecutive Rejects Timer field to configure the time it takes to reset
the reader after consecutive rejects.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 465

Consecutive Rejects Activate an Event

5. Enter a value by clicking in the Value field.

The range is 0 to 86400 seconds. Zero, the default setting, disables the feature.
6. Close the Systems Variables window.
7. Open the Hardware pane and open the door to edit.
8. In the iSTAR Door editor, select the Triggers tab. Select Add. A new row appears.
9. In the Property field, select Reject Limit Reached from the drop-down list.
10. In the Value field, select Inbound Reader or Outbound Reader for this trigger.
11. In the Action field, select Activate Event. An event field appears at the bottom of the window. Choose an event to link
with the trigger by selecting . An event dialog box appears. Select the configured event and then click OK.
12. Change the Details, Schedule, and Time Zone fields if necessary.
13. Select Save and Close.
Figure 140:  Configuring an Event Activation After Consecutive Rejects

466 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Consecutive Rejects Activate an Event

Disabling Event Activation After Consecutive Rejects

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Administration Station, open the Options & Tools pane and then select System Variables.
2. Expand the iSTAR Driver section and select Number of Consecutive Rejects Cause Event field.
3. Click in the Value field. Enter zero (0) which disables the feature.
4. In the System Variables, select the Reader Consecutive Rejects Timer field to configure the time it takes to reset
the reader after consecutive rejects.
5. Click in the Value field. Enter zero (0) which disables the feature.
6. Close the Systems Variables window.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 11 467

Consecutive Rejects Activate an Event

468 Chapter 11 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 12

Chapter 12 - Configuring Readers

In C•CURE 9000, before you configure a Reader, you must first create and configure the type of controller to which the
Reader is connected. Then you can create and configure the Reader from the controller component the Reader is
associated with.

In this chapter

Reader Overview 470

OSDP Reader Configuration 471
Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration 480
TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader Configuration 490
Updating TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Firmware 492
Reader Editor 494
Reader Tab Definitions 495
iSTAR Reader Editor 496
iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor 512
iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor 516
apC Reader Editor 520

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 469

Reader Overview

Reader Overview
A Reader is a hardware device that accepts access requests. To make an access request, a person presents a card at the
Reader; the card reader scans the information encoded on the card and sends it to the controller, which grants or denies
access. The controller reports the activity to the C•CURE 9000 Server.

In C•CURE 9000, before you configure a Reader, you must first create and configure the type of controller to which the
Reader is connected. Then you can create and configure the Reader from the controller component the Reader is
associated with.

There is a Reader Editor for each type of Reader object in C•CURE 9000:
■ apC Reader Editor
■ iSTAR Reader Editor
■ iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

470 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

OSDP Reader Configuration

OSDP Reader Configuration

Open Security Device Protocol (OSDP) is an option available on HID® readers, Allegion™ aptiQ readers, and Innometriks
High Assurance readers (see Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration on Page 480).

OSDP is supported on the iSTAR Ultra and Ultra SE (Ultra Mode) with firmware 6.4.2 and later, and the IP-ACM.

■ The OSDP Restrictions and Limitations on Page 472 also apply to Innometriks readers.
NOTE
■ To configure Innometriks High Assurance Phase 2 Readers, see Innometriks High Assurance Reader
Configuration on Page 480

OSDP chains that contain readers from different manufacturers may experience intermittent communications failure. For optimum
performance, configure OSDP chains to only contain readers from a single manufacturer.

See the following:

■ Readers Supported on Page 471
■ Features on Page 472
■ Restrictions and Limitations on Page 472
■ HID iCLASS SE Reader Information on Page 473
■ Allegion aptiQ Reader Information on Page 473
■ Wiring Options Using OSDP on Page 474
■ Wiring Details for OSDP Readers on Page 474
■ Configuring OSDP in C•CURE on Page 475
■ Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration on Page 480
■ Configuring the Readers on Page 476
■ Changing the OSDP Reader Baud Rate on Page 476
■ OSDP Reader Configuration on Page 471
■ OSDP Troubleshooting on Page 479

Readers Supported
■ HID iCLASS SE
■ Allegion aptiQ
■ INID
■ Innometriks Cheetah
■ Innometriks Rhino
■ Innometriks Cheetah SE (supported on C•CURE 9000 v2.70 SP2 and higher with iSTAR firmware v6.6.5 and higher)

The readers ship with the OSDP installer key (default key). The readers automatically switch from the
NOTE default key (installer mode) to a new key when the reader is powered on.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 471

OSDP Reader Configuration

Features
■ Secure channel encryption, AES128, enabled by default.
■ Card data and keypad commands.
■ Intrusion zones and keypad commands.
■ Reader tamper indication.
■ Supports up to 8 OSDP readers daisy chain on each iSTAR Ultra/Ultra SE RS-485 device port. See information about
Speed selection.

Each reader on a chain must have a unique address. However, the factory default address for all
NOTE OSDP readers is 0. Ensure that you change the address for the second reader and each subsequent
reader in the chain. Refer to the reader’s manufacturer for the address setting process.

■ Communication loss alarm.

■ Display reader firmware version (iSTAR Reader Status tab).
■ Point-to-point, half duplex wiring.
■ Speed selection
• 9600, 38400 and 115200 baud.
• To change the speed, a reader must have the speed set locally, through the configuration card.

Readers configured with the wrong Baud Rate may cause communication problems with other
NOTE readers. Connecting a chain of readers with any mismatched Baud Rate can keep the entire chain
offline.

Restrictions and Limitations

The restrictions and limitations described in this section apply to all OSDP readers unless otherwise indicated.
■ IMPORTANT: OSDP readers communicating in OSDP Secure Channel and which do not have Installation Mode
enabled (in both C•CURE and on the reader) will remain offline until the reader is rebooted. A new exchange of keys is
required to restore the reader. Before you upgrade the iSTAR Ultra/Ultra SE/Ultra LT controller to firmware v6.6.5,
check with your OSDP reader supplier to ensure the reader supports key 1 change as described in Appendix D of the
OSDP 2.1.7 Specification. If your reader does not support key 1 change, then you need to set the OSDP reader back
to factory defaults (OSDP Install Mode) and enable Installation Mode in C•CURE before you can connect to an
iSTAR Ultra upgraded to firmware v6.6.5.
■ After the firmware iSTAR Ultra/Ultra SE/Ultra LT controller v6.6.5 upgrade, the Installer Mode and OSDP Secure
Channel are automatically enabled. For maximum security, manually disable (clear) the Installer Mode Enabled check
box for each reader on the iSTAR Reader dialog box General tab.
■ Occasionally, when an OSDP reader is first powered on, and not connected to a door, the LED may display unstable
status information. This condition should only last 30 seconds.
■ Setting both the LED and beep to the same pattern will not always synchronize. The buzzer and LED in the OSDP
protocol requires two different protocol messages, and at 9600 baud there is a minimum of 28 ms space between
those, and possibly up to 225 ms between the two requests. When the reader starts the beep pulse and when it starts
the LED flash is based on the reader manufacturer.

472 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

OSDP Reader Configuration

■ Ensure the reader baud rate and reader address match the baud rate on the RS485 port and the reader address
configured in C•CURE. Connecting a chain of readers with any mismatched Baud Rate can keep the entire chain
offline.
■ To utilize the customizable LED/Beep/Message features, the OSDP reader must support the full set of LED/Beep
commands in the OSDP specification.
■ Innometriks Readers only:
• The new LED and beep patterns are supported on the Cheetah SE. They are not supported on the older Cheetah
and Rhino classic readers.
• If one of the readers in a multi-drop configuration reboots or performs an initial boot, the rest of the readers in that
multi-drop will experience brief communication loss during that time.
■ In an OSDP multi-drop environment, use the higher baud rate (38.4K or 115K.) for the customizable LED patterns,
Beep patterns, and LCD message set features.
■ The double-swipe beep configurations supersede all other beep configurations. Avoid using the ninth pattern (400 ms
on/200 off/100 on) and the 10th pattern (100 ms on/200 off/400 on/200 off/100 on/200 off/100 on) if you are using
double-swipe for other purposes.
■ If you are using LED colors, ensure that the reader supports the colors you choose for the configuration. Check the
reader documentation.

HID iCLASS SE Reader Information

■ OSDP is an option on HID readers, not a standard feature.
• OSDP default set for the readers is V1 (non-encrypted)
■ SW House ordered OSDP HID readers ship with the following default settings:
• Address 0, 9600 baud
• Secure channel encryption enabled

You may need to use a HID configuration card to enable Secure Channel if you do not purchase HID
NOTE readers through Software House.

Allegion aptiQ Reader Information

The aptiQ reader models, listed in Table 148 on Page 473, are Wiegand/OSDP models.
Table 148:  Allegion aptiQ Reader Models

Model Description

AQ-MT11-485 Mullion

AQ-MT15-485 Single Gang

AQ-MTK15-485 Single Gang with KP

AQ-MTMS15-485 MT with Mag strip

AQ-MTMSK15-485 MT with Mag stripe & KP

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 473

OSDP Reader Configuration

The Wiegand/OSDP models are auto sensing:

■ If the reader senses an OSDP command on the RS485 terminal, the reader reverts to OSDP.
■ If the reader does not receive an OSDP command within a timeout period, it reverts to Wiegand.

Wiring Options Using OSDP

Wiring options for OSDP are shown in Figure 141 on Page 474.
Figure 141:  OSDP Wiring Options

Wiring Details for OSDP Readers

Wiring details from the Ultra to the readers is shown in Figure 142 on Page 475.

474 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

OSDP Reader Configuration

Figure 142:  OSDP Wiring Details

Configuring OSDP in C•CURE

To configure OSDP in C•CURE:

1. Verify that the iSTAR Controller firmware is v6.4.2 or later.
2. To setup the RS485 port on the IP-ACM go to Step 3.
To setup the RS485 port on the USB ACM go to Step 4.
3. Setup the RS485 port on the IP-ACM (one port per reader):
a. Open the iSTAR Controller editor.
b. Click the IP-ACMs tab.
c. Click the Configured check box of the IP-ACM and click Edit.
d. In the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM dialog box, click the RS-485 tab.
e. Click the Configured check box of the RS-485 port and click Edit.
f. In the iSTAR Device Port dialog box, select OSDP from the Protocol drop-down menu.
g. Set the Baud Rate.
h. Click Save and Close.
4. To setup the RS485 port on the USB ACM:

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 475

OSDP Reader Configuration

a. Open the iSTAR Controller editor.

b. Click the Boards tab.
c. Click the Configured check box of the desired ACM and click the Edit button.
d. In the iSTAR Ultra ACM dialog box, click the RS-485 tab.
e. Click the Configured check box of the RS-485 port and click Edit.
f. In the iSTAR Device Port dialog box, select OSDP from the Protocol drop-down menu.
g. Set the Baud Rate.
h. Click Save and Close.

Configuring the Readers

To configure the readers:

1. In the iSTAR Device Port dialog box, click the Readers tab.
2. Click the Configured check box of the reader and click Edit.
3. Set the reader address to the desired value between 0 and 8. (Multiple readers on a port must each have a unique
address.)
4. Enable the Tamper, Comm Fail, and Supervised Inputs, if needed.
5. Add card formats, complete the configuration.

Changing the OSDP Reader Baud Rate

There are two methods of changing the baud rate.
■ Method 1 requires the controller to be reset.
■ Method 2 requires removing, adding, and reconfiguring the readers attached to the port without resetting the controller.

Method 1 (controller reset is required)

This procedure requires the controller to be reset.

To change the baud rate:

1. Disable the cluster and the controller.
2. Open the iSTAR Controller editor.
3. Click the IP-ACMs or Boards tab. This depends on the current configuration.
4. Select the appropriate Configured check box of the IP-ACM or ACM and click Edit. The iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM dialog
box or the iSTAR ACM dialog box appears.
5. Click the RS-485 tab.
6. Select the Configured check box of the RS-485 port and click Edit. The iSTAR Device Port dialog box opens.

476 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

OSDP Reader Configuration

7. Click on the General tab.

8. Select a value from the Baud Rate drop-down menu.
9. Click Save and Close.
10. Enable the controller and the cluster.
11. Reset the controller.

Method 2 (controller reset is not required)

To change the baud rate:

1. Open the iSTAR Controller editor.
2. Click the IP-ACMs or Boards tab. This depends on the current configuration.
3. Select the Configured check box of the IP-ACM or ACM and click Edit. The iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM dialog box or the
iSTAR ACM dialog box appears.
4. Click the RS-485 tab.
5. Select the Configured check box of the RS-485 port and click Edit. The iSTAR Device Port dialog box opens.
6. Click the Readers tab.
7. Select Delete All Readers.
8. Click the General tab.
9. Select OSDP from the Protocol drop-down menu.
10. Change the Baud Rate.
11. Click the Readers tab.
12. Add and configure each reader.
13. Click Save and Close.

OSDP Conversion for Wiegand and RM readers

Use the following procedures to convert currently configured RM or Direct Connect Wiegand readers to the OSDP protocol
for iSTAR Ultra controllers.

For Wiegand readers, the conversion process creates a new device port and moves the Wiegand reader to that port.

For RM readers, you select a single reader for conversion, but you can convert the entire chain of RM readers. When you
select a single reader, if it is the only reader on the device port then you can select the current device port to be converted
to OSDP. If there are other readers on the device port, you must select a different device port. When you select to convert
the entire chain of readers, you can either convert the current device port to OSDP or you can select a different device port.

Prerequisites

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 477

OSDP Reader Configuration

■ Reader and controller firmware must be at version 6.6.B or later. The Convert reader to OSDP option is not available
for devices with incompatible firmware.
■ The cluster must be disabled before you start the conversion. You can manually disable the cluster then run the
conversion, or the conversion will automatically disable it for you.

From the OSDP Reader Conversion page, you can select an option to re-enable the cluster after the conversion
NOTE process is complete.

■ Device port indexes must be unique across an ACM.

■ OSDP Addresses must be unique across a single device port. Valid values are 0 through 8.
■ Any ACM hardware that exists but is not configured in C•CURE is not used in the conversion process. For example, if
the controller has two physical ACMs but only one ACM is configured, then only the configured ACM is used.
■ If you want to include any device Inputs or Outputs in the conversion, you must un-configure them in C•CURE before
you start the conversion process.
■ If you want to use Ports for Wiegand and RM conversions, they must be un-configured, or they must be configured as
OSDP but have no readers configured. You can also use Ports that are used by RM readers, if you convert all of the
RM readers at the same time.

Converting a Wiegand reader to OSDP

1. From a Dynamic View or Hardware Tree, right-click the iSTAR reader and select Convert reader to OSDP.
2. In the OSDP Conversion window, configure the following conversion settings:
■ Optional: In the Cluster area, select the check box if you want to enable the cluster after the conversion process is
complete.
■ In the RS-485 Device Port area, configure the following settings:
• From the RS-485 Device Port Index list, select a device port.

If you select an empty OSDP device port from the list, the baud rate is set automatically, and you cannot change
NOTE this value.

• From the Baud Rate list, select a baud rate.

■ In the Reader(s) area, configure the following reader settings:
• Optional: Click OSDP Address to type in a new OSDP reader address (invalid addresses are flagged).
• Optional: Select the Secure Channel Enabled check box to enable a secure channel for the reader.
• Optional: Select the Enable Installation Mode check box to enable installation mode.
3. Click Convert.
4. In the dialog box, read the instructions, select the check box, and then click Yes.
5. After the conversion is complete, click OK.

Converting an RM reader to OSDP

1. From a Dynamic View or Hardware Tree, right-click the iSTAR reader and select Convert reader to OSDP.

478 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

OSDP Reader Configuration

2. In the OSDP Conversion window, configure the following conversion settings:

■ Optional: In the Cluster area, select the check box if you want to enable the cluster after the conversion process is
complete.
■ In the RS-485 Device Port area, configure the following settings:
• From the RS-485 Device Port Index list, select a device port.

If you select an empty OSDP device port from the list, the baud rate is set automatically, and you cannot change
NOTE this value.

• From the Baud Rate list, select a baud rate.

■ In the Reader(s) area, configure the following reader settings:
• Select one of the following options:
— Convert only the selected reader.
— Convert the entire chain of RM readers.
• Optional: Click OSDP Address to type in a new OSDP reader address (invalid addresses are flagged).
• Optional: Select the Secure Channel Enabled check box to enable a secure channel for the reader.
• Optional: Select the Enable Installation Mode check box to enable installation mode.
3. Optional: In the Reader I/O area, to edit I/O destination mappings, select a destination from the Destination Index
list. You can select the following options for each input or output object:
■ Keep the object mapped to the reader. Note: The OSDP reader must support I/O.
■ Map the object to an un-configured I/O slot on the ACM.
■ (Outputs only) Map the output to an unconfigured R8 board slot.
■ Delete the object mapping.
4. Click Convert.
5. In the dialog box, read the instructions, select the check box, and then click Yes.
6. After the conversion is complete, click OK.

OSDP Troubleshooting
If OSDP readers do not come online immediately, check the following:
■ Wiring – check the wiring of the reader (HID’s brown and tan wires look very similar).
■ Configuration – ensure the port is set to OSDP, and that the limit of 8 readers per ACM was not exceeded.
■ Check the port’s green TX and RX lights – they should be flashing constantly. If not, the port may not be configured
properly.
■ Ensure the readers are set for secure channel encryption. Check the reader part number to verify. You may need to
use configuration cards to enable secure channel encryption.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 479

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

This section describes the requirements and the pre-configuration procedures for the Innometriks High Assurance (HA)
 readers.

HA is supported on C•CURE 9000 v2.70 with v2.70 SP2 installed, and higher.

■ See OSDP Reader Restrictions and Limitations on Page 472

■ Ensure that all steps in the Reader Configuration Requirements Checklist on Page 480 are
completed.

In this section:
■ Hardware and Firmware Requirements on Page 480
■ Reader Configuration Requirements Checklist on Page 480
■ Importing the Enrollment Service XML file on Page 482
■ Configuring the FICAM Plugin User-Defined Field on Page 482
■ CHUID Templates for use with Card Formats on Page 483
■ Enrolling Users on Page 486
■ Reader Configuration on Page 486

Hardware and Firmware Requirements

Innometriks HA Reader Firmware Requirement

■ Cheetah SE Reader firmware version 1.2.4 and higher.
■ Cheetah and Rhino Reader firmware version 5.2.3 or higher.

iSTAR Controllers Supported and Firmware Requirement

iSTAR Ultra and Ultra SE (Ultra Mode) with Firmware version 6.6.5 and higher.

Supported Modules
USB-ACM, SE USB-ACM, or the IP-ACM v2.

IP-ACM v1 is not supported.

NOTE

Reader Configuration Requirements Checklist

Ensure that the following requirements are met before you configure the reader in C•CURE 9000:
1. Configure the Innometriks HA reader for FICAM (Federal Identity, Credential and Access Management). See the
Innometriks Reader Guide.
2. Obtain and record the reader IP address using the reader keypad.

480 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

• Innometriks Cheetah SE reader: press F1 and F4 simultaneously, then press the 2 key.
• Innometriks Cheetah and Innometriks Rhino readers: press and the F1 key at the same time.
3. Install and configure the Innometriks Identity Server. See the Innometriks Identity Server User Guide for installation
and configuration information.
4. Install the following Innometriks software services:
• FICAM High Assurance Services (on the same computer as the C•CURE 9000)
• FICAM Enrollment Client (can be installed on a different server or desktop system)
• FICAM Enrollment Plugin (on the same computer as the C•CURE 9000)
a. Go to http://www.swhouse.com/Support/SoftwareDownloads.aspx. You must be a registered user to access this
site.
b. Select Innometriks High Assurance to access and download the installation files.
c. See the Innometriks High Assurance Solution Installation and Configuration Guide for extraction and installation
instructions.

The following XML files used are installed to the following locations:
NOTE
■ Program Files (X86)\Tyco\CCURE Client\HA_Card Formats
• Card-Format-Government-200-bit-FASC-N.xml
• Card-Format--PIV-I.xml
CAUTION: Do not use the CHUID xml files.

■ Program Files (X86)\Tyco\CCURE Client\HA_Enrollment:

• Personnel-View-Ficam-Enrollment.xml

5. Attach a smart card enrollment reader device to the operating system where C•CURE 9000 is installed. The reader
device is required to read the personnel enrollment data from the cards. See the manufacturer’s documentation.
6. Ensure the Innometriks reader is directly connected to the configured ACM or the IP-ACM v2.
7. Ensure the C•CURE license file is applied, and the following information is verified in the License Manager (C•CURE
9000 tab):
a. System Wide Capabilities:
— HA Assurance Readers lists the correct number of licensed readers.
b. Licensed Features:
— Innometriks Enrollment - Plugin
— Innometriks HA Enrollment Service
— Innometriks HA Panel Service
8. Ensure the cluster and the controller is configured.
9. Ensure that FICAM High Assurance is enabled on the controller to which the reader is connected:
a. Open the iSTAR Controller editor dialog box and select the General tab.
b. Click Enable FICAM High Assurance.
c. Click OK.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 481

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

10. The Enrollment Service XML file is imported using the C•CURE Data Import Utility.
See Importing the Enrollment Service XML file on Page 482.
11. A User Defined Field (UDF) is created for the FICAM plugin.
See Configuring the FICAM Plugin User-Defined Field on Page 482
12. The HA card format XML files are imported.
See CHUID Templates for use with Card Formats on Page 483
13. Configure the reader in C•CURE.
See Reader Configuration on Page 486

Importing the Enrollment Service XML file

The Enrollment Service XML file creates the HA Personnel View.

To manually import the Enrollment Services XML file:

1. Click the Configuration pane.
2. Select Data Import from the Configuration drop-down menu.
3. Click New. The Data Import dialog box opens.
4. Enter a name for the FICAM Personnel Data Import.

5. In the Source Type field, click .

6. Select XML file import source.
7. In the Automation Mode field, click the drop-down menu, select Manual only and click the Manual Import button.
8. Navigate to C:\Program Files (x86)\Tyco\CCURE Client\HA_Enrollment.
9. Select Personnel-View-Ficam-Enrollment.xml and click Open. The Importing Data dialog box opens.
10. Ensure that Enabled is selected.
11. Save and Close the Data Import dialog box.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Go to Configuring the FICAM Plugin User-Defined Field on Page 482.

Configuring the FICAM Plugin User-Defined Field

To configure the FICAM Plugin UDF:

1. Click the Configuration pane.
2. Select User-defined Fields from the Configuration drop-down menu.
3. Click New. The User-defined Fields dialog box opens.
4. Enter HA in the Name field.

482 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

5. Click in the Customer Label field. HA appears in the field.

6. Select Custom from the Field Type drop-down menu.
7. Select Personnel from the Object Type drop down menu.
8. Select FicamEnrollmentPlugin from the Custom Control drop-down menu.
9. Click Save and Close.

CHUID Templates for use with Card Formats

After you select a CHUID format template, you must manually add the system ID to the card format template.

Available CHUID templates:

l Full FASC-N CHUID Format (200 bit) Template

l PIV I CHUID Format (128-bit) template

The procedures in this section apply to the following card formats:

■ Card Format Government 200-bit FASC-N on Page 483
■ Card Format PIV I Card Format on Page 485

Do not use the CHUID.xml files that were installed along with the card templates.

High Assurance Card MAS/SAS Grace Period Configuration

There is a system variable that allows you to expand the time period added after the Source of Authority Certificate (Not
valid after) expires if there is a communication failure between the MAS and the SAS. If the Source of Authority Certificate
(Not valid after) expires, and the MAS/SAS communication is not restored, then all cards become invalid and require full
download to the controller.

Extending the time ensures all cards will remain valid for the period of time selected after the Source of Authority
Certificate (Not valid after) expires, if the connectivity between the MAS/SAS be down for an extended period of time.

To extend the time period:

1. Click the Options & Tools pane.
2. Click System Variables and select the Personnel category.
3. Select Enterprise High Assurance (HA) Grace Period (Hours) and enter the extended time.

Card Format Government 200-bit FASC-N

This section describes how to locate the system ID, add the ID to the card format template, and how to import the file.

Perform the following steps:

1. Click the Personnel pane.
2. Select CHUID Format from the Personnel drop-down menu.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 483

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select Full FASC-N CHUID Format (200-bit) Template (for Card Format
Government 200-bit FASC-N).
The CHUID Format dialog box opens.
4. Enter a Name for the CHUID Format.
5. Click Enabled.
6. Click Save and Close.

7. Click next to CHUID Format to open a Dynamic view listing all CHUID Formats.
8. Right-click on the CHUID format you created from the template you selected in Step 3 and select Export Selection.
9. Browse to a location to save the file and click Open. The Exporting CHUID Data Format dialog box opens.
10. Click OK when the export is complete is displayed in the dialog box.
11. Navigate to the exported CHUID format file.
12. Open the file with Notepad.
13. Locate <objectID> in the file and note the number.
Example: <objectID>5004</objectID>
14. Close the file.
15. Navigate to C:\Program Files (x86)\Tyco\CCURE Client\HA_Card_Formats.
16. Locate the Card-Format-Government-200-bit-FASC-N.xml file and open it in Notepad.
17. Locate <CHUIDFormatID> in the file and replace the number with the number you noted in step 13.
Example: <CHUIDFormatID>5004</CHUIDFormatID>
18. Save the file.
19. Click the Configuration pane.
20. Select Data Import from the Configuration drop-down menu. The Data Import dialog box opens.
21. Enter a name for the Card Format.

22. In the Source Type field, click .

23. Select XML file import source.
24. In the Automation Mode field, click the drop-down menu, select Manual only and click the Manual Import button.
25. Browse to C:/Program Files (x86)/Tyco/CCURE Client/ HA_Card_Formats
26. Select Card Format Government 200-bit FASC-N.xml and click Open. The Importing data dialog box opens.
27. Click OK when "Import complete" is displayed in the dialog box.
28. Click Save and Close.
The Government 200-bit FASC-N card format is now available.

484 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

Card Format PIV I Card Format

This section describes how to locate the system ID, add the CHUID ID to your template, and how to import the template.

Perform the following steps:

1. Click the Personnel pane.
2. Select CHUID Format from the Personnel drop-down menu.
3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select PIV I CHUID FORMAT (128-bit Template) (for Card Format PIV I
Card Format).
The CHUID Format dialog box opens.
4. Enter a Name for the CHUID Format.
5. Click Enabled.
6. Click Save and Close.

7. Click next to CHUID Format to open a Dynamic view listing all CHUID Formats.
8. Right-click on the CHUID format you created from the template and select Export Selection.
9. Browse to a location to save the file and click Open. The Exporting CHUID Data Format dialog box opens.
10. Click OK when the export is complete is displayed in the dialog box.
11. Navigate to the exported CHUID format file.
12. Open the file with Notepad.
13. Locate <objectID> in the file and note the number.
Example: <objectID>5004</objectID>
14. Close the file.
15. Navigate to C:\Program Files (x86)\Tyco\CCURE Client\HA_Card_Formats.
16. Locate the Card-Format-PIV-I-Card-Format.xml file and open it in Notepad.
17. Locate <CHUIDFormatID> in the file and replace the number with the number you noted in step 13.
Example: <CHUIDFormatID>5004</CHUIDFormatID>
18. Save the file.
19. Click the Configuration pane.
20. Select Data Import from the Configuration drop-down menu. The Data Import dialog box opens.
21. Enter a name for the Card Format.

22. In the Source Type field, click .

23. Select XML file import source.
24. In the Automation Mode field, click the drop-down menu, select Manual only and click the Manual Import button.
25. Browse to C:\Program Files (x86)\Tyco\CCURE Client\HA_Card_Formats.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 485

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

26. Select the Card-Format-PIV-I-Card-Format.xml file and click Open. The Importing data dialog box opens.
27. Click OK when "Import complete" is displayed in the dialog box.
28. Click Save and Close.
The PIV I Card Format is now available.

Enrolling Users
After the services are installed, you must edit existing Personnel records, or create a new Personnel record, to enroll
users. The Personnel record uses the HA XML files you manually imported to add the Card Reader tab which allows HA
enroll configuration.

To Enroll Users
1. Ensure that the smart card enrollment reader is connected to the operating system.
2. Click the Personnel pane.

3. Select Personnel from the drop-down menu list and click to open a Dynamic View displaying all configured
Personnel records.
or,
Select Personnel from the drop-down menu list and click New to create a new personnel record.
4. Select Ficam Enrollment from the Current View drop-down list, located at the top of the screen.
5. Click the Card Reader tab.
6. Select the card reader from the drop-down list of available card readers.
7. Place the configured card on, or in, the smart card enrollment reader and click Read Card.
All information on the card is read into the personnel record and overrides all previous information. Information can be
edited once the process is complete.
8. Complete configuration updates.
9. Click Save and Close when done.

Reader Configuration
See the following:
■ Configuring the HA Reader connected to an IP-ACM v2 on Page 486
■ Configuring the HA Reader connected to an ACM on Page 488

Configuring the HA Reader connected to an IP-ACM v2

IP-ACM v1 modules are not supported.

NOTE

486 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

To configure the reader:

1. Access the controller's editor dialog box for the controller you want to add the reader.
2. On the General tab, select the Support High Assurance Reader check box.
3. Click the IP-ACM's tab.
4. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row of the configured IP-ACM v2.
5. Click in the Edit column in the Index row to open the IP-ACM editor. See iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM Editor on Page 297
6. Click the RS-485 tab for reader connection to the IP-ACM v2 board.
7. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row of the device port.
8. Click in the Edit column in the Index row of the device port. The iSTAR Device Port dialog box opens. See iSTAR
Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor on Page 204 for more information about the tabs and fields.
9. Select OSDP from the Protocol drop-down menu.
10. Select the Baud Rate from the drop down menu. The baud rate must match the baud rate configured on the reader.
11. Click the Readers tab.
12. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row of the reader attached to the RS-485 port on the controller.
13. Click in the Edit column in the Index row of the reader.

The iSTAR Reader dialog box opens. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for more information about the tabs and
fields.

The iSTAR Reader dialog box name field displays the following information about the reader:
NOTE
■ Reader number
■ Port number
■ IP-ACMv2 number
■ Controller name

Optionally, you can change the reader name.

14. On the General tab, select the card format:

a. Enter the reader address in the Address field.
b. Under Card format, click Add.
c. Click in the check boxes to select the card formats.
d. Click OK.
15. Click the High Assurance tab. See High Assurance Tab on Page 509
a. Select the Support High Assurance Reader check box. The High Assurance Operation Mode selections become
available for selection.
b. Select the High Assurance Operation Mode.
c. Click Save and Close to save the settings and close the dialog box.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 487

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

Configuring the HA Reader connected to an ACM

To configure the reader connected to the ACM:

1. Access the Controller's Editor dialog box for the controller you want to add the reader.
2. On the General tab, select the Support High Assurance Reader check box
3. Click the Boards tab.
4. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row of the configured ACM.
5. Click in the Edit column in the Index row to open the ACM editor. See iSTAR Ultra Controller ACM Board Editor
on Page 202
6. Click the RS-485 tab for reader connection to the ACM board.
7. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row of the device port.
8. Click in the Edit column in the Index row of the device port.

The iSTAR device Port dialog box opens. See iSTAR Ultra ACM RS-485 Device Port Editor on Page 204 for more
information about the tabs and fields.
9. Select OSDP from the Protocol drop-down menu.
10. Select the Baud Rate from the drop down menu. The baud rate must match the baud rate configured on the reader.
11. Click the Readers tab.
12. Click on the Configured check box in the Index row of the reader attached to the port on the controller.
13. Click in the Edit column in the Index row of the reader.

The iSTAR Reader dialog box opens. See iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 496 for more information about the tabs and
fields.

The iSTAR Reader dialog box name field displays the following information about the reader:
NOTE
■ Reader number
■ Port number
■ IP-ACMv2 number
■ Controller name

Optionally, you can change the reader name.

14. On the General tab:

a. Enter the reader address in the Address field.
b. Under Card format, click Add.
c. Click in the check boxes to select the card formats.
d. Click OK.
15. Click the High Assurance tab. See High Assurance Tab on Page 509

488 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration

a. Select the Support High Assurance Reader check box. The High Assurance Operation Mode selections become
available for selection.
b. Select the High Assurance Operation Mode.
c. Click Save and Close to save the settings and close the dialog box.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 489

TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader Configuration

TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader Configuration

You can configure the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal in RM mode or Smart mode. The mode of the reader is dependent
on the configuration of the S2 DIP switches. Additionally, the reader is required to be wired as full-duplex for Smart mode
and half-duplex for RM mode. Not all features are supported when using the reader in RM mode.

RM Mode Configuration
In RM mode, you can connect the reader to iSTAR Classic, Pro, eX, Edge, Ultra, Ultra SE (Ultra Mode or Pro Mode), or
Ultra LT controller.

Ensure the reader S2-1 DIP switch is in the OFF position and S2-2 is in the ON position.
NOTE

To Configure the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal in RM Mode:

1. Open the Hardware Tree for a Controller, navigate in the tree to open the reader folder under that Controller, showing a
list of readers.
2. Click on the reader that you want to edit, and the Reader Editor opens.
3. Click the RS-485 tab.
4. Configure a port by selecting the corresponding check box. The iSTAR Device Port box appears.
5. Click the General tab.
6. In the Protocol field, select RM from the drop-down list.
7. Click the Readers tab.
8. Configure the reader by selecting the Configured check box of the corresponding reader and click Edit in the same
row. The iSTAR Reader configuration box appears.
9. Configure the reader by selecting the tabs (General, I/O, Keypad, Triggers, After Hours). See iSTAR Reader Editor on
Page 496 for more information.
10. Configure a door and assign the reader you configured to the door. See iSTAR Door Editor on Page 397
11. Ensure that you configure clearances, credentials, and personnel information such as card number for the reader.

Smart Mode Configuration

In Smart mode, you can connect the reader to iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE (in Ultra Mode), or Ultra LT controller. If using the
reader in Smart mode, the iSTAR controller must be connected to an IP-ACM.

Ensure the reader S2-1 and S2-2 DIP switch are in the OFF position.
NOTE

To Configure the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal in Smart Mode:

1. Configure an ACM or IP-ACM. If using the iSTAR IP-ACM for configuration, ensure that the IP-ACM is connected to
the controller GCM. You can find this information in the ICU or the IP-ACM Status page using the IP address of the
board entered into the navigation bar of a browser.

490 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader Configuration

2. Open the configured controller's Controller Editor dialog box.

3. Select the IP-ACMs tab. The IP-ACM dialog box opens.
4. Click the RS-485 tab of the IP-ACM.
5. Configure a port by selecting the corresponding check box. The iSTAR Device Port box appears.
6. Click the General tab.
7. In the Protocol field, select Smart from the drop-down list.

The Smart protocol will not be available if offline mode is enabled on the IP-ACM.
NOTE

8. Click the Readers tab.

9. Configure the reader by selecting the check box of the corresponding reader and click Edit in the same row. The
iSTAR Reader configuration box appears.
10. Configure the reader by selecting the tabs (General, I/O, Keypad, Triggers, After Hours, Touchscreen). See iSTAR
Reader Editor on Page 496 for more information.
11. Configure a door and assign the reader you configured to the door. See iSTAR Door Editor on Page 397
12. Ensure that you configure clearances, credentials, and personnel information such as card number for the reader.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 491

Updating TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Firmware

Updating TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Firmware

You can update the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader, in Smart mode, firmware through the iSTAR panel it is
connected to from the Administration Client or the Monitoring Station client.
■ Firmware updates are only supported on the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader using the Smart mode protocol.
You cannot update the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal firmware if you are using RM mode.
■ Firmware updates are only supported on the iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE (in Ultra mode), or the Ultra LT connected to an IP-
ACM.
■ Please read the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal firmware release notes before updating the firmware.

You initiate a firmware update by right-clicking on the iSTAR controller:

■ In the Hardware Tree
■ In a Dynamic View in the Administration Client
■ In the Status List - Controller in the Monitoring Station

This procedure updates the firmware on all TST-100 Touchscreen Terminals connected to the iSTAR.

To Update Firmware on the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal

1. Right-click on the controller and select Update Firmware from the context menu.

Update Firmware will not appear on the context menu if the iSTAR is not Enabled or is off-line.
NOTE

492 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Updating TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Firmware

2. Select Touchscreen Reader from the Download Type drop-down menu.

Touchscreen Reader only appears on the drop-down menu if there are Smart mode TST-100 Touchscreen
NOTE Terminal readers configured on the panel.

3. Select the firmware version that you want to download from the list in the dialog box.
4. Click Start firmware download.
A progress bar indicates the firmware download to the controller is complete.
5. When the download has completed, click Close to close the dialog box.

After the download is successful, the controller updates all Smart mode TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal readers
connected to the controller, if needed.

The TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader firmware update can be verified in the iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 504

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 493

Reader Editor

Reader Editor
The Reader Editor in C•CURE 9000 lets you configure and edit Reader objects to control entrances and exits within your
facility.

Readers are created as child objects under a controller, rather than directly from the Hardware Tree.

Each Controller type has Reader settings that are Controller-specific. Therefore, there is a Reader Editor for each
Controller type.

The following topics give more information about the various Controller-based Reader objects and how to use them.
■ Reader Overview
■ apC Reader Editor
■ iSTAR Reader Editor
■ iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor
■ iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor
■ Accessing the Reader Editor

Accessing the Reader Editor

You can access the Reader Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane.

To Access the Reader Editor

1. Click on the Hardware pane button.

2. You can view a list of all readers of a particular type by Selecting a reader type (apC Reader or iSTAR Reader) from
the Hardware pane drop-down list, then click to open a Dynamic View showing all Reader objects of that type.

Alternatively, you can view Readers connected to a specific controller by clicking the pointer ( ) to open the
Hardware Tree for a Controller, navigating in the tree to open a Reader folder under that Controller, showing a
list of Readers.

3. Double-click on the Reader in the list of Readers that you want to edit, and the Reader Editor opens.

494 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Reader Tab Definitions

Reader Tab Definitions

Refer to the following topics for definitions of the fields and buttons on Reader Editor screens.

apC Readers
l apC Reader General Tab
l apC Reader Input/Output Tab
l apC Reader Keypad Tab
l apC Reader Triggers Tab
l apC Reader Status Tab

iSTAR Readers
l iSTAR Reader General Tab
l iSTAR Reader Input/Output Tab
l iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab
l iSTAR Reader Triggers Tab
l iSTAR Reader Status Tab
l iSTAR Reader After-Hours Tab

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 495

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader Editor

The iSTAR Reader editor lets you configure an iSTAR Reader that you created on an iSTAR Controller.

The iSTAR Reader editor (see Figure 143 on Page 497) has the following tabs:
■ iSTAR Reader General tab
Lists the Reader name, connections, and card formats for a reader connected to an iSTAR. See iSTAR Reader
General Tab on Page 498.
■ iSTAR Reader I/O tab
This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See iSTAR Reader I/O Tab on Page 500.
■ iSTAR Reader Keypad tab
This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad. See iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab on Page
501.
■ iSTAR Reader Triggers tab
See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.
■ iSTAR Reader Groups tab
If you have created a Group containing iSTAR readers and added this Reader to the Group, the iSTAR Reader editor
displays a Group tab.
This tab lists the Reader groups to which this Reader belongs. See Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36 for
information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Reader.
■ iSTAR Reader Options tab
Use this tab to enable two factor authentication on the reader and to configure LED Control and Beep on Card Read for
Wiegand Readers. See iSTAR Reader Options Tab on Page 505.
■ iSTAR Reader Status tab
This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, PIN Required, and Keypad Command
Allow Status of the Reader. See iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 504.
■ iSTAR Reader After-Hours tab
This tab enables the After-Hours Readers Group feature. See After-Hours on Page 506 for further information and
procedures to configure this feature.
Use this tab to select the Innometriks reader high assurance settings. See High Assurance Tab on Page 509
■ Touchscreen tab
Use this tab to set the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader's Automatic Dim brightness and time. This tab also
displays the card types supported and allows you to reporder the card type priority. See iSTAR Reader Touchscreen
Tab on Page 508.
■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab
This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to
customize these state images. See iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 510.

496 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

Figure 143:  iSTAR Reader Editor

You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers on the iSTAR Reader Dynamic View. See Add or Remove
Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

Accessing the iSTAR Reader Editor

You can access the iSTAR Reader editor in several ways:
■ From the iSTAR Ultra iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 167, iSTAR Ultra Controller IP-
ACMs Tab on Page 189, and iSTAR Ultra COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 189.
■ From the iSTAR PIM-485 Board Editor Readers Tab on Page 239.
■ From the iSTAR Ultra IP-ACM RS-485 Tab on Page 301
■ From the iSTAR eX Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 180 or iSTAR Edge Controller Wiegand Tab on Page 178.
■ From the iSTAR eX COM1/COM2 Tabs on Page 182 or iSTAR Edge COM1/COM2/COM3 Tabs on Page 176
■ From the iSTAR Classic/Pro Controller iSTAR ACM Board Readers Tab on Page 212.
■ From the Hardware Tree, edit a Reader on a COM board or ACM board.

In each case, you must select the Configure column to configure the reader, then click to open the iSTAR Reader
editor.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 497

iSTAR Reader Editor

Configuring iSTAR Readers

When you configure an iSTAR Reader, you use the Reader Editor tabs to define the Options and State Images for the
Reader.

To Configure an iSTAR Reader

1. Access the Reader Editor for the Reader you wish to edit (see Accessing the iSTAR Reader Editor on Page 497).
2. Click the Reader General tab:
• Modify the name of the Reader in the Name field, if desired.
• Add a textual description of the Reader to the Description field.
• Enable the Reader by clicking the Enabled field.
• For some Readers, you need to select the correct Reader type from the drop-down list.
• Add the Card Formats that the Reader uses to the Card Format table. See Configuring iSTAR Readers on Page
498.
• Select options in the Reader Options section if it applies. For instance, if you are configuring a Touchscreen
reader.
3. Click the Reader Status tab to view the Active Status of the Reader.
4. Click the Reader State Images tab to view the state images for this Reader. If you wish to customize the state images
for this Reader, follow the steps in State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281.
5. When you have finished configuring this Reader in the Reader Editor, click Save and Close to save the settings you
have configured.

iSTAR Reader General Tab

The iSTAR Reader General tab displays information that identifies the Reader and allows you to configure the Options for
the Reader. Figure 143 on Page 497 shows the iSTAR Reader General tab.

iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions

Table 149 on Page 498 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Reader General tab.
Table 149:  iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Identification

Name Displays the name for this Reader. The name is system-generated by default, but you can edit
this name by clicking in click in this field.

Description Enter a textual comment about the Reader, such as its location or purpose. This text is for
information only.

498 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Enabled Click to enable the Reader.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the iSTAR Reader into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for
more information.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition in which this reader resides.

Controller This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller to which this reader is attached.

Board This read-only field identifies the iSTAR Controller board to which this reader is attached.

Assigned to Displays the Elevator or Door object name with which this reader is configured.

Connection Identifies the Reader number on the hardware board to which this reader is connected.

Device ID The 15-character ID of the Aperio Reader. (Aperio Reader only.)

Reader Type Displays the reader type:

• RM (Software House Reader Protocol)
• BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy) Future feature.
• OSDP (Open Supervised Device Protocol)
• Smart (select for the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader)
Default: RM

Card Format

Add Click Add to add a Card Format.

If the card format you desire is not in the Name Selection dialog box list, click in the Select
Type field to select a card format.

Remove
Click the row selector to select one or more Card Format rows (hold down SHIFT or Ctrl to
select multiple rows), then click Remove to delete the row(s) for this field.

Name Displays the Name of each Card Format you have chosen for this Reader.

Description Displays the Description for the Card Format. This field is read-only.

Clearance Filter

Default Clearance Select a Clearance Filter Level for the reader from the drop-down list. The available Clearance
Filter Level Filter Levels are numbered 1 through 6. Personnel assigned with lower Clearance Filter Levels,
in the Personnel than the reader configuration are denied access.
• Level 6 is the highest level.
• Level 1 is the lowest level and the default setting.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 499

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Reader Options (available only for Smart protocol)

Beep on Key Press Select this check box for the TS-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader to beep when pressing a key.

Beep on Card Read Select this check box for the TS-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader to beep on a card read.

Date Format Select the date format and/or the time format to use.
Time Format

iSTAR Reader I/O Tab

The iSTAR Reader I/O tab displays information that identifies the Reader and allows you to configure the Options for the
Reader.

iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions

Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader I/O tab are described in Table 150 on Page 500.

Definitions for the Inputs on the iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab are described in iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab on Page 518.

The fields on this tab vary depending upon the type of Reader you are configuring. For example, a Direct Connect Wiegand
Reader displays only the Communications Fail Input on the I/O tab.
Table 150:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Inputs

Create All Inputs Click to create all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Delete All Inputs Click to delete all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Edit Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input Editor to edit this Input.

Connection This read-only field identifies the position of each Input on the I/O tab.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to
select an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

Supervised 1 Represents Supervised Input #1 on iSTAR Readers. Not available on direct connect Wiegand Readers.

500 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Supervised 2 Represents Supervised Input #2 on iSTAR Readers. Not available on direct connect Wiegand Readers.

Tamper Represents the Tamper Input on iSTAR Readers. Not available on direct connect Wiegand Readers.

Communications Represents the Communications Failure Input on iSTAR Readers.

Fail

Outputs

Create All Click to create all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

Delete All Click to delete all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Outputs

1 Represents Output #1 on iSTAR Readers.

2 Represents Output #2 on iSTAR Readers. Not available on direct connect Wiegand Readers.

iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab

The iSTAR Reader Keypad tab allows you to configure settings for the keypad on the Reader. You can specify how the
Reader accepts PIN entries, and whether the Reader accepts Keypad Commands.

Some features may not be supported by your reader.

NOTE

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 501

iSTAR Reader Editor

Figure 144:  iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab

iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions

Table 151:  iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

PIN is not If selected, only a card swipe is required for successful access to the door connected to this reader.
required

PIN only If selected, this reader can be used for PIN-Only access.
NOTE: PIN only cannot be used as a Query filter value for the PIN Required Status field.

Card and PIN If selected, this reader requires both a card swipe and a PIN entry at the keypad for access.
required

Schedule If Card and PIN Required is selected, you can select a Schedule object to determine when Card and PIN Required is
enforced. When the Schedule is active, both Card and PIN are required for access. When the Schedule is inactive, only a card
swipe is required.

Allow PIN If Card and PIN Required is selected, Personnel records configured with PIN Exempt (ADA) are exempt from having to
Exempt (ADA) enter a PIN for access.

502 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

Table 151:  iSTAR Reader Keypad Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Allow card If you have selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required, you can enable Allow card numbers to be entered
numbers to be from the keypad by selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only, this option is unavailable because the Keypad must be
entered from used to enter a PIN.
keypad

Use PIN+1 as If you have selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required, you can enable Use PIN+1 as duress code by
duress code selecting the check box. If you chose PIN Only, this option is unavailable.

Keypad Indicates whether or not Keypad Commands can be entered on this Reader’s Keypad and when. Select one of the following
Commands options from the drop-down list. The default is Not Allowed.
Allowed • Not Allowed – Keypad Commands cannot be used at the Reader
• Always Allowed – Keypad Commands can always be used at the Reader
• Allowed during specified schedule – Keypad Commands can be used at the Reader during the period specified in the
following field. When you select this option, the Schedule for Keypad Commands field becomes available.

Scramble TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader using the Smart Protocol only.
Keypad If the reader is using the Smart protocol on the reader, you must select this check box to enable Scramble Keypad on the reader.
When the PIN is being entered, the LED displays a randomly allocated set of numbers from 0 to 9. The position of the numbers
changes every time the keypad is activated.
NOTE: This field is not visible if the reader is using the RM Protocol. To enable Scramble Keypad on a reader using the RM
protocol, place the TST-100 Touchscreen Terminal Reader S2-5 switch to the ON position.

Schedule for Select a Schedule from the list to specify when Keypad Commands can be used at this Reader. When the Schedule is active,
Keypad Keypad Commands can be used. When the Schedule is inactive, Keypad Commands cannot be used.
Commands

iSTAR Reader Triggers Tab

The iSTAR Reader Triggers tab allows you to configure triggers for the Reader. You can set up triggers based on
Communication Status, PIN Required Status, and Tamper Status.

See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.

For iSTAR Readers you can create Triggers for the properties shown in Table 152 on Page 503.
Table 152:  iSTAR Reader Trigger Properties

Property Description

Communication Possible values are Normal or Comm Fail.

Status

PIN Required Status Possible values are Not Required or Card and PIN Required, based on the setting for PIN Requirements on the
Keypad tab.

Tamper Status Boolean value; True if the Tamper input has been activated, or False if the Tamper Input has not been activated.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 503

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader Status Tab

The iSTAR Reader Status tab displays read-only status fields that allow you to see the current status of the Reader. The
type of reader determines the fields displayed on this tab.

l iSTAR Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 504.

l iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 504.
l iSTAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions on Page 505

iSTAR Reader Status Tab Definitions

Table 153:  iSTAR Reader Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Firmware Version The version number of the reader firmware.

Communications Communications displays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fail if the
Controller cannot communicate with the Reader.

PIN Required PIN Required displays the value True if PIN Required has been selected on the Keypad tab or False otherwise.

Tamper Displays the status of the Tamper Input. Not available on Direct Connect Wiegand readers.

Keypad Command This field displays status of the Keypad Commands Allowed setting from the Reader Editor Keypad tab:
Allow Status • Not Allowed
• Allowed
• Allowed during specified schedule.

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions

Table 154:  iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Firmware Version The version number of the reader firmware.

Communications Communications displays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fail if the
Controller cannot communicate with the Reader.

PIN Required PIN Required displays the value True if PIN Required has been selected on the Keypad tab or False otherwise.

Tamper True if a Tamper status is detected for the PIM Reader, or False if no Tamper condition is detected.

Keypad Command This field displays status of the Keypad Commands Allowed setting from the Reader Editor Keypad tab:
Allow Status • Not Allowed
• Allowed
• Allowed during specified schedule.

504 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Status Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

[PIM1-pro 1] - PIM True if a Tamper status is detected for the PIM-485 board to which this reader is attached, or False if no Tamper condition
Tamper is detected.

Motor Stall True if a Motor Stall condition (a problem with the latching mechanism of the door strike) is detected, or False if no Motor
Stall condition is detected.
Available only for PIM-485 WA Series Locks, not for other AD Locks.

Low Battery True if a Low Battery condition is detected for the PIM Reader, or False if no Low Battery condition is detected. Available
only for PIM-485 connected Readers.

Manual Lock True if the Manual Lock Overrride has been activated (unlocked by a physical key), or False if the Manual Lock Override
Override has not been activated. Available only for PIM-485 connected Readers.

Push Button True if the Push Button on the lock panel (inside the room) has been pressed, or False if the Push Button has not been
pressed. Available only for PIM-485 connected Readers.

iSTAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions

Table 155:  iSTAR Aperio Reader Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Communications Communications displays the value Normal if the Controller can communicate with the Reader or Comm Fail if the Controller
cannot communicate with the Reader.

Tamper True if a Tamper status is detected for the Reader, or False if no Tamper condition is detected.

Low Battery True if a Low Battery condition is detected for the Reader, or False if no Low Battery condition is detected.

iSTAR Reader Options Tab

■ Use this tab to enable two factor authentication on the reader.
■ Use this tab to configure OSDP Secure Channel and Installation Mode.
Table 156 on Page 506 lists the additional fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Reader Options tab for
iSTAR Ultra Wiegand Readers.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 505

iSTAR Reader Editor

Table 156:  iSTAR Ultra Wiegand Reader Options Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Dual Authentication

Enable Dual Authentication on Select to enable, deselect to disable.

this Reader See Configuring iSTAR Readers and Doors for Two Factor Authentication on Page 547 for more information.

OSDP Options

Installation Mode Enabled When enabled, allows C•CURE 9000 to communicate securely with a new reader that does not have encryption
keys. The OSDP Secure Channel Enabled check box must be also selected.
• If OSDP Secure Channel Enabled is On (selected) and Installation Mode Enabled is Off (deselected)
and a new reader is presented, it will not communicate with C•CURE 9000.
• If OSDP Secure Channel Enabled is Off (deselected), then communication is always available and the
installation mode is disabled.
• If Installation Mode Enabled is On (selected), then the keys will be exchanged and communication will
begin.
Default: Enabled.
Software House recommends that you disable (clear) this feature for maximum security.

OSDP Secure Channel When enabled, the 485 communication port is encrypted using keys exchanged between the panel and the
Enabled readers. See Installation Mode Enabled.
IMPORTANT:
Enabling or disabling the OSDP Secure Channel requires the reader to be restarted for the changes take
effect. This can be accomplished by power cycling the reader, resetting the ACM, or by resetting the
controller.
Default: Enabled

Reader Options Reader Options (available only for Smart protocol)

(available only for Smart
protocol)

Beep on Key Press Select this check box for the TS-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader to beep when pressing a key.

Beep on Card Read Select this check box for the TS-100 Touchscreen Terminal reader to beep on a card read.

Date Format Select the date format and/or the time format to use.
Time Format

Enable Dual Authentication on Select to enable, deselect to disable.

this Reader See Configuring iSTAR Readers and Doors for Two Factor Authentication on Page 547 for more information.

After-Hours
When configured, the After-Hours Reader feature defines a schedule, an enabling reader, and an iSTAR reader group.
Cardholders with clearance gain access by an enabling door to normally restricted, secure spaces after business hours.
Within this schedule, readers configured as members of an After-Hours Reader Group will reject access to all
cardholders that have not first presented their card to the enabling reader for that particular reader group, even when those
cardholders have valid clearance to member readers. Once a card has been presented and accepted at the enabling

506 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

reader, it will then have access to any members of the associated After-Hours group to which it has a valid clearance for
the remainder of the schedule.

The After-Hours feature supersedes clearance restrictions only relative to admission during the schedule. Outside of the
defined schedule, cardholders will have the normally expected access to readers within the After-Hours Reader Group.
Refer to After-Hours Readers Under Offline State Conditions on Page 508 for information regarding After-Hours enabled
readers during offline conditions.

The After-Hours restriction can be overridden for certain cardholders by using the AntiPassback Exempt Flag to indicate
After-Hours Exemption. The AntiPassback Exempt Flag is on the General tab of the Personnel record. Use of the
AntiPassback Exempt Flag to override After-Hours is set in System Variables. Refer to Setting the AntiPassback
Exempt Flag on Page 508 for instructions on setting the AntiPassback Exempt Flag.

For proper functionality, when configuring an After-Hours Reader feature, the After-Hours Reader Group, the enabling reader, and
NOTE the schedule that is assigned to these units must all be configured in the same time zone.

Configuring the After-Hours Readers Feature

This section provides instructions for configuring the After-Hours Reader Group, Schedule, and Enabling Readers required
for the After-Hours Readers feature.

Configuring an After-Hours Reader Group

1. If creating the first After-Hours Reader Group, open the Hardware pane and right-click the Hardware folder at the
top of the Hardware tree. Select After-Hours Reader Groups from the drop-down menu. Click New and an After-
Hours Reader Group editor appears.
or
If the After-Hours Reader Group folder already exists in the Hardware tree, select the After-Hours Reader Group
folder and click New.

2. Enter information in the Name and Description fields.

3. In the Objects in Group section, select Add and choose previously configured readers to add to this group.
4. Save and close the After-Hours Reader Group editor. A folder appears in the Hardware tree containing all configured
After-Hours Reader Groups.

Configuring an After-Hours Enabling Reader

1. Open the Reader editor that you want to enable as an After-Hours reader. Follow the procedures for accessing a
Reader editor as described in Reader Overview on Page 470.
2. Select the After-Hours tab.
3. Select the Enable After-Hours Reader Group check box. By default, this feature is disabled.
4. Click to select an After-Hours Reader Group to associate with the Enabling Reader.
5. Click to select an After-Hours Schedule during which the After-Hours feature is active.

If required, follow the instructions for creating and configuring an After-Hours Schedule as explained in the C•CURE 9000 Software
NOTE Configuration Guide.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 507

iSTAR Reader Editor

6. Save and close the reader editor.

Setting the AntiPassback Exempt Flag

1. In the Administration Station, select Options & Tools and click System Variables. The System Variables screen
appears.
2. Expand the iSTAR Driver section and select the After-Hours AntiPassback Exempt system variable. Enter True
into the value field. The default setting is False.
3. Close the System Variables window. A restart of the iSTAR is required to implement this system variables change.

After-Hours Readers Under Offline State Conditions

The After-Hours Enabling Reader is a host-based feature which does not operate effectively if the iSTAR controller that
controls the enabling reader (or member readers of a reader group) is in an offline or communication failure state. During
such communication failures, readers which are out of communication with the host will not have a means of granting
access to cardholders.

If the enabling reader is controlled by a panel that is offline:

■ Any card holder that is already granted access by the enabling reader before a panel is put offline will still be able to
gain access to all member readers.
■ Any new cardholder that is not granted access by the enabling reader before the panel is put offline will not be able to
gain access at any member readers

If the enabling reader is not controlled by a panel that is offline:

■ Any cardholder that is already granted access by the enabling reader before a panel is put offline will still be able to
gain access to all member readers.
■ Any new cardholder that is not granted access by the enabling reader before the panel is put offline will not be able to
gain access at the member readers on this offline panel. If this cardholder is then granted access by the enabling
reader, it will be able to gain access to the other remaining member readers that are not on an offline panel.

Once communication with the host is restored, the panel controlling the enabling reader resumes normal operation.

iSTAR Reader Touchscreen Tab

The iSTAR Reader Touchscreen tab is used to set the Automatic Dim brightness and time, and to enable the Touchscreen
scramble key feature. This tab also displays the card types supported and allows you to reorder the priority of the card
types.

iSTAR Reader Touchscreen Tab Definitions

Table 157 on Page 509 lists the fields and buttons that appear on the iSTAR Reader Touchscreen tab.

508 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

Table 157:  iSTAR Reader Touchscreen Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Touchscreen Configuration

Automatic Dim Select the time the LCD display timeouts and goes dark after no motion is detected in front of the reader.
Timeout The default is 2 minutes.

Brightness during Select the percentage of screen brightness when the reader is in use and before the LCD display goes dark due to the
Auto Dim Automatic Dim Timeout.
The default is 0.

Card Types

Lists the supported card types, and allows you to select and reorder the priority of the card type to the card type(s) used.
To reorder the priority:
1. Click on the card type row to select it.
2. Click Up or Down to move the card type to the priority in the list.

High Assurance Tab

Use this tab to configure the Innometriks reader high assurance settings.

High assurance is supported on the iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE (Ultra Mode), and Ultra LT controllers.

The CHUID (Cardholder Unique Identifier) container is always sent.

NOTE

CAK, PIN, and Biometrics are single factor authentications when used alone. Any two together are a double factor
authentication, and all three together are a triple factor authentication.

See Innometriks High Assurance Reader Configuration on Page 480 for configuration information.
iSTAR Reader High Assurance Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

High Assurance Reader

Support High Assurance Reader When selected (enabled), the High Assurance Operation Modes become available for selection.
Default: Disabled (clear)

High Assurance Operation Mode

Normal Mode Select the authentications listed to run in normal mode.

Secure Mode Select the authentications listed to support high assurance.

CAK Card authentication.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 509

iSTAR Reader Editor

iSTAR Reader High Assurance Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

PAK Physical Access Control System (PAK). Card plus PIN authentication.
NOTE: If you select PAK, Card PIN is automatically selected.

Card PIN Personal Identification Number (PIN) authentication from a card or panel.

If you select Card PIN, PAK is automatically selected.

Biometrics Biometric authentication from card.

iSTAR Reader State Images Tab

The State Images tab for a Reader provides a means to change the default images used to indicate iSTAR Reader device
states on the Monitoring Station.

See State Images Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 281 for information on using the State Images tab for an iSTAR
Reader.

See Table 158 on Page 510 for default State Images for an iSTAR RM reader

See Table 159 on Page 510 for default State Images for an iSTAR PIM-485 reader (Schlage wireless lock and reader).

iSTAR Reader State Images Tab Definitions

Table 158:  iSTAR Reader State Images Tab Definitions

Icon Description Icon Description

Unknown Tampered

Comm Fail Normal

Table 159:  iSTAR PIM 485 Reader State Images Definitions

Icon Description Icon Description Icon Description

Unknown Normal Low Battery

Comm Fail Motor Stall (Schlage Wireless Only) Manual Lock Override (Schlage Wireless
Only)

510 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Reader Editor

Icon Description Icon Description Icon Description

Tampered PIM Tamper (Schlage Wireless Push Button (Schlage Wireless Only)

Only)

Table 160:  iSTAR Aperio Reader State Images Definitions

Icon Description Icon Description

Unknown Key Cylinder Override (Aperio only)

Comm Fail Lock State Locked (Aperio only)

Tampered Lock State Jammed (Aperio only)

Normal

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 511

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor allows you to configure the settings for a Schlage PIM-485 reader/lock wirelessly
connected to an iSTAR Pro or eX controller PIM-485 board.

iSTAR Schlage Doors do not support Momentary Unlock.

NOTE

The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader editor is shown in Figure 145 on Page 512.

Figure 145:  iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader editor dialog box has the following tabs.
■ iSTAR Reader General tab
Lists the Reader name, connections, and card formats for a reader connected to an iSTAR Classic/Pro, or iSTAR eX.
See iSTAR Reader General Tab on Page 498.
■ iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O tab
This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See the iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab
on Page 513.
■ iSTAR Reader Keypad tab
This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad on iSTAR Schlage Readers. See iSTAR
Reader Keypad Tab on Page 501.
Only Schlage Keypad Mode 1 keypad output format (4 data bits per key with no parity) is supported. The mode is
configured on the Schlage device.
■ iSTAR Reader Triggers tab
See the Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.

512 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

You can define triggers for the following Properties of the iSTAR PIM-485 Reader:

Property Value

Communication Status Normal or Comm Fail

Low Battery Active or inactive

Manual Lock Override Active or inactive

Motor Stall Active or inactive

Parent PIM Tamper Active or inactive

PIN Required Status Not Required, Card and PN Required, or PIN Only

Push Button Active or inactive

Tamper Status Active or inactive

■ iSTAR Reader Groups tab

If you have created a Group containing iSTAR readers and added this Reader to it, the iSTAR Reader editor also
displays a Groups tab.
This tab lists the Reader groups to which this Reader belongs. See the Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36
for information on using the Group tab for the iSTAR Reader.
■ iSTAR Reader Status tab
This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, PIN Required, and Keypad Command
Allow Status of the Reader. See the iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 504.
■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab
This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to
customize these state images. See the iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 510.

You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Dynamic View. See Add or
Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O Tab

The iSTAR PIM-485 Reader I/O tab lets you configure the inputs and outputs for the reader. Each input and output is pre-
assigned to a specific function for the reader. Typically you can use the Create All buttons to create the inputs and
outputs, and then click the button in the Edit column to configure each input and output individually.

You can configure these inputs and outputs by clicking on in the Edit column. You can then create triggers that can
activate Events based on state changes.

Example:
You can create a trigger to activate an Event if the Low Battery Input status changes to Active (indicating that the
reader battery charge is low). See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278.

Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader I/O tab are described in Table 161 on Page 514.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 513

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

Table 161:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Inputs

Create All Inputs Click to create all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Delete All Inputs Click to delete all eight Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Edit Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input editor to edit the Input.

Connection This read-only field identifies the position of each Input on the I/O tab.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to
select an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

Wireless DSM Represents the Wireless Door Switch Monitor (DSM) for the door.

Wireless REX Represents the Wireless Request To Exit (REX) for the door.

Wireless Reader Represents the Tamper Input on the Wireless Reader.

Tamper

Wireless Reader Represents the Communications Failure Input on the Wireless Reader.
Communications
Fail

Motor Stall Represents the Motor Stall Input on the Wireless Reader.

Low Battery Represents the Low Battery Input on the Wireless Reader.

Manual Lock When this input is active, it indicates that the lock has been unlocked by a physical key.
Override The Manual Lock Override status is available on the Status tab for this reader. This property is available for use in triggers.

Push Button When this input is active, it indicates that the push button on the lock panel (inside the room) has been pushed.
The Push Button Input status is available on the Status tab for this reader. This property is available for use in triggers.

Outputs

Create All Outputs Click to create all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Delete All Outputs Click to delete all Outputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .

Door Latch Relay Represents the Door Latch Relay Output that is used to unlock the door.

Edit Click in this column to open the iSTAR Output editor to edit the Output.

514 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR PIM-485 Reader Editor

Table 161:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Connection This read-only field identifies the position of the Output on the I/O tab.

Configured indicates that the Output has been configured.

indicates that the Output has not been configured.

Name Displays the system-generated name for this Output. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Output. If the Output is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then
click to select an Output Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 515

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor allows you to configure the settings for an Aperio reader/lock wirelessly connected to an
iSTAR Ultra controller Aperio RS-485 Hub board.

The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor is shown in Figure 146 on Page 516.

Figure 146:  iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

When you add an iSTAR Aperio Reader, Enable it in the Aperio Reader editor, and Save and Close the editor, a Door
object for that reader is added to the parent Ultra controller in the iSTAR Aperio Doors folder in the Hardware tree.

If you delete an iSTAR Aperio Reader, the iSTAR Aperio Door associated with the reader is also deleted.

If you display a list of iSTAR Doors, the new Aperio Door appears on the list. See iSTAR Aperio Door Editor on Page 420
for more information on Aperio Doors.

516 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

Figure 147:  iSTAR Aperio Doors

The iSTAR Aperio Reader editor dialog box has the following tabs.
■ iSTAR Reader General tab
Lists the Ultra controller name, Hub board, Assigned to Door, Reader number, Device ID, and Reader type. See
iSTAR Reader General Tab on Page 498.
■ iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O tab
This tab lets you configure the available Inputs and Outputs for the Reader. See the iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab on
Page 518.
■ iSTAR Reader Keypad tab
This tab lets you configure the settings and options for the Reader Keypad on iSTAR Aperio Readers. See
iSTAR Aperio Reader Keypad Tab on Page 277.
■ iSTAR Reader Triggers tab
See the Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR Ultra device.
You can define triggers for the following Properties of the iSTAR Aperio Reader:

Property Value

Communication Status Normal or Comm Fail

Key Cylinder Override Active or inactive

Lock State Jammed Active or inactive

Lock State Locked Active or inactive

Low Battery Status Active or inactive

Tamper Status Active or inactive

■ iSTAR Reader Status tab

This tab displays several read-only fields that report the Communications, Tamper, and Low Battery status of the
Reader. See the iSTAR Reader Status Tab on Page 504.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 517

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

■ iSTAR Reader State Images tab

This tab displays the default images used to depict this reader in the Monitoring Station. You can use this tab to
customize these state images. See the iSTAR Reader State Images Tab on Page 510.

You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an iSTAR Aperio Reader Dynamic View. See Add or
Remove Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O Tab

The iSTAR Aperio Reader I/O tab lets you configure the inputs for the reader. Each input is pre-assigned to a specific
function for the reader. Typically you can use the Create All buttons to create the inputs, and then click the button in the
Edit column to configure each input individually.

The number of inputs available on this tab varies, depending upon the reader model configured on the General tab in the
Reader Type field.

When an Aperio reader input is changed from active to inactive while the iSTAR Controller is offline, the
NOTE controller continues to report the input as active when the controller comes back online.
Workaround: Activate and then deactivate the input to synchronize the input with the controller.

You can configure these inputs by clicking on in the Edit column. You can then create triggers that can activate
Events based on state changes.

Example:
You can create a trigger to activate an Event if the Lock Low Battery Input status changes to Active (indicating that
the reader battery charge is low). See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278.

Definitions for the fields and buttons on the Reader I/O tab are described in Table 162 on Page 518.

Definitions for the input types are described in Table 163 on Page 519.
Table 162:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Create All Click to create all Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Delete All Click to delete all Inputs. The check boxes in the Configured column are set to .
Inputs

Edit Click in this column to open the iSTAR Input editor to edit the Input.

Connection This read-only field indicates the three standard inputs (Comm Fail, Low Battery, and Lock State Jammed.

Configured indicates that the Input has been configured.

indicates that the Input has not been configured.

Name Displays the system-generated name for this Input. You can edit this name by clicking in the field.

Template Displays the Template used for creating this Input. If the Input is not yet configured, you can click in this column, then click to select
an Input Template. If the Configured column displays , this field cannot be edited.

518 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Aperio Reader Editor

Table 163:  iSTAR Reader I/O Tab Input Definitions

Field/Button Description

Lock Reader Tamper Represents the state of the Tamper input on the lock.

Handle State / Request to Exit Represents the state of the Request to Exit input associated with the door handle.

Lock State Locked Represents the

Key Cylinder Override Represents the state of the Key Cylinder Override.

Door Position State Represents state of the Door Switch Monitor for the door associated with this reader.

Lock Communications Fail Represents the Lock Communications Failure Input on the Aperio Reader.

Lock State Jammed Represents the Lock State Jammed Input on the Aperio Reader.

Lock Low Battery Represents the Lock Low Battery Input on the Aperio Reader.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 519

apC Reader Editor

apC Reader Editor

The apC Reader Editor is used to configure apC Readers that you have created on the apC Controller Readers tab.

The apC Reader editor has the following tabs:

■ apC Reader General Tab on Page 520
■ apC Reader Input/Output Tab on Page 521
■ apC Reader Keypad Tab on Page 522
■ Hardware Groups Tab Definitions on Page 36
■ apC Reader Triggers Tab on Page 522
■ apC Reader Status Tab on Page 522
■ apC Reader State Images Tab on Page 522

You can add or remove Card Formats from multiple Readers via an apC Reader Dynamic View. See Add or Remove
Reader Card Formats on Page 33 for more information.

apC Reader General Tab

To Configure a Reader Using the apC Reader General Tab

1. Select a Reader Type: MRM, Direct Connect Wiegand, or RM, as shown in Figure 148 on Page 521.
The Reader Type selected should match the connected apC panel since the type will affect the inputs and outputs
available on the Reader I/O tab.
Example:
• The RM has 2 supervised inputs and 2 outputs.
• the MRM has 2 supervised inputs and 1 output.
The Identification area in the Readers - General tab displays read-only, previously-configured information.
2. To choose a card format for the reader that you have selected, click Add in the Card Format area. The Card Format
browser appears, as shown in Figure 148 on Page 521.

You may configure an apC Reader from the apC panel Readers tab or from the Add-on Board tab. A
NOTE reader index configured on one tab will be unavailable on the other tab. The location chosen will affect
the possible reader type and reader input/output option selection.
See the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide - Table 1-5 for a list of UL approved card formats and
readers.

520 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Reader Editor

Figure 148:  apC Controller - Readers - General Tab

3. Click the applicable row in the Card Format browser to select Card Format. Repeat for multiple formats.
4. Navigate to the Input/Output (I/O) tab (see on Page 521).

apC Reader Input/Output Tab

Dedicated Supervised Inputs and Outputs vary on the apC Readers I/O tab, depending upon the Reader Type selected in
the Reader General tab.

To Configure the I/O Tab

1. To configure the Inputs, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Controller Inputs on Page 333.
2. To configure Outputs, follow the instructions given in To Configure apC Outputs on Page 334.
3. Navigate to the Keypad tab to configure the PIN requirements for the reader.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 521

apC Reader Editor

apC Reader Keypad Tab

The apC Readers - Keypad tab provides a means to control reader keypads. Keypad configuration on an apC panel allows
specification of Card and PIN required. The Schedule is configurable when a PIN is required and restricts the time when
the PIN must be entered. The default Schedule is Always and is the initial value of the Schedule browser.

To Configure the apC Readers - Keypad Tab

1. Choose one of three options for PIN Requirements:
• PIN is not required - to require a card swipe only;
• PIN Only
• Card and PIN required - to require a both a card swipe or presentation with a PIN entry.
2. Click to select a Schedule, which is set up in the Configuration Pane.
If you selected PIN is not required or Card and PIN required for PIN Requirements, two choices appear in the
Options area.
3. Choose either of the following options:
• Allow card numbers to be entered from the keypad.
• Use PIN+1 as duress code.

apC Reader Triggers Tab

See the following for information on apC Triggers:
■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 363.
■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 363.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279

You can click Save and Close after configuring apC Reader triggers, or navigate to the Status tab.

apC Reader Status Tab

The apC Reader Status tab provides a read-only listing of critical information about the operational status of the selected
apC Readers including:

n Communications - displays the values Normal or Comm Fail

n Tamper - displays the values True or False.
n PIN Required - displays the values True or False.

apC Reader State Images Tab

The State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate reader states These images appear
on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object.

522 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Reader Editor

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image. A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you
have placed replacement images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default.
4. Click Save and Close.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 12 523

apC Reader Editor

524 Chapter 12 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 13

Chapter 13 - Configuring Reader LCD Messages, LED Colors, LED

Patterns, and Beep Patterns

This chapter explains how to customize sets of messages, such as “Present Card” or “Access Granted,” for your RM, non-
RM, and OSDP readers to meet the specific needs of your facility or site. It also explains how to customize OSDP reader
LED and beep patterns.

In this chapter

LCD Message Set 526

LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns 538

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 525

LCD Message Set

LCD Message Set

Some readers display LCD messages, such as “Present Card” or “Access Granted” to indicate different states to
cardholders. You can customize the message sets to meet the specific needs of your facility or site.

Example:
You could change the “Access Granted” message to “Please Enter Now”.

When you assign a set of messages to an iSTAR Controller or an apC Panel, all those types of readers (RM or OSDP) on
that controller use the same messages.

The Reader LCD Message Set Editor allows you to configure message sets. You can also use the Reader LCD
Message Set Editor to change the language in which your messages appear. See Changing the Language for the Default
LCD Messages on Page 531.

Only ASCII characters 0 to 125 are supported for display on the reader.
NOTE
■ There are 94 printable characters. (Code 1 to 31 are non-printing, mostly obsolete characters that
affect how text is processed.)
■ No accented characters are supported.

Accessing the Reader LCD Message Set Editor

You access the Reader LCD Message Set Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane.

To Access the Reader LCD Message Set Editor

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click the Hardware Folder, click Reader LCD Message Set, and select New on the sub-menu that appears.
(Once you create a message set, a Reader LCD Message Set folder appears in the Hardware Tree.)
- or -
Click the Hardware drop-down list and scroll down to select Reader LCD Message Set.

Click to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all existing Reader LCD Message Sets, right-click the Reader
LCD Message Set you want to change, and click Edit from the context menu that appears.
The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens. Figure 149 on Page 527 shows the Reader LCD Message Set Editor,
the default setting.

526 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

LCD Message Set

Figure 149:  Reader LCD Message Set Editor

To Access OSDP Message Sets and LED Control Configurable Options:

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click the Hardware Folder, click Reader LCD Message Set, and select New on the sub-menu that appears.
(Once you create a message set, a Reader LCD Message Set folder appears in the Hardware Tree.)
- or -
Click the Hardware drop-down list and scroll down to select Reader LCD Message Set.

Click to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all existing Reader LCD Message Sets, right-click the Reader
LCD Message Set you want to change, and click Edit from the context menu.
3. In the Reader Message Set editor, click Support OSDP LED Control to access OSDP readers configurable message
sets and LED control.
Figure 150 on Page 528 shows the OSDP Reader LCD Message Set and LED Control Editor.
See LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns on Page 538 for configuration information.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 527

LCD Message Set

Figure 150:  OSDP Reader LED Control Message Set Editor

Reader LCD Message Set

The Reader LCD Message Set Editor fields are described in Table 164 on Page 528Table 165 on Page 529
Table 164:  Reader LCD Message Set Editor -

Field/Button Description

Name Enter a name for the Reader LCD Message Set.

Description Enter a brief description for this Reader LCD Message Set.

Partition This read-only field identifies the Partition to which this Reader LCD Message Set belongs. (This field is visible only if the
C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned.)

Display Formats

Date Select the format for the date display: MM/DD/YY (the default) or DD/MM/YY

Time: Hour Clock Select the format for the time display: 12 hour (the default) or 24 hour.

Support OSDP LED Opens the configurable options for message, LED, and Beep Patterns.
Control

Messages

528 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

LCD Message Set

Reader LCD Message Set Editor - (continued)

Field/Button Description

Message Name Name of the Reader LCD Message string.

Message Text Default text for the Reader LCD Message.

Table 165:  Reader LCD Messages

Message Message Text Description iSTAR apC

Name Uses Uses

Access granted ACCESS Admit text–general use Yes Yes

GRANTED

Access denied ACCESS DENIED Reject text–general use Yes Yes

Enter PIN ENTER PIN Enter PIN prompt–general use Yes Yes

Enter next card ENTER NEXT Enter next card prompt–used for occupancy and visitor/escort features Yes Yes
CARD

Unlocked UNLOCKED Door unlocked mode text–general use Yes Yes

Please wait PLEASE WAIT Text displayed while access decision pending–general use Yes Yes

Wait - busy WAIT - BUSY Text displayed when door busy processing a previous access–general use Yes Yes

Enter floor ENTER FLOOR apC display for elevator admit–general use No Yes

Reader not READER NOT Text displayed when reader disabled–general use Yes Yes
ready READY

Present card PRESENT CARD Locked Door mode text–general use Yes Yes

Enter command ENTER Intrusion entrance delay text–intrusion zone feature Yes No
COMMAND

Misread card MISREAD Visitor/escort misread card feedback text–visitor/escort feature Yes No

All secure ALL SECURE Intrusion zone all inputs secure text–intrusion zone feature Yes No

Exit now EXIT NOW Intrusion exit delay text–intrusion zone feature Yes No

Ready to arm READY TO ARM Intrusion zone ready to arm status text–intrusion zone feature Yes No

Not ready to arm NOT READY TO Intrusion zone not ready to arm status text–intrusion zone feature Yes No
ARM

Door in alert DOOR IN ALERT iSTAR reader tampered text, or apC reader tamper or door held forced Yes Yes
open text–general use

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 529

LCD Message Set

Reader LCD Messages (continued)

Message Message Text Description iSTAR apC

Name Uses Uses

Area armed AREA ARMED Intrusion zone armed mode text–intrusion zone feature Yes No

Area disarmed AREA DISARMED Intrusion zone disarmed mode text–intrusion zone feature Yes No

Secure pending SECURE Intrusion zone disarm pending text–intrusion zone feature Yes No
PENDING

Secure SECURE Door secure mode text–general use Yes Yes

Keypad CMD ISSUED Keypad command issued text–keypad commands feature Yes No
Command
Issued

Keypad CMD FAILED Keypad command failed text–keypad commands feature Yes No
Command
Failed

Keypad ENTER ACCESS Keypad command prompt 1 text–keypad commands feature Yes No
Command
Prompt 1

Keypad ENTER TARGET Keypad command prompt 2 text–keypad commands feature Yes No
Command
Prompt 2

Acknowledged ACKNOWLEDGED Enter next card acknowledgement text–occupancy and visitor/escort Yes No
features

Enter escort ENTER ESCORT Request Escort prompt–occupancy and visitor/escort features Yes No

Secure violated SECURE Intrusion zone armed and violated status text–intrusion zone feature Yes No
VIOLATED

Secure SECURE Intrusion zone armed but not ready to re-arm status text–intrusion zone Yes No
offnormal OFFNORMAL feature

Lockout LOCKOUT & T Area lockout reject & T will be replaced with remaining lockout time Yes No
HHH:MM HHH:MM–area lockout feature

Reject REJECT Occupancy reject indicates that supervisor/escort cannot leave Yes No
unattended UNATTEND supervisees/visitors unattended–occupancy feature

Reject REJECT Occupancy general reject text–occupancy feature Yes No

occupancy OCCUPANCY

Door held open DOOR HELD iSTAR door held open status text–STAR only (apC displays Door in Alert Yes No
OPEN instead)

Door forced DOOR FORCED iSTAR door forced open status text–iSTAR only (apC displays Door in Alert Yes No
open OPEN instead)

530 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

LCD Message Set

Changing the Language for the Default LCD Messages

You can use the Reader LCD Message Set Editor to easily change the language in which the default messages appear.
When you first start the C•CURE 9000, the default messages appear in the system-wide primary language you chose
during installation.

Example:
You chose English as the primary system language and configured all the sets of English messages your Boston site
needs; you may now want to customize some message sets in French for your Montreal site.

The C•CURE 9000Multilingual User Interface (MUI) Editor, available as a licensed option when
NOTE purchasing C•CURE 9000, allows you to localize the C•CURE 9000 user interface for a broad range of
languages and cultures. When installed and enabled, the C•CURE 9000 MUI Editor allows anyone with
appropriate access permissions to localize individual screens and system messages, including the Reader
LCD Message Sets, from within C•CURE 9000 at any time. For information on the MUI Editor see the
chapter, “Displaying the C•CURE 9000 in Multiple Languages” in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance
Guide.

To Change the Language for the Default Message Set

1. Exit the C•CURE 9000 Administration Application.
2. Go to the Windows Control Panel and click Regional and Language Options.
3. Use the Regional Options tab on the Regional and Language Options dialog box to change to the language and
culture you need by clicking the down- arrow to scroll to your choice and the Customize button to specify your own
required formats.
Example:
French (Canada).

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 531

LCD Message Set

Figure 151:  Windows Regional and Language Options Screen

4. Click Apply and then OK.

5. Restart the Administration Application, click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane.
6. Right-click the Reader LCD Message Sets Folder in the Hardware tree and click New on the sub-menu that appears,
as shown in on Page 526.
7. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens, and you can customize a set of messages in French.

Reader LCD Message Set Editor

The Reader LCD Message Set Editor lets you modify LCD message text for messages that display on the readers.

In addition, the editor lets you select the way the date and time display on the Reader. The Reader LCD Message Set
Editor has only one tab—the General tab.

For more information, see:

■ Accessing the Reader LCD Message Set Editor on Page 526
■ Reader LCD Message Set on Page 528
■ Creating a Reader LCD Message Set on Page 533

Reader LCD Message Set Tasks

You can perform the following tasks to configure Reader LCD Message Sets.
■ Creating a Reader LCD Message Set on Page 533
■ Creating a Reader LCD Message Set Template on Page 533
■ Configuring a Reader LCD Message Set on Page 534

532 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

LCD Message Set

■ Assigning New Message Sets and Reassigning Updated Message Sets on Page 534
■ Viewing a List of Reader LCD Message Sets on Page 535
■ Deleting a Reader LCD Message Set on Page 536
■ Using Set Property to Configure Reader LCD Message Set on Page 537

Creating a Reader LCD Message Set

You can create a new Reader LCD Message Set.

To Create a Reader LCD Message Set

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click the Hardware Folder, click Reader LCD Message Set, and click New on the sub-menu that appears.
- or -
If Reader LCD Message Sets were already created, right-click the Reader LCD Message Sets Folder and click New
on the sub-menu that appears.
3. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens, and you can configure the message set.
4. To save your new Reader LCD Message Set, click Save and Close.
- Or -
Alternatively, if you want to save the Reader LCD Message Set and then create a new one, click Save and New. The
current Reader LCD Message Set is saved and closed, but the Reader LCD Message Set Editor remains open to
allow you to create a new Reader LCD Message Set.

Creating a Reader LCD Message Set Template

You can create a new template for a Reader LCD Message Set. A Reader LCD Message Set template saves you time
because you can reuse the same configuration repeatedly.

To Create a Reader LCD Message Set Template

1. Click the Hardware button in the Navigation Pane to open the Hardware Tree.
2. Right-click the Hardware Folder, click Reader LCD Message Set, and click New Template on the sub-menu that
appears.
- or -
If Reader LCD Message Sets were already created, right-click the Reader LCD Message Sets Folder and click New
Template on the sub-menu that appears.
The Reader LCD Message Set Editor where you can configure the Reader LCD Message Set template opens.
3. Configure the template to meet your requirements. Any fields you configure values for become part of the template;
then when you subsequently create a new Reader LCD Message Set from that template, these values are already
filled in.
4. In the Name field, enter the name you wish to use for the template.
Example:

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 533

LCD Message Set

Reader LCD Message Set Template1

5. To save the template, click Save and Close.
The template will be available as an option on the pull-down Template menu.

Configuring a Reader LCD Message Set

You can configure a new Reader LCD Message Set or modify an existing one using the Reader LCD Message Set
Editor. To modify an assigned message set, see

To Configure a Reader LCD Message Set

1. Create a new Reader LCD Message Set or modify an existing Reader LCD Message Set.
The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens for you to edit the Reader LCD Message Set making changes as you
wish in the fields on the top of the editor and on the General tab.
2. Type a Name and Description for the Reader LCD Message Set that sufficiently identifies this message set and its
purpose.
3. Select your desired date format. Use the default MM/DD/YY or click the drop-down menu to select the DD/MM/YY.
4. Select the time format. Use the default 12 Hour Clock or click the drop-down menu to select the 24 Hour Clock.
5. In the Messages box, use the vertical scroll bar to find the message you want to modify in the Message Name column
and change its related entry in the Message Text column as desired.
There are 34 text messages you can modify for your uses. Many of them are used by, and can be downloaded to,
iSTAR and apC controllers. For detailed information about the messages, see Reader LCD Message Set on Page
528.

Assigning New Message Sets and Reassigning Updated Message Sets

This section describes how to assign a message set to all readers on a controller. It also describes the steps to take if the
assigned message is updated after it was assigned.

Assigning a Message Set

To Assign a Message Set:

1. Open the controller editor.
2. Click the General tab.

3. In the RM LCD Messages field, click .

A list of message sets applicable to the controller appears.
4. Select the message set in the list.
5. Click Save and Close.

534 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

LCD Message Set

Reassigning an Updated Message Set

Updated message sets are not automatically downloaded to the controller. The assigned message must be deleted and
then reassigned. Otherwise, the message set updates will not take effect until the controller is rebooted.

To Reassign a Message Set:

1. Open the controller editor.
2. Click the General tab.
3. In the RM LCD Messages , clear the field with the message set. Highlight the name and click Delete on your
keyboard.

4. Click .
5. Select the message set in the list. Message sets using OSDP control will not appear if the controller does not support
OSDP.
6. Click Save and Close.

Viewing a List of Reader LCD Message Sets

You can display a list of the Reader LCD Message Sets you have created by opening a Dynamic View of Reader LCD
Message Sets.

To View a List of Reader LCD Message Sets

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.

2. Select Reader LCD Message Set from the Hardware drop-down list and click to open a Dynamic View
showing a list of all existing Reader LCD Message Sets, as shown in Figure 152 on Page 535. (You can also click the
down-arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or open a new tabbed view).
Figure 152:  Reader LCD Message Set List

• You can sort, filter, and group items in the list.

• You can right-click a Reader LCD Message Set in the list to open the Reader LCD Message Set Context menu
(see Table 166 on Page 536) and perform any of the functions on that menu.
• You can right-click any column heading to open a context menu of all possible Reader LCD Message Set fields that
can display as columns and add/remove fields to view certain information.
For more information on using Dynamic Views, see the Dynamic Views chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views
Guide.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 535

LCD Message Set

Reader LCD Message Set List Context Menu

The context menu that opens when you right-click a Reader LCD Message Set in the Reader LCD Message Set Dynamic
View includes the selections described in Table 166 on Page 536.
Table 166:  Reader LCD Message Set List Right-Click Context Menu Options

Menu Description
Selection

Edit Click this menu selection to edit the selected Reader LCD Message Set. The Reader LCD Message Set Editor opens. You can
rename the message set and change any of its attributes.

Delete Click this menu selection to delete the selected Reader LCD Message Set. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to
delete the Reader LCD Message Set. Click Yes to delete the Reader LCD Message Set or No to cancel the deletion.
NOTE: You cannot delete a Reader LCD Message Set if it is being used by an iSTAR and/or apC Controller.

Set Click this menu selection to change the value of the selected properties in the selected Reader LCD Message Set(s).
property
A dialog box appears asking you to select a property to change. Click to open a selection list and click the property you wish to
change. You can then change the value of the following property:
• Description – You can change the textual description of the Reader LCD Message Set(s) by selecting this property and typing
in a new value.

Export Click this menu selection to Open an Export...to XML or CSV file dialog box to export one or more of the selected Reader LCD
selection Message Set records to either an XML or a CSV file. This allows you to quickly and easily create XML/CSV reports on the selected
data.
NOTE: Although XML is the initial default file type, once you choose a type in the Save as type field, whether XML or CSV, that
becomes the default the next time this dialog box opens.

CSV-formatted exports cannot be imported. If you require importing functionality, export to XML.
• When you export to an XML file, all available data for the selected object(s), whether displayed in the Dynamic View or not—as
well as all the child objects of the selected record(s), is exported.
• When you export to a CSV file, only data in the columns displaying in the Dynamic View is exported, and in the order displayed.
This allows you to both select and arrange data fields for your report. In addition, exporting to a CSV file allows you to view the
exported data in an Excel spreadsheet and further manipulate it for your use.
For more information, see the Dynamic Views chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide.
NOTE: When you click Export Selection, you are running the export on the client computer. Consequently, the system does not
use the Default Export Directory Path—which is on the server. It opens a directory on the client, reverting to the last directory
used. You can navigate to the default export server directory, if you wish. Or to avoid confusion or use the same destination
folder for both client and server computers, you can use UNC (Universal Naming Convention) paths, for example:
\\Computer Name\
Program Files\Software House\SWHouse\SWHSystem\Export.

Find in Click this menu selection to Open a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the Query criteria
Audit Log to search for entries in the Audit Log that reference the selected Reader LCD Message Set. When found the results display in a
separate Dynamic View.

Find in Click this menu selection to Open a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the Query criteria
Journal to search for entries in the Journal that reference the selected Reader LCD Message Set. When found the results display in a
separate Dynamic View.

Deleting a Reader LCD Message Set

You can delete a Reader LCD Message if it is not currently being used by any iSTAR and/or apC Controller.

536 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

LCD Message Set

To Delete a Reader LCD Message

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Reader LCD Message Set from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Reader LCD Message objects.
4. Right-click the Reader LCD Message Set(s) in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context
menu. A confirmation message appears.
5. Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the Reader LCD Message Set or click No to cancel the deletion.
If you click Yes, the Reader LCD Message Set objects dialog box appears showing the results of the delete
operation, with one line per message set. If no controllers are using the message set(s), the line shows that the
message set was deleted. If, however, the message is in use, the message Unable to delete object - The message
set is currently in use by iSTAR or apC controllers. Please remove the message set from the controller(s) is
displayed.

Using Set Property to Configure Reader LCD Message Set

You can use Set Property to quickly set a property for one or more Reader LCD Message without opening the Reader
LCD Message Set Editor, thus making it useful for mass updates. See Table 166 on Page 536 for the properties that can
be changed.

To Set a Property for a Reader LCD Message

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Reader LCD Message Set from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Reader LCD Message Set objects.
4. Right-click the Reader LCD Message Set(s) in the list for which you want to set the property and select Set Property
from the context menu.
5. Specify the property for the Reader LCD Message Set(s). Click the drop-down menu to see a list of properties.
6. Enter the value for the property and click OK.
7. Click OK on the Setting Properties of Reader LCD Message Set message box.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 537

LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns

LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns

LED color, LED pattern, and beep pattern are supported on OSDP readers on iSTAR Ultra, Ultra SE (Ultra Mode), and
iSTAR Ultra LT controllers with firmware v6.6.5 and higher.

RM and Wiegand readers do NOT support the new colors and patterns.
NOTE

Click the Support OSDP LED Control check box in the Reader LCD Message Set dialog box to access OSDP readers
configurable messages and LED control.

LED colors, LED patterns, and beep patterns are supported with the following messages:
■ Present Card
■ Access granted
■ Access denied
■ Unlocked
■ Secure
■ Door held open
■ Door forced open

The remaining messages can be used, and their text modified. However, customized LED color, LED pattern and beep
pattern are not supported on them in this release.

Limitations
■ Changes to patterns do not take effect until there is a new reader transaction or if the reader is restarted.
■ To utilize the customizable LED/Beep/Message features, the OSDP reader must support the full set of LED/Beep
commands in the OSDP specification.
■ In an OSDP multi-drop environment, use the higher baud rate (38.4K or 115K.) for the customizable LED patterns,
Beep patterns, and LCD message set features.
■ The double-swipe beep configurations supersede all other beep configurations. Avoid using the ninth pattern (400 ms
on/200 off/100 on) and the 10th pattern (100 ms on/200 off/400 on/200 off/100 on/200 off/100 on) if you are using
double-swipe for other purposes.
■ If you are using LED colors, ensure that the reader supports the colors you choose for the configuration. Check the
reader documentation.
■ Occasionally, OSDP readers when configured, not connected to a door, may display unstable LED status information
the first time the reader is powered on. This condition should only last 30 seconds.
■ When the ACM/IP-ACM is busy and/or the Baud rate set on the port is low, LED and beep patterns may not reproduce
perfectly.
■ Setting both the LED and beep to the same pattern will not always synchronize. The buzzer and LED in the OSDP
protocol requires two different protocol messages, and at 9600 baud there is a minimum of 28 ms space between
those, and possibly up to 225 ms between the two requests. When the reader starts the beep pulse and when it starts
the LED flash is based on the reader manufacturer.

538 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns

■ The double-swipe beep configurations supersede all other beep configurations. Avoid using the ninth pattern (400 ms
on/200 off/100 on) and the 10th pattern (100 ms on/200 off/400 on/200 off/100 on/200 off/100 on) if you are using
double-swipe for other purposes.
■ Some readers do not support the blue LED color. Check the reader manufacturer documentation.

LED Color Configuration

Two LED colors can be selected, LED Color #1 and LED Color #2, which appear alternately in the selected pattern.

Supported colors accessed from the LED Color (#1, #2) drop-down menu in the Message Name row:
■ Off (dark)
■ Red
■ Green
■ Amber
■ Blue

Ensure that your reader supports the colors you choose for the configuration. Most readers do not support
NOTE the blue LED color.

LED Pattern Configuration

This section describes LED Color #1 and LED Color #2 patterns.

The LED patterns start with color #1, alternating between color #1 and color #2, if applicable. Table 167 on Page 539

LED color patterns are access from the LED Pattern drop-down menu in the Message Name row.

If either color # is not defined, then the LED for that color # will be off for the specified time.
NOTE

Table 167:  LED Color Patterns

LED Color Sequence

LED Each block represents 100 ms
Selection
Color X = On, Empty box = Off

100 ms On, 200 Off, 400 ON Color #1 X X X X X

Color #2 X X

1000 ms On Color #1 X X X X X X X X X X

Color #2

600 ms On, 400 Off, Repeat Color #1 X X X X X X

Color #2 X X X X

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 539

LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns

LED Color Sequence

LED Each block represents 100 ms
Selection
Color X = On, Empty box = Off

400 ms On, 700 Off, Repeat Color #1 X X X X

Color #2 X X X X X X X

700 ms On Color #1 X X X X X X X

Color #2

400 ms On, 300 Off, Repeat LED #1 X X X X

LED #2 X X X

400 ms On, 200 Off, 100 On, Repeat LED #1 X X X X X

LED #2 X X

100 ms On, LED #1 X X X X X X X

200 Off, 400 On, 200 Off, 100 On, 200
Off, 100 On LED #2 X X X X X X

300 ms On, LED #1 X X X

300 Off, Repeat
LED #2 X X X

800 ms On, LED #1 X X X X X X X X

800 Off, Repeat
LED #2 X X X X X X X X

500 ms On, LED #1 X X X X X

500 Off, Repeat
LED #2 X X X X X

Beep Pattern Configuration

Beep pattern configuration selections are accessed from the Beep Pattern drop-down menu in the Message Name row.

Table 168 on Page 541 describes the beep pattern actions for each selection.

540 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns

Table 168:  Beep Pattern Actions

Selection Beep Action

Always Off Beep is off.

Always On Beep is continuously on.

100 ms On, Beeps for 100 ms, turns off for 200 ms, beeps for 400 ms, and stops.
200 Off,
400 ON

1000 ms On Beeps for 1000 ms and stops

600 ms On, Beeps for 600 ms, turns off for 400 ms, then repeats the sequence.
400 Off, Repeat

400 ms On, 700 Off, Repeat Beeps for 400 ms, turns off for 700 ms, then repeats the sequence.

700 ms On Beeps for 700 ms and stops.

400 ms On, 300 Off, Repeat Beeps for 400 ms, turns off for 300 ms, then repeats the sequence.

400 ms On, 200 Off, 100 On Beeps for 400 ms, turns off for 200 ms, beeps for 100 ms, then stops.

100 ms On, 200 Off, 400 On, 200 Off, 100 Beeps for 100 ms, turns off for 200 ms, beeps for 400 ms, turns off for 200 ms, beeps for 100 ms,
On, 200 Off, 100 On turns off for 200 ms, beeps for 100 ms, then stops.

300 ms On, 300 Off, Repeat Beeps for 300 ms ,turns off for 300 ms, then repeats the sequence.

800 ms On, 800 Off, Repeat Beeps for 800 ms, turns off for 800 ms, then repeats the sequence.

500 ms On, 500 Off, Repeat Beeps for 500 ms, turns off for 500 ms, then repeats the sequence.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 13 541

LED Colors, LED Patterns and Beep Patterns

542 Chapter 13 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 14

Chapter 14 - Two Factor Authentication

This chapter explains how to configure Two Factor Authentication in C•CURE 9000.

In this chapter

Two Factor Authentication Overview 544

Configuring iSTAR Readers and Doors for Two Factor Authentication 547
Configuring Fallback to One Factor Authentication 548
Two Factor Authentication Behaviors 550

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 14 543

Two Factor Authentication Overview

Two Factor Authentication Overview

The two factor authentication feature provides a further level of security for your C•CURE 9000 system, credentials, and
access requests. With this feature, you can gain access to a protected door using a second, additional manner of
authentication before access is granted by the reader. By configuring two factor authentication in your system, you can
avoid cloned credentials from being used without the knowledge of the original owner of the credential. This software-only
security feature is a solution that does not require the deployment of new hardware devices.

The two factor authentication feature in your C•CURE 9000 platform is applied through Duo services. This third party
company and its APIs are integrated to provide you with the utmost security from the beginning to the end of access
requests by providing the following services:
• Signals a mobile phone that a new authentication request is pending.
• An application or automated call on the mobile phone that you can use to approve or deny the authentication
request.

There are two ways Duo services perform the second authentication process for two factor authentication:
• When the cardholder swipes at a two factor authentication protected door and enabled reader, they receive a
notification on their mobile phone requesting approval. They can approve or deny the request from the Duo
application.
• If a user does not have the Duo application but has a registered phone, they receive an automated call prompting
them to press a key to approve the request or terminate the call to deny the request.

Prerequisites
The following components are required to apply two factor authentication to your C•CURE 9000 system and security
objects:
• You need to add a license to the server you are using to host the two factor authentication plugin that has:
— Tyco Web Bridge enabled.
— 2-Factor Mobile Authentication per Door Annual Subscription License option enabled.
— The limit you require for the number of personnel that can be enrolled and the number of doors that participate in
the two factor authentication process.
• A valid account with Duo that requires access to both the Auth API and Admin API. The Admin API is not available
unless you request it directly from Duo.
— For more information see Enabling Two Factor Authentication for C•CURE through DUO APIs on Page 545.

When successful, the status of Web Bridge State in and Application Server Dynamic View appears as Connected.

Two Factor Authentication in an Enterprise Environment

Two factor authentication is initiated by the Satellite Application Server (SAS) that us connected to hardware and the
approved access requests directed to this connected hardware. Therefore, if you are using an Enterprise system, you need
to run the two factor authentication services on each SAS which requires them. All servers in an Enterprise environment
can share a single Duo account.

544 Chapter 14 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Two Factor Authentication Overview

Supporting Hardware
Two factor authentication depends on the firmware version applied to the iSTAR family devices you are using in your
system. Table 169 on Page 545 lists the devices and firmware versions that support the use of the two factor
authentication feature. If the device is not listed, it does not support two factor authentication.
Table 169:  Supported Hardware

Device Firmware version

iSTAR Ultra v6.5.2 or greater.

iSTAR Ultra SE v6.5.2 or greater.

iSTAR Ultra LT v6.5.2 or greater.

iSTAR Edge/eX v6.2.6 or greater.

iSTAR Pro v5.2.D or greater

Enabling Two Factor Authentication for C•CURE through DUO APIs

Before you can enable doors to use two factor authentication ensure you have the prerequisites outlined in Prerequisites on
Page 544.

The Duo service provides documentation that describes the process of adding these applications in Duo at the following
locations:
• For information about getting started with a Duo account, refer to https://duo.com/docs/getting-started.
• For information about the Auth API, refer to https://duo.com/docs/authapi#first-steps.
— When you access the Auth API, you are provided with the Integration Key, Secret Key, and API hostname.
You can use these to securely communicate between the C•CURE host and Duo for the two factor
authentication process.
— In regards to the Username normalization section, you can choose the radio button for Simple. This
provides you with greater flexibility in establsihing how C•CURE personnel maps to a Duo user.
• For information about the Admin API, refer to https://duo.com/docs/adminapi#first-steps.
— When you access the Admin API, you are provided with an Integration Key and Secret Key. These are
different from the Auth API but the API hostname is the same.
— In the Permissions section, you must grant read permissions at a minimum. If your C•CURE host is creating
and removing new users as you enable them for two factor authentication, you must also grant write
permissions. However, if you manage users through another process you can deny write permissions to
guarantee C•CURE cannot alter user information.

The Auth API and Admin API information can be located on C•CURE system here: C:\Program Files (x86)
\Tyco\CrossFire\ServerComponents\ACVS.Enterprise.WebBridge.exe This is an important integration and the
security information in this file should only be accessed by trusted personnel.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 14 545

Two Factor Authentication Overview

For information about configuring personnel for two factor authentication see the C•CURE 9000 Personnel
NOTE Configuration Guide.

546 Chapter 14 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring iSTAR Readers and Doors for Two Factor Authentication

Configuring iSTAR Readers and Doors for Two Factor Authentication

The configuration you provide to the iSTAR readers in your system determines whether a card swipe requires two factor
authentication for a cardholder. To fully enable two factor authentication for readers and doors, you need to complete the
following configurations:
• The reader has two factor authentication enabled and is associated with a door.
• The cardholder has access to the door.
• The cardholder's Personnel record is configured for two factor authentication.
• The cardholder's Clearance Filter Level is below the reader's current Clearance Filter Level.

When you complete these configurations, two factor authentication is initiated at the reader and the door upon a card
swipe.

Configuring iSTAR readers for two factor authentication

1. Open the iSTAR Reader editor, select a clearance filter level from the Default Clearance Filter Level drop-down list.
This choice restricts which cardholders can access the door.
• The cardholder that presents themselves at this reader must have a Clearance Filter Level below the reader’s
current Clearance Filter Level in order to enable the two factor authentication. Cardholder’s with equal or higher
clearance filter levels are admitted without a 2FA challenge.
2. Click the Options tab.
3. Select the Enable Two Factor Authentication on this Reader check box.

Configuring iSTAR doors for two factor authentication

1. Assign a two factor authentication-enabled reader to the door.
2. Ensure you complete the prerequisites for other portions of two factor authentication configuration detailed in the
Prerequisites section ofTwo Factor Authentication Overview on Page 544.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 14 547

Configuring Fallback to One Factor Authentication

Configuring Fallback to One Factor Authentication

There may be situations when your C-CURE host and the two factor authentication provider, or your C-CURE host and the
access control panel fail to communicate. In these situations, you may need to configure a contingency plan so that your
security system falls back to using one factor authentication.

You can define a trigger and event to maintain security while communications are being fixed in order to do this.

Configuring fallback when the C-CURE host and two factor authentication provider fail to
communicate
The C-CURE host periodically confirms connectivity to the two factor authentication provider. If communication fails for
any reason the value in the Web Bridge State field of the Application Server Dynamic View does not appear as
Connected and the Web Bridge Connected check box is clear, which means it is false and not connected.

Configuring fallback to one factor authentication when the C-CURE host and two factor authentication provider
fail to communicate
1. Click the Configuration pane and select Event from the drop-down list.
2. Click New to create a new event.
3. In the Event editor, click the Action tab.
4. Click Add to add a row for the action you want to configure.
5. In the Action drop-down list, select Set Clearance Filter to Level <x>, where x is a level below the pre-configured
Clearance Filter Level the reader uses for two factor authentication.
6. In the Reader field, click the ellipsis and select the reader you want to apply this action to if there is communications
loss between C-CURE and the access control panel.
7. Complete any other configuration options in the Event editor you want to pair with this event in the situation it is
triggered. Ensure that you select the Enable and Armed check boxes.
8. Click Save and Close. You have created an event that sets the chosen reader to a lower clearance level. To finalize
this configuration, you must apply this event to the Application Server in case there is a communication failure.
9. Open the editor for your Application Server and click the Triggers tab.
10. In the Property section, select Web Bridge Connected or Web Bridge State. This depends on which field you want
to base this trigger on.
11. In the Value section, select the value you want to use to trigger the event you configured.
• If you choose Web Bridge State you can choose several options such as, but not limited to: Disconnected, An
unexpected error occurred on the connection, or Not Licensed.
• If you choose Web Bridge Connected you can choose the check box value of selected, True, or clear, False.
12. In the Action section, select Activate Event.
13. In the Event field, click the ellipsis and select the event that you configured which lowers the Clearance Filter Level
of the reader.
14. Click Save and Close. The Application Server is now configured to trigger an event that lowers the clearance level of
a reader in case the server has a connection problem.

548 Chapter 14 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Configuring Fallback to One Factor Authentication

Configuring fallback to one factor authentication when the C•CURE host and the access control panel fail to
communicate
1. Click the Configuration pane and select Event from the drop-down list.
2. Click New to create a new event.
3. In the Event editor, click the Action tab.
4. Click Add to add a row for the action you want to configure.
5. In the Action drop-down list, select Set Clearance Filter to Level <x>, where x is a level below the preconfigured
Clearance Filter Level the reader uses for two factor authentication.
6. In the Reader field, click the ellipsis and select the reader you want to apply this action to if there is a communication
loss between C-CURE and the access control panel.
7. Complete any other configuration options in the Event editor you want to pair with this event in the situation it is
triggered. Ensure that you select the Enable and Armed check boxes.
8. Click Save and Close. You have created an event that sets the chosen reader to a lower clearance level. To finalize
this configuration, you must apply this event to the access control panel in the case there is communication failure.
9. Open the editor for your access control panel cluster and click the Triggers tab.
10. Click Add to add a row to the Triggers section.
11. In the Property section, select Primary Communication Status.
12. In the Value section, select Offline.
13. In the Action section, select Activate Event.
14. In the Event field, click the ellipsis and select the event that you configured which lowers the Clearance Filter Level
of the reader.
15. Click Save and Close. The access control panel is now configured to trigger an event that lowers the clearance level
of a reader in case the panel has an offline status.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 14 549

Two Factor Authentication Behaviors

Two Factor Authentication Behaviors

When a cardholder approaches a two factor authentication protected door and swipes their card, the outcomes in the Table
170 on Page 550 are possible.
Table 170:  Two Factor Authentication Behaviors

Card swipe is valid Clearance Filter Level of Two factor authentication

Result
or not valid the cardholder request

Not valid n/a n/a Entry is rejected.

Valid Equal to or higher than the n/a Entry is allowed.

reader.

Valid Less than the reader Two factor authentication • The request is approved and the door is
request initiated. used.
• The request is approved but the door is
not used.
• The request is denied. The door is never
unlocked.
• The user is not enrolled with Duo and two
factor authentication. The door is never
unlocked.

550 Chapter 14 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

 15

Chapter 15 - Configuring Elevators

This chapter explains how to configure elevators in C•CURE 9000.

In this chapter

Elevator Configuration Overview 552

Elevator Tasks 553
iSTAR Elevators 557
apC Elevators 571

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 551

Elevator Configuration Overview

Elevator Configuration Overview

Access to floors is managed through Elevator control. Elevators are similar to doors, but have many exit points which are
determined by the floor objects. Floors are created independently from controllers, and are integrated into Elevators
through the definition of elevator buttons (see Creating a Floor on Page 373). Elevator control requires readers, inputs,
outputs, and Personnel Clearances.

A reader is used to control access to the elevator by authenticating cardholders.

A cardholder is given access to an elevator by assigning a Personnel Clearance that includes the Elevator to the
cardholder.

Outputs are used to control the elevator buttons. When the Output is energized, the button for a floor in the Elevator
becomes available for use.

Inputs can be configured to determine at which floor the cardholder exited. When the Elevator door opens at a Floor, an
Input state change indicates that the door has opened.

Elevators or elevator groups are configured through the use of buttons that represent floors with inputs and outputs. You
can then add elevators to clearances that are used to control which cardholders can access the elevators and floors and at
what times.

You can configure Elevators for iSTAR and apC controllers.

■ iSTAR Elevators on Page 557
■ apC Elevators on Page 571

Elevators are associated with the time zone that is used by the elevator’s inputs, outputs, and readers.
NOTE

Elevator controls and Clearances for Elevators have not been evaluated by UL, and cannot be used in UL
NOTE Listed applications.

552 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Elevator Tasks

Elevator Tasks
You can perform the following general tasks to configure iSTAR and apC Elevators.
■ Creating an Elevator on Page 553
■ Creating an Elevator Template on Page 553
■ Deleting an Elevator on Page 554
■ Modifying an Elevator on Page 554
■ Viewing a List of Elevators on Page 554
■ Using Set Property for Elevators on Page 555
■ Adding Elevators to a Group on Page 555

Creating an Elevator
You can create a new Elevator.

To Create an Elevator
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Right-click the Elevator folder and select New to create a new Elevator. The Elevator Editor opens and you can
configure the Elevator.
4. Type an identification for the Elevator in the Name and Description entry fields.
5. To save your new Elevator, click Save and Close.
Alternatively, if you want to save the Elevator and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Elevator is
saved and closed, but the Elevator Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Elevator.

Creating an Elevator Template

You can create a new template for an Elevator. An Elevator template saves you time because you specify some of the
Elevator configuration settings in the Template. When you use the Template to create new Elevators, you do not have to
enter those configuration settings again.

To Create an Elevator Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and select New Template.
4. The Elevator Template opens and you can configure the Elevator template.
5. To save your new Elevator Template, click Save and Close.
The new Elevator template appears under ----Templates in the New Template drop-down list.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 553

Elevator Tasks

To Create an Elevator from an Elevator Template

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click the drop-down arrow next to New and click a Template name from the list under ----Templates. The Elevator
editor opens.
4. Configure the Elevator.
5. To save your new Elevator, click Save and Close.

Deleting an Elevator
You can delete an existing Elevator.

To Delete an Elevator
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list.

3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects.

4. Right-click the Elevator in the list that you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu.
5. Click Yes on the “Are you sure you want to delete the selected Elevator?” message box.

Modifying an Elevator
You can edit an Elevator to modify its buttons (Floors and Outputs) and state images.

To Edit an Elevator
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list.

3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects.

4. Double-click the Elevator in the list that you want to modify, or right-click and select Edit from the context menu. The
Elevator Editor opens.

Viewing a List of Elevators

You can a open Dynamic View listing your Elevators.

To View a List of Elevators

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list.

554 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

Elevator Tasks

3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects.

You can right-click the column header to add columns—Enabled, Controller, Comm Status, and so forth.
NOTE

If you right-click a row in the Elevator Dynamic View, a context menu is displayed. This menu contains a number of
standard selections, as well as selections that are specific for elevators.

See Using the Object List Context Menu in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for more information about the
object context menu.

Using Set Property for Elevators

You can use Set Property to set properties for Elevators to quickly set a property for an Elevator without opening an
Elevator. You can select multiple Elevators in a Dynamic View list, and right-click to use Set Property to set a specific
property for all of them.

Example:
To change the setting for Send to Monitoring Station for 10 specific Elevators, display a Dynamic View of Elevators
(see Viewing a List of Elevators on Page 554), the use multiple selection (typically SHIFT+LEFT-CLICK to select a
range or CTRL+LEFT-CLICK to select multiple items) to select the 10 Elevators, then right-click to display the context
menu. Choose Set Property from the context menu, then click to see a list of Elevator properties. Select Send to
Monitoring Station, then select or for the Value setting. When you click OK the property will be set for these
elevators.

To Set a Property for an Elevator

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list.

3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects.

4. Right-click the Elevator in the list that you want to set the property for and select Set Property from the context menu.
5. Specify the property for the Elevator. Click to choose from a list of properties.
6. Enter the Value for the property and click OK.

Adding Elevators to a Group

You can use Add To Group for Elevators to add one or more Elevators to a group.

To Add Elevators To Group

1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Select Elevator from the Hardware pane drop-down list.
3. Click to open a Dynamic View showing all Elevator objects.
4. Right-click the Elevator in the list that you want to add to the group and select Add To Group from the context menu.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 555

Elevator Tasks

5. Select a Group from the list that appears.

6. Click OK to confirm that the Elevators were added to the Group. Alternatively, you can click:
• Print to print the message.
• Email to send the message to the email address you have configured in the Customer Support section of the
C•CURE 9000 System Variables.

556 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Elevators

iSTAR Elevators
A cluster of iSTAR controllers can be used to manage elevator access. A cluster consists of a system of one or more
iSTAR controllers which determine communications between individual controllers. Each cluster is configured for either
iSTAR Classic/Pro or iSTAR eX controllers. For more information see Configuring iSTAR Clusters on Page 91.

Elevator controls have not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE

After configuring the parent objects, iSTAR Clusters and Controllers, iSTAR Elevators require floors, iSTAR Readers,
Inputs, Outputs and Doors. The iSTAR Inputs are used to determine at which floor the cardholder exited and the iSTAR
Outputs are used to control the elevator buttons, which are set in the Buttons tab. These dependent objects must be set up
before you can configure an iSTAR Elevator. For more information, see the references listed below.
1. Cluster and Controller - for more information see:
■ iSTAR Cluster Editor on Page 95
■ iSTAR Controller Editor on Page 145
2. Floor - for more information see:
■ Floors Overview on Page 370
■ Configuring a Floor for an iSTAR Elevator on Page 557
3. Boards with Readers, Inputs, Outputs - for more information see:
■ iSTAR Controller Boards Tab (iSTAR Classic/Pro) on Page 167
■ iSTAR eX and iSTAR Edge Configuration Summary on Page 122

Once these parent and dependent objects are created, you can continue the elevator configuration process:
1. Elevator name (for more information see iSTAR Elevator General Tab on Page 558).
2. Elevator Buttons (for more information see iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab on Page 562).
3. Elevator Triggers (see iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab on Page 564
4. Groups tab (see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36).

Configuring a Floor for an iSTAR Elevator

You may create new floors or configure existing floors using the Floor folder displayed in the Hardware tree. After you
create the iSTAR cluster and controller(s), you can configure inputs, outputs, readers, elevators, and buttons and
associate the these objects with specific floors or elevators for access by authorized cardholders. For more information
see Using the Hardware Pane on Page 28.

When you add a floor to a group, the Groups tab will be displayed with the Floor - General tab.

Configuring a Floor for an iSTAR Elevator

1. From the default Floor directory of the Hardware tree, create a new floor, or edit the name or description of an existing
floor.
2. Highlight the Floor folder, right-click, and select New. A Floor dialog box opens.
3. Enter a Name and Description for the new floor and click the Enabled box if you want to set the floor online.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 557

iSTAR Elevators

Figure 153:  Floor Dialog Box - General Tab

4. Click Save and Close. The new floor name displays below the Floors folder in the Hardware tree.
Continue this creation process until your facility’s floors, which you want to access via an elevator, have been
assigned to a C•CURE 9000 Floor object.
The next task that must be completed before you can configure an iSTAR Elevator is to complete the configuration of
an iSTAR Cluster, Controller(s), Readers, Inputs, Outputs and Doors. For more information, see the references listed
above.

iSTAR Elevator General Tab

You can access the Elevator editor from a configured iSTAR Elevator object in the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane. See
iSTAR Elevator General Tab Definitions on Page 566 for descriptions of the fields on this tab.

To Access the iSTAR Elevator Editor

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware
pane.
2. Click the iSTAR Controller drop-down list and select Elevator.
3. Right-click the Elevator listing and click New or New Template.

558 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Elevators

4. If you have configured Elevators, double-click the Elevator listing for the selected controller to open a Dynamic View
showing all existing Elevator objects (see Figure 154 on Page 559).
5. Double-click the Elevator in the list that you want to edit, and the Elevator - General tab opens, shown in Figure 155
on Page 560.
Figure 154:  Hardware Pane Elevator Selection

To Configure Elevators
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Right-click the Elevators folder in the Hardware tree and select New to create a new Elevator. The Elevator -
General tab, shown in Figure 155 on Page 560 opens.
3. Enter a Name and description (for example, its location or function) for the elevator.
4. Select Enabled to put the Elevator online once you click Save and Close.
The iSTAR Controller is displayed within the Location box.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 559

iSTAR Elevators

Figure 155:  iSTAR Elevator General Tab - Reader Selection

5. Click to select a Reader in the Location area. The Reader list shown in the Reader browser is restricted to
unassigned readers on the parent Controller.
6. Choose an Elevator Floor Selection Mode for the elevator from the listed options. The possible choices include:
• No Input
• Single Input
• Multiple Inputs
7. If you choose the Single Input option, click the browse button to select an Input from the Input browser (see
Figure 156 on Page 561).

560 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Elevators

Figure 156:  iSTAR Elevator General Tab - Input Selection

8. Enter a Button Activation Time in seconds.

Figure 157:  iSTAR Elevator General Tab - Completed

9. Navigate to the Buttons tab or click Save and Close.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 561

iSTAR Elevators

iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab

Elevator Buttonscan be created in the Elevator Buttons tab to specify which floors, inputs, and outputs are connected to
elevator buttons. See iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions on Page 567 for more definitions of the Buttons tab.

To Configure Elevator Buttons for Floor Access

1. From the Elevator dialog box, click the Buttons tab. The Elevator dialog box - Buttons tab opens, shown in Figure
158 on Page 562.
2. Click Add to create a row under the Floors and Outputs columns.
3. Click within the Floors column to display the browse button and select a Floor from the Floor browser, shown in
Figure 158 on Page 562, that you want to associate with the iSTAR Elevator.
Figure 158:  iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab - Floor Selection

4. Click within the Outputs column to display and select an Output from the Outputs browser, shown in Figure 159
on Page 563, that you want to associate with the iSTAR Elevator.

562 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Elevators

Figure 159:  iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab - Output Selection

5. Continue to add Floors and Outputs until you have finished creating Elevator Buttons for each floor that you want to
manage with the iSTAR Elevator.
6. Navigate to the Status tab or click Save and Close.

iSTAR Elevator Status Tab

The Elevator Status tab (see Figure 160 on Page 564) provides a read-only listing of critical information about the
operational status of the selected Elevator including:
■ Communication Status - displays the values Normal or Comm Fail.
■ Tamper Status - displays the values True or False.
■ Admit Status - displays the values Admit or Reject.

See iSTAR Elevator Status Tab Definitions on Page 568 for descriptions of the fields on this tab.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 563

iSTAR Elevators

Figure 160:  iSTAR Elevator Status Tab

Navigate to the Triggers tab or click Save and Close.

iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab

You can create Triggers for iSTAR Elevators using the iSTAR Elevators Triggers tab. A Trigger executes a specified
Action when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the
property selected (see Figure 161 on Page 565).

See Triggers Tab for iSTAR Devices on Page 278 for information on creating Triggers for an iSTAR device.

See iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 568 for descriptions of the fields on this tab.

564 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Elevators

Figure 161:  iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab - Completed

iSTAR Elevator State Images Tab

The iSTAR Elevator State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states
(see Figure 162 on Page 566). These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the
object that they represent.

To Change an Elevator State Image

1. Double-click the existing image.
A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 565

iSTAR Elevators

Figure 162:  iSTARElevator State Images Tab

4. Click Save and Close to finish the iSTAR Elevator configuration and return to the Hardware Pane.

iSTAR Elevator Definitions

The tables in the following sections provide definitions for the iSTAR Elevator editor tabs.
■ iSTAR Elevator General Tab Definitions on Page 566
■ iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions on Page 567
■ iSTAR Elevator Status Tab Definitions on Page 568
■ iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 568
■ iSTAR Elevator Triggers Properties on Page 569
■ iSTAR Elevator Triggers Actions on Page 569
■ iSTAR Elevator State Images Definitions on Page 569

iSTAR Elevator General Tab Definitions

iSTAR Elevator General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Identification

566 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Elevators

iSTAR Elevator General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Elevator Name Enter a unique name for this elevator.

Description Enter a brief description for this elevator.

Maintenance Click to put the elevator into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.
Mode

Enabled Select this check box to put the elevator online. For an elevator to be put online, it must selected.

Location

Controller The parent controller is displayed in this read-only field.

Reader Click to select a Reader from the Reader browser.

Floor Selection Mode

No Input Click on No Input to indicate that no inputs are connected to the elevator buttons. However, the system cannot tell if a person
presses a floor button after being granted access.

Single Input Click on Single Input to indicate that one input is connected to all buttons on this elevator.
Click and select an Input from the Input list that displays.
When a person presses an elevator button, the system detects an elevator button has been pressed, but cannot determine
which button.

Multiple Inputs Click on Multiple Inputs to indicate that multiple inputs are associated with this elevator. Each elevator button will be connected
to a different input. Select the inputs by clicking Elevator Buttons to open the Elevator Buttons dialog box.
When a person presses an elevator button, the system determines which button the person pressed.

Button Activation Time

Button Enter the interval at which the Elevator button activates.

Activation Time
(seconds)

iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions

Table 171:  iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions

Field Description

Elevator Button Components

Add Fields are added to Elevator Button Components by clicking Add, which adds an empty row to the grid.

Remove
Click the row selector , then click Remove to delete a trigger.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 567

iSTAR Elevators

Table 171:  iSTAR Elevator Buttons Tab Definitions (continued)

Field Description

Floors This displays a list of available floors for the elevator. Use Add to add a floor to the list and click to display the Floor selection
browser.

Outputs This displays a list of available Outputs for the elevator. Click to select an Output from the Output selection browser.

iSTAR Elevator Status Tab Definitions

Table 172:  iSTAR Elevator Status Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Communication Status Unknown, Normal, Comm Fail

Tamper Status True, False

Admit Status Unknown, Admit, Reject

iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions

Table 173:  iSTAR Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions

Field Description

Add Fields are added to Elevator Button Components by clicking Add, which adds an empty row to the grid.

Remove
Click the row selector , then click Remove to delete a trigger.

Property Click within the Property column to display browse button. When you click this button, the Property browser opens, presenting
properties available for the controller. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column.

Value Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click on a
Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.

Action Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click on an Action that you want to include as a parameter for
the trigger to add it to the column.
When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that will occur when the object’s
selected Property receives the selected Value. As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box will show a corresponding
entry field, or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action. Click the browse button to select entries for these fields. Once
the field (or group of fields) is completed, the Details column will show information about how the Action was configured.

Details The Details column displays information about how the Action was configured. This field is read-only.

Schedule Click within the Schedule column, then click to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger. Schedules are
created in the Configuration Pane.

568 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

iSTAR Elevators

iSTAR Elevator Triggers Properties

Table 174:  iSTAR Elevator Triggers Properties

Property Description

Admit Status For any one of the Admit Status values (see the Value column drop-down list) you can choose one of the following Actions to
Values are: create a Trigger:

- Admit Activate Event – When this status occurs and the Schedule is Active (you can choose any Schedule).

- Reject Activate Event Outside Schedule – An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is Inactive (choose
any Schedule).
- Duress
Activate Output – When this status occurs (only works with the Always Schedule).
- Noticed
Admit Only these three Actions are supported for Admit Status.

- Noticed
Reject

Comm Status 1. Choose a value for the Property from the Value column.
Values are: 2. Select an Action from the Action drop-down list:
- Normal See Table 175 on Page 569.
- Comm For example, if you chose Comm Fail as a Comm State Status for which you want to define an action, you could then select
Fail Activate Event if you wanted to send a command to a CCTV Switch, then in Details, select the Event that you wanted to
activate when a Comm Fail status occurs.
Tamper
Status
Values are:

iSTAR Elevator Triggers Actions

Table 175:  iSTAR Elevators Triggers Actions

Action Description

Activate Event Select an Event to activate when this status occurs.

Activate Event Outside Schedule Select an Event to activate when this status occurs while the Schedule is inactive.

Activate Output Select an Output to activate when this status occurs. Must use the Always Schedule.

iSTAR Elevator State Images Definitions

iSTAR Elevator State Images Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Unknown

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 569

iSTAR Elevators

iSTAR Elevator State Images Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Active

Comm Fail

Tampered

570 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Elevators

apC Elevators
This section illustrates the configuration process for the apC - controlled elevator. The advanced processing Controller
(apC), apC/8X, and apC/L are access control field panels that coordinate communication between the C•CURE 9000
server and the system security hardware.

Elevator controls have not been evaluated by UL.

NOTE
The apC and apC/L Controllers have not been evaluated by UL.

The apC Elevator editor includes the following tabs:

■ General
■ Buttons
■ Groups (this tab appears once you have created an Elevator Group)
■ State Images

The function of these tabs is covered in the description of configuring the apC Elevator in the following sections. To
configure an elevator controlled by a reader on an apC panel, you must first create and configure the following objects:
1. Floor (for more information see Floors Overview on Page 370)
2. apC panel(s) (for more information see apC Panel Overview on Page 308)
3. Readers, Inputs, Outputs

Once these parent and dependent objects are created, you can continue the elevator configuration process:
1. Elevator name (for more information see apC Elevator General Tab on Page 572)
2. Elevator Buttons (for more information see apC Elevator Buttons Tab on Page 574)
3. Personnel Clearance for cardholders who will use the Elevator (for more information see the C•CURE 9000 Personnel
Configuration Guide).
4. Groups tab (see Groups Tab for Hardware Devices on Page 36).

Configuring a Floor for an apC Elevator

You may create new floors or configure existing floors using the Floor folder displayed in the hardware tree. After you
create the apC panel, you can configure outputs, readers, elevators, and buttons and associate the these objects with
specific floors or elevators for access by authorized cardholders. When you create a Floor group, a Group tab will appear
with the Floor General tab. For more information see Floors Overview on Page 370.

Configuring a Floor for an apC Elevator

1. From the default Floor directory of the Hardware tree, create a new floor, or edit the name or description of an existing
floor.
a. Highlight the Floor folder, right-click and select New. A Floor dialog box opens.
b. Enter a Name and Description for the new floor and click the Enabled box if you want to set the floor online.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 571

apC Elevators

Figure 163:  Floor Editor General Tab

2. Click Save and Close. The new floor name displays below the Floors folder in the Hardware tree.
Continue this creation process until your facility’s floors, which you want to access via an elevator, have been
assigned to a C•CURE 9000 Floor object.

apC Elevator General Tab

You can access the Elevator editor from a configured apC Elevator object in the C•CURE 9000 Hardware pane.

To Access the apC Elevator Editor

1. In the C•CURE 9000 Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware
pane.
2. Click the apC Controller drop-down list and select Elevator.
3. Right-click the Elevator listing and click New or New Template.
4. If you have configured Elevators, double-click the Elevator listing for the selected controller to open a Dynamic View
showing all existing Elevator objects (see Figure 164 on Page 573).
5. Double-click the Elevator in the list that you want to edit, and the Elevator General tab opens, shown in Figure 165
on Page 574.

572 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Elevators

Figure 164:  Hardware Pane apC Elevator Selection

To Configure Elevators
1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Hardware to open the Hardware pane.
2. Right-click the Elevators folder in the Hardware tree and select New to create a new Elevator. The Elevator -
General tab, shown in Figure 165 on Page 574 opens.
3. Enter a Name and description (for example, its location or function) for the elevator.
4. Select Enabled to put the Elevator online once you click Save and Close.
The apC panel name is displayed within the Location box.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 573

apC Elevators

Figure 165:  apC Elevator General Tab

5. Click to select a Reader in the Location area. The Reader list shown in the Reader browser is restricted to
unassigned readers on the parent Controller.
6. Choose an Elevator Floor Selection Mode for the elevator from the listed options. The possible choices include:
• No Input
• Single Input
• Multiple Inputs
7. If you choose the Single Input option, click the browse button to select an Input from the Input browser.
8. Enter a Button Activation Time in seconds.
9. Navigate to the Buttons tab or click Save and Close.

apC Elevator Buttons Tab

Elevator Buttons can be created in the Elevator Buttons tab to specify which floors, inputs, and outputs are connected to
elevator buttons.

To Configure Elevator Buttons for Floor Access

1. From the Elevator editor, click the Buttons tab. The Elevator Buttons tab opens, shown in Figure 166 on Page 575.
2. Click the Add button to create a row under the Floors and Outputs columns.

574 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Elevators

3. Click within the Floors column to display and select a Floor from the Floor browser, shown in Figure 166 on Page
575, that you want to associate with the apC Elevator.
Figure 166:  apC Elevator Buttons Tab Floor Selection

4. Click within the Outputs column to display and select an Output from the Outputs browser, shown in Figure 167
on Page 576, that you want to associate with the apC Elevator.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 575

apC Elevators

Figure 167:  apC Elevator Buttons Tab Output Selection

5. Continue to add Floors and Outputs until you have finished creating Elevator Buttons for each floor that you want to
manage with the apC Elevator.
6. Navigate to the Status tab or click Save and Close.

apC Elevator Status Tab

The Elevator Status tab (see Figure 168 on Page 577) provides a read-only listing of critical information about the
operational status of the selected Elevator including:
■ Communication Status - displays the values Normal or Comm Fail.
■ Tamper Status - displays the values True or False.
■ Admit Status - displays the values Admit or Reject.

576 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Elevators

Figure 168:  apC Elevator Status Tab

Navigate to the Triggers tab or click Save and Close.

apC Elevator Triggers Tab

You can create Triggers for apC Elevators using the apC Elevators Triggers tab. A Trigger executes a specified Action
when a particular predefined condition occurs. When a Trigger is defined, the Actions available depend on the property
selected

See the following for information on apC Triggers:

■ Triggers Tab for apC Devices on Page 363.
■ Defining a Trigger for an apC Device on Page 363.
■ Removing a Trigger on Page 279.

You can click Save and Close after configuring apC Elevator triggers, or navigate to the Status tab.

apC Elevator State Images Tab

The apC Elevator State Images tab provides a means to change the default images used to indicate controller states (see
Figure 169 on Page 578). These images appear on the Monitoring Station and change according to the state of the object
that they represent.

To Change an Image
1. Double-click the existing image.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 577

apC Elevators

A Windows Open dialog box appears allowing you to browse for a folder in which you have placed replacement
images.
2. When you locate the replacement image, select it to add it to the image listing.
3. To restore the default image, right-click on the new image and select Restore Default.
Figure 169:  apC Elevator - State Images Tab

4. Click Save and Close to finish the apC Elevator configuration and return to the Hardware Pane.

apC Elevator Definitions

Table 176 on Page 578 through Table 180 on Page 580 provide details about the fields and buttons on the General tab,
Buttons tab, Status tab, Triggers tab, and State Images tab of the apC Elevator dialog box.

apC Elevator General Tab Definitions

Table 176:  apC Elevator General Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Identification

Elevator Name Enter a unique name for this elevator.

Description Enter a brief description for this elevator.

578 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Elevators

apC Elevator General Tab Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Enabled Select this check box to put the elevator online. For an elevator to be put online, it must selected.

Maintenance Mode Click to put the apC Elevator into Maintenance Mode. See Chapter 3: Maintenance Mode for more information.

Partition This read-only label shows what partition the elevator is in. If the system is not partitioned, the label indicates that the
elevator is in the “Default” partition.

Location

Controller The parent controller is displayed in this read-only field.

Reader Click to select a Reader from the Reader browser.

Floor Selection Mode

No Input Select this option when no inputs are needed for the apC Elevator.

Single Input Click to select an Input from the Input browser.

Multiple Inputs Select this option when more than one input is needed for the apC Elevator.

Button Activation Time

Button Activation Time Enter the interval at which the apC Elevator button activates.
(seconds)

apC Elevator Status Tab Definitions

Table 177:  apC Elevator Status Tab Definitions

Elevator Status Property Values

Communication Status Unknown, Normal, Comm Fail

Tamper Status True, False

Admit Status Unknown, Admit, Reject

apC Elevator Triggers Definitions

Table 178:  apC Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions

Field Description

Add Fields are added to Elevator Button Components by clicking Add, which adds an empty row to the grid.

Remove
Click the row selector , then click Remove to delete a trigger.

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 579

apC Elevators

Table 178:  apC Elevator Triggers Tab Definitions (continued)

Field Description

Property Click within the Property column to display a button. When you click this button, the Property browser opens, presenting
properties available for the controller. Click a Property to select it and add it to the column.

Value Click within the Value column to display a drop-down list of Values associated with the Property that you have selected. Click on a
Value that you want to include as a parameter for the trigger to add it to the column.

Action Click within the Action column to display a drop-down list of valid actions. Click on an Action that you want to include as a parameter for
the trigger to add it to the column.
When a Trigger is added, an Action must be configured in the Action column. This is the Action that will occur when the object’s
selected Property receives the selected Value. As the Action is selected, the lower pane in the Triggers box will show a corresponding
entry field, or group of entry fields, specific to the selected Action. Click to select entries for these fields. Once the field (or group of
fields) is completed, the Details column will show information about how the Action was configured.

Details The Details column displays information about how the Action was configured. This field is read-only.

Schedule Click within the Schedule column, then click the browse button to select a Schedule that you want to associate with the trigger.
Schedules are created in the Configuration Pane.

apC Elevator Triggers Properties

Table 179:  apC Elevator Triggers Properties

Property Description

Admit Status For any one of the Admit Status values (see the Value column drop-down list) you can choose one of the following Actions to
Values are: create a Trigger:

Admit Activate Event - When this status occurs and the Schedule is Active (you can choose any Schedule).

Reject Activate Event Outside Schedule - An event is activated when this status occurs while the Schedule is Inactive (choose
any Schedule).
Admit
Duress Activate Output - When this status occurs (only works with the Always Schedule).

Reject Only these three Actions are supported for Admit Status.
Duress
Noticed
Admit
Noticed
Reject

apC Elevator State Images Definitions

Table 180:  apC Elevator State

Images Tab Definitions

Field/Button Description

Unknown

580 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide

apC Elevators

apC Elevator State Images Tab

Definitions (continued)

Field/Button Description

Active

Comm Fail

Tampered

C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide Chapter 15 581

apC Elevators

582 Chapter 15 C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide